SPECIFICATIONS
TCDSB Venerable John Merlini,
St. Francis De Sales and Blessed
Margherita
Full Day Kindergarten
Issued for Tender
Toronto, Ontario
April 2013
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
TCDSB Tender No. P-038-13
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 00010
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 1
DOCUMENT 0 - INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
Document
Title
Pages
00010
-00200
--
Table of Contents
Instructions to Bidders
Information Available to Bidders
Venedrable John Merlini C.S. Outline of Work - Asbestos
Remediation Project
St. Francis de Sales C.S. Outline of Work - Asbestos
Remediation Project
Blessed Margherita of Citta di Castello C.S. Outline of
Work - Asbestos Remediation Project
Amendments to CCDC2-2008 - Supplementary Conditions
Appendix 1
Appendix 2
3
17
1
----
33
1
3
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section
Title
Pages
01000
General Requirements
36
DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION
Section
Title
Pages
02050
02740
02822
02830
Demolition and Removals
Asphaltic Concrete Paving
Ornamental Metal Fencing and Gates
Chain Link Fencing
8
5
4
5
DIVISION 5 - METALS
Section
Title
Pages
05500
Miscellaneous and Metal Fabrications
7
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
Section
Title
Pages
06100
06200
06400
Rough Carpentry
Finish Carpentry
Architectural Woodwork
4
7
8
Section 00010
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 2
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section
Title
Pages
07850
07900
Firestopping and Smoke Seals
Sealants
4
5
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
Section
Title
Pages
08110
08701
08800
08900
Wood Doors and Metal Frames
Finishing Hardware
Glazing
Aluminum work
5
12
7
7
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
Section
Title
Pages
09250
09300
09500
09660
09900
Gypsum Board
Tile
Acoustical Ceilings
Resilient Tile Flooring
Painting
11
6
5
5
8
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
Section
Title
Pages
10160
10800
10990
Compartments and Cubicles
Washroom Accessories
Miscellaneous Specialties
3
4
2
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
Section
Title
See attached Mechanical Table of Contents.
Pages
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 00010
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 3
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
Section
Title
Pages
See attached Electrical Table of Contents.
REPORTS
Title
Designated Substances and Hazardous Materials
END OF DOCUMENT
Toronto Catholic District School Board
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT
SCHOOL BOARD
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Toronto Catholic District School Board
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.
COMPLIANCE....................................................................................................................1
2.
BID DOCUMENTS.............................................................................................................1
3.
CONDITIONS OF THE PLACE OF THE WORK ............................................................2
4.
MANDATORY SITE MEETING .......................................................................................2
5.
PREQUALIFICATION .......................................................................................................2
6.
BID AND PERFORMANCE SECURITY..........................................................................3
7.
AMENDMENTS TO BID DOCUMENTS .........................................................................4
8.
TAXES.................................................................................................................................4
9.
BID COMPLETION............................................................................................................5
10.
BID SUBMISSION .............................................................................................................6
11.
BID EXPIRY PERIOD........................................................................................................6
12.
BID OPENING AND EVALUATION ...............................................................................6
13.
REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION....................................................................................7
14.
AWARD OF CONTRACT, EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT AND DOCUMENTS
TO BE DELIVERED...........................................................................................................8
15.
LIMIT OF LIABILITY........................................................................................................8
16.
17.
DISPUTES...........................................................................................................................8
LOBBYING.......................................................................................................................10
18.
RELEVANT POLICIES....................................................................................................10
Toronto Catholic District School Board
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1.
COMPLIANCE
1.1
The bidder acknowledges that by submitting a compliant bid, it has accepted an offer by
the Owner to enter into a “bid contract” for the evaluation of bids and the award of the
Contract, if an award is made. The bidder acknowledges that the terms of the “bid
contract” are represented by the Bid Documents.
1.2
A bid which fails to comply with the requirements of these Instructions to Bidders may
be declared non-compliant.
2.
BID DOCUMENTS
2.1
The following documents form the basis of this bid process (the “Bid Documents”):
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
2.2
Check Bid Documents for completeness upon receipt. Inform Consultant immediately:
.1
.2
2.3
Instructions to Bidders
Bid Forms comprising the Base Bid Form and, where required, the
Supplementary Bid Form – List of Subcontractors, Supplementary Bid Form –
Alternative Prices and Supplementary Bid Form – Unit Prices
Agreement, Definitions and General Conditions of the CCDC 2 - 2008
Supplementary Conditions
Specifications (per table of contents)
Drawings (per list of drawings)
Addenda issued during bidding period
should any documents be missing or incomplete;
upon finding any discrepancies or omissions.
The Tender Documents will be available as digital documents through the Levitt
Goodman Architects FTP site:
ftp.levittgoodmanarchitects.com
(using ftp client)
ftp://lgaftp:533collegestreet@ftp.levittgoodmanarchitects.com/outgoing/ (using web
browser)
Username: lgaftp
Password: 533collegestreet
2.4
The Bid Documents are made available only for the purpose of submitting bids for the
Project. Availability and/or use of the Bid Documents do not confer a licence or grant for
any other purpose.
2.5
Except as otherwise defined in these Instructions to Bidders, the defined terms in these
Bid Documents are taken from the Contract. The term Contract is defined in the
Agreement.
Toronto Catholic District School Board
3.
CONDITIONS OF THE PLACE OF THE WORK
3.1
The Place of the Work is located at:
3.2
.1
Venerable John Merlini Catholic School
123 Whitfield
Weston, ON
M9L 1G9
.2
St. Francis De Sales Catholic School
333 Firgrove Crescent
Downsview, ON
M3N 1K9
.3
Blessed Margherita Catholic School
108 Spenvalley Drive
Downsview, ON
M3L 1Z5
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
The following reports prepared or obtained with respect to the Place of the Work are
available through the Consultant:
.1
Designated Substances and Hazardous Materials Survey, prepared by DCS,
January 29, 2013.
3.3
Before submitting a bid, investigate the Place of the Work to fully ascertain existing
conditions, circumstances and limitations affecting the Work. No allowances will be
made for additional costs and no claims will be entertained in connection with conditions
which could reasonably have been ascertained by such investigation or other due
diligence prior to submitting a bid.
4.
SITE MEETING
4.1
Should the General Contractor wish to arrange a site visit any time before 8:00 am and
after 3:30 pm, one can be arranged directly through the principal. For Venerable John
Merlini, please contact Herminio Pires at 416-393-5397. For St. Francis De Sales, please
contact Cecilia Vitorio at 416-393-5366. For Blessed Margherita, please contact Maria
Leitao at 416-393-5409.
5.
PREQUALIFICATION
5.1
The following bidders have been prequalified:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
Bemocon Contracting Ltd.
Brown Daniels Associates
Buttcon Ltd.
Century Group Inc.
Compass Construction Resources Ltd.
Page 2 of 17
Toronto Catholic District School Board
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16
.17
.18
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
DASD Contracting
Direct Construction Co. Ltd.
Dixon Building Solutions
Dole Contracting Inc.
Greco Construction
HN Construction
Moroson Construction Ltd.
Newgen Construction Corp.
Olar Ltd.
Pegah Construction Ltd.
Stracor Inc.
Strut-Con Construction Ltd.
TRP Construction General Contractors
5.2
Bids received from bidders which have not been prequalified shall be returned unopened.
5.3
Bidders who fail to comply with 5.2 shall be declared non-compliant.
6.
BID AND PERFORMANCE SECURITY
6.1
Each bid shall be accompanied by bid security in the form of a bid bond in the amount of
Ten Percent (10%) of the Bid Price naming the Owner as obligee and issued by a surety
licensed to conduct surety and insurance business in Ontario. The bid security is for the
benefit of the Owner and stands as security that the bidder, if awarded the Contract, will
deliver the performance security described in paragraph 6.4 below and evidence of
insurance and other documents required by these Instructions to Bidders or by the
Contract, and will execute the Contract. The bid security shall remain valid for a period
of 90 DAYS from the date of bid submission (the ”Bid Expiry Period”). No other form
of bid security is acceptable.
6.2
The bid security of the bidder whose bid is accepted will be retained by the Owner to
compensate the Owner for the damages it will suffer should the successful bidder fail to
execute the Contract and/or fail to provide the performance security described in
paragraph 6.4 below and/or evidence of insurance and other documents required by these
Instructions to Bidders or by the Contract.
6.3
The bid security of the bidder whose bid is accepted will be returned after the delivery of
the specified performance security and evidence of insurance and other documents
required by these Instructions to Bidders or by the Contract, and after the execution of the
Contract. The bid security of all other bidders will be returned after the execution of the
Contract or after the Bid Expiry Period without an award of Contract or after the rejection
of all bids.
Page 3 of 17
Toronto Catholic District School Board
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
6.4
Each bid shall be accompanied by an agreement to bond issued by the same surety
company that provides the bid bond, undertaking to provide a fifty percent (50%)
performance bond and a fifty percent (50%) labour and material payment bond, both to
be delivered to the Owner if the bidder is awarded the Contract. In the event that the Bid
Documents require that the successful bidder provide a warranty bond, an agreement to
provide a warranty bond, in the amount specified in the Bid Documents, shall be
submitted with the bid, such agreement to provide that the warranty bond will be
delivered to the Owner if the bidder is awarded the Contract.
6.5
Bids not accompanied by the required bid security and the required agreement to bond
will be declared non-compliant and rejected. Where the Bid Documents require an
agreement to provide a warranty bond, bids not accompanied by such agreement to bond
will be declared non-compliant and rejected.
6.6
Include the cost of all bonds in the bid price.
7.
AMENDMENTS TO BID DOCUMENTS
7.1
Direct questions arising during the bidding period to Megan Cassidy, Levitt Goodman
Architects, 416.203.7600 EXT. 229. The Bid Coordinator is the sole contact for bidding
on this Project. A bid may be disqualified where contact is made with any person other
than the Bid Coordinator.
7.2
Neither the Owner nor the Consultant will be responsible for instructions, clarifications
or amendments communicated orally. Instructions, clarifications or amendments which
affect the Bid Documents may only be made by addendum.
7.3
If bidders find discrepancies, omissions, errors, departures from building by-laws, codes
or good practice, and points considered to be ambiguous or conflicting, they shall bring
them to the attention of the Bid Coordinator in writing, and not less than seven (7)
Working Days before the bid closing date, so that the Consultant may, if the Consultant
deems it necessary, issue instructions, clarifications or amendments by addendum to all
bidders prior to the bid closing date. The Consultant will endeavour to issue such
addenda at least seventy-two (72) hours prior to bid closing.
7.4
Addenda issued during the bidding period shall become part of the Bid Documents and
their receipt shall be acknowledged in the space provided on the Bid Form. Addenda will
be sent to all bidders.
8.
TAXES
8.1
The Harmonized Sales Tax (HST) shall not be included in the bid price. All other
eligible taxes shall be included in the bid price. Any taxes or increases to taxes
announced prior to the date of the issuance of the Bid Documents and scheduled to come
into effect subsequent to it shall be taken to be included in the bid price.
Page 4 of 17
Toronto Catholic District School Board
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
9.
BID COMPLETION
9.1
Fill in all blank spaces on the Bid Forms in ink, or typewritten, providing all information
requested, and ensure that an authorized person or persons sign all forms where indicated.
Failure to provide all requested information on the Bid Forms and failure to fill in all
blank spaces may result in a bid being declared non-compliant.
9.2
Use only the Bid Forms issued as part of the Bid Documents for the Project. If any or all
pages of the Bid Forms are amended by addendum, only the amended pages shall be used
to submit a bid. Failure to comply with this paragraph may result in the bid being
declared non-compliant.
9.3
Information provided by bidders on the Bid Forms may be amended prior to bid closing,
provided corrections are initialled by an authorized representative of the bidder. Other
modifications, erasures, additions, conditions, qualifications or un-initialled pre-closing
amendments may result in the bid being declared non-compliant.
9.4
Bids that are not originals, are unsigned, improperly signed, un-initialled, incomplete,
conditional or illegible, may be declared non-compliant.
9.5
Bid Price
.1
.2
9.6
Listing of Subcontractors
.1
9.7
Where a bidder lists “own forces” in lieu of a Subcontractor, the bidder shall carry
out such item of the Work with its own forces. Where “own forces” have been
listed by a bidder, the Owner reserves the right to obtain information from the
bidder and from third parties respecting the qualifications and experience of the
bidder’s “own forces” for such item of the Work. If the Owner, acting
reasonably, determines that the bidder’s “own forces” are not sufficiently
qualified or sufficiently experienced to undertake such item of the Work, it may
reject the bid.
Alternative Prices. Where required by the Bid Documents, a bidder shall complete and
submit a Supplementary Bid Form –Alternative Prices:
.1
9.8
The Base Bid Form provides that the bid price shall be provided in numbers only.
Where the Bid Forms require the bidder to provide a breakdown of the bid price,
the bid price shall govern in the case of conflict or ambiguity between the bid
price and the sum of the breakdown of the bid price.
Alternative Prices for work, if any, any or all of which the Owner reserves the
right to accept or reject any or all alternative prices.
Unit Prices. Where required by the Bid Documents, a bidder shall complete and submit a
Supplementary Bid Form – Unit Prices.
Page 5 of 17
Toronto Catholic District School Board
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
10.
BID SUBMISSION
10.1
Submit one (1) completed original of the Base Bid Form, and any required
Supplementary Bid Forms, accompanied by the bid bond and the agreement to bond, in a
sealed opaque envelope. Ensure that the outside of the envelope bears the bidder’s return
address and a label clearly identifying the Project , the Project number and, if one exists,
the bid number for which the bid is submitted.
10.2
Submit the envelope to:
TENDER BOX, 4th Floor, Materials Management Department
Toronto Catholic District School Board
Catholic Education Centre
80 Sheppard Avenue East, Toronto, ON
M2N 6E8
10.3
Bids must be received before 3:00:00 PM, APRIL 30, 2013. The term “local time” shall
mean the time as measured by the Owner’s tender clock which is located at the reception
desk of the Materials Management Department.
10.4
Bids will be date and time stamped at the place receiving the bids. Late bids will be
returned unopened.
10.5
Bids which are submitted by facsimile transmission or by electronic means will not be
considered.
10.6
Bidders are solely responsible for the method and timing of delivery of their bids.
10.7
The Owner acknowledges that the information included in the bids submitted is “supplied
in confidence” within the meaning of Section 10 of the Municipal Freedom of
Information and Protection of Privacy Act (Ontario).
11.
BID EXPIRY PERIOD
11.1
Each bid shall be irrevocable for the Bid Expiry Period, after which the bid expires.
12.
BID OPENING AND EVALUATION
12.1
Bids will be opened in public, in the cafeteria located on the 4th floor of the Catholic
Education Centre, shortly following bid closing.
12.2
In the event that more than one envelope is received from the same bidder, only the last
envelope received will be considered.
12.3
If only a single bid is received for evaluation, the Owner will notify the bidder that its bid
is the only one received for evaluation and, upon being so advised, the bidder may:
.1
Request the Owner to return the bid unopened and the owner agrees to do so; or,
Page 6 of 17
Toronto Catholic District School Board
.2
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Authorize the Owner, in writing, to open the bid, but, in that case, the bidder
specifically agrees that the Owner is not required to award the Contract and may
reject the bid even if the bid is compliant.
12.4
The Owner may reject the lowest or any bid or part of any bid, reject all bids or cancel
this bid process in whole or in part.
12.5
The bid price offered on the Base Bid Form will be considered the bidder’s “Base Bid”.
The Owner reserves the right, but has no obligation, to adjust all bidders’ Base Bids by
the amounts of any Alternative Prices which the Owner, in its discretion, decides to
accept.
12.6
The Owner reserves the right to award the Contract to the bidder which submitted the bid
which, in the Owner’s sole discretion, provides the best value to the Owner based on the
criteria described in the Bid Documents including, but not limited to, a bidder’s:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Base Bid;
Base Bid as adjusted by the Owner pursuant to the Bid Documents;
Clarification provided pursuant to Article 13 [Requests for Information]
The TCDSB reserves the right to limit the award of FDK retrofits for summer
2013 construction to 3 packages to any one contractor. It is anticipated that there
will be a total 0f 19 packages tendered in two categories, projects under $300,000
and projects equal to or greater than $300,000.
12.7
The Owner reserves the right to award the Contract to a bidder which, in the Owner’s
discretion, has submitted a substantially compliant bid. Incomplete or conditional bids
may be declared non-compliant.
12.8
Should the Owner receive no compliant bids, the Owner, in its discretion, may re-bid the
Project or may negotiate a Contract for the whole or any part of the Project with a bidder
which has submitted a non-compliant bid.
13.
REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION
13.1
The Consultant may contact any one or more bidders to request information without any
obligation to contact or request the same information from any other bidder or bidders.
13.2
Within five (5) Working Days of notification by the Consultant, a bidder shall submit a
trade by trade breakdown of the bid price for analysis by the Consultant. Submission of
an unbalanced or front-end loaded breakdown may result in the bid being rejected.
13.3
Within five (5) Working Days of notification by the Consultant, a bidder shall submit a
preliminary construction schedule. Such preliminary construction schedule shall be
consistent with the time for Substantial Performance of the Work stated in the Bid
Documents. Such preliminary construction schedule may be in bar chart format and shall
include all major subtrades and show Project milestones and critical schedule items, such
as start and completion of major Project components. Failure to submit an acceptable
preliminary construction schedule may result in the bid being rejected.
Page 7 of 17
Toronto Catholic District School Board
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
13.4
A bidder shall submit additional information promptly if requested by the Consultant.
Failure to do so may result in the bid being rejected.
13.5
Requests for a breakdown of the bid price, a preliminary construction schedule, or other
requests for information shall not be construed as acceptance of a bid.
14.
AWARD OF CONTRACT, EXECUTION
DOCUMENTS TO BE DELIVERED
14.1
Bidders shall not issue or make any statements or news release concerning their bid, the
bid process, the Owner’s evaluation of the bids, or the Owner’s award or cancellation of
the bid process without the express written consent of the Owner.
14.2
If the Owner decides to award the Contract to a bidder, it will issue a letter of Contract
award.
14.3
Prior to commencing the Work, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner:
.1
.2
.3
OF
THE
CONTRACT
AND
the performance bond and the labour and material payment bond described in the
Bid Documents, the form of such bonds to comply with the requirements of the
Contract;
certified true copies of the insurance policies required by the Bid Documents; and
a current Clearance Certificate issued by the Workplace Safety and Insurance
Board.
14.4
The Contractor shall execute the Contract and deliver the executed original to the Owner
within ten (10) Working Days of receipt from the Consultant.
15.
LIMIT OF LIABILITY
15.1
The liability of the bidder to the Owner for loss and damage arising out of the bidder’s
breach of the “bid contract” shall be limited to the lesser of the actual loss suffered by the
Owner and the amount of the bid bond submitted as part of the bidder’s bid.
15.2
The liability of the Owner to any bidder for loss and damage arising in tort or for the
breach by the Owner of the “bid contract” shall be limited to the reasonable cost to the
bidder of preparing its bid.
16.
DISPUTES
16.1
In the event of a dispute arising in connection with this bid process including, without
limitation, a dispute concerning the existence of the “bid contract” or a breach of the “bid
contract”, or a dispute as to whether the bid of any bidder was submitted on time or
whether a bid is compliant, the Owner may refer the dispute to a confidential binding
arbitration pursuant to the Arbitration Act, 1991, as amended, before a single arbitrator
with knowledge of procurement/bidding law. In the event that the Owner refers the
dispute to arbitration, the bidder agrees that it is bound to arbitrate such dispute with the
Page 8 of 17
Toronto Catholic District School Board
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Owner. Unless the Owner shall refer such dispute to binding arbitration, there shall be no
arbitration of such dispute.
16.2
In the event the Owner refers a dispute to binding arbitration, the Owner may give notice
of the dispute to one or more of the other bidders who submitted bids, whether or not they
may be compliant, each of whom shall be a party to and shall be entitled to participate in
the binding arbitration, and each of whom shall be bound by the arbitrator’s award,
whether or not they participated in the binding arbitration.
16.3
In the event the Owner refers a dispute to binding arbitration, the parties to the arbitration
shall exchange brief statements of their respective positions on the dispute, together with
the relevant documents, and submit to a binding arbitration hearing which shall last no
longer than two days, subject to the discretion of the arbitrator to increase such time. The
parties further agree that there shall be no appeal from the arbitrator’s award.
16.4
This Article is not intended to form part of any “bid contract” that may come into being
between a bidder and any prospective Subcontractor or Supplier of that bidder.
17.
LOBBYING
17.1
The TCDSB has established a prohibition on lobbying during all competitive tenders,
RFP's or RFQ's. The Board will designate a Tender Contact Person for all tenders or
proposal calls to respond to all communications with respect to the call from the time of
issuance, during the competitive process, and up to and including the announcement of
award.
17.2
Vendors or any representatives employed or retained by them, or any unpaid
representatives acting on behalf of either to promote a bid/proposal or oppose any
competing bid/proposal are strictly prohibited from communicating, either verbally or in
writing, with any other Board employees or elected officials from the time of issuance
until the time of award.
17.3
Any vendor found to be in breach of the policy will be subject to disqualification from
this particular call or future calls at the discretion of the Board.
18.
RELEVANT POLICIES
18.1
The Board has a number of relevant Policies regarding Tenders and Acquisitions.
Proponents should familiarize themselves with the following policies:
Purchasing Policy:
http://www.tcdsb.org/Board/Policies/Pages/FP01.aspx
Sweatshop Free Purchasing:
http://www.tcdsb.org/Board/Policies/Pages/FP04.aspx
Conflict of Interest – Employee:
http://www.tcdsb.org/Board/Policies/Pages/HM31.aspx
Acceptance of Hospitality or Gifts:
http://www.tcdsb.org/Board/Policies/Pages/HM33.aspx
Page 9 of 17
Toronto Catholic District School Board
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Conflict of Interest for Trustees:
http://www.tcdsb.org/Board/Policies/Pages/T01.aspx
END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Page 10 of 17
Toronto Catholic District School Board
BASE BID FORM
NAME OF BIDDER
________________________________________________________________
ADDRESS
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
TELEPHONE
E-MAIL
______________________
FAX ____________________________
______________________
BID PRICE
I/We the undersigned, having carefully examined the Bid Documents, having received, carefully
examined and incorporated
Addenda No. ______ to No. ______
inclusive, having visited and investigated the Place of the Work, and having examined all
conditions, circumstances and limitations affecting the Work, offer to enter into a Contract with
the Owner to perform the Work required by the Bid Documents for the price of:
z [NOTE: Bidders must provide bids for all of the listed schools below, selective bidding will
not be accepted. This package will be awarded to one (1) Contractor only]
Venerable John Merlini:
$ ____________________________________ . z [NOTE: insert amount in numbers only]
The price offered includes the Cash Allowances listed in Section 01020 and excludes the
Harmonized Sales Tax (HST) but includes all other eligible taxes.
St. Francis De Sales:
$ ____________________________________. z [NOTE: insert amount in numbers only] The
price offered includes the Cash Allowances listed in Section 01020 and excludes the Harmonized
Sales Tax (HST) but includes all other eligible taxes.
Blessed Margherita:
$ ____________________________________. z [NOTE: insert amount in numbers only] The
price offered includes the Cash Allowances listed in Section 01020 and excludes the Harmonized
Sales Tax (HST) but includes all other eligible taxes.
BID SECURITY
Attached to this bid is a bid bond issued by
in
$_______________________. z [NOTE: insert amount in numbers only]
the
amount
of
No other form of bid security is acceptable.
Page 11 of 17
Toronto Catholic District School Board
BASE BID FORM
AGREEMENT TO BOND
Attached to this bid is a separate agreement to bond issued by:
_________________________________________________
undertaking to provide the bonds required by the Bid Documents.
DECLARATIONS
I/We the undersigned declare that:
1.
I/We agree to perform the Work, inclusive of mobilization time, in compliance with the
Contract Documents and attain Substantial Performance before August 15th, 2013.
2.
No person, firm or corporation other than the undersigned has any interest in this bid or
in the proposed Contract for which this bid is made.
3.
This bid is irrevocable and is open for acceptance by the Owner for the Bid Expiry
Period.
DATE
___________________________________________________________
SIGNATURE
____________________________________________________________
Name and Title
____________________________________________________________
Company Seal
END OF DOCUMENT
Page 12 of 17
Toronto Catholic District School Board
SUPPLEMENTARY BID FORM
ALTERNATIVE AND SEPARATE PRICES
NAME OF BIDDER
_______________________________________________________________
I/We the undersigned offer the Alternative Prices and Separate Prices described below. I/We
agree that:
1.
All prices submitted take into consideration and allow for changes and adjustments in
other work as may be necessary to provide a finished and functional result, unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
2.
“Alternative Prices” are amounts stipulated by bidders for solicited alternatives which
can be stated as additions, deductions or no change to the bid price.
3.
“Separate Prices’ are for work not included in the bid price and are amounts stipulated by
bidders for solicited additional work that will change the scope of work and bid price.
4.
Without limiting its rights under the Instructions to Bidders, the Owner reserves the right
to accept or reject any of the Alternative and Separate Prices. Acceptance of Alternative
and Separate Prices is subject to acceptance of the bid before the end of the Bid Expiry
Period provided in the Instructions to Bidders.
5.
Prices listed hereunder do not include Harmonized Sales Tax (HST) but include all other
eligible taxes.
6.
These amounts shall be irrevocable for the Bid Expiry Period provided in the Instructions
to Bidders.
ALTERNATIVE PRICES
1.
Provide Alternative price to supply and install solid surfacing counter top
and backsplash on all teacher’s and child’s sink units in scope of work in
lieu of specified plastic laminate countertop and backsplash
Venerable John Merlini:
2.
St. Francis De Sales:
$_____________
Blessed Margherita:
$_____________
Provide Alternative Price to supply and install ceramic tile on backsplash
wall to underside of upper cabinets at teacher’s and child’s sink units in
scope of work in lieu of specified paint finish.
Venerable John Merlini:
3.
$_____________
$_____________
St. Francis De Sales:
$_____________
Blessed Margherita:
$_____________
Provide Alternative Price to supply and install furring out wall and adding
tile finish in the following washrooms.
Venerable John Merlini Washrooms 107C and 107D:
$_____________
Toronto Catholic District School Board
BASE BID FORM
St. Francis De Sales Washrooms A and B:
$_____________
Blessed Margherita Washrooms 127A, 127B, 126B, 126C:
$_____________
END OF DOCUMENT
Page 14 of 17
Toronto Catholic District School Board
BASE BID FORM
SEPARATE PRICES
1.
2.
3.
For Venerable John Merlini provide Separate Price to replace tank toilets
in Washrooms 107C and 107D
$_____________
For St. Francis De Sales provide Separate Price to replace tank toilets in
Washrooms A and B
$_____________
For Blessed Margherita provide Separate Price to replace tank toilets in
Washrooms 127A, 127B, 126B, 126C
$_____________
This List of Alternative and Separate Prices is an integral part of the Bid Documents.
DATE
____________________________________________________________
SIGNATURE
____________________________________________________________
Name and Title
____________________________________________________________
END OF DOCUMENT
Page 15 of 17
Taylor Smyth Architects
TCDSB FDK4 Group 3
Interior Renovation
Section 00200
INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS
Page 1
1
REPORTS
1.1
A copy of the following detailed reports prepared by Decommissioning Consulting
Services Ltd. (DCS) is appended to this Document:
Venedrable John Merlini C.S. Outline of Work - Asbestos Remediation Project
DCS Project No. 701776-000
Date: March 2013
St. Francis de Sales C.S. Outline of Work - Asbestos Remediation Project
DCS Project No. 701777-000
Date: March 2013
Blessed Margherita of Citta di Castello C.S. Outline of Work - Asbestos Remediation
Project
DCS Project No. 701773-000
Date: March 2013
1.2
These reports are provided for information purposes only. The Consultants are not
responsible for any of the information contained within.
1.3
Should the abatement contractor need to remove any walls or portions of existing
walls, the General Contractor will be required to identify the extent of removal in
coordination with general demolition work to be completed by the General
Contractor.
1.4
Should there be any thermostats, chalkboards, fire hose cabinets or other
mechanical/electrical/communications and fire safety devices that need to be
removed and/or secured prior to abatement, this will need to be completed by the
General Contractor.
1.5
Should there be any bearing walls which require removal by the abatement
contractor, all required shoring will need to be installed by the General Contractor
prior to abatement.
END OF DOCUMENT
TCDSB
Venerable John Merlini C.S.
DCS Project No. 701776-000
ASBESTOS REMEDIATION PROJECT
Page 1 of 3
March 2013
OUTLINE OF WORK
1.0
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL
1.2
.1
The requirements as set out in this Outline of Work may, at times, exceed the
procedures detailed in the various applicable regulations. All work shall be done in
compliance with this Outline of Work, and O.Reg. 278/05. Should there be any
discrepancy or conflict between the documents, the most stringent shall apply.
.2
Replacement of removed materials is not part of this contract.
.3
If any material not previously identified and suspected of containing asbestos is
encountered, accessed or uncovered during the course of the renovation work, and
that will be affected, immediately report the findings to the Owner’s Representative
and do not disturb the material until authorization to proceed is granted.
.1
Removal and disposal of additional asbestos-containing materials, if
required, will be the subject of additional cost submissions.
.2
The contractor shall submit a quotation, for the cost of removal and disposal
of any asbestos-containing materials encountered during the course of
renovation work carried out after the completion of the asbestos abatement
work for review by the Owner’s Representative. The contractor shall only
proceed with asbestos removal after acceptance of the cost quotation by the
Owner and/or the Owner’s Representative.
OUTLINE OF WORK
.1
The intent of the work is to remove and dispose of affected asbestos-containing
materials from the areas as detailed below. Exact locations of work areas may
change depending on site conditions and the requirements of the general
contractor and sub-trades. Please refer to the Architect’s Drawings for specific
locations and details.
.2
Provide all supervision, labour, equipment, tools, materials, waste management,
haulage and disposal and other services required as required for undertaking and
completing the work as detailed below:
.3
Work Area 1 – Rooms 123, 112A and 107 Coat Area
.1
Prepare the areas as indicated above and as referenced on the Architect’s
Drawings for Type 1 and Type 2 Enclosure asbestos removal operations.
DCS
TCDSB
Venerable John Merlini C.S.
DCS Project No. 701776-000
ASBESTOS REMEDIATION PROJECT
Page 2 of 3
March 2013
OUTLINE OF WORK
.4
.5
.2
Using Type 2 Enclosure procedures, remove and dispose as asbestos waste,
affected ceiling tiles (2’x4’) as required. Please note that if the total
quantity of ceiling tiles to be removed in each area does not exceed 7.5
m2, the work may be completed following Type 1 asbestos abatement
procedures.
.3
The exposed ceiling grid and all existing lighting and other items supported
by the ceiling assemblies, in the immediate area, are to be sufficiently
cleaned and temporarily supported as required.
.4
Remove and dispose vinyl baseboards in Rooms 112 and 107 Coat Area, as
required, to access vinyl floor tiles. Baseboards are to be disposed as clean
(“non-asbestos”) waste.
.5
Remove and dispose affected vinyl floor tiles in Rooms 112 and 107 Coat
Area as clean asbestos waste.
.6
Ceiling tiles contain 5.0% amosite and 1.0% chrysotile asbestos. Vinyl floor
tiles contain 3.0% to 5.0% chrysotile asbestos.
Work Area 2 – Rooms 104, 105, 128, 129, 204 and 205
.1
Prepare the areas as indicated above and as referenced on the Architect’s
Drawings for Type 2/Glovebag asbestos removal operations.
.2
Remove and dispose all affected drywall and asbestos-containing drywall
joint compound applied to the ceilings, including drywall, vapour barrier and
insulation (if required) and all support assemblies as asbestos waste.
.3
Using glovebag procedures, remove and dispose all asbestos-containing
thermal insulation (if present) from the ceiling spaces, as asbestos waste.
.4
Thermal insulation applied to pipe fittings contains 67.0% chrysotile
asbestos. Drywall joint compound contains 0.75% chrysotile asbestos
All waste is to be removed from the site and disposed. Disposal containers are not to
be left on Board property unattended unless fully enclosed and locked. Bins must be
removed immediately on completion of work.
DCS
TCDSB
Venerable John Merlini C.S.
DCS Project No. 701776-000
ASBESTOS REMEDIATION PROJECT
Page 3 of 3
March 2013
OUTLINE OF WORK
.6
.7
Schedule
.1
Mobilization
To be determined
.2
Complete Work and Demobilize
To be determined
The milestone dates, which are to be determined, are fundamental conditions of the
Contract and failure to achieve these dates will be considered a breach of the
Contract. The Asbestos Contractor must schedule adequate manpower to achieve
completion by the milestone dates.
DCS
TCDSB
St. Francis de Sales C.S.
DCS Project No. 701777-000
ASBESTOS REMEDIATION PROJECT
Page 1 of 2
March 2013
OUTLINE OF WORK
1.0
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL
1.2
.1
The requirements as set out in this Outline of Work may, at times, exceed the
procedures detailed in the various applicable regulations. All work shall be done in
compliance with this Outline of Work, and O.Reg. 278/05. Should there be any
discrepancy or conflict between the documents, the most stringent shall apply.
.2
Replacement of removed materials is not part of this contract.
.3
If any material not previously identified and suspected of containing asbestos is
encountered, accessed or uncovered during the course of the renovation work, and
that will be affected, immediately report the findings to the Owner’s Representative
and do not disturb the material until authorization to proceed is granted.
.1
Removal and disposal of additional asbestos-containing materials, if
required, will be the subject of additional cost submissions.
.2
The contractor shall submit a quotation, for the cost of removal and disposal
of any asbestos-containing materials encountered during the course of
renovation work carried out after the completion of the asbestos abatement
work for review by the Owner’s Representative. The contractor shall only
proceed with asbestos removal after acceptance of the cost quotation by the
Owner and/or the Owner’s Representative.
OUTLINE OF WORK
.1
The intent of the work is to remove and dispose of affected asbestos-containing
materials from the areas as detailed below. Exact locations of work areas may
change depending on site conditions and the requirements of the general
contractor and sub-trades. Please refer to the Architect’s Drawings for specific
locations and details.
.2
Provide all supervision, labour, equipment, tools, materials, waste management,
haulage and disposal and other services required as required for undertaking and
completing the work as detailed below:
.3
Work Area 1 – Rooms 109, 110, 136, 137B, 137C, 206, 207, 217, 217B and
218.
.1
Prepare the areas as indicated above and as referenced on the Architect’s
Drawings for Type 1 and Type 2 Enclosure asbestos removal operations.
DCS
TCDSB
St. Francis de Sales C.S.
DCS Project No. 701777-000
ASBESTOS REMEDIATION PROJECT
Page 2 of 2
March 2013
OUTLINE OF WORK
.2
Using Type 2 Enclosure procedures, remove and dispose as asbestos waste,
affected ceiling tiles (2’x4’) as required in Rooms 109, 110, 206, 207, 217,
217B and 218. Please note that if the total quantity of ceiling tiles to be
removed in each area does not exceed 7.5 m2, the work may be
completed following Type 1 asbestos abatement procedures.
.3
Using Type 1 procedures, remove and dispose as asbestos waste, affected
ceiling tiles (2’x4’) as required in Rooms 136, 137B, 137C, . Please note
that the total quantity of ceiling tiles to be removed in each area is not
exceed 7.5 m2. If the total quantity of ceiling tiles to be removed in each
area does exceeds 7.5 m2, the work is to be completed following Type 2
Enclosure asbestos abatement procedures.
.4
The exposed ceiling grid and all existing lighting and other items supported
by the ceiling assemblies, in the immediate area, are to be sufficiently
cleaned and temporarily supported as required.
.5
Ceiling tiles contain 5.0% amosite asbestos.
.4
All waste is to be removed from the site and disposed. Disposal containers are not to
be left on Board property unattended unless fully enclosed and locked. Bins must be
removed immediately on completion of work.
.5
Schedule
.6
.1
Mobilization
To be determined
.2
Complete Work and Demobilize
To be determined
The milestone dates, which are to be determined, are fundamental conditions of the
Contract and failure to achieve these dates will be considered a breach of the
Contract. The Asbestos Contractor must schedule adequate manpower to achieve
completion by the milestone dates.
DCS
TCDSB.
Blessed Margherita of Citta di Castello C.S.
DCS Project No. 701773-000
ASBESTOS REMEDIATION PROJECT
Page 1 of 2
March 2013
OUTLINE OF WORK
1.0
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL
1.2
.1
The requirements as set out in this Outline of Work may, at times, exceed the
procedures detailed in the various applicable regulations. All work shall be done in
compliance with this Outline of Work, and O.Reg. 278/05. Should there be any
discrepancy or conflict between the documents, the most stringent shall apply.
.2
Replacement of removed materials is not part of this contract.
.3
If any material not previously identified and suspected of containing asbestos is
encountered, accessed or uncovered during the course of the renovation work, and
that will be affected, immediately report the findings to the Owner’s Representative
and do not disturb the material until authorization to proceed is granted.
.1
Removal and disposal of additional asbestos-containing materials, if
required, will be the subject of additional cost submissions.
.2
The contractor shall submit a quotation, for the cost of removal and disposal
of any asbestos-containing materials encountered during the course of
renovation work carried out after the completion of the asbestos abatement
work for review by the Owner’s Representative. The contractor shall only
proceed with asbestos removal after acceptance of the cost quotation by the
Owner and/or the Owner’s Representative.
OUTLINE OF WORK
.1
The intent of the work is to remove and dispose of affected asbestos-containing
materials from the areas as detailed below. Exact locations of work areas may
change depending on site conditions and the requirements of the general
contractor and sub-trades. Please refer to the Architect’s Drawings for specific
locations and details.
.2
Provide all supervision, labour, equipment, tools, materials, waste management,
haulage and disposal and other services required as required for undertaking and
completing the work as detailed below:
DCS
TCDSB.
Blessed Margherita of Citta di Castello C.S.
DCS Project No. 701773-000
ASBESTOS REMEDIATION PROJECT
Page 2 of 2
March 2013
OUTLINE OF WORK
.3
Work Area 1 – Rooms 126 and 127
.1
Prepare the areas as indicated above and as referenced on the Architect’s
Drawings for Type 1 asbestos removal operations.
.2
Remove and dispose affected vinyl floor tiles as clean “non-asbestos” waste.
.3
Remove all underlying mastic using hand-scrapers (non-powered hand tools).
Mastic is to be disposed as asbestos waste.
.4
Mastic contains 1.2% chrysotile asbestos.
.4
All waste is to be removed from the site and disposed. Disposal containers are not to
be left on Board property unattended unless fully enclosed and locked. Bins must be
removed immediately on completion of work.
.5
Schedule
.6
.1
Mobilization
To be determined
.2
Complete Work and Demobilize
To be determined
The milestone dates, which are to be determined, are fundamental conditions of the
Contract and failure to achieve these dates will be considered a breach of the
Contract. The Asbestos Contractor must schedule adequate manpower to achieve
completion by the milestone dates.
DCS
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT
SCHOOL BOARD
AMENDMENTS TO CCDC2-2008
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
JUNE 2009
(i)
2266168.2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.
AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR ...........................................1
1.1 article a-5 - payment...................................................................................................1
1.2 ARTICLE A-6 – RECEIPT AND ADDRESSES FOR NOTICES IN WRITING....1
2.
DEFINITIONS.....................................................................................................................1
3.
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE STIPULATED PRICE CONTRACT ......................2
3.1 GC 1.1 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS......................................................................2
3.2 GC 2.2 - ROLE OF THE CONSULTANT ................................................................3
3.3 GC 2.4 - DEFECTIVE WORK ..................................................................................4
3.4 GC 3.1 - CONTROL OF THE WORK ......................................................................4
3.5 GC 3.2 - CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR OTHER CONTRACTORS.............4
3.6 GC 3.4 - DOCUMENT REVIEW..............................................................................4
3.7 GC 3.5 - CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE ................................................................5
3.8 GC 3.6 - SUPERVISION ...........................................................................................6
3.9 GC 3.7 - SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS.................................................6
3.10 GC 3.8 - LABOUR AND PRODUCTS .....................................................................7
3.11 GC 3.9 - DOCUMENTS AT THE SITE....................................................................8
3.12 GC 3.10 - SHOP DRAWINGS ..................................................................................8
3.13 GC 3.14 – STANDARD OF CARE...........................................................................8
3.14 GC 3.15 OCCUPANCY OF THE WORK...............................................................9
3.15 GC 3.16 – CONTRACTOR’S USE OF PERMANENT EQUIPMENT OR
SYSTEMS............................................................................................................................9
3.16 GC 4.1 - CASH ALLOWANCES............................................................................10
3.17 GC 5.1 - FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE OWNER ............10
3.18 GC 5.2 - APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT ....................................10
3.19 GC 5.3 - PROGRESS PAYMENT ..........................................................................11
3.20 GC 5.4 - SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK .............................11
3.21 GC 5.5 - PAYMENT OF HOLDBACK UPON SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE
OF THE WORK ................................................................................................................12
3.22 GC 5.6 - PROGRESSIVE RELEASE OF HOLDBACK ........................................12
3.23 GC 5.7 - FINAL PAYMENT ...................................................................................13
3.24 GC 6.2 - CHANGE ORDER....................................................................................14
3.25 GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE ............................................................................15
3.26 GC 6.4 - CONCEALED OR UNKNOWN CONDITIONS.....................................16
3.27 GC 6.5 - DELAYS ...................................................................................................16
3.28 GC 7.1 - OWNER’S RIGHT TO PERFORM THE WORK, STOP THE WORK,
OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT...............................................................................17
3.29 GC 7.2 - CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO SUSPEND THE WORK OR
TERMINATE THE CONTRACT .....................................................................................17
3.30 GC 8.1 - AUTHORITY OF THE CONSULTANT .................................................18
3.31 GC 8.2 - NEGOTIATION, MEDIATION AND ARBITRATION .........................18
3.32 GC 8.3 - RETENTION OF RIGHTS .......................................................................19
3.33 GC 9.1 - PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY........................................19
3.34 GC 9.2 - TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES .........................................20
3.35 GC 9.4 - CONSTRUCTION SAFETY ....................................................................21
3.36 GC 9.5 - MOULD ....................................................................................................22
( ii )
2266168.2
3.37
3.38
3.39
3.40
3.41
3.42
3.43
3.44
3.45
3.46
3.47
3.48
3.49
GC 10.1 - TAXES AND DUTIES ...........................................................................22
GC 10.2 - LAWS, NOTICES, PERMITS, AND FEES ...........................................22
INDEMNIFICATION ..............................................................................................23
GC 12.2 - WAIVER OF CLAIMS...........................................................................23
GC 12.3 - WARRANTY ..........................................................................................24
OTHER PROVISIONS ............................................................................................24
GC 13.1 - OWNERSHIP OF MATERIALS............................................................24
GC 13.2 - CONSTRUCTION LIENS......................................................................25
GC 13.3 - CONTRACTOR DISCHARGE OF LIABILITIES ...............................25
GC 13.4 - AS-BUILT DRAWINGS .......................................................................25
GC 13.5 - DAILY REPORTS/DAILY LOGS .........................................................25
GC 13.6 - NEUTRAL APPOINTING AUTHORITY .............................................26
GC 13.7 - PUBLIC STATEMENTS.......................................................................26
ADDENDA
Appendix 1
Appendix 2
( iii )
2266168.2
Toronto Catholic District School Board
Amendments to CCDC2-2008
Supplementary Conditions
April 2009
1 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
AMENDMENTS TO THE STIPULATED PRICE CONTRACT, CCDC2-2008
The Standard Construction Document for Stipulated Price Contract, English version, consisting
of the Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, Definitions, and General Conditions of the
Stipulated Price Contract, Parts 1 to 12 inclusive, governing same is hereby made part of these
Contract Documents, with the following amendments, additions and modifications:
1.
AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR
1.1
ARTICLE A-5 - PAYMENT
1.1.1
Amend paragraph 5.1.3, in the first line, by deleting the words "the issuance of the"
and replacing them with "receipt of the Consultant's".
1.1.2
Delete paragraph 5.3.1 and replace it with the following:
"Should either party fail to make payments as they become due under the terms of the Contract or
in an award by arbitration or a court, interest shall also become due and payable on such unpaid
amounts at 2% above the prime rate. Such interest shall be compounded on a monthly basis. The
prime rate shall be the rate of interest quoted by [named of chartered lending institution] for
prime business loans as it may change from time to time."
1.2
1.2.1
ARTICLE A-6 – RECEIPT AND ADDRESSES FOR NOTICES IN WRITING
Delete paragraph 6.1 and replace it with the following:
"Notices in Writing between the parties or between them and the Consultant shall be considered to
have been received by the addressee on the date of receipt if delivered by hand or by commercial
courier or if sent during normal business hours by fax and addressed as set out below. Such
Notices in Writing will be deemed to be received by the addressee on the next business day if sent
by fax after normal business hours or if sent by overnight commercial courier. Such Notices in
Writing will be deemed to be received by the addressee on the fifth Working Day following the
date of mailing, if sent by pre-paid registered post, when addressed as set out below. An address
for a party may be changed by Notice in Writing to the other party setting out the new address in
accordance with this Article."
2.
2.1.1
DEFINITIONS
Amend Definition 4, "Consultant", by adding the following to the end of that
Definition:
"For purposes of the Contract, the terms "Consultant", "Architect" and "Engineer" shall be
considered synonymous."
2.1.2
Add a new Definition 27, Act, as follows:
"'Act' means the Construction Lien Act (Ontario)."
2.1.3
2266168.2
Add a new Definition 28, "Environmental Programs", as follows:
Toronto Catholic District School Board
Amendments to CCDC2-2008
Supplementary Conditions
April 2009
2 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
"'Environmental Programs' means the environmental plans, programs, procedures and
requirements of the Owner. The Environmental Programs incorporate Owner’s infection control
program including measures to suppress dust and noise and to avoid conditions likely to propagate
mould or fungus of any kind."
2.1.4
Add a new Definition 29, OHSA, as follows:
"'OHSA' means the Occupational Health and Safety Act (Ontario)."
2.1.5
Add a new Definition 30, Submittals, as follows:
"27. Submittals
Submittals are documents or items required by the Contract Documents to be provided by the
Contractor, such as:
Shop Drawings, interference drawings, samples, models, mock-ups to indicate details or
characteristics, before the portion of the Work that they represent can be incorporated into the
Work; and
Record Drawings and manuals to provide instructions to the operation and maintenance
of the Work.
2.1.6
Add a new Definition 31, WSIB, as follows:
"'WSIB' means the Work Place Safety & Insurance Board."
3.
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE STIPULATED PRICE CONTRACT
Where a General Condition or paragraph of the General Conditions of the Stipulated Price
Contract is deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the numbering of the remaining General
Conditions or paragraphs shall remain unchanged, and the numbering of the deleted item will be
retained, unused.
3.1
3.1.1
GC 1.1 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Add the following to the end of paragraph 1.1.6:
"The Specifications are divided into divisions and sections for convenience but shall be read as a
whole and neither such division nor anything else contained in the Contract Documents will be
construed to place responsibility on the Consultant to settle disputes among the Subcontractors
and Suppliers in respect to such divisions. The Drawings are, in part, diagrammatic and are
intended to convey the scope of the Work and indicate general and appropriate locations,
arrangement and sizes of fixtures, equipment and outlets. The Contractor shall obtain more
accurate information about the locations, arrangement and sizes from study and coordination of
the Drawings, including shop Drawings and shall become familiar with conditions and spaces
affecting these matters before proceeding with the Work. Where site conditions require reasonable
minor changes in indicated locations and arrangements, the Contractor shall make such changes at
no additional cost to the Owner. Similarly, where known conditions or existing conditions
interfere with new installation and require relocation, the Contractor shall include such relocation
in the Work. The Contractor shall arrange and install fixtures and equipment in such a way as to
conserve as much headroom and space as possible. The schedules are that portion of the Contract
2266168.2
Toronto Catholic District School Board
Amendments to CCDC2-2008
Supplementary Conditions
April 2009
3 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Documents wherever located and whenever issued, compiling information of similar content and
may consist of Drawings, tables and/or lists."
3.1.2
Add new subparagraph 1.1.7.5:
"1.1.7.5 In case of discrepancies, noted materials and annotations shall take precedence over
graphic indications in the Contract Documents."
3.1.3
Delete paragraph 1.1.8 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 1.1.8:
"1.1.8
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
The Owner shall provide the Contractor, without charge, six copies of the Contract
Documents. Additional copies of the Contract Documents may be obtained from the
Consultant at a reasonable cost."
GC 2.2 - ROLE OF THE CONSULTANT
Amend paragraph 2.2.7 by deleting the words “Except with respect to GC 5.1 –
FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE OWNER.”
Amend paragraph 2.2.13 by adding the following to the end of that paragraph:
“If, in the opinion of the Contractor, the Supplemental Instruction involves an adjustment in the
Contract Price or the Contract Time, the Contractor shall, within ten (10) Working Days of
receipt of a Supplemental Instruction provide the Consultant with a written notice to that effect.
In the event that the Contractor needs additional information to determine whether a Supplemental
Instruction involves an adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Time, the Contractor
may issue a written request to the Consultant seeking such additional information. Following
receipt of such information the Contractor shall, within ten (10) Working Days of receipt of such
additional information, provide the Consultant with the written notice described in the first
sentence of this paragraph 2.2.13 if, in the opinion of the Contractor, the Supplemental Instruction
involves an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time. Failure to provide written
notification within the time stipulated in this paragraph 2.2.13 shall be deemed an acceptance of
the Supplemental Instruction by the Contractor without adjustment in the Contract Price or
Contract Time. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, every item on the Drawings shall
be deemed as included within the scope of the Work unless noted “not in contract”.”
3.2.3
Add new paragraphs 2.2.19 and 2.2.20 as follows:
“2.2.19 Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, Supplier or other third party shall have
any claim against the Consultant as a result of the performance or non-performance of the
Consultant’s services. The Contractor shall include this provision in any Contracts it
makes with its Subcontractors, Suppliers and others and shall require such
Subcontractors, Suppliers and others to include the same term in their Contracts with
sub-Subcontractors, sub-suppliers and others.
2.2.20
2266168.2
The Specifications are divided into divisions and sections for convenience but shall be
read as a whole and neither such division nor anything else contained in the Contract
Documents will be construed to place responsibility on the Consultant to settle disputes
among Subcontractors and Suppliers in respect to such divisions.”
Toronto Catholic District School Board
Amendments to CCDC2-2008
Supplementary Conditions
April 2009
4 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3.3
3.3.1
GC 2.4 - DEFECTIVE WORK
Amend paragraph 2.4.1 by adding the following sentence to the end of the existing
paragraph:
"The Contractor shall rectify, in a manner acceptable to the Owner and the Consultant, all
defective Work and deficiencies throughout the Work, whether or not they are specifically
identified by the Consultant.
3.3.2
Amend paragraph 2.4.2 by adding the following sentence to the end of the existing
paragraph:
“The Contractor shall prioritize the correction of any defective Work which, in the sole discretion
of the Owner, adversely affects the day to day operation of the Owner.”
3.4
3.4.1
GC 3.1 - CONTROL OF THE WORK
Add new paragraph 3.1.3:
"3.1.3
3.5
Prior to commencing individual procurement, fabrication and construction activities, the
Contractor shall verify, at the Place of the Work, all relevant measurements and levels
necessary for proper and complete fabrication, assembly and installation of the Work and
shall further carefully compare such field measurements and conditions with the
requirements of the Contract Documents. Where dimensions are not included or exact
locations are not apparent, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Consultant in
writing and obtain written instructions from the Consultant before proceeding with any
part of the affected Work."
GC 3.2 - CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR OTHER CONTRACTORS
3.5.1
Delete subparagraphs 3.2.2.1 and 3.2.2.2 in their entirety.
3.5.2
Delete paragraph 3.2.3.2 and replace it with the following:
“3.2.3.2 Coordinate and schedule the activities and work of other contractors and Owner’s own
forces with the Work of the Contractor and connect as specified or shown in the Contract
Documents;”
3.5.3
Add new subparagraph 3.2.3.4:
"3.2.3.4 Subject to GC 9.4 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY, for the Owner’s own forces and for
other Contractors, assume overall responsibility for compliance with all aspects of the
applicable health and safety legislation in the Place of the Work, including all of the
responsibilities of the constructor under the OHSA."
3.6
3.6.1
GC 3.4 - DOCUMENT REVIEW
Delete paragraph 3.4.1 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 3.4.1:
"3.4.1
2266168.2
The Contractor shall review the Contract Documents and shall report promptly to the
Consultant any error, inconsistency or omission the Contractor may discover. Such
review by the Contractor shall comply with the standard of care described in GC3.14
STANDARD OF CARE. Except for its obligation to make such review and report the
Toronto Catholic District School Board
Amendments to CCDC2-2008
Supplementary Conditions
April 2009
5 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
result, the Contractor does not assume any responsibility to the Owner or to the
Consultant for the accuracy of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not be
liable for damage or costs resulting from such errors, inconsistencies, or omissions in the
Contract Documents, which the Contractor could not reasonably have discovered. If the
Contractor does discover any error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected until the Contractor
has received corrected or missing information from the Consultant."
3.6.2
Add new paragraph 3.4.2:
"3.4.2
3.7
3.7.1
If the Contractor finds discrepancies in and/or omissions from the Contract Documents
or has any doubt as to the meaning or intent of any part thereof, the Contractor must
immediately notify the Consultant, who will provide written instructions or explanations.
Neither the Owner nor the Consultant will be responsible for oral instructions."
GC 3.5 - CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
Delete paragraph 3.5.1.1 and replace it with the following:
“3.5.1.1 prior to site mobilization, submit to the Owner and the Consultant for their approval a
construction schedule indicating critical milestone dates for the Project using a
scheduling program which is the most current version of MS Project or Primavera, to
demonstrate that the Work will be performed in conformity with the Contract Time. The
Contractor shall provide the schedule information required by this paragraph 3.5.1.1 in
both electronic format and hard copy;”
3.7.2
Delete paragraph 3.5.1.2 and replace it with the following:
“3.5.1.2 provide the expertise and resources, including manpower and equipment, as are necessary
to maintain progress under the construction schedule or any successor or revised schedule
approved by the Owner;”
3.7.3
Delete paragraph 3.5.1.3 and replace it with the following:
“3.5.1.3 monitor the progress of the Work relative to the Construction Schedule, or any successor
or revised schedule approved by the Owner, update the schedule on a monthly basis, and
advise the Consultant in writing of any deviation from or delay in the construction
schedule or any other schedule; and”
3.7.4
Add a new paragraph 3.5.1.4 as follows:
“3.5.1.4 if after applying the expertise and resources required under paragraph 3.5.1.2, the
Contractor forms the opinion that there has been a deviation from or a delay in the
construction schedule or any other schedule cannot be recovered by the Contractor, it
shall, in the same notice provided under paragraph 3.5.1.3, indicate to the Consultant if
the Contractor intends to apply for an extension of Contract Time.”
3.7.5
Add a new paragraph 3.5.2 as follows:
“3.5.2
2266168.2
Without limiting the other obligations of the Contractor under GC 3.5, the Contractor
shall not amend the construction schedule without the prior written consent of the Owner.
In addition, at each site construction meeting, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner
and the Consultant a two (2) week look-ahead schedule indicating the major activities to
be undertaken or constructed in such two (2) week period.”
Toronto Catholic District School Board
Amendments to CCDC2-2008
Supplementary Conditions
April 2009
6 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3.7.6
Add new paragraph 3.5.3:
"3.5.3
3.8
3.8.1
GC 3.6 - SUPERVISION
Delete paragraph 3.6.1 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 3.6.1:
"3.6.1
3.8.2
3.9
3.9.1
"3.6.3
The Owner acting reasonably, shall have the right to order the Contractor to remove from
the Project any representative or employee of the Contractor, Subcontractors or
Suppliers who, in the opinion of the Owner, are a detriment to the Project.
3.6.4
Where the Work is being carried out at or near an existing school which is still in
operation, the Owner has the discretion to require the Contractor to provide to the Owner
criminal background checks on all of the Contractor’s employees who will be providing
work or services at the Place of the Work and will require its Subcontractors and
Suppliers to provide criminal background checks on any of their employees who will be
providing work or services at the Place of the Work. Where such background checks
indicate that an employee of the Contractor or any Subcontractor has a criminal record,
the Owner shall be entitled to cause the removal of that person from the Project pursuant
to paragraph 3.6.3 of these General Conditions."
GC 3.7 - SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS
Delete paragraph 3.7.2 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 3.7.2:
The Contractor agrees not to change Subcontractors without prior written approval of the
Owner, which approval will not be unreasonably withheld."
Add a new paragraph 3.7.7 as follows:
“3.7.7
2266168.2
The Contractor shall provide all necessary supervision and appoint competent
representatives who shall be in attendance at the Place of the Work while Work is being
performed. The appointed representatives shall not be changed except for valid reasons,
and upon the Contractor obtaining the Consultant's written consent, which consent will
not be unreasonably withheld."
Add new paragraphs 3.6.3, 3.6.4 and 3.6.5 as follows:
"3.7.2
3.9.2
If at any time it should appear to the Owner or the Consultant that the actual progress of
the Work is behind schedule or is likely to fall behind schedule, based on critical path
methodology, or if the Contractor has given notice of such to the Owner or the
Consultant pursuant to 3.5.1.3, the Contractor shall take appropriate steps to cause the
actual progress of the Work to conform to the schedule and shall produce and present to
the Owner and the Consultant a recovery plan demonstrating how the Contractor will
achieve the recovery of the schedule. If the Contractor intends to apply for a change in
the Contract Price in relation to a schedule recovery plan, the Contractor shall proceed
with PART 6 – CHANGES IN THE WORK. "
The Owner may assign to the Contractor, and the Contractor agrees to accept, any
Contract procured by the Owner for Work or services or Products required on the Project
that has been pre-tendered or pre-negotiated by the Owner.”
Toronto Catholic District School Board
Amendments to CCDC2-2008
Supplementary Conditions
April 2009
7 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3.10
3.10.1
GC 3.8 - LABOUR AND PRODUCTS
Amend paragraph 3.8.1 by adding the following sentence at the end of that paragraph:
“The Contractor represents and warrants that the Products provided in accordance with the
Contract Documents are not subject to any conditional sales Contracts and are not subject to any
security rights claimed or obtained by any third party which may subject any of the Products to
seizure and/or removal from the Place of the Work.”
3.10.2
Delete paragraph 3.8.2 and replace it with the following:
“3.8.2
Products provided shall be new and shall conform to all current applicable specifications
of the Canadian Standards Association, Canadian Standards Board or General Standards
Board, ASTM, National Building Code, Ontario Building Code and all governmental
authorities having jurisdiction at the Place of the Work, unless otherwise specified.
Products which are not specified shall be of a quality consistent with those specified and
their use acceptable to the Consultant. Products brought on to the Place of the Work by
the Contractor shall be deemed to be the property of the Owner, but the Owner shall be
under no liability for loss thereof or damage thereto arising from any cause whatsoever,
and such Products shall be at the sole risk of the Contractor.”
3.10.3
Amend paragraph 3.8.3 by adding the words “agents, Subcontractors and Suppliers”
after the word “employees” toward the end of the first line.
3.10.4
Further amend paragraph 3.8.3 by adding the following three new sentences to the end
of that paragraph:
“Without in any way limiting the generality of the foregoing, the Contractor shall prepare and
implement the job site rules more particularly described in the Contract Documents. If no job site
rules are described in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall draft job site rules for the
review and approval of the Owner. Any such job site rules prepared by the Contractor shall be
consistent with the Contractor’s duties and obligations under the OHSA and shall also include
provisions making smoking and the consumption of alcohol or non-prescription drugs on the
Project site the subject of discipline proceedings and/or termination of employment.”
3.10.5
Add new paragraphs 3.8.4, 3.8.5 and 3.8.6 as follows:
“"3.8.4 The Contractor is responsible for the safe on-site storage of Products and their protection
(including Products supplied by the Owner and other Contractors to be installed under
the Contract) in such ways as to avoid dangerous conditions or contamination to the
Products or other persons or property and in locations at the Place of the Work to the
satisfaction of the Owner and the Consultant. The Owner shall provide all relevant
information on the Products to be supplied by the Owner."
2266168.2
3.8.5
The Contractor shall not employ any persons on the Work whose labour affiliation, or
lack thereof, is incompatible with other labour employed in connection with the Work.
Any costs arising from labour disputes as a result of the employment of any such person
by the Contractor, its Subcontractors or Suppliers, shall be the sole expense of the
Contractor.
3.8.6
The Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner and its representatives and shall take all
reasonable and necessary actions to maintain stable and harmonious labour relations with
respect to the Work at the Place of the Work, including cooperation to attempt to avoid
Work stoppages, trade union jurisdictional disputes, and other labour disputes.”
Toronto Catholic District School Board
Amendments to CCDC2-2008
Supplementary Conditions
April 2009
8 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3.11
3.11.1
GC 3.9 - DOCUMENTS AT THE SITE
Delete paragraph 3.9.1 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 3.9.1:
"3.9.1
3.12
The Contractor shall keep one copy of the current Contract Documents, Supplemental
Instructions, Contemplated Change Orders, Change Orders, Change Directives, Cash
Allowance Disbursement Authorizations, reviewed Shop Drawings, Submittals, reports
and records of meetings at the Place of the Work, in good order and available to the
Owner and Consultant."
GC 3.10 - SHOP DRAWINGS
3.12.1
Add the words "AND OTHER SUBMITTALS" to the Title after SHOP
DRAWINGS.
3.12.2
Add "and Submittals" after the words "Shop Drawings" in clauses 3.10.2, 3.10.4,
3.10.7, 3.10.8, 3.10.8.2, 3.10.9, 3.10.10, and 3.10.11.
3.12.3
Delete paragraph 3.10.3 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 3.10.3:
"3.10.3 Prior to the first application for payment, the Contractor and the Consultant shall jointly
prepare a schedule of the dates for submission and return of Shop Drawings and any
Submittals.
3.12.4
Delete subparagraph 3.10.8.1 in its entirety and substitute new subparagraph 3.10.8.1:
"3.10.8.1 the Contractor has determined and correlated the field measurements with the Shop
Drawings and any Submittals and field construction conditions, Product requirements,
catalogue numbers and similar data, or will do so if not possible at that time, and
3.12.5
Delete paragraph 3.10.12 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 3.10.12:
“3.10.12 The Consultant will review and return Shop Drawings and Submittals in accordance with
the schedule agreed upon in 3.10.3, or, in the absence of such schedule, with reasonable
promptness. If, for any reason, the Consultant cannot process them within the agreedupon schedule or with reasonable promptness, the Consultant shall notify the Contractor
and they shall meet to review and arrive at an acceptable revised schedule for processing.
The Contractor shall update the Shop Drawings and Submittals schedule to correspond to
changes in the construction schedule. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time
may be made only as provided in the Contract."
3.13
3.13.1
GC 3.14 – STANDARD OF CARE
Add new General Condition 3.14 as follows:
"3.14.1 In performing its services and obligations under the Contract, the Contractor shall
exercise a standard of care, skill and diligence that would normally be provided by an
experienced and prudent Contractor supplying similar services for similar projects. The
Contractor acknowledges and agrees that throughout the Contract, the Contractor's
obligations, duties and responsibilities shall be interpreted in accordance with this
standard. The Contractor shall exercise the same standard of due care and diligence in
respect of any Products, personnel, or procedures which it may recommend to the Owner.
2266168.2
Toronto Catholic District School Board
Amendments to CCDC2-2008
Supplementary Conditions
April 2009
9 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3.14.2 The Contractor further represents, covenants and warrants to the Owner that:
3.14
3.14.1
.1
The personnel it assigns to the Project are appropriately experienced;
.2
It has a sufficient staff of qualified and competent personnel to replace its
designated supervisor and project manager, subject to the Owner’s approval, in
the event of death, incapacity, removal or resignation; and
.3
There are no pending, threatened or anticipated claims that would have a
material effect on the financial ability of the Contractor to perform its Work
under the Contract.”
GC 3.15 OCCUPANCY OF THE WORK
Add a new GC 3.15 as follows:
“GC 3.15 OCCUPANCY OF THE WORK
3.15.1 The Owner reserves the right to take possession of and use for any intended purpose any
portion or all of the undelivered portion of the Project, even though the Work may not
have reached Substantial Performance of the Work, provided that such taking of
possession and use will not interfere, in any material way, with the progress of the Work.
The taking of possession or use of any such portion of the Project shall not be deemed to
be the Owner’s acknowledgement or acceptance of the Work or Project, nor shall it
relieve the Contractor of any of its obligations under the Contract.
3.15.2 Where the Project contemplates Work by way of renovations in buildings which will be
in use or be occupied during the course of the Work, or where the Project involves Work
that is adjacent to a structure which is in use or is occupied, the Contractor, without in
any way limiting its responsibilities under this Contract, shall take all reasonable steps to
avoid interference with fire exits, building access and egress, continuity of electric power
and all other utilities, to suppress dust and noise, to avoid conditions likely to propagate
mould or fungus of any kind, and all other steps reasonably necessary to promote and
maintain the safety and comfort of the users and occupants of such structures or adjacent
structures. Without Owner’s prior approval, the Contractor shall not permit any Worker
or Subcontractors to use any existing facilities including, without limitation, lavatories,
toilets, entrances and parking areas other than those designated by the Owner.”
3.15
3.15.1
GC 3.16 – CONTRACTOR’S USE OF PERMANENT EQUIPMENT OR
SYSTEMS
Add a new GC 3.16 as follows:
“GC 3.16 CONTRACTOR’S USE OF PERMANENT EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEMS
3.16.1 With the prior written approval of the Owner, the Contractor may make use of elements
of the mechanical and electrical systems or equipment comprising a permanent part of the
Work for the purpose of providing heat or power to the Project during the final stages of
construction. In such event, and before the issuance of the certificate of Substantial
Performance of the Work, the Contractor shall clean and make good, to the satisfaction of
the Consultant, such systems and equipment as it had been permitted to use. The
Contractor shall pay any and all costs associated with such use, cleaning and making
good.
2266168.2
Toronto Catholic District School Board
Amendments to CCDC2-2008
Supplementary Conditions
April 2009
10 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3.16.2 Where the Contractor has made use of elements of the mechanical and electrical systems
or equipment comprising a permanent part of the Work, as described in paragraph 3.16.1
above, the Contractor shall obtain, from the manufacturer or Supplier of the systems or
equipment used, a confirmation from such manufacturer or Supplier that the warranty on
such systems or equipment begins on the date of Substantial Performance of the Work
and is not impaired in scope or reduced in time by virtue of the Contractor’s use of such
systems or equipment.”
3.16
3.16.1
GC 4.1 - CASH ALLOWANCES
Delete paragraph 4.1.4 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 4.1.4:
"4.1.4
3.16.2
Delete paragraph 4.1.5 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 4.1.5:
“4.1.5
3.16.3
3.17.1
The unexpended total cash allowance amount shall be deducted from the Contract Price
by Change Order.”
Add new paragraph 4.1.8:
"4.1.8
3.17
Where costs under a cash allowance exceed the amount of the allowance, unexpended
amounts from other cash allowances shall be reallocated at the Consultant's direction to
cover the shortfall."
The Owner reserves the right to call, or to have the Contractor call, competitive bids for
portions of the Work, to be paid for from cash allowances."
GC 5.1 - FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE OWNER
Delete GC 5.1 in its entirety and replace it with “Intentionally left blank.”
3.17.2
Delete paragraph 5.1.2 in its entirety.
3.18
GC 5.2 - APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT
3.18.1
Amend paragraph 5.2.3 by adding the following to the end of that paragraph:
“No amount claimed shall include Products delivered to the Place of the Work unless the Products
are free and clear of all security interests, liens, and other claims of third parties.”
3.18.2
Add to the end of paragraph 5.2.7 the following new sentence:
"Any Products delivered to the Place of the Work but not yet incorporated into the Work shall
remain at the risk of the Contractor notwithstanding that title has passed to the Owner pursuant to
GC 13.1 OWNERSHIP OF MATERIALS."
3.18.3
Add new paragraph 5.2.8, 5.2.9 and 5.2.10:
"5.2.8
2266168.2
The Contractor shall submit, with each application for progress payment after the first, a
Statutory Declaration, on an original form of CCDC Document 9A-2001, stating that
payments in connection with the Work, as noted in the Statutory Declaration, have been
made to the end of the period immediately preceding that covered by the current
application.
Toronto Catholic District School Board
Amendments to CCDC2-2008
Supplementary Conditions
April 2009
11 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
5.2.9
The Contractor shall submit WSIB Clearance Certificate, with each application for
progress payment.
5.2.10
3.19
The Contractor shall prepare and maintain current as-built Drawings which shall consist
of the Drawings and Specifications revised by the Contractor during the Work, showing
changes to the Drawings and Specifications, which current as-built Drawings shall be
maintained by the Contractor and made available to the Consultant for review with each
application for progress payment. The Consultant reserves the right to retain a reasonable
amount for the value of the as-built Drawings not presented for review."
GC 5.3 - PROGRESS PAYMENT
3.19.1
Delete from the first line of subparagraph 5.3.1.2, the words, "calendar days" and
substitute the words: "Working Days".
3.19.2
Delete subparagraph 5.3.1.3 in its entirety and substitute new subparagraph 5.3.1.3:
"5.3.1.3 The Owner shall make payment to the Contractor on account as provided in Article A-5
of the Agreement – PAYMENT no later than 10 Working Days after the date of a
certificate of payment issued by the Consultant."
3.19.3
Add a new paragraph 5.3.3 as follows:
“5.3.3
3.20
3.20.1
GC 5.4 - SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK
Delete paragraph 5.4.3 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 5.4.3:
"5.4.3
3.20.2
2266168.2
If the Contractor fails to provide a statutory declaration as required by paragraph 5.2.8,
or if the Contractor fails to demonstrate compliance with GC 10.4 – WORKERS’
COMPENSATION, the Owner shall be entitled to deduct from amounts otherwise
payable to the Contractor an amount sufficient to cover any liability which it might incur
as a result of the Contractor’s failure to provide a statutory declaration or to demonstrate
compliance with GC 10.4.”
Immediately following the issuance of the certificate of Substantial Performance of the
Work, the Contractor, in consultation with the Consultant, shall establish reasonable
dates for finishing the Work and correcting deficient Work."
Add new paragraphs 5.4.4, 5.4.5 and 5.4.6:
"5.4.4
The Contractor shall publish, in a construction trade newspaper in the area of the location
of the Work, a copy of the Certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work within
seven (7) days of receiving a copy of the Certificate signed by the Consultant, and the
Contractor shall provide suitable evidence of the publication to the Consultant and
Owner. If the Contractor fails to publish such notice, the Owner shall be at liberty to
publish and back charge the Contractor its reasonable costs for doing so.
5.4.5
Prior to submitting its application for Substantial Performance of the Work, the
Contractor shall submit to the Consultant all:
.1
guarantees,
.2
warranties,
Toronto Catholic District School Board
Amendments to CCDC2-2008
Supplementary Conditions
April 2009
12 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
.3
certificates,
.4
testing and balancing reports,
.5
distribution system diagrams,
.6
maintenance, spare parts and operating manuals,
and other materials or documentation required to be submitted under the Contract,
together with written proof acceptable to the Owner and the Consultant that the Work has
been substantially performed in conformance with the requirements of municipal,
government and utilities authorities having jurisdiction. The Contractor shall deliver the
materials and documentation listed in this paragraph 5.4.5 in an electronic format that is
readable on the Owner’s information technology infrastructure.
5.4.6
3.21
3.21.1
Where the Contractor is unable to deliver the documents and materials described in
paragraph 5.4.5, then, provided that none of the missing documents and materials
interferes, in a material way, with the use and occupancy of the Work, failure to deliver
shall not be grounds for the Consultant to refuse to certify Substantial Performance of the
Work. Any documents or materials not delivered in accordance with paragraph 5.4.5 shall
be delivered as provided in GC 5.7, "
GC 5.5 - PAYMENT OF HOLDBACK UPON SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE
OF THE WORK
Add new subparagraphs 5.5.1.3, 5.5.1.4 and 5.5.1.5:
"5.5.1.3 Submit a written request for release of holdback including a declaration that no written
notices of lien have been received by it.
5.5.1.4 Submit a Statutory Declaration CCDC 9A-2001.
5.5.1.5 Submit WSIB Clearance Certificate."
3.21.2
Delete from line 1 of paragraph 5.5.2, the words, "the statement" and substitute the
words "the documents".
3.21.3
Delete paragraph 5.5.3 in its entirety.
3.22
3.22.1
GC 5.6 - PROGRESSIVE RELEASE OF HOLDBACK
Add new paragraph 5.6.4:
"5.6.4
2266168.2
For release of holdback on Subcontract Work which is 100% complete, prior to final
payment, the Contractor shall make application by written request for a review to
determine the date of completion of the Subcontract and shall submit such supporting
material as the Consultant may in his discretion require, and may include statutory
declarations from such persons and dealing with such matters as the Consultant requires.
Such material shall in any event include:
.1
Description of the scope of Work included in the Subcontract.
.2
Declaration of Last Supply by the Subcontractor as prescribed in subsection
31(5) of the Act (Form 5).
Toronto Catholic District School Board
Amendments to CCDC2-2008
Supplementary Conditions
April 2009
13 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
.3
Certificate of Completion of Subcontract as prescribed in subsection 33(1) of
the Act (Form 7).
3.23
3.23.1
.4
WSIB Clearance Certificate for the Contractor, the Subcontractor concerned,
and any other subcontractors and suppliers who have provided any services to
the Subcontractor.
.5
Statutory declaration by an officer of the Subcontractor in the form CCDC
Document 9B - 2001.
.6
Contractor's written acknowledgement to the Owner that the requirements of the
Contract Documents will not be altered by early release of the holdback of the
completed Subcontracts.
.7
Confirmation by the bonding company that it has been notified of the intent to
claim early release of holdback and does not object."
GC 5.7 - FINAL PAYMENT
Delete paragraph 5.7.1 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 5.7.1:
"5.7.1
When the Contractor considers that the Work is completed, the Contractor shall submit
an application for final payment. The Contractor's application for final payment shall be
accompanied by any documents or materials not yet delivered pursuant to paragraph 5.4.5
together with complete as-built Drawings in AutoCad 2008. Should the Contractor fail to
deliver any of the foregoing documents, the Owner shall be at liberty to withhold from
amounts otherwise payable to the Contractor, the sum of z [NOTE: insert dollar
amount] Dollars ($?) as security for the obligation of the Contractor to deliver the
undelivered documents."
[Drafting Note: If substantial performance of the work has been granted in spite of missing
deliverables, the dollar value to be inserted in the above paragraph should be equivalent to the
amount the Board estimates would be required to have the missing materials provided by a
third party.]
3.23.2
Delete from the first line of paragraph 5.7.2 the words, "calendar days" and substitute
the words "Working Days".
3.23.3
Delete from the second line of paragraph 5.7.4 the words, "calendar days" and
substitute the words: "Working Days".
3.23.4
Add new paragraph 5.7.5:
"5.7.5
2266168.2
As additional requirements for release of finishing construction lien holdback, the
Contractor shall submit the following documentation:
.1
Contractor's written request for release of holdback, including a declaration that
no written notices of lien have been received by it.
.2
Contractor's Statutory Declaration CCDC 9A-2001.
.3
Contractor's WSIB Clearance Certificate.
Toronto Catholic District School Board
Amendments to CCDC2-2008
Supplementary Conditions
April 2009
14 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3.24
3.24.1
GC 6.2 - CHANGE ORDER
Add new paragraph 6.2.3 as follows:
"6.2.3
The value of a change shall be determined in one or more of the following methods as
directed by the Owner:
.1
by estimate and acceptance of a lump sum.
.2
by unit prices established in the Contract or subsequently agreed upon. Unit
prices shall include overhead, profit, and other reasonable charges of the
Contractor and shall be the total cost to the Owner. Adjustment to the Contract
Price shall be based on a net quantity difference from the original quantity.
.3
by the amount, net of all credits, of time, materials and Products expended:
(1)
by a Subcontractor applying the labour charge out rates set out in the
wage schedule in the Contract Documents together with the actual
costs, without mark-up of materials and Products utilized in the
change, plus the Subcontractor's mark-up disclosed in the table below
which applies to material and Product costs only;
(2)
by the Contractor applying the labour charge out rates set out in the
wage schedule in the Contract Documents together with the actual
costs, without mark-up, of materials and products plus the mark-up
disclosed in the table below which applies to material and Product costs
only;
(3)
the Contractor shall be entitled to the Contractor mark-up in the table
below on the value of Subcontractor Work even where the
Subcontractor is not entitled to a mark-up on its labour charge out rates
pursuant to paragraph 6.2.3.3(1).
Change in the Contract
Price
Subcontractor Mark-Up (%)
(includes overhead and profit)
Contractor Mark-Up (%)
On Subcontractor Work
(includes overhead and profit)
$0 to no more than $25,000
10
10
$0 to no more than $50,000
10
7.5
$0 to in excess of $50,000
5
5
Interpretive Note: The mark-ups disclosed in the above table are flat not graduated. For
example, a Subcontractor performed change valued at $35,000 attracts a mark-up of 10% for
the Subcontractor and 7.5% for the Contractor. The table is not intended to provide one set of
mark-ups for the first $25,000 of the change and a lower set of mark-ups for the balance.
.4
2266168.2
where the Contractor self performs a change pursuant to paragraph 6.2.3.3(2), it
shall be entitled to the mark-ups described in the "Subcontractor Mark-Up (%)"
Toronto Catholic District School Board
Amendments to CCDC2-2008
Supplementary Conditions
April 2009
15 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
column above, subject to the limitation on the mark-up of labour costs described
in paragraph 6.2.3.3(2).
.5
3.25
3.25.1
the mark-ups described in paragraph 6.2.3.3 include all necessary supervision,
general account items, general clean-up, small tools, as-built Drawings and job
safety necessary to perform the change. Additional bonding cost is excluded
from the mark-ups but may be included as a cost, using the value declared for
bonding by the Contractor in its bid to the Owner, unless otherwise agreed by
the parties."
GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE
Further amend paragraph 6.3.6.3 by adding the following to the end of that paragraph:
"Such allowance for overhead and profit shall be as described in paragraphs 6.2.3.3 and 6.2.3.4."
3.25.2
Delete paragraph 6.3.7.1 the introductory language and replace it with the following:
.1
3.25.3
3.25.4
salaries, wages and benefits paid to personnel in the direct employ of the Contractor,
applying the labour rates set out in the wage schedule in the Contract Documents or as
otherwise agreed between the Owner and Contractor for personnel…"
Delete paragraphs 6.3.7.1(1), (2), (3) and (4) and replace them with the following:
"(1)
carrying out the Work, including necessary supervisory services;
(2)
intentionally left blank;
(3)
engaged in the preparation of Shop Drawings, fabrication Drawings,
coordination Drawings and Project record Drawings: or…
(4)
including clerical staff engaged in processing changes in the Work."
Add new paragraph 6.3.14 as follows:
"6.3.14 Without limitation, the cost of performing the Work attributable to the Change Directive
does not include:
2266168.2
.1
head office salaries and benefits and all other overhead or general expenses,
except only for the salaries, wages and benefits of personnel described in
paragraph 6.3.4.2 and the contributions, assessments or taxes referred to in
paragraphs 6.3.4.3;
.2
capital expenses and interest on capital;
.3
general clean-up, except where the performance of the Work in the Change
Directive causes specific additional clean-up requirements;
.4
wages paid for field supervision of Subcontractors;
.5
wages, salaries, rentals, or other expenses that exceed the rates that are standard
in the locality of the Place of the Work that are otherwise deemed unreasonable
by the Consultant;
Toronto Catholic District School Board
Amendments to CCDC2-2008
Supplementary Conditions
April 2009
16 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
.6
any costs or expenses attributable to the negligence, improper Work,
deficiencies, or breaches of Contract by the Contractor or SubContractor; and
.7
3.26
3.26.1
GC 6.4 - CONCEALED OR UNKNOWN CONDITIONS
Delete paragraph 6.4.1 and replace it with the following:
“6.4.1
3.26.2
any cost of quality assurance, such as inspection and testing services, charges
levied by authorities, and any legal fees unless any such costs or fees are preapproved in writing by the Owner."
The Contractor confirms that, prior to tendering the Project, it carefully investigated the
Place of the Work to fully ascertain existing conditions, circumstances and limitations
affecting the Work, and applied to that investigation the degree of care and skill described
in paragraph 3.14.1. If the Contractor has not conducted such careful investigation, it is
deemed to assume all risk of conditions or circumstances now existing or arising in the
course of the Work which could make the Work more expensive or more difficult to
perform than was contemplated at the time the Contract was executed. No allowances
will be made for additional costs and no claims by the Contractor will be entertained in
connection with conditions which could reasonably have been ascertained by such
investigation or other due diligence undertaken prior to the execution of the Contract.”
Amend paragraph 6.4.2 by adding a new first sentence which reads as follows:
“Having regard to paragraph 6.4.1, if the Contractor believes that the conditions of the Place of
the Work differ materially from those reasonably anticipated, or differ materially from those
indicated in the Contract Documents, or were concealed from discovery notwithstanding the
conduct of the investigation described in paragraph 6.4.1, it shall notify the Owner and Consultant
in writing no later than five (5) Working Days after the first observation of such conditions.”
3.26.3
Amend the existing second sentence of paragraph 6.4.2, in the second line, following
the word “materially”, by adding the words “or were concealed from discovery
notwithstanding the conduct of the investigation described in paragraph 6.4.1”.
3.26.4
Delete paragraph 6.4.3 and substitute the following:
“6.4.3
3.27
If the Consultant makes a finding pursuant to paragraph 6.4.2 that no change in the
Contract Price or Contract Time is justified, the Consultant shall report in writing the
reasons for this finding to the Owner and the Contractor.”
GC 6.5 - DELAYS
3.27.1
Delete the period at the end of paragraph 6.5.1, and substitute the following words ",
but excluding any consequential, indirect or special damages."
3.27.2
Add new subparagraph 6.5.6.
6.5.6
2266168.2
If the Contractor is delayed in the performance of the Work by an act or omission of the
Contractor or anyone employed or engaged by the Contractor directly or indirectly, or by
any cause within the Contractor's control, then the Contract Time shall be extended for
such reasonable time as the Consultant may decide in consultation with the Contractor.
The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for all reasonable costs incurred by the
Owner as the result of such delay, including all services required by the Owner from the
Toronto Catholic District School Board
Amendments to CCDC2-2008
Supplementary Conditions
April 2009
17 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Consultant as a result of such delay by the Contractor and, in particular, the cost of the
Consultant's services during the period between the date of Substantial Performance of
the Work stated in Article A-1 herein as the same may be extended through the provisions
of these General Conditions and any later, actual date of Substantial Performance of the
Work achieved by the Contractor.”
3.27.3
3.28
3.28.1
3.29
3.29.1
Add new paragraphs 6.5.7 and 6.5.8 as follows:
“6.5.7
The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, maintenance and protection of the Work
in the event of any suspension of construction as a result of the delay described in
paragraphs 6.5.1, 6.5.2 or 6.5.3. In the event of such suspension, the Contractor shall be
reimbursed by the Owner for the reasonable costs incurred by the Contractor for such
care, maintenance and protection, but excluding the costs of the Contractor’s head office
personnel. The Contractor’s entitlement to costs pursuant to this paragraph 6.5.7, if any,
shall be in addition to amounts, if any, to which the Contractor is entitled pursuant to
paragraphs 6.5.1, 6.5.2 or 6.5.3.
6.5.8
Without limiting the obligations of the Contractor described in GC 3.2 –
CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR OTHER CONTRACTORS and GC 9.4 –
CONSTRUCTION SAFETY, the Owner may, by Notice in Writing, direct the
Contractor to stop the Work where the Owner determines that there is an imminent risk
to the safety of persons or property at the Place of the Work. In the event that the
Contractor receives such notice, it shall immediately stop the Work and secure the
Project site. The Contractor shall not be entitled to an extension of the Contract Time or
to an increase in the Contract Price unless the resulting delay, if any, would entitle the
Contractor to an extension of the Contract Time or the reimbursement of the
Contractor’s costs as provided in paragraphs 6.5.1, 6.5.2 or 6.5.3.”
GC 7.1 - OWNER’S RIGHT TO PERFORM THE WORK, STOP THE WORK,
OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT
Amend paragraph 7.1.2 by adding the words “or fails or neglects to maintain the latest
construction schedule” immediately following the word “properly” in the first line.
GC 7.2 - CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO SUSPEND THE WORK OR
TERMINATE THE CONTRACT
Amend paragraph 7.2.2, in line 1, by deleting “20” and replacing it with “35”.
3.29.2
Delete subparagraph 7.2.3.1 in its entirety.
3.29.3
Delete subparagraph 7.2.3.3 in its entirety and substitute new subparagraph 7.2.3.3:
"7.2.2.3 the Owner fails to pay the Contractor when due the amount certified by the Consultant or
awarded by arbitration or a Court, except where the Owner has a bona fide claim for set
off, or"
3.29.4
3.29.5
Delete from line 2 of subparagraph 7.2.3.4, the words, "OF THE OWNER".
Delete paragraph 7.2.5 and replace it with the following:
“7.2.5
2266168.2
If the default cannot be corrected within the 5 Working Days specified in paragraph 7.2.4,
the Owner shall be deemed to have cured the default if it
Toronto Catholic District School Board
Amendments to CCDC2-2008
Supplementary Conditions
April 2009
18 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
.1
commences the correction of the default within the specified time; and
3.29.6
3.30.1
provides the Contractor with an acceptable schedule for such correction; and
.3
completes the correction in accordance with such schedule.”
Add new paragraph 7.2.6:
"7.2.6
3.30
.2
If the Contractor terminates the Contract under the conditions described in this GC 7.2,
the Contractor shall be entitled to be paid for all Work performed to the date of
termination. The Contractor shall also be entitled to recover the direct costs associated
with termination, including the costs of demobilization, losses sustained on Products and
construction machinery and equipment. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any
recovery for special, indirect or consequential losses or loss of profit or loss of use."
GC 8.1 - AUTHORITY OF THE CONSULTANT
Delete last sentence of 8.1.3 and substitute the following sentence:
"If it is subsequently determined that such instructions were at variance with the Contract
Documents, the Owner shall pay the Contractor costs incurred by the Contractor in carrying out
such instructions which the Contractor was required to do beyond the requirements of the
Contract Documents, including costs resulting from interruption of the Work."
3.31
GC 8.2 - NEGOTIATION, MEDIATION AND ARBITRATION
3.31.1
Amend paragraph 8.2.1 by adding the words "...(the "Rules"), subject to amendments
to the Rules attached to these Supplementary Conditions as Appendix 2..." following
the term "Construction Disputes" in line 1.
3.31.2
Amend paragraph 8.2.4 by adding the words "…subject to the amendments to the
Rules made as described in paragraph 8.2.1", following the words "Construction
Disputes" in the last line.
3.31.3
Delete paragraph 8.2.6 and replace it with the following:
Amend paragraph 8.2.7 by changing the number "10" in line 1 to "20".
3.31.4
Add a new paragraph 8.2.9 as follows:
“8.2.9
2266168.2
Within five days of receipt of the notice of arbitration by the responding party under
paragraph 8.2.6, the Owner and the Contractor shall give the Consultant a written notice
containing:
.1
a copy of the notice of arbitration
.2
a copy of supplementary conditions 8.2.9 to 8.2.15 of the Contract, and;
.3
any claims or issues which the Contractor or the Owner, as the case may be,
wishes to raise in relation to the Consultant arising out of the issues in dispute in
the arbitration.
Toronto Catholic District School Board
Amendments to CCDC2-2008
Supplementary Conditions
April 2009
19 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
8.2.10 The Owner and the Contractor agree that the Consultant may elect, within ten days of
receipt of the notice under paragraph 8.2.9, to become a full party to the arbitration under
paragraph 8.2.6 if the Consultant:
3.32
3.32.1
3.33.1
2266168.2
has a vested or contingent financial interest in the outcome of the arbitration;
.2
gives the notice of election to the Owner and the Contractor before the arbitrator
is appointed;
.3
agrees to be a party to the arbitration within the meaning of the rules referred to
in paragraph 8.2.6; and,
.4
agrees to be bound by the arbitral award made in the arbitration.
8.2.11
If an election is made under paragraph 8.2.10, the Consultant may participate in the
appointment of the arbitrator and notwithstanding the rules referred to in paragraph 8.2.6,
the time period for reaching agreement on the appointment of the arbitrator shall begin to
run from the date the Owner receives a copy of the notice of arbitration.
8.2.12
The arbitrator in the arbitration in which the Consultant has elected under paragraph
8.2.10 to become a full party may:
.1
on application of the Owner or the Contractor, determine whether the
Consultant has satisfied the requirements of paragraph 8.2.10; and
.2
make any procedural order considered necessary to facilitate the addition of the
Consultant as a party to the arbitration.
8.2.13
The provisions of paragraph 8.2.9 shall apply mutatis mutandis to written notice to be
given by the Consultant to any sub-Consultant.
8.2.14
In the event of notice of arbitration given by a Consultant to a sub-consultant, the subconsultant is not entitled to any election with respect to the proceeding as outlined in
8.2.10, and is deemed to be bound by the arbitration proceeding."
GC 8.3 - RETENTION OF RIGHTS
Add new subparagraph 8.3.3:
"8.3.3
3.33
.1
If the Owner gives the Notice in Writing described in paragraph 8.2.6 to have a dispute
resolved by arbitration, the Contractor agrees that this paragraph 8.3.3 shall be construed
as a formal consent to the stay of any lien proceedings until an award is rendered in the
arbitration or such dispute is otherwise resolved between the parties. In no event shall the
Contractor be deprived of its right to enforce its lien against the Project should the
Owner fail to satisfy any arbitral award against it in full on the dispute in respect of
which the lien proceedings were commenced. Provided nothing in this paragraph 8.3.3
shall prevent the Contractor from taking the steps required by the Act to preserve and/or
perfect a lien to which it may be entitled."
GC 9.1 - PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY
Delete subparagraph 9.1.1.1 in its entirety and substitute new subparagraph 9.1.1.1:
Toronto Catholic District School Board
Amendments to CCDC2-2008
Supplementary Conditions
April 2009
20 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
"9.1.1.1 errors in the Contract Documents which the Contractor could not have discovered
applying the standard of care described in GC3.14 STANDARD OF CARE."
3.33.2
Delete paragraph 9.1.2 in its entirety and substitute the following new paragraph
9.1.2:
"9.1.2
3.33.3
Add a new paragraph 9.1.5 as follows:
“9.1.5
3.33.4
3.34.1
Without in any way limiting the Contractor’s obligations under this GC 9.1, should the
Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier cause loss or damage to trees or other
plantings, whether owned by the Owner or third parties, the Contractor shall be liable for
the replacement cost of the trees or other plantings damaged, including the cost of any
arborist or other Consultant, and such costs may be deducted by the Owner from amounts
otherwise owing to the Contractor.”
Add new paragraph 9.1.6:
"9.1.6
3.34
Before commencing any Work, the Contractor shall determine the locations of all
underground utilities and structures indicated in the Contract Documents or that are
discoverable by applying to an inspection of the Place of the Work the degree of care and
skill described in GC14 STANDARD OF CARE.
The Contractor shall neither undertake to repair and/or replace any damage whatsoever
to the Work of other Contractors, or to adjoining property, nor acknowledge the same
was caused or occasioned by the Contractor, without first consulting the Owner and
receiving written instructions as to the course of action to be followed from either the
Owner or the Consultant. However, where there is danger to life or public safety, the
Contractor shall take such emergency action as it deems necessary to remove the
danger."
GC 9.2 - TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES
Add to paragraph 9.2.6 after the word "responsible", the following new words:
"or whether any toxic or hazardous substances or materials already at the Place of the Work (and
which were then harmless or stored, contained or otherwise dealt with in accordance with legal
and regulatory requirements) were dealt with by the Contractor or anyone for whom the
Contractor is responsible in a manner which does not comply with legal and regulatory
requirements, or which threatens human health and safety or the environment, or material damage
to the property of the Owner or others,".
3.34.2
Add to paragraph 9.2.8 after the word "responsible", the following new words:
"or that any toxic or hazardous substances or materials already at the Place of the Work (and
which were then harmless or stored, contained or otherwise dealt with in accordance with legal
and regulatory requirements) were dealt with by the Contractor or anyone for whom the
Contractor is responsible in a manner which does not comply with legal and regulatory
requirements, or which threatens human health and safety or the environment, or material damage
to the property of the Owner or others,".
3.34.3
Add a new paragraph 9.2.10 as follows:
“9.2.10 Without limiting its other obligations under this GC 9.2, the Contractor acknowledges
that its obligations under the Contract include compliance with the Environmental
2266168.2
Toronto Catholic District School Board
Amendments to CCDC2-2008
Supplementary Conditions
April 2009
21 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Programs. The Contractor acknowledges that the Owner may suffer loss and damage
should the Contractor fail to comply with the Environmental Programs and agrees to
indemnify and hold harmless the Owner with respect to any loss or damage to which the
Owner is exposed by the Contractor’s failure to comply. The Contractor expressly
agrees that such loss and damage shall be included within the scope of the Contractor’s
indemnity described in paragraph 12.1.1. The Contractor acknowledges that should it
fail to comply with the Environmental Programs, such failure will constitute a failure to
comply with the Contract to a substantial degree within the meaning of paragraph 7.1.2.”
3.35
GC 9.4 - CONSTRUCTION SAFETY
Delete paragraph 9.4.1 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 9.4.1
"9.4.1
3.35.1
Add new paragraphs 9.4.2, 9.4.3, 9.4.4 and 9.4.5.
"9.4.2
2266168.2
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for construction safety at the Place of the
Work and for compliance with the rules, regulations and practices required by the
applicable construction health and safety legislation and shall be responsible for
initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection
with the performance of the Work."
Prior to the commencement of the Work, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner:
.1
a current WSIB clearance certificate;
.2
copies of the Contractor's insurance policies having application to the Project or
certificates of insurance, at the option of the Owner;
.3
documentation of the Contractor's in-house safety-related programs;
.4
a copy of the Notice of Project filed with the Ministry of Labour naming itself
as "constructor" under OHSA.
9.4.3
The Contractor hereby represents and warrants to the Owner that appropriate health and
safety instruction and training have been provided and will be provided to the
Contractor’s employees, Subcontractors and Suppliers, before the Work is commenced.
The Contractor also undertakes to provide such health and safety instruction and training
to the Owner’s representatives, the Owner’s own forces and other contractors, should
they fall under the jurisdiction of the Contractor as more particularly described in
paragraph 9.4.1 above.
9.4.4
The Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner, its agents, officers,
directors, employees, Consultants, successors and assigns from and against the
consequences of any and all safety infractions committed by the Contractor under OHSA,
including the payment of legal fees and disbursements on a solicitor and client basis.
Such indemnity shall apply to the extent to which the Owner is not covered by insurance,
provided that the indemnity contained in this paragraph shall be limited to costs and
damages resulting directly from such infractions and shall not extend to any
consequential, indirect or special damages.
9.4.5
The Owner undertakes to include in its Contracts with other Contractors and/or in its
instructions to its own forces the requirement that the other Contractor or own forces, as
the case may be, will comply with directions and instructions from the Contractor with
respect to occupational health and safety and related matters. The text of such instruction
is attached to these Supplementary Conditions as Appendix 1.”
Toronto Catholic District School Board
Amendments to CCDC2-2008
Supplementary Conditions
April 2009
22 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3.36
GC 9.5 - MOULD
3.36.1
Delete paragraph 9.5.3.3 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 9.5.3.3
"9.5.3.3 extend the Contract Time for such reasonable time as the Consultant may recommend in
consultation with the Contractor. If, in the opinion of the Consultant, the Contractor has
been delayed in performing the Work and / or has incurred additional costs under
paragraph 9.5.1.2, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for reasonable costs
incurred as a result of the delay and as a result of taking those steps, and "
3.37
3.37.1
GC 10.1 - TAXES AND DUTIES
Amend paragraph 10.1.2 by adding the following sentence at the end of that paragraph:
“For greater certainty, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any mark-up for overhead or profit
on any increase in such taxes and duties and the Owner shall not be entitled to any credit relating
to mark-up for overhead or profit on any decrease in such taxes.”
3.37.2
Add new paragraphs 10.1.3, 10.1.4, 10.1.5 and 10.1.6 as follows:
"10.1.3 Where the Owner is entitled to an exemption or a recovery of sales taxes, customs duties,
excise taxes or Value Added Taxes applicable to the Contract, the Contractor shall, at the
request of the Owner or the Owner’s representative, assist with application for any
exemption, recovery or refund of all such taxes and duties and all amounts recovered or
exemptions obtained shall be for the sole benefit of the Owner. The Contractor agrees to
endorse over to the Owner any cheques received from the federal or provincial
governments, or any other taxing authority, as may be required to give effect to this
paragraph.
10.1.4
The Contractor shall maintain accurate records of equipment, material and component
costs reflecting the taxes, customs duties, excise taxes and Value Added Taxes paid.
10.1.5 Any refund of taxes including, without limitation, any government sales tax, customs
duty, excise tax or Value Added Tax, whether or not paid, which is found to be
inapplicable or for which exemption may be obtained, is the sole and exclusive property
of the Owner. The Contractor agrees to cooperate with the Owner and to obtain from all
Subcontractors and Suppliers cooperation with the Owner in the application for any
refund of any taxes, which cooperation shall include, but not be limited to, making or
concurring in the making of an application for any such refund or exemption and
providing to the Owner copies, or where required, originals of records, invoices, purchase
orders and other documentation necessary to support such applications or exemptions or
refunds. All such refunds shall either be paid to the Owner, or shall be a credit to the
Owner against the Contract Price, in the Owner’s discretion.
10.1.6 Customs duties penalties, or any other penalty, fine or assessment levied against the
Contractor shall not be treated as a tax or customs duty for purposes of this GC 10.1.”
3.38
GC 10.2 - LAWS, NOTICES, PERMITS, AND FEES
z [NOTE: 10.2.2, regarding provision of permits, should be reviewed on every
project and amended if necessary.]
3.38.1
2266168.2
Add to the end of paragraph 10.2.4, the following words:
Toronto Catholic District School Board
Amendments to CCDC2-2008
Supplementary Conditions
April 2009
23 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
"The Contractor shall notify the Chief Building Official or the registered code agency where
applicable, of the readiness, substantial completion, and completion of the stages of construction
set out in the Ontario Building Code. The Contractor shall be present at each site inspection by an
inspector or registered code agency as applicable under the Ontario Building Code."
3.38.2
Delete from the first line of paragraph 10.2.5 the word, "The" and substitute the
words:
"Subject to paragraph 3.4.1, the".
3.39
3.39.1
INDEMNIFICATION
Delete paragraphs 12.1.1 through 12.1.6 and replace them with the following:
“The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Consultant, their agents
and employees from and against all claims, demands, losses, costs, damages, actions, suits, or
proceedings (hereinafter called “claims”), by third parties that arise out of, or are attributable to,
the Contractor’s performance of the Contract provided such claims are:
.1
attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of
tangible property, and
.2
caused by negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor or anyone for whose acts the
Contractor may be liable, and
.3
made in writing within a period of 6 years from the date of Substantial Performance of
the Work as set out in the certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work, or within
such shorter period as may be prescribed by any limitation statute of the province or
territory of the Place of Work.
Except as otherwise provided in this Contract, the Owner expressly waives the right to indemnity
for claims other than those stated above.
3.39.2
The obligation of the Contractor to indemnify hereunder shall be limited to $5,000,000 per occurrence
from the commencement of the Work until Substantial Performance of the Work and thereafter to an
aggregate limit of $5,000,000.
3.39.3
The Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, the Contractor’s agents and employees
from and against claims, demands, losses, costs, damages, actions, suits, or proceedings arising out of
the Contractor’s performance of the Contract which are attributable to a lack of or defect in title or an
alleged lack of or defect in title to the Place of Work.”
3.40
3.40.1
GC 12.2 - WAIVER OF CLAIMS
Delete paragraphs 12.2.1 through 12.2.10 and replace them with the following:
“12.2.1 As of the date of the final certificate for payment, the Owner expressly waives and
releases the Contractor from all claims against the Contractor including without
limitation those that might arise from negligence or breach of contract by the Contractor
except for one or more of the following:
.1
2266168.2
those made in writing prior to the date of the final certificate for payment and
still unsettled;
Toronto Catholic District School Board
Amendments to CCDC2-2008
Supplementary Conditions
April 2009
24 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
.2
those arising from the provisions of GC12.1 – INDEMNIFICATION or GC12.3
– WARRANTY;
12.2.2
3.41
3.41.1
.3
those arising from GC9.2 – TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND
MATERIALS and arising from the Contractor bringing or introducing any toxic
or hazardous substances and materials to the Place of the Work after the
Contractor commences the Work;
.4
those made by Notice in Writing within a period of six years from the date of
Substantial Performance of the Work as set out in the certificate of substantial
performance, or within such shorter period as may be prescribed in any
limitation statute of the province or territory of the Place of the Work and arising
from any liability of the Contractor for damages resulting from the Contractor’s
performance of the Contract with respect to substantial defects or deficiencies in
the Work for which the Contractor is proven responsible. As used herein,
“substantial defects or deficiencies” means those defects or deficiencies in the
Work where the reasonable cost of repair of such defects or deficiencies
exceeds:
.1
for a Contract Price of $2,000,000 or less, the sum of $50,000, before
GST;
.2
for a Contract Price of $2,000,000 or more, the sum of $100,000,
before GST.
As of the date of certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work, the Contractor
expressly waives and releases the Owner from all claims which it has or reasonably ought
to have knowledge of that could be advanced against the Owner including without
limitation those that might arise from the negligence or breach of contract by the Owner
except:
.1
those made in writing prior to the Contractor’s application for final
payment and still unsettled; and
.2
those arising from the provisions of GC9.2 – TOXIC AND
HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND MATERIALS or GC10.3 –
PATENT FEES.”
GC 12.3 - WARRANTY
Delete from the first line of paragraph 12.3.2 the word, "The" and substitute the
words:
"Subject to paragraph 3.4.1, the…".
3.42
OTHER PROVISIONS
“Add new PART 13 as follows:
3.43
GC 13.1 - OWNERSHIP OF MATERIALS
13.1.1
2266168.2
Unless otherwise specified, all materials existing at the Place of the Work at the time of
execution of the Contract shall remain the property of the Owner. All Work and
Products delivered to the Place of the Work by the Contractor shall be the property of the
Toronto Catholic District School Board
Amendments to CCDC2-2008
Supplementary Conditions
April 2009
25 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Owner. The Contractor shall remove all surplus or rejected materials as its property when
notified in writing to do so by the Consultant.
3.44
3.45
3.46
GC 13.2 - CONSTRUCTION LIENS
13.2.1
In the event that a construction lien is registered against the Project by or through a
Subcontractor or Supplier and provided the Owner has paid all amounts properly due
under the Contract and has otherwise complied with its material obligations under the
Contract, the Contractor shall, at its own expense, post the security necessary to vacate
or discharge such lien, as the case may be. In the event that a lien action is commenced
and a Statement of Claim is issued and served, the Contractor shall take all reasonable
steps to remove the Owner from the main action and to indemnify it and hold it harmless
against such action, except where the Statement of Claim makes substantive claims
against the Owner beyond the recovery of the holdback under the Act.
13.2.2
In the event that the Contractor fails to comply with the requirements of paragraph
13.2.1, the Owner may set off and deduct from any amount owing to the Contractor, all
costs and associated expenses, including the costs, as applicable, of borrowing the
appropriate cash, posting a letter of credit or delivering a bond as security together with
all reasonable legal fees and disbursements. If there is no amount owing by the Owner to
the Contractor, then the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for all of the said costs
and associated expenses.
GC 13.3 - CONTRACTOR DISCHARGE OF LIABILITIES
13.3.1
In addition to the obligations assumed by the Contractor pursuant to GC 3.7, the
Contractor agrees to discharge all liabilities incurred by it for labour, materials, services,
Subcontractors and Products, used or reasonably required for use in the performance of
the Work, except for amounts withheld by reason of legitimate dispute and which have
been identified to the party or parties, from whom payment has been withheld.
13.3.2
Notwithstanding any other provision in this Contract, in the event the Owner as a result
of the Contractor’s act or omission or breach of contract, incurs damages, costs, fees or
expenses, including costs of additional services performed by the Consultant and
including the Owner’s reasonable solicitor and own client costs, whether or not such act,
omission or breach results in any lien, lien action or other legal proceeding, and whether
or not such act, omission or breach results in the Owner taking any of the steps provided
in ARTICLE 7.1 – THE OWNER’S RIGHT TO PERFORM THE WORK OR
TERMINATE THE CONTRACT. All such damages, costs, fees and expenses shall be
charged to the Contractor and the Owner shall be entitled to set off and deduct all such
damages, costs, fees and expenses from any amount owing to the Contractor and any
security or other funds held by the Owner. If there is no amount owing by the Owner to
the Contractor, then the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for all of the said
damages, costs, fees and expenses.
GC 13.4 - AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
13.4.1
3.47
GC 13.5 - DAILY REPORTS/DAILY LOGS
13.5.1
2266168.2
Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall prepare asbuilt Drawings and provide them to the Consultant for review in accordance with
paragraph 5.4.5.
The Contractor shall cause its supervisor, or such competent person as it may delegate, to
prepare a daily log or diary reporting on weather conditions, Work force of the
Toronto Catholic District School Board
Amendments to CCDC2-2008
Supplementary Conditions
April 2009
26 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers and any other forces on site and also record the
general nature of Project activities. Such log or diary shall also include any extraordinary
or emergency events which may occur and also the identities of any persons who visit the
site who are not part of the day-to-day Work force.
3.48
13.5.2
The Contractor shall also maintain records, either at its head office or at the job site,
recording manpower and material resourcing on the Project, including records which
document the activities of the Contractor in connection with GC 3.5, and comparing that
resourcing to the resourcing anticipated when the most recent version of the schedule was
prepared pursuant to GC 3.5.
13.5.3
The Contractor shall make the records, logs and other materials prepared pursuant to this
GC13.5 available to the Owner and/or the Consultant upon reasonable notice. In such
event, the Owner and/or the Consultant may attend at the Contractor’s premises, review
the materials and logs and make such copies as they may require, such copies to be at the
expense of the Owner and/or the Consultant, as the case may be.
GC 13.6 - NEUTRAL APPOINTING AUTHORITY
13.6.1
3.49
For purposes of the Rules the term "neutral appointing authority", shall mean the
"Appointing Committee" at ADR Chambers presiding at the time notice of the dispute is
given pursuant to the Contract."
GC 13.7 - PUBLIC STATEMENTS
13.7.1
The Contractor shall not publish, issue or make any statements or news release,
electronic or otherwise, concerning the Contract, the Work, or the Project, without the
express written consent of the Owner.”
END OF SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
2266168.2
APPENDIX 1
LANGUAGE FOR OWNER PERSONNEL OR FOR THIRD PARTY CONTRACTORS
ENTERING A PROJECT SITE WHERE THE CONTRACTOR HAS ASSUMED
OVERALL RESPONSIBILITY – IN CONTRACT – FOR OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH
AND SAFETY
"The (trade or employee) acknowledges that the Work it will perform on behalf of the
Owner requires it to enter a job site which is under the total control of a Contractor which has a
Contract with
. The (trade or employee) acknowledges that [name
of Contractor] has assumed overall responsibility for compliance with all aspects of the health
and safety legislation of Ontario, including all the responsibilities of the "constructor" under the
Occupational Health and Safety Act (Ontario). Further, (trade or employee) acknowledges that
[name of Contractor] is also responsible to the
to co-ordinate and
schedule the activities of our Work with the Work of the Contractor.
We agree to comply with [name of Contractor] directions and instructions with respect to
occupational health and safety and coordination. We acknowledge that it will be cause for
termination under our Contract with the Owner should (I/we) fail or refuse to accept the
direction and instruction of the Contractor with respect to matters of occupational health and
safety or matters related to coordination of Work.
We agree to have the Contractor named as an additional insured on our comprehensive
liability policy."
2266168.2
APPENDIX 2
Amendment to Rules for Mediation and Arbitration of Construction Disputes
(CCDC-40, 1994) (the "Rules")
The Rules assume the use of the Standard Construction Documents CCDC2-2008 for a
Stipulated Price Contract, including the Agreement, Definitions, General Conditions and any
amendments or supplementary conditions, if there are any. This Amendment supersedes,
replaces or amends the Rules, as the case may be, as outlined below.
1.
RULES FOR MEDIATION OF CCDC 2 CONSTRUCTION DISPUTES
1.1
Interpretation. Amend clause 1.1(a) so that it reads as follows:
"(a)
1.2
The "Contract" means CCDC2-2008, where such Contract document contains an
agreement to refer disputes to mediation under these Rules."
By Agreement. Delete clause 5.1 and replace it with the following:
"5.1 By Agreement . Where a party desires the appointment of a Project Mediator and gives a
Notice in Writing to that effect, such notice shall include the names of two qualified individuals
who are prepared to act as mediator, ranked in order of preference. Within five Working Days of
receiving such a notice, the other party shall deliver a responding notice including the names of
two qualified individuals who are prepared to act as mediator, ranked in order of preference. From
the names submitted by the parties, the parties shall unanimously appoint a mediator."
1.3
Appointment of Project Mediator. Add a new clause 5.5 which reads as follows:
"5.5 Formal Agreement. When the Project Mediator has been appointed, whether pursuant to
clause 5.1 or clause 5.2, the parties and the mediator shall enter into an agreement in writing
pursuant to which the terms and conditions of the engagement of the Project Mediator shall be set
out. Such agreement shall include an undertaking by the Project Mediator to carry out the
mediation pursuant to these Rules and such agreement shall specifically set out the undertaking of
the Project Mediator and the parties as to "Confidentiality" (Section 4) "Costs of the Mediation"
(Section 12) and "Privileged Process" (Section 13)."
1.4
Representation. Amend clause 8.1 by deleting the last six words of that clause.
1.5
Right To Withdraw. Amend clause 11.1 by deleting the words "of GC8.2.5" toward the
end of line 3.
1.6
Not Compellable. Amend clause 14.2(a) by replacing the word "Contractor" with the
word "Contract".
2.
RULES FOR ARBITRATION OF CCDC 2 CONSTRUCTIONS DISPUTES
2.1
Interpretation. Amend clause 1.1(b) so that it reads as follows:
"(b)
2266168.2
The "Contract" means CCDC2-2008, where such Contract document contains an
agreement to refer disputes to mediation under these Rules."
-2-
2.2
Interpretation. Amend clause 1.1(d) so that, as amended, it reads as follows:
"(d)
2.3
The parties means the parties to the Contract and any other persons who may join in an
arbitration involving the Owner and the Contractor or the Construction Manager and/or a
Trade Contractor, as the case may be."
Location of Arbitration. Add the following as a second sentence to clause 5.1:
"Failing agreement by the parties, the arbitrator may select a location for the arbitration within the
jurisdiction of the Place of Work, which is convenient to both parties".
2.4
Single Arbitrator. Delete clause 8.1 and replace it with the following:
“8.1
The arbitration shall be conducted before a single arbitrator who possesses the
qualifications specified in Clause 8.5.”
2.5
Appointment Of Arbitrator. Delete Clause 8.2 in its entirety and replace it with the
words, “intentionally left blank”.
2.6
Appointment of 3 Arbitrators. Delete Clause 8.4 in its entirety and replace it with,
“intentionally left blank”.
2.7
Appointment of Arbitrator. Add a new clause 8.13 which reads as follows:
"8.13
2.8
Where the arbitrator has been appointed pursuant to the Section 8, the parties and the
arbitrator shall enter an agreement in writing setting out, at minimum, the name of the
arbitrator, the undertaking of the arbitrator and the parties to conduct the arbitration
pursuant to these Rules and the terms and conditions of engagement of the arbitrator
including the fees to be paid and expenses to be reimbursed and any arrangements
required to provide for interim payment of fees and/or expenses to the arbitrator."
Procedural Meeting. Add the following new sentence to clause 9.2:
"Such written record shall be deemed to be the procedural code for the conduct of the
arbitration, subject to any further orders of the arbitrator or of the Court of competent
jurisdiction."
2.9
Powers of the Arbitrator. Delete clause 10.1 and substitute the following:
"Subject to these Rules and subject to the written record described in clause 9.2, the
arbitrator may conduct the arbitration in such manner as the arbitrator, acting reasonably,
considers appropriate provided that in all events each party shall be treated fairly and
given a full opportunity to present its case and respond to the case presented by the other
party."
2.10
Exchange of Statements. Delete clause 11.3(a) and replace it with the following:
"(a)
2.11
Disclosure. Delete clause 12.1 and replace it with the following:
"12.1
2266168.2
which are relevant to the issues in dispute, and..".
Production of Documents - The arbitrator may order one or both parties to prepare an
affidavit, within a specified time, in which such party deposes under oath that it has made
a full and complete listing of documents pursuant to clause 11.3(a) where the arbitrator
-3has reason to believe that one or both parties may not have made full and complete
disclosure of the documents relevant to the issues in the arbitration."
2.12
Add a new clause 12.6 as follows:
"12.6
In the event that a party provides the statement or report of an expert witness pursuant to
clause 12.4, the provisions of clauses 15.3 and 15.4 shall apply, with necessary
modifications."
2.13 Hearings and Meetings. Amend clause 13.3 by adding the following language to that
clause:
"..unless otherwise agreed by both parties or directed by the arbitrator."
2.14
Arbitrator Retained Experts. Add clause 15.3(c) as follows:
"(c)
2.15
provide the party with a written summary of any other information, beyond that described
in clauses 13.2(a) and (b), upon which the expert relied in preparing the expert's report."
Consolidation. Amend clause 21.1(a) by adding the following wording to that clause:
"...on the same Project,..".
[Drafting note: Should the Board of the Owner wish to waive its right of appeal under the
Arbitration Act, the following amendment is required:
“Final Award. Amend clause 18.6 by adding the following sentence at the end of that
clause:
‘The parties specifically waive any rights of appeal they may have in connection
with the final award or any interim order or award made by the arbitrator.’
2266168.2
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 1
1
GENERAL
1.1
The requirements of the Articles of Agreement, Conditions of the Contract, Division 1
apply to and form all Sections of the Contract Documents and the Work.
1.2
Work in this Specification is divided into descriptive sections which are not intended
to identify absolute contractual limits between Subcontractors, nor between the
Contractor and their Subcontractors. The Contractor is responsible for organizing
division of labour and supply of materials essential to complete the Contract.
1.3
Specifications, Schedules and Drawings are complementary and items mentioned or
indicated on one may not be mentioned or indicated on the others.
1.4
Mention in the specifications or indication on the drawings of materials, products,
operations, or methods, requires that the Contractor provide each item mentioned or
indicated of the quality or subject to the qualifications noted; perform according to the
conditions stated each operation prescribed; and provide labour, materials, Products,
equipment and services to complete the Work.
1.5
Where the singular or masculine is used in the Contract Documents, it shall be read
and construed as if the plural, feminine or neuter had been used when the context or
the statement so requires and as required to complete the Work, and the rest of the
sentence, clause, paragraph, or Article shall be construed as if all changes in
grammar, gender or terminology thereby rendered necessary had been made.
2
EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS
2.1
Make a careful examination of the site, and investigate and be satisfied as to all
matters relating to the nature of the Work to be undertaken, as to the means of
access and egress thereto and therefrom, as to the obstacles to be met with, as to
the extent of the Work to be performed and any and all matters which are referred to
in the Contract Documents.
2.2
Report any inconsistencies, ambiguities, discrepancies, omissions, and errors
between Site conditions and Contract Documents to the Consultant prior to the
commencement of Work. If inconsistencies, ambiguities, discrepancies, omissions,
and errors are not reported and clarified, the most stringent requirement shall
govern, as determined by the Consultant. Ensure that each Subcontractor
performing work related to the site conditions has examined it so that all are fully
informed on all particulars which affect the Work thereon in order that construction
proceeds competently and expeditiously.
2.3
Before commencing the Work of any Section or trade, carefully examine the Work of
other Sections and trades upon which it may depend, examine substrate surfaces,
and report in writing to the Consultant, defects which might affect new Work.
Commencement of Work shall constitute acceptance of conditions and Work of other
sections, trades, and Other Contractors upon which the new Work depends. If repair
of surfaces is required after commencement of specific work it shall be included in
the work of the trade providing the specific system or finish.
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 2
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
3
CONTINUITY OF EXISTING SERVICES
3.1
Shutdowns and planning of operations that may affect Owner’s use of services shall
be coordinated with and in accordance with the Owner’s written directions. Provide
notice for all required interruptions to utility, heating, cooling, mechanical, electrical,
and life safety systems.
3.2
Make written requests for shutdown at least 5 working days in advance, unless
specifically stated herein or as otherwise instructed by the Owner.
3.3
Shutdowns shall be scheduled in advance with Owner and shutdown period shall be
minimized to Owner’s convenience. Facilities in existing adjacent areas will be
occupied during the Work.
3.4
Major shutdowns shall take place on weekends or at night by prior arrangement with
and at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.5
Minimize disruption, vibration, noise and dust to the function if existing building.
3.6
These requirements are for security reasons and for the consideration of the Owner.
Requirements shall not be construed as cause for elimination or restriction of
Contractor’s working schedule, claims for delay or work, nor additional cost.
4
ACCESS/PROPERTY CONSTRAINTS
4.1
Perform Work in accordance with requirements of Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
4.2
Provide and maintain access facilities as may be required for access to the Work.
4.3
Minimize disruption, noise and dust to the functions of existing operational areas of
existing buildings. Times of entry, routes of access and time required to complete the
Work shall be arranged and scheduled in cooperation with the Owner.
4.4
Confine Work and operations of employees to limits indicated by the Contract
Documents. Do not unreasonably encumber the premises with products.
4.5
Organize delivery of materials/equipment to and removal of debris and equipment
from place of Work to permit continual progress of work and suitable for
restricted site conditions.
4.6
Determine and make arrangement as required for loading and unloading of
equipment and Products at times that will not affect public traffic flow and that will be
permitted by the City of Toronto. Conform to City by-laws with regard to parking
restrictions and other conditions.
4.7
Make provisions and arrangements and provide allowances if times for loading and
unloading allowed by the City of Toronto are other than regular working hours.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 3
4.8
All Products, materials and equipment required on Site shall be portable and/or size
suitable for access and movement on Site and without causing damage to buildings.
4.9
Workers shall not enter existing building beyond construction areas except where
required for connection or modification to existing services or other such work.
Arrange such requirements with Owner prior to entering existing occupied areas.
4.10
Provide locked doors in barriers, permit access by Owner and Consultant to Work
areas and to areas Contractor is responsible for.
4.11
Personnel access and material deliveries to the Site shall be only by routes
designated by the Owner. Do not deliver Products between the hours of 8:00 am 6:00 p.m. except when permitted otherwise by the Owner. Owner's equipment such
as trucks, bins, dollies, and other such equipment/facilities shall not be used by
Contractors. Arrangements for handling items weighty or bulky enough to require
special treatment must be made and reviewed with the Owner.
4.12
Advise the Owner 48 hours in advance of large or cumbersome item deliveries. Give
particulars of item size and weight, protection to existing surfaces to be provided and
safety precautions during movement.
5
SETTING OUT
5.1
Before commencing work, verify lines, levels and dimensions shown on the drawing
and report discrepancies in levels or dimensions to the Consultant. Be responsible
for work done prior to the receipt of the Consultant’s decision regarding reported
discrepancies.
6
CASH ALLOWANCES
6.1
Allowances included in Bid Form are for items of Work which could not be fully
quantified prior to Bidding.
6.2
Expend each allowance as directed by the Consultant in writing. Work covered by
allowances shall be performed for such amounts and by such persons as directed by
Consultant.
6.3
Each allowance will be adjusted to actual cost as defined hereunder and the
Contract Price will be amended accordingly by Contract Change Order.
6.4
Progress payments for Work and Products authorized under allowances will be
made in accordance with the payment terms set out in Conditions of the Contract.
6.5
A schedule shall be prepared jointly by the Consultant and Contractor to show when
items called for under allowances must be authorized by the Consultant for ordering
purposes so that the progress of the Work will not be delayed.
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 4
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
6.6
Where a Cash Allowance is for work performed under a Subcontract, the Contractor
shall Bid the work involved and submit the Bids received, with the Contractor’s
recommendations, for approval.
6.7
Cash allowances, unless otherwise specified, cover the net cost to the Contractor of
services, Products, construction machinery and equipment, freight, handling,
unloading, storage, installation where indicated, and other authorized expenses
incurred in performing the Work. Cash allowances shall not be included by a
Subcontractor in the amount for their Subcontract work.
6.8
.1
.2
.3
Supply only allowances shall include:
Net cost of Products.
Delivery to Site.
Applicable taxes and duties, excluding HST.
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
Supply and install allowances shall include:
Net cost of Products.
Delivery to Site.
Unloading, storing, handling or Products on Site.
Installation, finishing and commissioning of Products.
Applicable taxes and duties, excluding HST.
.1
.2
Inspection and testing allowances shall include:
Net cost of inspection and testing services.
Applicable taxes and duties, excluding HST.
6.9
6.10
6.11
Other costs related to work covered by cash allowances are not covered by the
allowance but shall be included in the Contract Price.
6.12
Where costs under a cash allowance exceed the amount of the allowance, the
Contractor will be compensated for any excess incurred and substantiated plus an
allowance for overhead and profit as set out in the Contract Documents.
6.13
Progress payments on accounts of work authorized under cash allowances shall be
included in the monthly certificate for payment.
6.14
Submit, before application for final payment, copies of all invoices and statements
from suppliers and Subcontractors for work which has been paid from cash
allowances.
6.15
Include in the Bid Price to have a total cash allowance amount of $105,000.00:
.1
Inspection and Testing.
.2
Finish Hardware.
.3
Wayfinding.
.4
Overtime Cleaning Cost.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 5
.5
Unforseen Site Conditions.
.6
Furring out wall and adding tile finish in the following washrooms covered by the
Alternate Price:
.1
Venerable John Merlini Washrooms 107C & 107D
.2
St. Francis De Sales Washrooms A & B
.3
Blessed Margherita Washrooms 127A, 127B, 126B,126C
7
COORDINATION
7.1
Coordination of the Work of all Sections of the specifications as required to complete
the Project is the responsibility of the Contractor.
7.2
Coordinate with removals/installations specified in other Divisions and Other
Contracts.
7.3
Existing equipment shall remain in present locations unless designated otherwise.
Protect from damage. Remove, store and reinstall existing fixed equipment, fixtures
and components which interfere with construction and which are scheduled for
relocation.
7.4
Pay particular attention to types of ceiling construction and clearances throughout,
especially where recessed fixtures are required. Coordinate work with Other
Contractors and Subcontractors wherever ventilation ducts or piping installations
occur to ensure that conflicts are avoided.
7.5
Install ceiling mounted components in accordance with Contract Drawings. Inform
Consultant of conflicting installations. Install as directed.
7.6
Install and arrange ducts, piping, tubing, conduit, equipment, fixtures, materials and
products to conserve headroom and space with minimum interference and in neat,
orderly and tidy arrangement. Run pipes, ducts, tubing and conduit, vertical,
horizontal and square with building grid unless otherwise indicated. Install piping,
ducts, and conduit as close to underside of structure as possible unless shown
otherwise.
7.7
Make provision for unrestricted relocation of light fixtures to replace ceiling panels at
grid spaces of the same size, without interference or restriction by items located
within the ceiling space.
7.8
Where supports or openings are to be left for the installation of various parts of the
Work furnish the necessary information to those concerned in ample time so that
proper provision can be made for such items. Have cutting, drilling and other
remedial work, and the subsequent patching or other work required for failing to
comply with this requirement, performed at a later date at no additional Cost to
Owner.
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 6
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
7.9
Ensure that setting drawings, templates, and all other information necessary for the
location and installation of materials, fixtures, equipment, holes, sleeves, inserts,
anchors, accessories, fastenings, connections, and access panels are provided by
each Section whose work requires cooperative location and installation by other
Sections, and that such information is communicated to the applicable installer.
Have cutting, fixing and making good to the work of Other Contractors,
Subcontractors and trades required for, and make up time lost as result of, failure to
comply with this requirement, at no additional cost to Owner.
7.10
Be responsible for coordinating products supplied in metric (SI) and imperial units
into the overall layout.
7.11
Properly coordinate the work of the various Sections and trades, taking into account
the existing installations to assure the best arrangement of pipes, conduits, ducts
and mechanical, electrical and other equipment, in the available space. Under no
circumstances will any extra payment be allowed due to the failure by the Contractor
to coordinate the Work. If required, in critical locations, prepare interference and/or
installation drawings showing the work of the various Sections as well as the existing
installation, and submit these drawings to the Consultant for review before the
commencement of Work.
7.12
Coordinate with mechanical and electrical trades to ensure protecting supporting,
disconnecting, cutting off, capping, diverting, relocating or removing of existing
services in areas of Work before commencement of alteration work.
7.13
In case of damage to active services on utilities, notify Consultant and respective
authorities immediately and make all required repairs under direction of Consultant
and respective authorities. Carry out repairs to such damaged services and utilities
continuously to completion, including working beyond regular working hours.
8
CONTRACTOR ON SITE
8.1
The Contractor shall organize his work at the school in co-operation with the
Principal or SQS or TCDSB Project Coordinator so that the academic program of the
school is not disrupted. Such organization shall take place at least forty-eight (48)
hours prior to commencing work.
8.2
During the regular school year (September to June), work shall be done after school
hours, between the hours of 4:00 pm and 10:30 pm. The Contractor shall make
special arrangements with the Owner to perform work outside these hours. Requests
for special arrangements shall be made at least forty-eight (48) hours in advance.
8.3
During the summer months (July and August), work shall be done between the hours
of 7:30 am to 4:00 pm. The Contractor shall make special arrangements with the
Owner to perform work outside these hours. Requests for special arrangements shall
be made at least forty-eight (48) hours in advance.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 7
8.4
Any cost associated with work outside of regular hours will be charged to and shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor. On site access problems are to be referred to
the Project Coordinator first and in the absence of a response, the SQS.
8.5
Caretaker overtime is applicable after 4:00 p.m. Monday - Friday, during the summer
break and on weekends year round. The Contractor is responsible for applying to the
Board Permits Department for school permits for all work outside regular school
hours, whether or not overtime is applicable, including regular daytime work during
summer. The current overtime rates are Monday to Saturday: $30.86/hr and
Sunday: $41.41/hr.
8.6
For the safety of students and staff, no heavy equipment or machinery shall be used
on the job site between 8:00 am and 4:00 pm, Monday to Friday during the regular
school year except as permitted by the Principal and under the supervision of the
Principal, or his designate.
8.7
The Contractor shall clean up and remove debris on a daily basis, Under NO
circumstances, shall the Contractor use the school’s garbage disposal containers.
8.8
Smoking is NOT permitted in any of the Owner’s buildings or on any of the Owner’s
properties, All smoking must be done off School Board premises.
8.9
The Owner reserves the right to request criminal background verification of the
Contractor’s personnel at no expense to the Owner.
8.10
The Owner reserves the right to require Contractor’s personnel to carry and display
identification.
9
SCHOOL OPERATION
9.1
Where Work interferes with the School program the Contractor shall organize his
work at the school in cooperation with the Principal, through the Owner’s
Representative, so that the academic program of the existing school is not disrupted.
The Contractor shall include in his/her tender price, all costs required to phase or
stage the project so that construction does not interfere with normal operations of the
school.
9.2
Deliveries - the Contractor shall receive all construction deliveries and endeavour to
avoid such deliveries interfere with regular school operations the school office.
School staff shall not sign for any construction related deliveries.
9.3
Take reasonable measures for the control of noise and dust during operations while
the building is in use.
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 8
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
9.4
Prevent excessive noises which will be disturbing to school operation. Machine tools
which are set up in fixed locations shall be so located as to minimize noise and
suitable sound deflectors shall be used if directed by the Consultant. Air
compressors and pneumatic hammers shall be used only with the express
authorization of the Consultant at times as directed by him. Gasoline welding
machines or gasoline driven compressors shall not be used. The Contractor may be
requested from time to time to suspend noisy or otherwise objectionable operations
during certain functions, should such operations cause undue interference with the
said functions. The Contractor will be expected to extend the fullest co-operation and
courtesy in such cases.
9.5
Any work creating noise, requiring blocking off of certain areas, interruption of fire
alarm, water or electrical services must be coordinated with the caretaker and day
care provider, including the provision of a fire watch by the contractor if fire alarm is
shut down. The Contractor must also assure that proper exiting for any areas
occupied by the day care is maintained at all times.
Upon arrival at the school, the Contractor shall report to the school office identifying
himself and the purpose for which he is in the school.
9.6
10
CUTTING AND PATCHING
10.1
Execute Work to avoid damage to other Work.
10.2
Execute cutting, fitting and patching including excavation and fill to complete the
Work.
10.3
Employ appropriate trades with skilled labour to perform cutting Work.
10.4
Fit Work segments together, to integrate with penetrations through surfaces and with
other Work.
10.5
Remove and replace defective and non-conforming Work.
10.6
Do any drilling, cutting, fitting, patching and finishing that may be required to make
the various classes and kinds of other Work fit together in a professional and finished
manner. Make watertight connections with adjoining structures.
10.7
Provide openings in non-structural elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical
and electrical Work.
10.8
Execute Work by methods to avoid damage to other Work and which will provide
proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing.
10.9
Cut Products using proper equipment and methods. On rigid materials, use a
masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic or impact tools are not allowed on masonry
work without prior approval.
10.10
Where new Work connects with existing structures, cut, patch and make good
existing work to match original condition.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 9
10.11
Be responsible for correct formation and bridging of openings in masonry and
structural walls as required.
10.12
Ensure compatibility between installed Products and security of installation.
10.13
Restore Work with new Products in accordance with requirements of the Contract
Documents.
10.14
Fit Work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduits and other penetrations through
surfaces.
10.15
Properly prepare surfaces to receive patching and finishing.
10.16
Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes; for continuous surfaces refinish to
nearest intersection; for an assembly, refinish entire unit.
11
FIRE RATINGS
11.1
Where a material, component or assembly is required to be fire rated, the fire rating
shall be as determined or listed by one of the following testing authorities acceptable
to the authorities having jurisdiction:
.1
Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada.
.2
Underwriters' Laboratories Inc.
.3
Factory Mutual Laboratories.
.4
The National Research Council of Canada.
.5
The National Board of Fire Underwriters.
.6
Intertek Testing Services.
11.2
Where reference is made to only one testing authority an equivalent fire rating as
determined or listed by another of the aforementioned testing authorities is
acceptable if approved by authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain and submit such
approval of authorities, in writing when requesting acceptance of a proposed
equivalent rating or test design.
12
FIRE SEPARATIONS
12.1
Conform to following requirements to maintain continuity of fire separations whether
or not shown on the Contract Drawings.
12.2
Fire separations may be pierced by openings for electrical and similar service outlets
provided such boxes are non-combustible and are tightly fitted and sealed with a
ULC approved sealant for the assembly being sealed.
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 10
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
12.3
Construction that abuts on or is supported by a non-combustible fire separation shall
be constructed so that its collapse under fire conditions will not cause the collapse of
the fire separation.
12.4
At penetration through fire rated walls, ceilings or floors, completely seal voids with
ULC approved firestopping material; full thickness of the construction element. In
locations that require a smoke seal, provide appropriate ULC approved system
installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
13
CODES
13.1
Reference is made to standards in the specifications to establish minimum
acceptable standards of materials, products and workmanship. Ensure that
materials, products and workmanship meet or exceed requirements of the reference
standards specified.
13.2
In the event of conflict between documents specified herein, execute the Work in
accordance with the most stringent requirements.
14
STANDARDS
14.1
Where a material or product is specified in conjunction with a referenced standard,
do not supply the material or product if it does not meet the requirements of the
standard. Supply another specified material or product, or an acceptable material or
product of other approved manufacture which does meet the requirements of the
standard, at no additional cost to the Owner.
14.2
Where no standard is referred to, provide materials, products and workmanship
which meet requirements of the applicable standards of the Canadian Standards
Association, Canadian General Standards Board, Standards Council of Canada,
Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications (OPSS), Ontario Provincial Standard
Drawings (OPSD) and the applicable building code. References to "Measurement
for Payment" and "Basis of Payment" in OPSS standard documents are not
applicable to this Contract.
14.3
If there is question as to whether a material, product or system is in conformance
with applicable standards, the Consultant reserves the right to have such materials,
products or systems tested to prove or disprove conformance. The cost for such
testing will be paid by the Owner in the event of conformance with contract
Documents or by the Contractor in the event of non-conformance.
14.4
Where application, installation and workmanship standards are cited, it is intended
that referenced standards form the basis for minimum requirements of the specified
item and specifications supplement the standards unless specified otherwise.
14.5
Matters may be dealt with in part by these specifications which are also dealt with,
under the same or similar headings in cited standard. It is not intended that these
specifications take the place of the standards but supplement them, unless specified
otherwise.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 11
14.6
Where reference is made to manufacturer’s directions, instructions or specifications
they shall include full information on storing, handling, preparing, mixing, installing,
erecting, applying, or other matters concerning the materials pertinent to their use
and their relationship to materials with which they are incorporated.
15
PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
15.1
Attend a pre-construction meeting, arranged and conducted by the Consultant.
15.2
Co-ordinate and organize attendance by representatives of major Subcontractors
and parties in contract with the Contractor.
15.3
Consultant will arrange attendance of other interested parties not responsible to the
Contractor.
15.4
Consultant will distribute copies of Agenda prior to meeting.
15.5
Be prepared to provide specific information relative to agenda items as they are
pertinent to the Contract.
15.6
Record minutes of meeting and distribute type written copies to all participants and
other interested parties, within one week of meeting date.
16
PROGRESS MEETINGS
16.1
Attend regularly scheduled progress meetings to be held on Site at times and dates
that are mutually agreed to by the Owner, Consultant, and Contractor.
16.2
Co-ordinate and organize attendance of individual Subcontractors and material
suppliers when requested. Relationships and discussions between Subcontractor
participants are not the responsibility of the Consultant and do not form part of the
meetings content.
16.3
Ensure that Contractor representatives in attendance at meetings have required
authority to commit Contractor to actions agreed upon. Assign same persons to
attend such meetings throughout the contract period.
16.4
Inform the Consultant in advance of meetings regarding all items to be added to the
agenda.
16.5
Consultant will distribute copies of Agenda prior to meeting.
16.6
Be prepared to provide specific information relative to agenda items at each meeting
as they are pertinent to the Contract.
16.7
Agenda will include but not be limited to the following topics as are pertinent to the
Contract.
.1
Review and agreement of previous minutes.
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 12
.2
Construction safety.
.3
Status of submittals.
.4
Quality control.
.5
Co-ordination.
.6
Contract Schedule
.7
Work plan up to next scheduled meeting.
.8
Requests for information/clarification.
.9
Contemplated changes.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
16.8
Consultant will record minutes of meeting and distribute type written copies to all
participants and other interested parties, within one week of meeting date.
17
PRODUCT DATA
17.1
Before delivery of Products to the Site, submit Product data as specified in each
section or as requested by the Consultant.
17.2
Submit manufacturer's Product data for systems, materials, and methods of
installation proposed for use. Such literature shall identify systems, each
component, and shall certify compliance of each component with applicable
standards.
18
SAMPLES
18.1
Before delivery of Products to the Site, submit samples of Products as specified or
as requested by the Consultant. Label samples as to origin and intended use in the
Work and in accordance with the requirements of the Specification Sections.
Samples must represent physical examples to illustrate materials, equipment or work
quality and to establish standards by which completed Work is judged.
18.2
Ensure samples are of sufficient size and quantity, if not already specified, to
illustrate:
18.3
.1
The quality and functional characteristics of Products, with integrally related parts
and attachment devices.
.2
Full range of colours available.
Notify the Consultant in writing, at time of submission, of any deviations in samples
from requirements of the Contract Documents, and state the reasons for such
deviations.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 13
18.4
Identify samples with Project name, Contract number, date, Contractor's name,
number and description.
18.5
If samples are not acceptable, both samples will be returned. If samples are
acceptable, one sample will be so indicated and returned. Be responsible for the
cost of samples that are not accepted and for resubmission of samples.
18.6
Acceptable samples shall serve as a model against which the products incorporated
in the work shall be judged.
18.7
Each Product incorporated in the Work shall be precisely the same in all details as
the acceptable sample.
18.8
Should there be any change from the accepted sample, submit in writing for approval
of the revised characteristics and resubmit samples of the Product for approval if
requested.
18.9
When samples are very large, require assembly, or require evaluation at the Site,
they may be delivered to the Site, but only with approval and as directed.
19
SHOP DRAWINGS
19.1
Arrange for the preparation of shop drawings as called for in the Contract
Documents or as may be reasonably requested by the Consultant. The Contractor
and each Subcontractor shall operate as experts in their respective fields and all
shop drawings and samples shall conform to the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
19.2
The term ?shop drawings” means drawings, diagrams, schematics, illustrations,
schedules, performance charts, brochures and other data which are required to
illustrate details of the Work.
19.3
In addition to shop drawings specified in the specification sections, submit shop
drawings required by jurisdictional authorities in accordance with their requirements.
19.4
Shop drawings shall indicate the following minimum criteria and any additional
criteria indicated in the individual specification sections requiring shop drawings:
.1
Clear and obvious notes of any proposed changes from the Contract Documents.
.2
Fabrication and erection dimension.
.3
Provisions for allowable construction tolerances and deflections provided for live
loading.
.4
Details to indicate construction arrangements of the parts and their connections, and
interconnections with other work.
.5
Location and type of anchors and exposed fastenings.
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 14
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
.6
Materials, physical dimensions including thicknesses, and finishes.
.7
Descriptive names of equipment.
.8
Information to verify that superimposed loads will not affect function, appearance,
and safety of the work detailed as well as of interconnection work.
.9
Assumed design loadings, and dimensions and material specifications for loadbearing members.
19.5
Include in shop drawing submissions detailed information, templates, and installation
instructions required for incorporation and connection of the Work.
19.6
Before submitting to the Consultant, review all shop drawings to verify that the
Products illustrated therein conform to the Contract Documents. By this review, the
Contractor agrees that it has determined and verified all field dimensions, field
construction criteria, materials, catalogue numbers and similar data and that it has
checked and coordinated each shop drawing with the requirements of the Work and
of the Contract Documents. The Contractor's review of each shop drawing shall be
indicated by stamp, date and signature of a qualified and responsible person
possessing the appropriate authorization.
19.7
Be responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the Site, for
information that pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of
construction and installation and for coordination of the Work of all subtrades.
19.8
Submit shop drawings for the Consultant's review with reasonable promptness and
in orderly sequence so as to cause no delay in the Work nor in the work of Other
Contractors. At the time of submission, notify the Consultant in writing of any
deviations in the shop drawings from the requirements of the Contract Documents.
The Contractor will be held responsible for changes made from the Contract
Documents which are not indicated or otherwise communicated in writing with the
submission.
19.9
Drawings submitted by the Contractor as required herein are the property of the
Owner who may use and duplicate such drawings where required in association with
the Work.
19.10
Submit shop drawings, as indicated in each section of the Work, signed and sealed
by a licensed Professional Engineer registered in the place of the Work.
19.11
Shop drawings shall have distinct, uniform letters, numerals and line thicknesses that
will ensure the production of clear legible prints and also facilitate microfilming and
reduced reproduction.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 15
19.12
Submissions shall be 8.5" x 11" or 11" x 17" page format prints of each sheet folded
with title block appearing on outside. Electronic copies of shop drawing submissions
on a Compact Disk (CD) are also acceptable. However, in instances where
catalogue items are specified, three clean copies of the manufacturer's catalogue
may be submitted.
19.13
Shop drawings shall contain the following identification:
.1
Project name and Contract number.
.2
Applicable 5-digit Contract Specification number describing the item.
.3
Location (unit, level, room number, etc.).
.4
Name of equipment or Product.
.5
Name of Subcontractor or supplier.
.6
Signature of Contractor certifying that Shop drawing is in conformance with Contract
Documents.
.7
On submissions subsequent to the first, the following additional identification:
.1
The revision number.
.2
Identification of the item(s) revised.
19.14
Dimensions and designations of elements shall be shown in the same system of
measurement used on the applicable Contract Drawings.
19.15
The Consultant reserves the right to refuse acceptance of drawing submissions not
meeting the above requirements.
19.16
The Consultant's review will be for conformity to the design concept and for general
arrangement only and such review shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility
for errors or omissions in the shop drawings or of responsibility for meeting all
requirements of the Contract Documents unless a deviation on the shop drawings
has been approved in writing by the Consultant.
19.17
The Contractor shall make any changes in shop drawings which the Consultant may
require consistent with the Contract Documents and re-submit unless otherwise
directed by the Consultant. When re-submitting the shop drawings, the Contractor
shall notify the Consultant in writing of any revisions other than those requested by
the Consultant.
19.18
Only drawings noted for revision and resubmission need be resubmitted.
19.19
File one copy of each submitted shop drawing at the Site.
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 16
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
20
CERTIFICATES
20.1
Submit certificates that are required by authorities having jurisdiction or that are
requested in the specification sections.
20.2
Clearly show on each certification the name and location of the Work, name and
address of Contractor, quantity and date of shipment and delivery and name of
certifying company.
20.3
Certificates shall verify that Products and/or methods meet the specified
requirements and shall include test reports of acceptable testing laboratories to
validate certificates.
20.4
Submit certificates in duplicate and signed by an authorized representative of the
certifying company.
21
WARRANTIES
21.1
Submit extended warranties as requested in sections of the Specifications showing
title and address of Contract, warranty commencement date and duration of
warranty.
21.2
Extended warranties shall commence on termination of the standard warranty
specified in the conditions of the contract and shall be an extension of these
provisions. Clearly indicate what is being warranted and what remedial action is to
be taken under the warranty. Ensure warranty bears the signature and seal of the
Contractor.
21.3
Submit each extended warranty on a form that is acceptable to the Owner and
Consultant.
22
INSPECTION AND TEST REPORTS
22.1
Submit inspection and test reports as specified in the Sections of the specifications
for “Source Quality Control” and “Field Quality Control” within 3 working days of
inspection or testing. If immediate action is required by the Contractor or Consultant
inform the Consultant immediately and submit inspection and testing report within
one working day.
22.2
Submit 3 copies of reports submitted with certificates of compliance indicating but
not limited to the following:
.1
Project name and number.
.2
Date of inspection or test and date report is issued.
.3
Name and address of inspection and testing company.
.4
Name and signature of inspector or tester.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 17
.5
Identification of Product and Specification Section covering inspected or tested work.
.6
Specified requirements for which the inspection or testing was performed and results
of inspections or tests.
.7
Location of inspection or from which tested material was derived.
.8
Overview of inspection and testing methods and procedures.
.9
Remarks and observations on compliance with Contract Documents.
22.3
Inspection and test reports shall be signed by a responsible officer of the inspection
and testing company.
23
SCHEDULES
23.1
Be responsible for planning and scheduling of the Work. As a minimum, prepare
and update the following schedules:
.1
Contract Schedule.
.2
Detailed Construction Schedule.
23.2
Be responsible for ensuring that Subcontractors plan and schedule their respective
portions of the Work. Subcontractor's schedules shall form part of the above
mentioned schedules.
23.3
Contract Schedule:
.1
Prepare and submit the Contract Schedule within two weeks following award of
Contract. This schedule, once it is reviewed by the Consultant and if it meets the
Consultant's project requirements, will become contractual.
.2
The Contract Schedule shall be developed using a logic network technique for
planning and scheduling.
.3
The Contract Schedule shall be submitted for approval in its optimum levelled form.
This presentation may be in either a time scaled network or a bar chart form. It shall
be subdivided into either work areas or systems as applicable.
.4
The Contract Schedule shall include the following information:
.1
Starting and ending dates of each activity including the float periods;
.2
Manpower requirements for each activity;
.3
Interdependency with activities of other Contractors;
.4
Dates specified in the Contract Documents;
.5
Dates on which specific data will be required for submittal, i.e., Vendor data,
drawings for review, etc.
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 18
.5
23.4
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
This schedule shall be reviewed and updated monthly by the Contractor so as to
reflect any Contract changes as well as major changes to the schedule.
Detailed Construction Schedule:
.1
Prepare and submit a detailed construction schedule within two weeks of final review
and acceptance of the Contract Schedule. This schedule, once it is reviewed and
accepted by the Consultant, will be updated and submitted monthly with the Contract
Schedule and weekly once the Contractor starts on Site.
.2
This schedule shall cover the construction period. It will show, in detail, activities on
a daily basis indicating durations, manpower and constraints. The activities shown
on this schedule shall further clarify or detail the activities shown on the Contract
Schedule.
.3
The detailed construction schedule shall be presented in a bar chart form.
24
INSPECTION AND TESTING
24.1
Be responsible for inspection and testing as required by the Contract Documents,
statutes, regulations, by-laws, standards or codes or any other jurisdictional
authority. Give the Consultant timely notice of the readiness for inspection, date and
time for such inspection for attendance by the Consultant.
24.2
Verify by certification that specified products meet the requirements of reference
standards specified in the applicable specification sections.
24.3
Conduct testing, balancing and adjusting of equipment and systems specified in
applicable mechanical and electrical specifications sections by independent testing
company.
24.4
Source and Field Quality Control specified in Other Sections:
24.5
.1
This Section includes requirements for performance of inspection and testing
specified under Source Quality Control and Field Quality Control in other Sections of
the specifications.
.2
Do not include in work of this Section responsibilities and procedures that relate
solely to an inspection and testing company's functions that are specified in another
Section which is paid for directly by the Owner. Such information is included in this
Section for Contractor's information only.
Do not limit responsibility for ensuring that products and execution of the work meet
Contract requirements, and inspection and testing required to this end, to specified
inspection and testing.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 19
25
TOLERANCES FOR INSTALLATION OF WORK
25.1
Unless specifically indicated otherwise, Work shall be installed plumb, level, square
and straight.
25.2
Unless acceptable tolerances are otherwise specified in specification sections or are
otherwise required for proper functioning of equipment, site services, and
mechanical and electrical systems:
.1
"Plumb and level" shall mean plumb or level within 1 mm in 1 m.
.2
"Square" shall mean not in excess of 10 seconds lesser or greater than 90 degrees.
.3
"Straight" shall mean within 1 mm under a 1 m long straightedge.
.4
"Flush" shall mean within:
.1
1 mm for exterior concrete and masonry materials.
.2
1 mm for interior concrete, masonry, tile and similar surfaces.
.3
0.025 mm for other interior surfaces.
25.3
Allowable tolerances shall not be cumulative.
26
DEFECTS
26.1
Defective products, materials and workmanship found at any time prior to Contract
Completion will be rejected regardless of previous inspections, testing, and reviews
of the Work. Inspections, testing, and reviews shall not relieve the Contractor from
their responsibility, but are a precaution against oversight or error. Remove and
replace defective and rejected products, materials, systems, and workmanship. Be
responsible for delays and expenses caused by rejection.
27
TEMPORARY CONTROLS
27.1
Fencing and barriers:
.1
Provide temporary enclosures consisting of 1800 mm high construction fencing as
required to protect the building in it’s entirety or in it’s parts, against the elements, to
maintain environmental conditions required for work within the enclosure, and to
prevent damage to materials stored within.
.2
Provide lockable gates through fencing and barriers for access to Site by workers
and vehicles.
27.2
Prevent unauthorized entry to the Site. Barricade, guard or lock access points to the
satisfaction of the Consultant and post "NO TRESPASSING" signs.
27.3
Install signs for movement of people around Work Site as required and directed by
the Consultant.
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 20
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
27.4
Provide secure, rigid guide rails and barricades around deep excavations, open
shafts, open stair wells, open edges of floors and roofs as required for protection of
Work, workers, and the public.
27.5
Remove fencing, barriers, building enclosures, guide rails and barricades upon
Contract Completion unless otherwise noted on the Contract Drawings or as directed
by the Consultant.
28
SITE SECURITY
28.1
Provide and pay for security personnel to guard the Site and contents of the Site
after working hours and during holidays as established by the Owner. Control of
access shall be through hoarding and barricades during times work is in progress,
and by locking hardware otherwise.
28.2
Any security service provided by the Owner is for the protection of the Owner's
interest in the Work on the Site and shall not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility to protect the Site and the Work of the Contract.
29
TEMPORARY WORKS
29.1
Installation and Removal: Provide temporary utilities, facilities and controls in order
to execute the Work expeditiously. Remove from Site all such Work after use.
29.2
Temporary Power and Lighting Systems:
.1
Supply, install and maintain electrical power and necessary electrical equipment.
Connections will be made available to any part of the Work within distance of a 30 m
extension.
.2
Provide temporary lighting of adequate intensity to illuminate construction activities.
.3
Make all necessary arrangements for and pay all costs for a temporary electrical
service of sufficient capacity to supply temporary lighting, operation of power tools,
and equipment for all construction, implementation, and inspection and testing
purposes. Supply and install necessary temporary cables and other electrical
equipment and make all temporary connections as required.
.4
Temporary power distribution wiring shall comply with Ontario Hydro Electrical Safety
Code. Obtain inspection certificates for temporary electrical work.
.5
Maintain the lighting systems in operation during the life of the Contract. Replace
burned or missing lamps immediately.
.6
Upon Contract Completion, remove electrical plant and temporary lighting from the
Site.
.7
Pay all costs for electrical energy consumed prior to Contract Completion.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
29.3
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 21
Water Supply:
.1
Provide and pay for a continuous supply of potable water for construction use.
.2
Provide and maintain all temporary lines, extensions and hoses as required.
Remove all temporary connections and lines on completion of the Work and make
good any damage.
29.4
Temporary Heating:
.1
Provide temporary heating required during construction period, including attendance,
maintenance and fuel.
.2
Construction heaters used inside buildings must be vented to the outside or be flame
less type. Solid fuel salamanders are not permitted.
.3
Maintain temperatures of minimum 10oC in areas where construction is in progress
unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. Protect exposed and
adjacent services from freezing. Repair at no cost to the Owner any such services,
buildings or other utilities disrupted by freezing.
.4
Ventilate heated areas and keep structures free from exhaust combustion gases.
.5
The permanent heating system of the building or portions thereof may be used when
available only upon written permission by Consultant.
29.5
Contractor's Drainage System: Provide and maintain a temporary drainage system
of sufficient capacity and efficiency to maintain the excavation free of water during
the construction period. Do not use any portion of the permanent drainage system
without the permission of the Consultant. Remove the temporary system upon
Contract Completion.
30
PROTECTION
30.1
Protection of Public Area: Protect surrounding private and public property from
damage during performance of the Work.
30.2
Protection of Building Finishes and Equipment:
.1
Provide protection for existing structure, finished and partially finished building
finishes, waterproofing systems, and equipment during performance of the Work.
.2
Cover Owner's equipment and plant within the Site with 6 mil PVC sheet, or equal,
taped to make it dust-tight. Equipment and existing work moved or altered to
facilitate construction, movement of Products or equipment shall be stored, protected
with dust-tight covers and subsequently returned to its original location.
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 22
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
.3
Obtain approval from the Consultant prior to the installation of temporary supporting
devices into existing roof, ceiling, or wall members for the erecting of equipment or
machinery. Repair roof, ceiling, and wall members used for this purpose to the
satisfaction of the Consultant.
.4
Provide necessary screens, covers and hoarding as required.
.5
Any Products or equipment damaged while carrying out the Work shall be restored
with new Products or equipment matching the original equipment. Damage shall
include harm resulting from all construction work, such as falling objects, wheel and
foot traffic, failure to remove debris, operation of machinery and equipment, and
scaffolding and hoisting operations.
30.3
Fire Protection:
.1
Take precautions to prevent fires. Provide and maintain temporary fire protection
equipment of a type appropriate to the hazard anticipated in accordance with
authorities having jurisdiction, governing codes, regulations, by-laws and to the
satisfaction of the Consultant and insurance authorities.
.2
Open burning of rubbish is not permitted on the Site.
31
PEST CONTROL
31.1
Be responsible to provide control measures, restraining procedures, and treatments
to prevent infestation and spread of insects, rodents and other pests deemed to be
present at Site and/or noticed during course of the Work. Carry out fumigation, pest
control procedure, and posting of warning signs, notices including contents of such
notices in accordance with requirements of Pesticides Act and any other authorities
having jurisdictions. Pesticides used shall be in accordance with Canada Pest
Control Products Act, and provincial and municipal regulations.
32
SITE MAINTENANCE
32.1
Maintain the Site and adjacent premises in a clean and orderly condition, free from
debris and other objectionable matter. Immediately remove rubbish and surplus
Products, equipment and structures from the Site. If the Site is not cleaned (within
48 hours after the Contractor has been instructed to do so), the Consultant may
clean the Site and retain the cost from monies due, or to become due, to the
Contractor.
32.2
When the Work is substantially performed, remove surplus Products, tools,
construction machinery and equipment not required for the performance of the
remaining Work.
33
SITE STORAGE AND OVER LOADING
33.1
Confine the Work and operations of employees to limits indicated by the Contract
Documents. Do not unreasonably encumber the Site with Products.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 23
33.2
Products shall be stored only in areas designated or approved by the Consultant,
and shall not be left lying on streets, sidewalks, boulevards or elsewhere within
public view. Products which the Consultant may permit to be stored elsewhere than
in the Contractor's storage areas shall be neatly stacked or otherwise disposed and
shall be so maintained.
33.3
Do not load or permit to be loaded any part of the Work with a weight or force that it
is calculated to bear safely. Be solely responsible and liable for damages resulting
from violation of this requirement. Provide temporary supports as strong as
permanent support.
33.4
Do not cut, drill or sleeve load bearing members unless shown on drawings or
otherwise approved by the Consultant in writing for each location.
33.5
Site storage and loading requirements to be in accordance with the Ontario
Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations for Construction Projects.
34
SUBSTITUTIONS
34.1
Requests for substitutions will not be accepted prior to the Notification of Award.
Substitutions will be considered by the Consultant provided that:
.1
The proposed substitutions have been investigated and complete data are submitted
in accordance with the Specifications.
.2
Data relating to changes in the Contract Schedule, if any, and relation to other Work
have been submitted.
.3
Same warranty is given for the substitution as for the original Product specified.
.4
All claims are waived for additional costs related to the substitution which may
subsequently arise.
.5
Installation of the accepted substitution is co-ordinated into the Work and that full
responsibility is assumed when substitutions affect other work. Make any necessary
changes required to complete the Work. Revisions to the drawings for incorporation
of the substitutions shall be made by the Consultant and all costs associated with the
revisions shall be borne by the Contractor.
34.2
Substitutions to methods or process described in the Specifications or drawings, may
be proposed for the consideration of the Consultant. Ensure that such substitutions
are in accordance with the following requirements:
.1
Time spent by the Consultant in evaluating the substitution shall not be the basis for
a claim by the Contractor for extensions to the Contract Time.
.2
Clearly indicate how the proposed substitutions would be advantageous to the
Owner or in the opinion of the Contractor would improve the operation of the
installation.
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 24
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
.3
Be responsible for substitutions to methods or processes concerning such Work and
ensure that the warranty covering all parts of the Work will not be affected.
.4
The cost of all changes in the work of Other Contractors, necessitated by the
substituted methods or processes, if accepted, is borne by the Contractor.
.5
The substituted methods or processes fit into space allotted for the specified
methods or processes. Revisions to the drawings for incorporation of the
substitutions shall be made by the Consultant and all costs associated with the
revisions shall be borne by the Contractor.
Substitutions will not be considered if:
.1
They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or Product data without formal
request.
.2
Acceptance will require substantial revision of the Specifications and Drawings.
34.3
34.4
Do not substitute Products or methods or processes into the Work unless such
substitutions have been specifically approved for the Work by the Consultant.
34.5
Approved substituted Products shall be subject to the Consultant's inspection and
testing procedures. Approved substituted Products shall only be installed after
receipt of the Consultant's written approval.
34.6
The Contract Price will be adjusted accordingly to any and all credits arising from the
substitutions mentioned above.
35
APPROVAL OF PRODUCTS AND INSTALLATION METHODS
35.1
Wherever in the Specifications it is specified that Products and installation methods
shall meet approval of Authorities having Jurisdiction, underwriters, the Consultant,
or others, such approval shall be in writing.
36
AVAILABILITY
36.1
If delays in supply of Products are foreseeable, notify the Consultant of such, in
order that remedial action may be authorized in ample time to prevent delay in
performance of Work.
36.2
In the event of failure to notify the Consultant at commencement of Work and should
it subsequently appear that Work may be delayed for such reason, the Consultant
reserves the right to direct the Contractor to take the following measures at no
increase in Contract Price:
.1
Substitute more readily available Products of similar or better quality and character,
or
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
.2
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 25
Temporarily install another Product until such time as the specified Product becomes
available, at which time the temporarily installed product shall be removed and the
specified Product installed.
37
DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING AND PROTECTION
37.1
Be responsible for handling and delivery of Products. Protect Products from damage
during handling, storage and installation. Deliver store and handle items in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as specified. Be responsible for all
costs of delivery, loading and off-loading, and for transportation back to its origin for
correction, if required, due to damage or defect. Reject materials and Products
delivered to the Site which are damaged.
37.2
Manufacture, pack, ship, deliver, and handle Products so that no damage occurs to
structural qualities and finish appearance, nor in any other way which is detrimental
to their function and appearance.
37.3
Ensure that Products, while transported, are not exposed to an environment which
would increase their moisture content beyond the maximum specified.
37.4
Organize delivery of materials, Products and equipment to, and removal of debris
and equipment from, the site and surrounding property.
37.5
Schedule early delivery of Products to enable Work to be executed without delay.
Before delivery, arrange for receiving at the Place of the Work.
37.6
Shop assemble work for delivery to Site in size easily handled and to ensure
passage through building openings.
37.7
Deliver packaged Products, in original unopened wrapping or containers, with
manufacturer's seals and labels intact.
37.8
Label packaged products to describe contents, quantity, and other information as
specified.
37.9
Labels attesting that materials conform to specified reference standards will be
acceptable as verification that contents meet specified requirements. In the absence
of labels, submit affidavits to validate conformance of Product to reference
standards, as requested by the Consultant.
37.10
Label fire-rated Products to indicate Underwriters' Laboratories approval.
37.11
Handle and store materials and products in such a manner that no damage is
caused to the materials and products, the Work, the Site and surrounding property.
37.12
Locate products on Site in a manner to cause minimal interference with the Work
and building activities.
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 26
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
37.13
Store Products off the ground, in a manner to prevent damage, adulteration,
deterioration and soiling to the Products, other building components, assemblies,
other products, the structure, the Site and surrounding property, and in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions when applicable.
37.14
Store packaged or bundled Products in original and undamaged condition complete
with written application instructions. Keep manufacturer's seals and labels intact. Do
not remove from packaging or bundling until required in the Work.
37.15
Do not place or store materials and Products in corridors, public areas, streets,
lanes, passageways or similar locations.
37.16
Store Products so as not to create any overloading conditions to any part of the
building, structure, falsework, form work and scaffolding.
37.17
Store Products subject to damage from weather in weatherproof enclosures.
37.18
Store cementitious Products clear of earth or concrete floors, and away from walls.
37.19
Keep sand, when used for grout or mortar materials, clean and dry. Store sand on
wooden platforms and cover with waterproof tarpaulins during inclement weather.
37.20
Store sheet materials and lumber on flat, solid supports and keep clear of ground.
Slope to shed moisture.
37.21
Store and handle flammable liquids and other hazardous materials in approved
safety containers and as otherwise prescribed by safety authorities. Store no
flammable liquids or other hazardous material in bulk within the Work.
37.22
Store and mix paints in a heated and ventilated room or area assigned for this
purpose. Keep this room or area locked when unattended. Remove oily rags and
other combustible debris from the Place of the Work daily. Take every precaution
necessary to prevent spontaneous combustion.
37.23
Protect prefinished metal surfaces by protective coatings or wrappings until time of
final cleanup. Protection shall be easily removable without damage to finishes. Do
not permit strippable tape or coatings to become baked on surfaces which they
protect.
37.24
Touch-up damaged factory finished surfaces to Consultant's satisfaction. Use primer
and paint to match original.
37.25
Protect glass and other finishes against heat, slag and weld splatter by provision on
adequate shielding. Do not apply Visible markings to surfaces exposed to view in
finished state or that receive transparent finishes.
37.26
Protect surfaces of completed work exposed to view from staining, disfigurement and
all other damage by restriction of access or by use of physical means suitable for the
material and surface location.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 27
37.27
Adequately protect trowelled concrete floors from damage. Take special measure
when moving heavy loads or equipment on them.
37.28
Keep concrete floors and finished free from oils, grease or other material likely to
damage or discolour them or affect bond of applied finishes. One building is
enclosed, keep floors as dry as possible after curing.
37.29
Protect finished flooring from pedestrian traffic with minimum reinforced kraft paper
temporary protection, secured in place and with joints sealed by reinforced pressure
sensitive tape. Maintain protection in place until contract completion.
37.30
Protect finished flooring from continuing construction work and delivery of products
with plywood panels of minimum 6 mm thickness with joints between panels sealed
with reinforced pressure sensitive tape. Maintain protection in place until work and
deliveries are complete.
37.31
Make good or replace damaged materials to the satisfaction of the Consultant.
37.32
Hazardous Materials Information:
.1
Comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System
(WHMIS) regarding use, handling, storage, and disposal of hazardous materials; and
regarding labelling and provision of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) in
accordance with jurisdictional authorities.
.2
Deliver copies of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) to the Consultant on all
Products intended for use in the Work and designated as a "controlled product."
38
TREE PROTECTION AND REMOVAL
38.1
Within Contractor's assigned work and storage areas and adjacent to designated
access routes, protect existing trees and other plants scheduled to remain. Provide
minimum 1.8 m high construction fencing outside of dripline of trees or groups of
trees and other plants.
38.2
Leave fenced areas undisturbed; do not use areas for storage, stockpiling or any
other purpose. Do not dump or flush any contaminants in areas of tree feeder roots.
38.3
Do not attach rigging cables to trees.
38.4
Where trees, limbs or portions of plants are required to be removed to accommodate
new work, they shall be removed in accordance with accepted arboricultural practice
and requirements of Authorities having Jurisdiction.
38.5
Where root systems of protected trees adjacent to construction are exposed or
damaged, they shall be neatly trimmed and the area backfilled with suitable material
to prevent desiccation.
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 28
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
38.6
Where necessary give plants an overall pruning to restore the balance between roots
and top growth and/or to restore appearance.
38.7
Except at locations where specific procedures are included in Contract Documents
do not alter grades around existing trees/plants without first obtaining Consultant's
consent and directions.
39
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
39.1
Unless otherwise indicated in the Specifications, fabricate, install, apply, connect,
install, erect, use, clean, and condition Products in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions except where more stringent requirements are specified. Do not rely on
labels or enclosures provided with Products. Obtain written instructions directly from
manufacturers.
39.2
Notify the Consultant in writing, of conflicts between the Specifications and
manufacturer's instructions, so that the Consultant may establish the course of
action. If requested, make a copy of those instructions available at the Site.
39.3
In cases of improper installation or erection of Products, due to failure in complying
with these requirements, the Consultant may direct removal and re-installation at no
increase in Contract Price.
40
WORKMANSHIP
40.1
Workmanship shall be the best quality, executed by workers experienced and skilled
in the respective duties for which they are employed. Immediately notify the
Consultant if required Work is such as to make it impractical to produce required
results.
40.2
Do not employ any unfit person or anyone unskilled in their required duties. The
Consultant reserves the right to require the dismissal from the Place of the Work,
workers deemed incompetent, careless, insubordinate or otherwise objectionable.
40.3
Decisions as to the quality or fitness of workmanship in cases of dispute rest solely
with the Consultant, whose decision is final.
40.4
Give particular attention to finished dimensions and elevations of the Work. Make
finished Work fit indicated spaces accurately. Make finished Work flush, plumb, true
to lines and levels and accurate in all respects.
40.5
In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts, conduit and wiring in floors, walls, ceilings,
chases, or behind furring except where indicated otherwise.
40.6
Ensure that service poles, fill-pipes, vents, regulators, metres and similar service
installations are located in inconspicuous locations. If not indicated on drawings,
verify location of service installations with Consultant prior to commencing
installation.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 29
40.7
Ensure that integrity of fire separations is maintained where they are penetrated.
40.8
Finish access panels and doors to match adjacent wall and/or ceiling finish unless
otherwise specified or indicated.
40.9
Keep surfaces, on which finished materials will be applied, free from grease, oil, and
other contamination which would be detrimental in any way to the application of
finish materials.
40.10
Enforce fire prevention methods at site. Do not permit fires, open flame heating
devices or accumulation or debris. Use flammable materials only if all safety
precautions are taken. Provide and maintain in working order ULC labelled fire
extinguishers of types suitable for fire hazard in each case, and locate them in
prominent location and to approval of jurisdictional authorities.
40.11
Where flammable materials are being applied, ensure that adequate ventilation is
provided, spark-proof equipment is used, and smoking and open flames are
prohibited.
41
DIMENSIONS
41.1
Check all dimensions at the Site before fabrication and installation commences and
report discrepancies to the Consultant.
41.2
Where dimensions are not available before fabrication commences, ensure that
dimensions required are agreed upon between the parties concerned.
41.3
Prior to commencing work, ensure that clearances required by jurisdictional
authorities can be maintained.
41.4
Wall thicknesses and openings shown on the drawings may be nominal only;
ascertain actual sizes at the Site.
41.5
Verify dimensions of shop fabricated portions of the Work at the Site before shop
drawings and fabrications are commenced. The Owner will not accept claims for
extra expense by reason of non-compliance with this requirement.
41.6
Fabricate and erect manufactured items, shop fabricated items, and items fabricated
on or off site, to suit site dimensions and site conditions.
41.7
In areas where equipment is to be installed, check dimensional data on equipment to
ensure that area and equipment dimensions are compatible with necessary access
and clearance provided. Ensure that equipment supplied is dimensionally suitable
for space provided.
41.8
Leave areas clear where space is indicated to be reserved for future equipment,
including access to such future equipment.
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 30
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
41.9
Whether shown on the Drawings or not, leave adequate space and provision for
servicing of equipment and removal and reinstallation of replaceable items such as
motors, coils and tubes.
42
EXPANSION, CONTRACTION, AND DEFLECTION
42.1
Conform to manufacturer’s recommended installation temperatures. If items,
components, assemblies, systems, and finishes are installed at temperatures
different from operation or service temperatures, make provisions for expansion and
contraction in service as acceptable to manufacturer and consultant. Repair all
resulting damage should expansion provisions provide inadequate.
42.2
Make provisions for expansion and contraction due to temperature changes within
components, Products and assemblies, and between adjacent components,
Products and assemblies, and due to building movements including but not limited to
creep, column shortening, deflection, sway and twist. Ensure provisions for
expansion, contraction and building movements prevent damages from occurring to
and within components, Products and assemblies.
42.3
Make adequate allowance at wall and partition heads for deflection of the structure
above. Determine requirements from Consultant where additional information is
required. Where partitions butt to underside of floor assembly, or structural framing,
the clearance shall be based on the span of the members supporting the floor or
structural framing. In making such allowance use methods which maintain the
integrity of the wall or partition as a sound, and/or fire barrier.
42.4
Make provisions in pipes, plenums, ducts and vessels containing air and fluids as is
necessary to prevent damage due to fluid and air induced pressure, surges and
vibrations, to pipes, plenums, ducts and vessels and to adjacent components,
assemblies and construction to which pipes, ducts, plenums and vessels are
attached or pass through.
43
DIELECTRIC SEPARATION
43.1
Ensure that a dielectric separator is provided in a permanent manner over entire
contact surfaces to prevent electrolytic action (galvanic corrosion) between dissimilar
materials. Similarly, prevent corrosion to aluminum in contact with alkaline materials
such as contained in cementitious materials.
44
PRODUCTS AT SOUND ATTENUATING PARTITIONS
44.1
Avoid sound transfer at sound attenuating partitions by careful location and
treatment of mechanical and electrical equipments, ducts, grilles, diffusers, electrical
outlets and boxes, and similar items. Where electrical boxes are back to back,
serving each side, locate them at least 250 mm apart laterally and, if interconnected,
use flexible connections.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 31
45
FASTENINGS
45.1
Include in the work of each section necessary fastenings, anchors, inserts,
attachment accessories, and adhesives. Where installation of devices is in work or
other sections, deliver and locate devices in ample time for installation.
45.2
Do not install fibre, plastic or wood plugs or blocking for fastenings in masonry,
concrete, or metal construction, unless specified or indicated on drawings.
45.3
Install work with fastenings or adhesives in sufficient quantity to ensure permanent
secure anchorage of materials, construction, components and equipment under
static conditions, and to resist building thermal movement, creep and vibration.
45.4
Provide metal fastenings and accessories in same material, texture, colour, sheen
and finish as metal on which they occur, unless indicated otherwise.
45.5
Prevent electrolytic action between dissimilar metals and materials.
45.6
Space anchors within their load limit or shear capacity and ensure they provide
positive permanent anchorage. Wood, or any other organic material plugs are not
acceptable.
45.7
Conceal fasteners where indicated. Keep exposed fastenings to a minimum, space
evenly and in an organized symmetrical pattern.
45.8
Fastenings which cause spalling or cracking of material to which anchorage is made
are not acceptable.
46
ADJUSTING
46.1
Ensure that all components of assemblies fit snugly, accurately and in true planes,
and that moving parts operate positively and freely, without binding and scraping.
46.2
Verify that work functions properly and adjust it accordingly to ensure satisfactory
operation. Lubricate Products as recommended by manufacturer.
47
DEMONSTRATION AND INSPECTION OF PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS
47.1
Arrange for a demonstration of systems and operating Products upon the 100%
completion of their installation and prior to certification for Substantial Performance.
47.2
Include in the arrangements for the attendance of the Consultant, Owner,
jurisdictional authorities, and personnel assigned by the Owner for the operation of
the systems and/or Products.
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 32
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
47.3
Demonstrations shall be conducted by the Subcontractor responsible for the
installation of the systems and/or Product, assisted by representatives of the
manufacturer or supplier. All personnel conducting the demonstration shall be
completely knowledgeable of all conditions of the operating, functioning and
maintenance of the systems and/or Products.
47.4
Owner's representative will acknowledge the successful completion of each
demonstration on a form provided by the Contractor. The form shall be agreed to by
the Owner, Consultant and Contractor prior to demonstration and testing.
47.5
Submit copies of letters from manufacturers of Systems and/or Products before
making application for certificate of Substantial Performance to verify that the
Products has been installed and connected correctly, and that it is operating in a
satisfactory manner. The certification shall be based upon inspection and testing of
the Products by competent technical personnel. Include in letter of certification the
names of personnel conducting the testing and inspection, the methods of
inspection utilized, and the location in the building of the Products certified.
47.6
Following submission of letters of certification and their acceptance by the Owner,
the owner shall have the right to use the Products on a trial basis and for instructing
their personnel in its use.
48
FINAL INSPECTIONS AND CLOSE OUT
48.1
Submit proposed closeout procedures and schedule of inspection to Consultant for
approval before final demonstrations and inspections commence.
48.2
Arrange for, conduct and document final demonstrations, inspections, close-out and
take-over at completion of the Work in accordance with procedures described in
OAA/OGCA TAKE-OVER PROCEDURES, OAA/OGCA Document No. 100. Where
"Architect" is referred to in Document No. 100 it shall mean Consultant.
49
GARBAGE DISPOSAL AND CLEANUP
49.1
Subtrades shall provide waste containers for the disposal of all waste materials
resulting from performance of their work.
49.2
No hazardous or contaminated waste material shall be placed in Owner’s waste
containers and Subtrades shall make their own arrangements for the disposal off site
of any such material resulting from performance of their work.
49.3
Subtrades shall remove all regular waste material and debris from their work areas
and deposit in the waste containers at the end of each working day. Any clean up
work not performed as requested will be carried out by the Owner with all resultant
costs being charged to the Subtrade.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
50
CLEANING
50.1
Progress cleaning:
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 33
.1
Remove from finish work, spatters, droppings, soil, labels, and debris, before they
set up.
.2
Ensure that only cleaning materials are used which are recommended for the
purpose by both the manufacturer of the surface to be cleaned and of the cleaning
material.
.3
Maintain building work areas "broom clean" at least on a daily basis, but cleaning
shall also be done immediately before finishing work.
.4
No waste material may be burned or buried at site. Remove waste as often as
required to avoid accumulation, no less than, at the end of each working day.
.5
Remove packaging materials and debris from the site immediately product and
equipment is unwrapped or uncrated.
.6
Ensure that volatile fluid wastes are not disposed of in storm or sanitary sewers, in
open drain courses, or anywhere on site.
.7
Do not allow waste material and debris to accumulate in an unsightly or hazardous
manner. Sprinkle dusty accumulations with water. Provide containers in which to
collect waste material and debris. Dispose of hazardous products in accordance
with requirements of jurisdictional authorities.
.8
Ensure that cleaning operations are scheduled to avoid deposits of dust or other
foreign matter on surfaces during finishing work and until wet or tacky surfaces are
cured.
.9
Provide instructions for final cleaning of finishing work, and for inclusion in
Maintenance and Operating Manuals.
50.2
Final cleaning:
.1
Before final inspection, replace glass and mirrors broken, damaged, and etched
during construction, or which are otherwise defective.
.2
In addition to requirements for progress cleaning, Work shall include final cleaning by
skilled cleaning specialists on completion of construction.
.3
Remove temporary protections and make good defects before commencement of
final cleaning.
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 34
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
.4
Final cleaning shall remove dust, stains, paint spots, soil, grease, fingerprints, and
accumulations of construction materials, interior and exterior to the building for all
new work throughout new and existing Building. Work shall be done in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions for each material. This work shall include:
.1
Washing of exterior paved surfaces, and of interior stone, brick, and concrete
floors.
.2
Cleaning and polishing of glass, porcelain, enamel and finish metals.
.3
Vacuum cleaning of ceilings, walls and floors.
.4
Cleaning of existing floors affected by Work of this Project to Consultant’s
approval.
.5
Washing clean of glazed wall surfaces.
.6
Cleaning of hardware, mechanical fixtures, plumbing fixtures, lighting fixtures,
cover plates, and equipment, including polishing of their finish metal,
porcelain, vitreous, and glass components.
.7
Cleaning of windows and entrances, both interior and exterior surfaces.
.5
Maintain cleaning until Owner has taken possession of building or portions thereof.
51
PROGRESS RECORDS
51.1
Maintain on site, permanent written records of daily progress of the Work. Records
shall be open to review by Consultant and Owner at all times and a copy shall be
furnished to Consultant on a weekly basis.
51.2
Records shall show dates of commencement, progress and completion of various
trades and items of work. Particulars pertaining to number of employees of various
trades and type and quantity of equipment employed daily, temperature, protection
methods and other such data shall be noted.
52
RECORD DRAWINGS
52.1
Authorized deviations from drawings shall be marked in red accurately on one set of
drawing prints in a neat, legibly printed manner and shall be dated. Prior to final
inspection, neatly transfer the recorded information to a second set of drawing prints
of the most recent revision to the drawings and submit both sets to the Consultant.
52.2
Maintain record drawings up to date as Work progresses. Status of maintained
record drawings may be considered as a condition for validation of applications for
payment.
52.3
Identify each record drawing as "Contract Record Copy" and maintain the record
drawings in good condition. Make record drawings available to the Consultant at all
times.
52.4
Record drawings shall include accurate dimensioned record of deviations and
changes in Work from drawings.
52.5
Record drawings shall be signed and dated by Contractor.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 35
52.6
Submit record drawing to Consultant for review and make corrections as directed by
Consultant.
52.7
Record accurately all deviations in the Work.
52.8
Accurately record locations of concealed structure, mechanical and electrical
services and similar Work not clearly in view, the location of which is required for
maintenance, alteration Work and future additions. Do not conceal such Work until
the location has been recorded.
52.9
Accurately record locations of equipment bases, anchors, concrete pads and roof
curbs, sleeves, piping, conduits, ducts, maintenance holes and valves, etc. located
either below, outside or within structure.
52.10
Where piping, conduits and ducts are underground, underfloor, embedded in
concrete or otherwise in unaccessible locations, accurately record with respect to
structure column lines or walls and elevations with respect to finished floor levels or
grades referenced to the centre line of components.
52.11
Accurately record any components which will be in inaccessible locations for
Consultant's review before the component is covered, or buried, or made
inaccessible.
53
AS BUILT DRAWINGS
53.1
At time of Substantial Performance of the Work, the Consultants will collect all
as-built drawings from the Contractors and transcribe them onto the project CAD
files. A compact disc with all drawings in a .dwg format will be turned over to the
Project Coordinator.
53.2
Receipt of Contractors’ on site drawings will be required at time of Substantial
Performance of the Work.
54
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
54.1
Hand over to the Consultant two (2) hard copies and one (1) PDF file in CD of a
comprehensive operations and maintenance manual and material suitable for the
Owner's maintenance employees. These manuals will outline all materials and
equipment used on the project as well as all manufacturer parts cuts and
maintenance recommendations.
54.2
Submit draft of the operation and maintenance manuals for the Consultant's review
at least 15 days before testing systems and equipment. Incorporate alterations and
additions, as found to be necessary during testing, and prepare the final version of
the manual from the corrected draft.
54.3
Submit final version of operation and maintenance manuals prior to Substantial
Performance of the Work.
Section 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 36
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
54.4
Testing of systems and equipment will not be deemed to be complete until the
requisite number of copies of the final version of the manuals has been handed over
to the Consultant.
54.5
If standard literature is incorporated into the operations and maintenance manual,
any irrelevant information shall be deleted, or suitably noted.
54.6
The manuals shall have sufficient detail in order that the Owner can totally maintain
the equipment without outside help.
54.7
Submit all material in English.
54.8
All manuals are to be bound into black 3-ring binders with the project’s final name
prominently displayed on the spine.
54.9
Approved copies of each of the following are to be bound into the manuals:
.1
All warranties and extended warranties.
.2
All maintenance recommendations.
.3
All shop drawings.
END OF SECTION
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
1
General
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
Section 02050
DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS
Page 1
.1
Labour, Products, equipment and services necessary for demolition and removals
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
.2
Work included: Requirements for demolishing, salvaging and removing wholly or in
part the various items designated on the drawings or required to be removed or
partially removed for the receipt of the Work of this Contract, including not
necessarily limited to:
.1
Alteration and renovations to existing building.
.2
Cutting and removing of walls, floors, ceilings, doors and frames, in the
existing buildings as indicated on Drawings.
.3
Patching, making good openings and chases in walls, floors, ceilings,
including the supply and installation of lintels, channels and finishes.
.4
Removal of rubbish, debris, demolished fixtures, fitments and items not
scheduled to remain the Owner's property, resulting from the demolition and
preparatory work.
.5
Remove abandoned services such as conduits, pipes, wiring, ducts, fixtures,
equipment, etc. where required for the work or indicated on the drawings.
.6
Removal of asphalt pavements, concrete curbs and walks, and other site
amenities as indicated on drawings.
.7
Removal of all mechanical items including plumbing fixtures, services etc.
where required for the work or indicated on drawings and or where not
required to be relocated.
.8
Removal of existing electrical items including fixtures, etc. where required for
the work or indicated on the drawings and not required to be relocated.
.9
Dust control during the operations of the work of this Section.
.10
Removal shall mean removal from site and safe disposal in a legal manner.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
CSA S350-M, Code of Practice for Safety in Demolition of Structures.
.2
OPSS, Ontario Provincial Standard Specification.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Where required by Authorities having jurisdiction, submit a Fire Plan to local fire
department for review and approval.
.2
Submit shop drawings, diagrams and details in accordance with the Conditions of
the Contract.
.3
30 calendar days prior to start of demolition and removals Work, submit for review,
drawings, diagrams or details showing sequence of disassembly Work and shoring
of supporting structures in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction.
Section 02050
DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS
Page 2
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
.4
Submit for approval, a plan showing impacts, interruptions and delays to Owners
operations.
.5
Submit Dust Control Plan conforming to requirements of the City of Toronto’s Public
Health Services.
.6
Have submissions signed and sealed by Professional Engineer licensed in Province
of Ontario.
.7
Submit to Consultant, details of where rubble, debris and other materials are to be
disposed or reused. Include each disposal/reuse site location, operator's name and
business address, type of license under which site operates, and criteria used by site
to assess suitability of rubble, debris and other materials for disposal.
.8
Give notice to Utility Authorities controlling services and appurtenances which will be
affected by demolition Work.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Prepare waste audits, waste reduction workplans, source separation programs and
recycling programs as required by jurisdictional authorities and update programs and
implement such programs as required.
.2
Perform the work of this section in accordance with the ‘Environmental Protection
Act’ including Ontario Regulation 102 and the ‘Environmental Assessment Act’
including Ontario Regulation 103.
.3
Conform to Fire Code, Regulation under the Fire Marshals Act.
.4
The demolition contractor must engage a registered professional engineer who holds
a certificate of authorization and an appropriate level of liability insurance to prepare
demolition procedures.
.5
As part of the contract requirements, the engineer for the demolition contractor
should be required to sign the general review commitment required by city building
departments.
1.5
SITE CONDITIONS
.1
Interruptions to Owners operations will not be permitted.
.2
Perform operations, machine and equipment movements, deliveries and removals at
time or times that will permit uninterrupted operations in and around structures,
including parking, deliveries, and Site access and egress.
.3
Take over structures to be demolished based on condition on date that Tenders
close.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
2
Products
2.1
MATERIALS
Section 02050
DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS
Page 3
.1
All materials requiring removal shall become the Contractor's property and shall be
removed and disposed of from the site, as the work progresses, unless indicated
otherwise.
.2
Salvaged material:
.1
Salvage and stockpile Products, materials, and equipment as specified
herein, indicated on Site or indicated on drawings.
.2
Coordinate items to be salvaged with Consultant.
.3
Salvaged materials shall not be chipped, cracked, split, stained or damaged.
.4
Store items off of moist surfaces.
3
Execution
3.1
GENERAL
.1
Clean up rubble and debris, resulting from Work promptly and dispose at end of day
or place in waste disposal bins. Empty bins on regular basis.
.2
Stockpiling of rubble, debris, and surplus Products on Site will not be permitted.
.3
Remove, handle and transport Products indicated to be salvaged and stored for
future use. Transport Products to storage area(s) designated by Consultant. Perform
Work to prevent any damage to Products during removal and in storage. Products
damaged during removal, will be inspected by Consultant. Consultant will determine
extent of damage and accept or refuse Products.
.4
List and description of items to be removed and stored or reused:
.1
Millwork.
.2
Additional items as indicated on the drawings or by the Consultant.
.5
Tag and log all items to be salvaged to the satisfaction of the Consultant. Ensure
identification tags do not damage items to be salvaged and are non-permanent,
removable and durable.
.6
Communicate Dust Control Plan procedures to all appropriate personnel on site and
their head offices and due diligence measures to be maintained to control all fugitive
emissions.
.7
Take precautions to guard against movement, settlement or collapse of adjacent
services, sidewalks, driveways, or trees. Be liable for such movement, settlement or
collapse caused by failure to take necessary precautions. Repair promptly such
damage when ordered.
Section 02050
DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS
Page 4
3.2
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
EXAMINATION
.1
3.3
Examine adjacent structures and other installations prior to commencement of
demolition and removals Work.
PRESERVATION OF REFERENCES
.1
3.4
Record location and designation of survey markers and monuments located within
demolition area, prior to removal. Store and restore markers and monuments upon
completion of Work or relocate as directed by Consultant.
PROTECTION
.1
Provide, erect and maintain required hoarding, sidewalk sheds, catch platforms,
lights and other protection around Site before commencing work. Maintain such
areas free of snow, ice, mud, water and debris. Lighting levels shall be equal to that
prior to erection.
.2
Provide flagmen where necessary or appropriate to provide effective and safe
access to Site to vehicular traffic and protection to pedestrian traffic.
.3
Prevent movement or damage of adjacent structures, services, walks, paving, trees,
landscaping and parts of existing structure to remain. Supply and install bracing, and
shoring as required. Make good damage caused by demolition to acceptance of
Consultant.
.4
Protect adjacent structures and property against damage which might occur from
falling debris or other causes. Repair or replace damage caused from Work of this
Section to acceptance of Consultant.
.5
Do not interfere with use of adjacent structures and Work areas. Maintain free, safe
passage to and from adjacent structures and Work areas.
.6
Take precautions to support affected structures. If safety of structure being
demolished, adjacent structures or services are endangered, cease demolition
operations and take necessary action to support endangered item. Immediately
inform Consultant. Do not resume demolition until reasons for endangering have
been determined and corrected and action taken to prevent further endangering.
.7
If movement or settlement occurs, install additional bracing and shoring as
necessary and make good damage to acceptance of Consultant.
.8
Hang tarpaulins where debris and other materials are lowered. Build in around
openings with wood and plywood at locations used for removal of debris and
materials.
.9
Prevent debris from blocking surface drainage system, elevators, mechanical, and
electrical systems which are required to remain in operation.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 02050
DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS
Page 5
.10
Pay particular attention to prevention of fire and elimination of fire hazards which
would endanger Work or adjacent structures and premises.
.11
Supply and install adequate protection for materials to be re-used, set on ground and
prevent moisture pick-up. Cover stockpiles of materials with tarpaulins.
.12
Close off access to areas where demolition is proceeding by barricades and post
warning signs.
.13
Supply, install and maintain legal and necessary barricades, guards, railings, lights,
warning signs, security personnel and other safety measures, and fully protect
persons and property.
.14
Dust/weather partitions:
.1
Prior to demolition Work proceeding in existing structures, temporarily
enclose Work areas, access and supply and install dustproof and
weatherproof partitions. Design partitions to prevent dust and dirt infiltration
into adjoining areas, prevent ingress of water, and to resist loads due to wind.
.2
Prevent dust, dirt and water from demolition operations entering operational
areas.
.3
Adjust and relocate partitions as required for various operations of Work.
.4
Upon completion of Work, remove and dispose of partitions from Site.
.15
Blasting is not permitted.
3.5
PREPARATION
.1
Disconnect and/or re-route electrical data, communication and telephone service
lines entering structures to be demolished. Remove abandoned lines as indicated on
Contract Drawings. Post warning signs on electrical lines and equipment which is
required to remain energized.
.2
Disconnect and cap designated mechanical services:
.1
Natural gas supply lines: As indicated on drawings, to be removed by
qualified workers in accordance with gas company instructions.
.2
Sewer and water lines: Remove and dispose of as indicated on Contract
Drawings.
.3
Other underground services: Remove and dispose of as indicated on
Contract Drawings.
.3
Disassemble and remove mechanical equipment, ductwork and piping complete with
supports and associated components.
.4
Do not disrupt active or energized utilities designated to remain undisturbed.
.5
Perform rodent and vermin control to comply with health regulations.
Section 02050
DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS
Page 6
3.6
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
DEMOLITION
.1
Perform demolition with extreme care. Confine effects of demolition to those parts
which are to be demolished.
.2
Perform Work and prevent inconvenience to persons outside those parts which are
to be demolished.
.3
Carry out demolition in accordance with the requirements of CSA S350-M.
.4
Demolish parts of structure to permit construction of addition.
.5
Demolition shall proceed safely in systematic manner from roof to grade and as
necessary to accommodate remedial work indicated. Work on each floor level shall
be complete before commencing work on supporting structure and safety of its
supports are impaired. Parts of building which would otherwise collapse prematurely
shall be securely shored. Walls and piers shall not be undermined.
.6
Do not overload floor or wall with accumulations of material or debris or by other
loads.
.7
Perform Work to minimize dusting. Keep Work area wetted down with fog sprays to
prevent dust and dirt rising. Supply and install temporary water lines and connections
that may be required. Upon completion, remove installed temporary water lines. Use
covered chutes, water down.
.8
Do not sell or burn materials on Site.
.9
Remove existing equipment, services, and obstacles where required for refinishing
or making good of existing surfaces, and replace as Work progresses.
.10
At end of day's Work, leave Work in safe condition with no part in danger of toppling
or falling. Protect interiors of parts not to be demolished from exterior elements.
.11
Drainage and sewer system protection:
.1
Ensure that no dust, debris or slurry enters drainage and sewer system on
Site.
.2
Remove and dispose of debris and slurry promptly from Site.
.3
Comply with City of Toronto Sewer Use By-Law.
.12
Asphalt pavement:
.1
Break out and remove existing asphalt pavement, curbs and sidewalks within
confines of Work as shown on Contract Drawings.
.2
Square up adjacent surfaces to remain in place by saw cutting or other
methods acceptable to Consultant to avoid damage to remaining pavement.
.3
Protect adjacent joints and load transfer devices.
.4
Protect underlying granular materials.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 02050
DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS
Page 7
.13
Concrete:
.1
Demolish concrete by methods which avoid impact loads on items which are
not to be demolished.
.2
Where only part or parts of a concrete floor, wall, roof, foundation or other
items are to be demolished, use saw cuts to isolate areas which are to be
demolished except where existing reinforcing steel is to be left in place. Prior
to such isolating, install suitable support to prevent premature movement of
area(s) being isolated and undesirable transfer of loads as cutting
progresses. If necessary remove area(s) to be demolished by successively
isolating small sections.
.3
Where reinforcing steel is to be left in place, use saw cuts from surface of
concrete reinforcing steel around perimeter(s) of area(s) to be demolished,
chip concrete without damaging reinforcing steel. Retouch damaged epoxy
coating of existing reinforcing steel.
.14
Masonry:
.1
Demolish block or brick walls in small sections of not more than 2 m2. Do not
permit masonry to fall in mass from one level to another.
.2
Where only part(s) of a wall is to be demolished, install adequate support for
adjacent part(s).
.3
Clean and stack blocks and bricks to be reused.
.4
After removal of masonry walls, grind smooth floors ready for new floor finish.
.5
Wall areas requiring brick infill; remove existing brick to allow for toothing in
method of installation.
.15
Steel: Where only part or parts of structure is to be demolished, dismantle and
maintain structure stable. Do not place excessive loads on components. Install
adequate temporary guys and supports to ensure stability and to prevent excessive
loading. Support each component being disconnected from structure, and lower, do
not drop, component after it is disconnected.
.16
Cut openings through existing walls, partitions, roofs and floors. Establish exact
location of steel reinforcing in existing concrete slabs or walls before cutting. Be
responsible for damage to existing steel reinforcing and be liable for structural
failure. Make good surfaces disturbed with materials to match existing.
17.
Where doors are scheduled to be removed, include removal of door frames and door
hardware.
18.
Remove interior partitions, fittings, fixtures and accessories as indicated on
drawings. Partitions and walls shall be removed full height to structure above.
19.
Remove interior finishes, such as ceiling and floor finishes, where new finishes are
indicated on Room Finish Schedule.
1.
Removal of existing ceilings shall include complete removal including
bulkheads and suspension system.
2.
Removal of adhesive applied finishes shall include complete removal to
substrate including adhesive. Take adequate care to prevent damage to
substrate.
Section 02050
DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS
Page 8
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
.20
Break out and dispose of terrazzo and concrete base back to divider strip.
Approximate thickness of concrete base is 22 mm and terrazzo is 16 mm.
.21
Where carpet is scheduled to be removed, include:
1.
Removal of carpet to limits indicated on drawings, in clean straight cuts
leaving no abraded or unravelling carpet pile.
2.
Removal of underpad, if any.
3.
Removal of carpet edging and grippers at walls and vertical surfaces.
4.
Stripping of all adhesive, underlayment or other cleavage membranes and
leave sub-base suitable for new floor finish.
3.7
DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS
.1
Remove from Site, rubble, debris, and other materials resulting from demolition and
removals Work in accordance with Authorities having Jurisdiction, except where
specified or indicated on Contract Drawings to be reused.
.2
Conform to requirements of municipality's Works Department regarding disposal of
waste materials.
.3
Materials prohibited from municipality waste management facilities shall be removed
from Site and dispose of at recycling companies specializing in recyclable materials.
3.8
RESTORATION
.1
Where demolition removed a structure or installation, rough grade and restore area
in accordance with Authorities having Jurisdiction.
END OF SECTION
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
1
General
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
1.2
Section 02740
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING
Page 1
Labour, Products, equipment, tools, and services necessary for asphaltic concrete
paving Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM D698, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Standard Effort.
.2
ASTM D1559, Test Method for Resistance to Plastic flow of Bituminous Mixtures
Using Marshall Apparatus.
.3
OPSS, Ontario Provincial Standard Specification.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Conditions of the
Contract indicating sections, materials, dimensions, and relation to adjacent
construction.
.2
Reports:
.1
Submit written mix designs for each type of asphalt concrete for acceptance.
.2
8 weeks prior to commencing Work test materials for conformance with
requirements of Specifications. Submit written test report verifying
compliance 4 weeks minimum prior to commencing Work.
.3
Submit written field inspection and test reports.
.4
Submit certification that testing laboratory is accredited for asphalt mix design
through the Canadian Council of Independent Laboratories (CCIL).
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
1.5
Pre-installation meetings: Arrange with Contractor, asphalt Subcontractor, and
Consultant to inspect substrates, and to review installation procedures 48 hours in
advance of installation.
SITE CONDITIONS
.1
1.6
Do not install Work of this Section outside of following environmental ranges without
Consultant's and Product manufacturer's written acceptance:
.1
Ambient air and surface temperature: OPSS 310.
.2
Precipitation: None within 24 hours prior to placement.
EXTENDED WARRANTY
.1
Submit a warranty for Work of this Section in accordance with General Conditions,
except that warranty period is extended to two years.
Section 02740
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING
Page 2
2
Products
2.1
MATERIALS
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
.1
Granular base and sub-base material: Granular "A" OPSS 1010, crushed or
screened stone or gravel.
.2
Asphalt materials:
.1
Hot mixed, hot laid asphalt meeting OPSS 1150, designation H.L. 8 for binder
course and H.L. 3 for surface course.
.2
Tack and primer coat: OPSS 1103 Grade SS-1.
2.2
MIXES
.1
Mix asphalt materials in accordance with OPSS 1003 for H.L. 8 and H.L. 3.
.2
Do not change mix without prior approval of Consultant.
2.3
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Source approval:
.1
Inform Consultant of proposed source of Products and afford access for
sampling and testing of quality of Products at least 4 weeks prior to
commencing production.
.2
Ensure that source of Products to be incorporated into Work or stockpiled is
acceptable to Consultant.
.3
Submit laboratory test results for samples of specified Products to be
supplied by this Section. Include in laboratory test results those tests required
to demonstrate that Product meets requirements of this Section.
.4
If Products from proposed source do not meet, or cannot reasonably be
processed to meet specified requirements, locate an alternative source or
demonstrate that Products source in questions can be processed to meet
specified requirements.
.5
Should a change of Products source be proposed during Work, advise
Consultant 14 days in advance of proposed change to allow sampling and
testing.
.6
Acceptance of Product at source does not preclude future rejection if it is
subsequently found to lack uniformity, or if it fails to conform to requirements
specified, or if its field performance is found to be unacceptable. Remove and
dispose rejected material.
.2
Production sampling:
.1
Products may be subject to continual sampling by Consultant during
production.
.2
Afford Consultant ready access to source and processed Products for
sampling and testing.
.3
If Products fail to meet Specifications, bear cost of additional sampling and
testing of aggregates and fill.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
.4
Section 02740
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING
Page 3
Supply necessary personnel and equipment to permit adequate investigation
and sampling. Advise Consultant at least 14 days in advance of use of
Products, to allow sufficient time for sampling and testing.
3
Execution
3.1
PREPARATION
.1
Verify grades of items set in paving area for conformity with elevations and sections
before placing granular base and subbase material.
.2
Obtain approval of subgrade by Consultant before placing granular subbase and
base.
.3
Coordinate elevations of maintenance holes and other appurtenances and make
flush with top of finish asphalt concrete paving.
3.2
SUBBASE AND BASE
.1
Comply with OPSS 314.
.2
Prior to placing subbase and base proof roll subgrade to identify soft spots. Excavate
soft spots and backfill with granular material to 100% standard Proctor maximum dry
density in accordance with ASTM D698.
.3
Place granular base and subbase material on clean unfrozen surface, free from
snow and ice.
.4
Place granular base and subbase to compacted thicknesses as indicated. Do not
place frozen material.
.5
Place in layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness. Compact to density not
less than 100 % standard Proctor maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM
D698.
.6
Finished base surface to be within 5 mm of specified grade, but not uniformly high or
low.
3.3
ASPHALT PRIMER
.1
Apply primer coat in accordance with OPSS 302.
.2
Do not apply primer when air temperature is less than 5°C or when rain is forecast
within 2 hours.
.3
If asphalt primer fails to cure within 24 hours, spread sand blotter material in
amounts required to absorb excess material. Sweep and remove excess blotter
material.
Section 02740
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING
Page 4
3.4
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
EQUIPMENT
.1
Pavers: mechanical grade controlled self-powered pavers capable of spreading mix
within specified tolerances, true to line, grade and crown indicated.
.2
Rollers: sufficient number of rollers of type and weight to obtain specified density of
compacted mix.
.3
Vibratory rollers:
.1
Minimum drum diameter: 750 mm.
.2
Maximum amplitude of vibration (machine setting): 0.5 mm for lifts less than
40 mm thick.
.4
Haul trucks: of sufficient number and of adequate size, speed and condition to
ensure orderly and continuous operation and as follows.
.5
Suitable hand tools.
3.5
ASPHALT PAVING
.1
Comply with requirements of OPSS 310.
.2
Obtain approval of tack coat base and primer from Consultant before placing asphalt
mix.
.3
Place asphalt mix only when base or previous course is dry and air temperature is
above 5°C.
.4
Place asphalt concrete in compacted layers not exceeding 50 mm per lift.
.5
Minimum 135°C mix temperature required when spreading.
.6
Maximum 160°C mix temperature permitted at any time.
.7
Compact each course with roller as soon as it can support roller weight without
undue cracking or displacement.
.8
Compact paving to density not less than 97% of density obtained with Marshall
specimens prepared in accordance with ASTM D1559. Roll until roller marks are
eliminated.
.9
Keep roller speed slow enough to avoid mix displacement and do not stop roller on
fresh pavement.
.10
Moisten roller wheels with water to prevent pick up of material.
.11
Compact mix with hot tampers or other equipment approved by Consultant, in areas
inaccessible to roller.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 02740
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING
Page 5
.12
Finish surface to be within 5 mm of design elevation and with no irregularities greater
than 10 mm in 4.5 m.
.13
Repair areas showing checking, rippling or segregation as directed by Consultant.
3.6
JOINTS
.1
Remove surplus material from surface of previously laid strip. Do not deposit on
surface of freshly laid strip.
.2
Paint contact surfaces of existing structures such as catchbasins, manholes, curbs
or gutters with tack coat prior to placing adjacent pavement.
.3
For cold joints, cut back to full depth vertical face and tack face with hot asphalt.
.4
For longitudinal joints, overlap previously laid strip with spreader by 25 to 50 mm.
3.7
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
3.8
Conduct following field tests, submit report to Consultant:
.1
Granular materials for composition and gradation.
.2
Granular material and asphalt concrete compaction.
PROTECTION
.1
3.9
Keep vehicular traffic off newly paved areas until paving surface temperature has
cooled below 38°C. Do not permit stationary loads on pavement until 24 hours after
placement.
SCHEDULE
.1
Refer to Geotechnical Report for compacted thicknesses of pavement structures for
asphaltic concrete paving, unless otherwise indicated.
.2
Paving on public property, meet requirements of municipality.
END OF SECTION
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
1
General
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
1.2
Section 02822
ORNAMENTAL METAL FENCING AND GATES
Page 1
Labour, Products, equipment and services necessary for ornamental metal fencing
and gate Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM A653/A653-M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
.2
CAN/CGSB-1.108-M, Bituminous Solvent Type Paint.
.3
CAN/CSA-A23.1/A23.2, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction.
.4
CSA W59, Welded Steel Construction.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Shop drawings:
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract
indicating:
.1
Construction, assembly, elevations, sections and interfacing with
other Work.
.2
Details shall indicate metal thicknesses, fasteners and welds, all
anchorage assemblies and components and erection details.
.2
Samples: Submit two 300 mm long samples of fencing components, showing finish
and size in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Installers qualifications: Perform Work of this Section by a company that has a
minimum of five years proven experience in the installation of ornamental fencing of
a similar size and nature and that is approved by manufacturer. Submit to
Consultant, applicator’s current certificate of approval by the material manufacturer
as proof of compliance.
2
Products
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
.1
Ornamental metal fencing shall be height indicated on drawings, complete with fence
posts, post caps, masonry attachment brackets and other brackets to match fencing
and stainless steel tamper-proof anchors, as manufactured by Iron Eagle Industries
Inc., or approved alternative.
Section 02822
ORNAMENTAL METAL FENCING AND GATES
Page 2
2.2
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
MATERIALS
.1
Steel: Steel tubing conforming ASTM A653/A653-M, having minimum 310 Mpa
tensile strength and minimum 220 MPa yield strength with AZ150 "Galvalume"
coating designation.
.2
Pickets, Rails and Posts Sizes:
.1
Pickets: 25 x 25 x 1.6 mm thick steel tube.
.2
Rails: 38 x 38 x 2 mm thick steel tube.
.3
Posts: 63 x 63 x 2 mm thick steel tube.
.3
Post and Masonry Attachment Brackets: to manufacturer’s standard.
.4
Welding: Conforms to CSA W59.
.5
Anchors and Fasteners: Stainless steel, tamper-proof expansion type anchors with
expansion shields and stainless steel, tamper-proof fasteners.
.6
Bituminous Paint: Conforms to CAN/CGSB-1.108-M, Type 1 or Type 2.
.7
Tube Forms: Spirally wound, adhesive laminated fibre paper tube forms having
bursting pressure of 140 psi, coated with hot wax, diameters as required,
`Handiform', or `Permaform' by Perma Tubes Ltd., or `Sonotube' by Sonoco Limited.
.8
Concrete: Minimum 20.684 MPa (3,000 psi) concrete conforming to CAN/CSAA23.1/A23.2.
2.3
FABRICATION
.1
Fit and assemble work of this Section in shop.
.2
Workmanship shall be best grade of modern shop practice known to recognized
manufacturers specializing in this work. Joints and intersecting members shall be
accurately fitted, made in true planes with adequate fastening. Wherever possible
fastenings shall be concealed.
.3
Isolate where necessary to prevent electrolysis between metal to metal or metal to
masonry or concrete contact. Apply 2 coats of bituminous paint.
.4
Fabricate work of this Section square, plumb, straight, true and accurately fitted.
Provide adequate reinforcing and anchorage.
.5
Fabricate fence panels to match shop drawings.
.6
Drilling shall be reamed and exposed edges left clean and smooth. Welds shall be
ground smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.
.7
Include anchors and fastenings necessary to anchor work of this Section.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
2.4
Section 02822
ORNAMENTAL METAL FENCING AND GATES
Page 3
FINISHES
.1
Polyester Powder Coating:
.1
Homogenous, free-flowing glycidal polyester powder coating, 2.0 to 4.0 mils
dry film thickness (DFT), electrostatically applied by spray method,
conforming to ASTM B117 and thermal fused to surfaces. Apply finish
coating in shop paint booth smooth and even, free of drips, creep and other
imperfections.
.2
Colour shall be to matching colour and texture as selected later by
Consultant.
3
Execution
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Inspect surfaces over which the work of this Section is dependent for any
irregularities detrimental to the application and performance of the work. Notify
Consultant in writing of all conditions which are at variance with those in the contract
documents and/or detrimental to the proper and timely installation of the work of this
Section. The decision regarding corrective measures shall be obtained from the
Consultant prior to proceeding with the affected work.
.2
Commencement of installation implies acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Make thorough examination of drawings and details, determine the intent, extent,
materials, conditions of interfacing with other work and be fully cognizant of
requirements.
.2
Work under this Section shall include complete installation of items specified herein.
Installation shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
.3
Locate and securely fasten ornamental metal fencing level, plumb and secure in the
locations shown on the drawings and specified herein.
.4
Gade Set Method For Setting Posts:
.1
Accurately layout and drill holes for post with auger or hand excavate.
Excavate each post hole to minimum 300 mm diameter, or not less than 4
times the post diameter. Excavate to 100 mm below bottom of post. Set
bottoms of posts 150 mm below "frost line".
.2
Cut tube forms to lengths required. Install tube forms in post holes. Brace
tube forms vertically by backfilling around tube forms in maximum 200 mm
lifts and compacting each lift until refusal.
.3
Set fence posts in tube forms and securely brace into position, plumb and
accurately aligned with other posts while installing and consolidating
concrete, and until concrete has set.
Section 02822
ORNAMENTAL METAL FENCING AND GATES
Page 4
.4
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Fill tube forms with concrete to the required level. Rod concrete with
reinforcing steel rod to eliminate air pockets. Provide sloped top of concrete
post footings around posts to provide drainage.
.5
Co-ordinate the work of this Section with the work of other Sections to provide the
necessary conditions for the ornamental metal fencing and gates as required.
.6
Do all drilling of steel, masonry and concrete necessary for the anchorage of the
work of this Section.
3.3
CLEANING
.1
Upon completion of the work of this Section, or when directed by Consultant, remove
all protective coatings and coverings from ornamental metal fencing and gates.
Clean and polish all exposed surfaces.
END OF SECTION
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
1
General
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
1.2
Section 02830
CHAIN LINK FENCING
Page 1
Labour, Products, equipment and services necessary for chain link fencing Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
REFERENCES
.1
CAN/CSA A23.1/A23.1-M, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete
Construction/Methods of Tests for Concrete.
.2
CAN/CGSB 1.181-M, Ready Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating.
.3
CAN/CGSB 138.1-M, Fence, Chain Link, Fabric.
.4
CAN/CGSB 138.2-M, Fence, Chain Link, Framework, Zinc-Coated, Steel.
.5
CAN/CGSB 138.3-M, Fence, Chain Link - Installation.
.6
CAN/CGSB 138.4-M, Fence, Chain Link, Gates.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product data:
.1
Submit copies of manufacturer's Product data in accordance with the
Conditions of the Contract indicating:
.1
Performance criteria, compliance with appropriate reference standard,
characteristics, limitations.
.2
Product transportation, storage, handling and installation
requirements.
.2
Shop drawings:
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract
indicating:
.1
Adjacent construction, elevations and details, dimensions, gauges,
finishes and relationship to adjacent construction.
.2
Show methods of fastenings, accessory items required, gate details,
structural header design and design computations, and other
pertinent data and information.
.3
Samples:
.1
Submit following samples in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract.
.1
300 mm square wire fabric mesh.
.2
One post top.
Section 02830
CHAIN LINK FENCING
Page 2
1.4
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Installers qualifications: Perform Work of this Section by a company that has a
minimum of five years proven experience in the installation of fencing of a similar
size and nature and that is approved by manufacturer. Submit to Consultant,
applicator’s current certificate of approval by the material manufacturer as proof of
compliance.
2
Products
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
.1
2.2
Fencing:
.1
Clotures Prepa Fences (Frost Fence).
.2
Lundy Fence and Deck.
.3
Master Halco Inc.
MATERIALS
.1
Concrete mixes and materials: 20 MPa minimum at 28 days in accordance with
CAN/CSA A23.1/A23.2-M.
.2
Vinyl-coated fence Fabric: CAN/CGSB 138.1, Black vinyl coated No. 9 gauge steel
wire woven in a 50 mm mesh, with knuckled finish top and bottom selvage edges.
.3
Posts, braces and rails: CAN/CGSB 138.2; Schedule 40 pipe, size, thickness,
diameter and length to meet standard. Minimum galvanizing weight: 610 g/m2 of
uncoated base metal surface with black powder coating.
.4
Bottom tension wire and tie wire fasteners: CAN/CGSB 138.1; Zinc-coated steel wire
and zinc coating, same diameter as specified for chain link fence fabric.
.5
Tension bar: 19 x 4.88 mm galvanized steel.
.6
Tension bar bands: 33 x 19 mm minimum galvanized steel.
.7
Gates, gate frames and accessories: CAN/CGSB 138.4, Schedule 40 galvanized
steel pipe, minimum galvanizing weight to be 610 g/m2 at uncoated base metal
surface with black powder coating.
.8
Fittings and hardware: Galvanized steel with minimum galvanizing weight of 610g/m2
of uncoated base metal.
.1
Post caps: Waterproof fit, to fasten securely over posts and, to carry top rail.
.2
Turnbuckles: Drop forged.
.9
Ditch closures: Hot dip galvanized 19 mm diameter pencil rod vertically and
horizontally at 150 mm and welded together. Touch up welds with zinc rich primer.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 02830
CHAIN LINK FENCING
Page 3
.10
Grounding: In accordance with requirements of Division 16.
.11
Concrete forms: As required by CGSB-138.3-M, Sonotube by Sonoco Ltd.,
Brantford, Ont.
.12
Zinc rich coating: CGSB 1-GP-181-M, organic zinc-rich coating.
.13
Finish coating: Epoxy Polyester coating conforming to AAMA 2603 with gloss finish.
Colour: black. ‘D1000 Series’ by Akzo Nobel Powder Coatings Ltd. or approved
alternative. Provide manufacturers recommended primer.
2.3
FABRICATION
.1
Fabricate gates as indicated on Contract Drawings with electrically welded joints,
and hot-dip galvanized after welding.
.2
Fabricate gates with galvanized malleable iron hinges, latch and latch catch with
provision for padlock which can be attached and operated from either side of
installed gate.
.3
Fabricate double gates with chain hook to hold gates open and centre rest with drop
bolt for closed position.
.4
Fasten fence fabric to gate with twisted selvage at top.
2.4
POWDER COAT FINISH
.1
Shop apply electrostatic coating in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed
instructions.
.2
Provide primer where required and one finish coat.
.3
Ensure application of each coat into all corners, pinholes and other difficult areas
and ensure full coverage to all surfaces.
.4
Ensure a smooth finish, free of laps, sags, runs, pin holes, crawls and skips. Back
lap all edges to achieve full coverage.
3
Execution
3.1
GRADING
.1
Remove debris and correct ground undulations along fence line to obtain smooth
uniform gradient between posts. Make clearance between bottom of fence and
ground surface 30 mm to 50 mm.
Section 02830
CHAIN LINK FENCING
Page 4
3.2
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
ERECTION OF FENCE
.1
Lay out lines and establish elevations required for correct location and setting of
fence posts, framing and fabric to suit Site contours.
.2
Erect fence along lines as indicated on Contract Drawings and in accordance with
CAN/CGSB-138.3.
.3
Auger post holes to depths and dimensions indicated on Contract Drawings and in
accordance with CAN/CGSB-138.3. Form top 250 mm with concrete forms.
.4
Dispose of excavated material in accordance with Section 02200.
.5
Space line posts maximum 3000 mm apart, measured parallel to ground surface.
.6
Space straining posts at equal intervals 50 m maximum between end or corner posts
on straight continuous lengths of fence and over smooth grade.
.7
Install additional straining posts at changes in grade and where shown on Contract
Drawings.
.8
Install corner post where change in alignment exceeds 100.
.9
Install end posts at end of fence and at structures. Install gate posts on both sides of
gate openings.
.10
Provide two 25 x 25 x 25 mm tabs to be welded to the post as shown on drawings.
.11
Embed posts into concrete to depth shown on Contract Drawings. Bury concrete 150
mm below ground level and slope to drain away from posts. Brace posts in plumb
position and true to alignment and elevation until concrete has set. Refer to
drawings for details.
.12
Do not install fence fabric until concrete has cured a minimum of 7 days.
.13
Install brace between end and gate posts and nearest line post, at inclination as
indicated on Contract Drawings. Install braces on both sides of corner and straining
post in similar manner.
.14
Install post caps.
.15
Install top rail between posts and fasten securely to posts and secure waterproof
caps and overhang tops.
.16
Install bottom tension wire, stretch tightly and fasten securely to end, corner, gate
and straining posts with turnbuckles and tension bar bands. Place 150 mm from
bottom of fabric.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 02830
CHAIN LINK FENCING
Page 5
.17
Lay out fence fabric. Stretch tightly to tension recommended by manufacturer and
fasten to end, corner, gate and straining posts with tension bar secured to post with
tension bar bands spaced at 300 mm intervals. Knuckled selvage at bottom. Twisted
selvage at top. Make closures by splicing fabric to form a continuous mesh.
.18
Secure fabric to top rails, line posts and bottom tension wire with tie wires at 450 mm
intervals. Give tie wires minimum two twists.
.19
Ground fence in accordance with Division 16.
.20
Install ditch closures with verticals extending 600 mm below grade.
.21
Any exposed threaded rods for connecting framing members to posts and gates
shall be cut back to expose only 2 to 3 threads.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF GATES
.1
Install gates in locations as indicated on Contract Drawings.
.2
Level ground between gate posts and set gate bottom approximately 40 mm above
ground surface.
.3
Determine position of centre gate rest for double gate. Cast gate rest in concrete as
directed. Dome concrete above ground level to shed water.
.4
Install gate stops where indicated on Contract Drawings.
3.4
TOUCH UP
.1
Clean damaged surfaces with wire brush removing loose and cracked coatings.
Apply two coats of organic zinc-rich coating to damaged areas in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
1
General
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
1.2
Section 05500
MISCELLANEOUS AND METAL FABRICATIONS
Page 1
Design, labour, Products, equipment and services necessary for the miscellaneous
and metal fabrication Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM A123, Specification for Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron & Steel
Products.
.2
ASTM A153, Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
.3
ASTM A307, Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile
Strength.
.4
ASTM A653/A653M, Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or ZincIron Alloy-Coated (Galvanealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
.5
CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21-M, General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural
Quality Steel/ Structural Quality Steels.
.6
CAN/CSA G164-M, Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles.
.7
CAN/CSA S16.1-M, Limit States Design of Steel Structures.
.8
CSA S136.1-M, Commentary on CAN/CSA S136-M, Cold Formed Steel Structural
Members.
.9
CSA W47.1, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures.
.10
CSA W48, Filler Metal and Allied Materials for Metal Arc Welding.
.11
CSA W59-M, Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding).
.12
CAN/CSA W117.2-M, Safety in Welding, Cutting and Allied Processes.
.13
CAN/CGSB 1.40-M, Primer, Structural Steel, Oil Alkyd Type.
.14
CGSB 1-GP-181, Organic Zinc Rich Primer.
.15
CGSB 85-GP-16M, Painting Galvanized Steel.
.16
Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC), Steel Structures Painting Manual, Vol. 2.
Section 05500
MISCELLANEOUS AND METAL FABRICATIONS
Page 2
1.3
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
.1
1.4
Design details and connections, where not shown on Drawings, in accordance with
CAN/CSA-S16.1 and CSA S136.1.
SUBMITTALS
.1
1.5
Shop drawings:
.1
Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of miscellaneous and
metal items in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract indicating:
.1
Materials, core thicknesses, class of finish (AMP 555), connections,
joints, method of anchorage, number of anchors, supports,
reinforcement, details, and accessories.
.2
Ensure shop drawings are of one uniform size and based on field
measurements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Retain a Professional Engineer, licensed in the Province of Ontario, with experience
in Work of comparable complexity and scope, to perform the following services as
part of the Work of this Section:
.1
Design steel stairs, handrail and railings and metal fabrication items that are
required to resist live, dead, lateral, wind, or seismic loads.
.2
Review, stamp, and sign shop drawings.
.2
Workmanship: Fabricate Work of this Section to meet the required class of
workmanship indicated below in accordance with AMP 555, Section 8.
.1
Class 1: for use on direct exposed to view fabricated items:
.1
Exposed surfaces are finished smooth with pitts, mill marks, nicks,
burrs, sharp edges, and scratches filled or ground off. Defects should
not show when painted, polished, or finished.
.2
Welds should be concealed where possible. Exposed welds are
ground to small radius with uniform sized cove unless otherwise
noted.
.3
Distortions should not be visible to the eye.
.4
Exposed joints are fitted to a hairline finish.
.3
Execute welding by firms certified in accordance with CSA W47.1 Division 1 or 2.1.
Ensure welding operators are licensed per CSA W47.1 for types of welding required
by Work.
2
Products
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
General:
.1
All materials under Work of this Section, including but not limited to, primers
and paints are to have low VOC content limits.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
.2
.3
.4
Section 05500
MISCELLANEOUS AND METAL FABRICATIONS
Page 3
Unless detailed or specified herein, standard products will be acceptable if
construction details and installation meet intent of Drawings and
Specifications.
Include all materials, products, accessories, and supplementary parts
necessary to complete assembly and installation of Work of this Section.
Incorporate only metals that are free from defects which impair strength or
durability, or which are visible. Install only new metals of best quality, and
free from rust or waves and buckles, and that are clean, straight, and with
sharp defined profiles.
.2
Structural shapes, plates, and similar items: CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21-M, Grade
350W. Hollow structural sections: CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21-M, Grade 350W, Class
H.
.3
Galvanized sheet steel: ASTM A653/A653M Grade A, Z275 Commercial Quality
zinc coating, size and shape as shown.
.4
Welding materials: CSA W48 and CSA W59-M.
.5
Fasteners: Conforming to ASTM A307, Grade A, in areas not exposed to view, use
unfinished bolts with hexagon heads and nuts. In areas exposed to view, use bolts,
nuts, washers, rivets, lock washers, anchor bolts, machine screws and machine bolts
Z275 zinc coated in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M. Supply bolts of lengths
required to suit thickness of material being joined, but not projecting more than 6 mm
beyond nut, without the use of washers.
.6
Primer paint: CAN/CGSB-1.40-M or CPMA 1.73a.
.7
Galvanized primer paint: Inorganic zinc rich primer. For use on galvanized
fabrications where touch up is to remain unpainted in finished work; Carbozinc 11WB
by Carboline Company, Catha-Coat 305 by Devoe Coatings or Zinc Clad XI by
Sherwin Williams.
.8
Drilled inserts: Mega by ITW Construction Products or HSL by Hilti Inc. heavy-duty
anchors, sizes as shown.
2.2
FABRICATION
.1
Verify dimensions of existing Work before commencing fabrications and report any
discrepancies to the Consultant.
.2
Fit and assemble Work in shop where possible. Execute Work in accordance with
details and reviewed shop drawings.
.3
Use self-tapping shake-proof screws on items requiring assembly by screws or as
indicated. Use screws for interior metal work. Use welded connections for exterior
metal Work unless otherwise found acceptable by the Consultant.
Section 05500
MISCELLANEOUS AND METAL FABRICATIONS
Page 4
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
.4
Ensure exposed welds are continuous for length of each joint. File or grind exposed
welds smooth and flush. Seal exterior steel fabrications against corrosion in
accordance with CAN/CSA S16.1-M.
.5
Execute shop welding to requirements specified .
.6
Carefully make and fit details. Take special care with exposed finished Work to
produce a neat and correct appearance to the Consultant's acceptance.
.7
Assemble members without twists or open joints.
.8
Correctly size holes for connecting Work of other trades where such can be
determined prior to fabrication. Where possible, show holes on shop drawings. Place
holes not to cause appreciable reduction in strength of member.
.9
Draw mechanical joints to hairline tightness and seal countersunk screw and access
holes for locking screws with metal filler where these occur on exposed surfaces.
2.3
FABRICATED ITEMS
.1
Provide metal fabrication items indicated below and items not indicated to be
supplied under other Sections. The following items includes miscellaneous and
metal fabrication including but not limited to the items listed below.
.2
Refer to Drawings for details of metal fabrication work and related items not
specifically listed in this Section.
.3
Where work is required to be built into work of other Sections supply such members
to respective Sections.
.4
Metal pan stairs:
.1
Fabricate steel channel stringer of size, construction and attachment to
structure as shown. Close exposed ends of stringers with 3 mm thick steel
closure plates welded to edges of exposed flange edges.
.2
Furnish treads, risers and landing permanent metal forms of steel sheet
formed as shown; treads to be concrete filled in accordance with Division 3,
with bare metal riser incorporating 19 mm dust cove. Fabricate landings for
concrete fill of same material as stair treads, unless ribbed metal deck form is
shown.
.3
Support treads, risers and landings as detailed on reviewed shop drawings.
.5
Handrails, guardrails, and posts:
.1
Design railings to withstand minimum horizontal and vertical loads as
required to meet requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. In no
instance shall load design of railings be less than 2.2 kN/m horizontally and
1.5 kN/m vertically.
.2
Close open ends of steel handrails with 1.9 mm thick closure neatly welded.
Fabricate railings, handrails, and guardrails as shown on drawings.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
.3
Section 05500
MISCELLANEOUS AND METAL FABRICATIONS
Page 5
Handrail bracket: Fabricate as shown. After fabrication, galvanized bracket in
accordance with ASTM A123.
.6
Lintels: Fabricated from CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21-M, Grade 350W, size and
location as shown, width to be not less than 25 mm less than width of wall and
extend 200 mm beyond opening at each end. Unless otherwise shown, fabricate
lintels in block walls of steel sections.
7.
Masonry lateral support angles:
.1
Supply only, to Section 04200 for installation, all horizontal lateral support
anchors at top of non-load-bearing masonry walls.
.2
Refer to Structural Drawings for size and spacing of required support
anchors. Provide drilled holes as required for anchorage.
.3
Galvanized for all exterior wall and unheated and high humidity locations.
8.
Shelf Angles: Of size indicated on Drawings and as specified in structural steel
specifications, with adjustable inserts for vertical adjustment and slotted holes for
horizontal; galvanized.
.9
Miscellaneous steel brackets, supports and angles
.1
Supply and install or supply for installation by trades responsible, all loose
steel brackets, supports and angles where indicated, except where such
brackets, supports and angles are specified under work of other Sections.
Drill for countersunk screws, expansion anchors and anchor bolts.
.2
Unless otherwise specified, prime paint for interior installation; galvanized
finish for exterior installation.
2.4
ANCHORS AND FASTENING
.1
Use weld studs of size not larger than 10 mm for attaching miscellaneous materials
and equipment to building steel. If weight of item requires larger fasteners use clips
or brackets and secure by welding or through bolting.
.2
Use self drilling expansion type concrete anchors for attaching to masonry and
concrete.
.3
Do not secure items to steel deck.
.4
Use steel beam clamps of two bolt design to transmit load to beam web. Do not use
C and I clamps.
2.5
WELDING
.1
Perform welding by electric arc process.
.2
Execute welding to avoid damage or distortion to Work. Execute welding in
accordance with following standards:
.1
CSA W48 - for Electrodes. If rods are used, only coated rods are allowed.
Section 05500
MISCELLANEOUS AND METAL FABRICATIONS
Page 6
.2
.3
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
CSA W59-M and CSA W59S1-M for design of connections and
workmanship.
CAN/CSA W117.2-M - for safety.
.3
Thoroughly clean welded joints and expose steel for a sufficient distance to perform
welding operations. Finish welds smooth. Supply continuous and ground welds
which will be exposed to view and finish paint.
.4
Test welds for conformance and remove Work not meeting specified standards and
replace to Consultant's acceptance.
2.6
SHOP PAINTING
.1
Clean steel to SSPC SP6 and remove loose mill scale, weld flux and splatter.
.2
Shop prime steel with one coat of primer paint to dry film thickness of 0.07
mm. Paint on dry surfaces, free from rust, scale, grease. Do not paint when
temperature is lower than 7 deg C. Paint items under cover and leave under cover
until primer is dry. Follow paint manufacturer's recommendations regarding
application methods, equipment, temperature, and humidity conditions.
.3
Shop prime galvanized steel in accordance with CGSB 85-GP-16M.
.4
Clean but do not paint surfaces being welded in field.
.5
Do not paint surfaces embedded in concrete, but clean as if they were to be primed.
.6
Do not prime machine finished surfaces, but apply an effective anti-rust compound.
.7
Take precautions to avoid damage to adjacent surfaces.
2.7
HOT DIP GALVANIZING
.1
After fabrication, hot dip galvanize specific miscellaneous steel items as indicated.
Plug relief vents air tight. After galvanizing, remove plugs, ream holes to proper size
and re-tap threads. Straighten shapes and assemblies true to line and plane after
galvanizing. Repair damaged galvanized surfaces with zinc rich primer in
accordance with manufacturer's printed directions.
.2
Hot-dip galvanize members in accordance with CAN/CSA G164-M and requirements
of the following ASTM, with minimum coating weights or thicknesses as follows:
.1
Rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strips: ASTM
A123; average weight of zinc coating per square/metre of actual surface, for
4.8 mm and less thickness members 600 g/m2 for 6 mm and heavier
members 640 g/m2.
.2
Iron and steel hardware: ASTM A153; minimum weight of zinc coating, in
ounces per square foot of surface, in accordance with ASTM A153,Table 1
for the various classes of materials used in the Work.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
3
Execution
3.1
EXAMINATION
Section 05500
MISCELLANEOUS AND METAL FABRICATIONS
Page 7
.1
Examine previously installed Work, upon which this Section depends, verify
dimensions and condition of existing Work, and coordinate repairs, alterations, and
rectification if necessary. Commencement of Work of this Section is deemed to
signify acceptance of existing, prior conditions.
.2
Obtain Consultant's written approval prior to field cutting or altering of structural
members.
3.2
ERECTION
.1
Install metal fabrications in accordance with reviewed shop drawings and
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Fit joints and intersecting members accurately. Make Work in true planes with
adequate fastenings. Build and erect Work plumb, true, square, straight, level and
accurate to sizes detailed, free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance
or performance.
.3
Perform drilling of concrete and steel as required to fasten Work of this Section.
.4
Erect rails and handrails in true vertical and horizontal planes, rigid, and free from
whip.
.5
Continuously weld connections for railings.
3.3
FIELD PAINTING
.1
Paint bolt heads, washers, nuts, field welds and previously unpainted items. Touch
up shop primer damaged during transit and installation, with primer to match shop
primer.
END OF SECTION
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
1
General
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
1.2
Section 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Page 1
Labour, Products, equipment and services necessary for rough carpentry Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM A153, Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
.2
ASTM A325, Specification for Bolts Quenched/Tempered Steel Nominal Thread
Diameter M16 - M36 For Structural Steel Joints.
.3
ASTM A653, Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
.4
CSA B111, Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples.
.5
CAN/CSA G164-M, Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles.
.6
CAN/CSA O80 Series M, Wood Preservation.
.7
CSA O121-M, Douglas Fir Plywood.
.8
CAN/CSA O141, Softwood Lumber.
.9
CAN/ULC-S102, Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials and Assemblies.
.10
NLGA, Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber, National Lumber Grades
Authority
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Lumber identification: Grade stamp of an agency certified by the Canadian Lumber
Standards Accreditation Board.
.2
Plywood identification: Grade mark in accordance with applicable CSA standards.
.3
Lumber quality: Carefully select individual pieces so that knots and obvious defects
will not interfere with placing bolts, proper nailing or making proper connections.
.4
Moisture Content of wood at time of construction shall be 19% maximum.
.5
Each piece of pressure treated lumber and fire retardant treated lumber shall be
shop marked with the pressure treatment brand and ULC monogram respectively, in
accordance with CAN/CSA O80-M.
Section 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Page 2
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
6.
Dimensions of lumber shall conform to dressed sizes specified in CAN/CSA-0141
unless actual dimensions are otherwise indicted or specified.
7.
Dimensional references to lumber on Drawings and in Specifications are to nominal
sizes unless actual dimensions are indicated. Such actual dimensions shall be dry
size.
.8
Lumber defects: Discard wood with defects which will render a piece unable to serve
its intended function. Lumber will be rejected by Consultant for excessive warp,
twist, bow, crook, mildew, fungus, or mould, as well as for improper cutting and
fitting, whether or not it has been installed.
1.4
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
1.
1.5
When it is required that wood maintain dimensional stability and tolerances to ensure
accurate installation of later work, store and install it only in dry areas, and where no
further installation of moist materials is contemplated.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Store materials in a dry area. Cover materials with tarpaulins or polyethylene sheets
to prevent moisture absorption and impairment of structural and aesthetic properties.
Vent to allow air movement. Tie covering to keep in place.
2
Products
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Lumber: Softwood, G4S, moisture content 19% or less at time of installation, in
accordance with the following:
.1
Lumber shall be of same species and grade, equally seasoned and shall be
processed and stamped at same mill.
.2
CSA O141 and NLGA Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber.
.3
Board quality: Construction or better.
.4
Dimension quality:
.1
Structural joists, planks, and framing: No. 1 Select Structural.
.2
Light framing: Construction.
.2
Plywood: CSA O121-M, G1S unsanded, T & G, standard construction, laminated
with waterproof adhesive, exterior grade, Thickness as indicated on drawings.
.3
Surface applied wood preservative: Green coloured copper napthenate or 5%
pentachlorophenol solution, water repellant preservative or same copper based
preservative as used for shop impregnation, in accordance with CAN/CSA O80.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Page 3
.4
Fire retardant treatment of lumber: ‘Dricon’ fire retardant treatment by J. A. Biewer or
approved equivalent, conforming to CAN/CSA-O80.20 and CAN/CSA-O80.27
respectively, to provide a flame spread rating of 25 or less in accordance with
CAN/ULC-S102.
.5
Rough hardware: Nails, bolts, screws, anchors, expansion shields, and other
fastenings required to frame and fix rough carpentry as follows:
.1
Nails, spikes and staples: CSA B111; spiral type.
.2
Bolts: ASTM A325; 12.7 mm diameter minimum with nuts and washers
unless noted otherwise.
.3
Screws: Countersunk head, full thread type.
.4
Proprietary fasteners: Toggle bolts, expansion shields, lag bolts, screws,
inorganic fibre plugs, recommended for purpose by manufacturer.
.5
Galvanize rough hardware exposed to the atmosphere in accordance with
CAN/CSA G164-M.
.6
Fasteners for use in pressure treated wood: Provide hot dipped galvanized fasteners
complying to ASTM A153 and connectors in accordance with ASTM A653, Class
G185 for non-structural members. Provide type 304 or 316 stainless steel fasteners
and connectors for use in Structural, pressure treated wood.
3
Execution
3.1
GENERAL
.1
Lay out work carefully and to accommodate work of others. Cut and fit accurately:
erect in position indicated by Drawings.
.2
Install rough carpentry to allow for expansion and contraction of the materials.
.3
Cut work into lengths as long as practicable and with square ends. Align, level,
square, plumb, and secure work permanently in place. Brace work temporarily as
required. Join work only over solid backing.
.4
Bore holes true to line and to same size as bolts. Drive bolts into place for snug fit,
and use plates or washers for bolthead and nut bearings. Turn up bolts and lag
screws tightly when installed, and again just before concealed by other work or at
completion of Work.
.5
Provide anchors, bolts, and inserts required for attachment of the work of this
Section, to those performing the work of other Sections and who are responsible for
their installation.
.6
Do not attach work by wood plugs or blocking in concrete or masonry. Use lead
shields, expansion shields, or similar methods only as approved by Architect.
Section 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Page 4
3.2
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
MISCELLANEOUS WOODWORK
.1
Fit and install wood furring, strapping, grounds and blocking. Adequately size,
correctly place and conceal members for finishes, fitments and for Work under other
Sections. Do not assume that Drawings show required work exactly or completely.
Anchor wood members securely in place.
.2
Install rough bucks, nailing strips and linings to rough openings as required for
backing for frames and other Work.
.3
Except where steel supports are specifically shown, provide wood blocking and
supports in metal stud partitions for fastening of item such as casework and other
wall mounted accessories. Have respective trades approve the location of such
wood blocking.
.4
Bolt wood blocking or nailing strips to steel framing.
.5
Align and plumb faces of furring and blocking to tolerance of 1:600.
.6
Use fire retardant lumber for blocking/framing in ceiling\ spaces, partitions and
bulkheads.
3.3
FASTENERS
.1
Frame, anchor, fasten, tie and brace members for required strength and rigidity.
.2
Use hot dipped galvanized fasteners for exterior Work and Work below grade.
.3
Countersink bolts and bolt heads as required for clearance of other Work.
.4
Size fasteners to penetrate base member by half of fastener length minimum.
Minimize splitting of wood members by staggering nails in direction of grain.
.5
For plywood use spiral, annular or resin coated nails and staples.
3.4
SURFACE-APPLIED WOOD PRESERVATIVE
.1
Treat raw surfaces, drilled holes and cut ends of pressure treated wood with 2 coats
of wood preservative immediately after cutting.
.2
Apply preservative by dipping, by brush or by pouring into plugged holes to
completely saturate surface.
END OF SECTION
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
1
General
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
1.2
Section 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
Page 1
Labour, Products equipment and services necessary for the finish carpentry Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
REFERENCES
.1
ANSI A208.1, Particleboard.
.2
ANSI/NEMA LD 3, High-Pressure Decorative Laminates.
.3
ASTM F1667, Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes and Staples.
.4
Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada (AWMAC).
.5
Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS) - Quality Standards for Architectural
Woodwork.
.6
CSA O115-M, Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
.7
CAN/CSA O141, Softwood Lumber.
.8
CSA O151-M, Canadian Softwood Plywood.
.9
National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA) Rules for the Measurement and
Inspection of Hardwood and Cypress.
.10
National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA) Standard Grading Rules for Canadian
Lumber.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings of finish carpentry Work in accordance with
the Conditions of the Contract indicating materials, thicknesses, sizes, finishes, wood
species, grades, profiles, connection attachments, shop jointing, field jointing,
reinforcing, anchorage, fastener types and sizes, location of exposed fastenings,
mechanical and electrical service routes, service outlets, cutout locations, and sizes.
Include erection drawings, plans, elevations, sections, and details as applicable.
.2
Samples: Submit samples of the following in accordance with the requirements the
Conditions of the Contract:
.1
Two representative pieces of each type of wood to receive a stained or
natural finish.
.2
Two representative pieces of each type of wood finished as specified.
.3
Two of each colour, pattern, gloss, and texture of plastic laminate, in
manufacturer's standard tag size.
Section 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
Page 2
.4
.5
.6
1.4
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Two samples of laminated plastic joints, edging, cutouts and postformed
profiles.
Two of each solid surface, in 100 x 75 x 10 mm samples.
One of each item of finish carpentry hardware.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Execute Work of this Section by member of AWMAC, with 5 years experience in
finish carpentry Work of comparable complexity and scope. Submit proof of
experience upon Consultant’s request.
.2
Fabricate finish carpentry Work in accordance with AWS Quality Standards,
Premium Quality materials and installation unless otherwise indicated. Perform Work
in accordance with the definition of Good Workmanship as defined in the AWS
Quality Standards.
.3
Remove and replace finish carpentry Work which does not conform to the AWS
Quality standards or as amended by these Specifications.
.4
Mock-up:
.1
Shop fabricate one mock-up of a base cabinet, wall cabinet, and counter top
for each type of surfacing specified, complete with hardware and shop
applied finishes, installed in location acceptable to Consultant.
.2
Arrange for Consultant's review and acceptance, allow 48 hours after
acceptance before proceeding with Work.
.3
When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard for this work.
Mock-up may remain as part of Work if accepted by Consultant. Remove
and dispose of mock-ups which do not form part of Work.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store, and handle finish carpentry in accordance with the AWS Quality
Standards. Control the temperature and humidity in accordance with the AWS
recommendations, before, during, and after finish carpentry delivery, and also
during storage and installation.
.2
Cover finished plastic laminated work with heavy kraft paper or put in cartons during
shipment. Protect installed surfaces by approved means. Do not remove until
immediately before final inspection.
1.6
WARRANTY
.1
Submit a warranty for millwork of this Section in accordance with General
Conditions, except that warranty period is extended to 2 years.
.1
Warrant against defects in material and workmanship including but not limited
to opening of joints, cracking, shrinkage, warpage, and delamination of
plastic laminate.
.2
Coverage: Complete replacement including affected adjacent Work.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
2
Products
2.1
MATERIALS
Section 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
Page 3
.1
General: All materials under Work of this Section, including but not limited to,
adhesives and mastics, are to have low VOC content limits.
.2
Concealed framing lumber: Eastern Spruce, Balsam Fir, or Jack Pine, to CAN/CSA
O141, NLGA, and AWS Custom Grade, S4S, average moisture content 7% +/- 2% at
installation.
.3
Hardwood lumber: Birch to NHLA and AWS Premium Grade, S4S, average moisture
content 7% +/- 2% at installation.
.4
Softwood plywood: CSA O151-M; 19 mm unless indicated otherwise, (G2S).
.5
Hardwood plywood: CSA standard for Type 11 veneer Grade Select White Birch.
.6
Wood Veneer: Birch to CSA O115 in sizes and thickness shown on drawings.
.7
Plastic laminate: Provide plastic laminates conforming to ANSI/NEMA LD 3 as
follows:
.1
Flatwork face sheet: 1.2 mm thick, heavy wear resistance.
.2
Vertical interior face sheets: 0.8 mm thick.
.3
Postformed face sheet: 0.8 mm thick.
.4
Backing sheet: thickness to match face sheet, high pressure laminate,
manufactured by same manufacturer as face sheet.
.5
Plastic laminate: As manufactured by Arborite, Formica, Forbo, Nevamar,
Pionite and Wilsonart.
.6
Colours: To the later selection of the Consultant from manufacturer’s
standard colour range.
.8
Solid Surfacing: 12 mm thick sheet stock, provide with bullnose edge and all cutouts
as required. ‘Corian’ solid surfacing by DuPont or approved alternative in colour
selected by Consultant. Installation and seam adhesives to be as recommended by
solid surfacing manufacturer, colour matched to solid surfacing.
.9
Particle board core: ANSI A208.1, Grade M2 of thickness indicated. Particleboard to
be bound with waterproof adhesive and meeting the following minimum criteria:
.1
Density: minimum 705 kg/m3.
.2
Internal bond: 0.45 N/mm2.
.3
Modulus of rupture: 14.5 N/mm2.
.4
Modulus of elasticity: 2250 N/mm2.
.5
Face screw holding: 1000 N.
.6
Edge screw holding: 900 N.
.10
Laminating adhesive: CSA O112 Series, water resistant type, low VOC content,
selected by laminate manufacturer for intended end use.
Section 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
Page 4
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
.11
Draw bolts and splines: Type as recommended by fabricator.
.12
Nails and staples: Conforming to ASTM F1667; Size and type to suit application,
galvanized for exterior work, interior humid areas and for treated lumber; plain finish
elsewhere.
.13
Bolts, nuts, washers, blind fasteners, lags and screws: Size and type to suit
application. Stapling is not acceptable.
.14
Adhesive and bituminous mastic: Selected by the millwork fabricator with low VOC
content.
.15
Miscellaneous metals: In accordance with Section 05500.
2.2
HARDWARE
.1
The following hardware is the minimum quality standard for the work of this Section.
Alternatives may be considered provided they are approved by Consultant prior to
ordering of products.
.2
Drawer slides: Full extension, 8400 Series by Knape & Vogt.
.3
Pilasters: Clear anodized aluminum recessed shelf standards with 12 mm divisions,
Model 233 by Knape & Vogt.
.4
Clips: Bright zinc plated, adjustable height shelf supports, Model 256 by Knape &
Vogt.
.5
Cabinet hinges: Heavy duty, concealed 110 degree, clip, self closing, Model
75M3550 by Blum.
.6
Drawer and cabinet pulls: 10 mm dia. x 106 mm wide, stainless steel with matt finish,
115.61.601 by Hafele.
.7
Magnetic catches: Model 918 by Knape & Vogt.
.8
Locks: Cam locks/deadbolt locks complete with lock core by Hafele, type to suit
application and installation.
.9
Closet rail: 27 mm diameter wardrobe rail stainless steel finish ‘Model 660 Round
Tubing' and tubing flange ‘Model 734' by Knape & Vogt.
.10
Coat hooks:
.1
Standard coat hook: Polished or brushed stainless steel coat hook ‘GSH 343'
by Gallery Specialty Hardware or approved alternative.
.2
Typical at cubbies: Stainless steel coat hooks, ‘CBH-61-C32D’ by Canadian
Builder’s Hardware or approved alternative.
.3
Locations and quantities of coat hooks to be indicated by the Consultant.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
2.3
Section 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
Page 5
PLASTIC LAMINATE WORK
.1
Perform plastic laminate Work in accordance with AWS Quality Standards and
ANSI/NEMA LD 3.
.2
Ensure adjacent parts of continuous laminate work match in colour and pattern.
.3
Laminate plastic laminates to core materials in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
.4
Fabricate core surfaces and profiles with continuous support and bond over entire
surface to receive plastic laminate.
.5
Apply plastic laminate backing sheets to balance shrinkage stresses induced by
plastic laminate face sheets.
.6
Minimize joints in plastic laminate Work; do not install joints in plastic laminate Work
in less than 2400 mm o.c. Locate joints minimum 610 mm from cut-outs. Offset core
and plastic laminate facing joints.
.7
Form shaped profiles and bends as indicated, using postformed grade laminate to
laminate manufacturer's instructions.
.8
Use straight self-edging laminate strip to match adjacent colour, finish, gloss, and
pattern to cover exposed edge of core material. Chamfer exposed edges uniformly at
approximately 20 degrees. Do not mitre laminate edges.
.9
Apply laminated plastic liner sheet to interior of cabinetry and where indicated.
.10
Fabricate units by solid surfacing manufacturer's certified or approved fabricator/
installer. Fabricate built-up profiles as indicated.
2.4
FABRICATION
.1
Be responsible for methods of construction and for ensuring that materials are rigidly
and securely attached and will not be loosened by the work of other sections.
.2
Coordinate locations of concealed supports and blocking with other parts of Work.
Provide cutouts for outlet boxes and other fixtures.
.3
Fabricate work in a manner which will permit expansion and contraction of the
materials without visible open joints. Conceal joints and connections in wherever
possible.
.4
Set nails and countersink screws, apply wood filler to indentations, sand smooth and
leave ready to receive finish.
.5
Mitre exposed corners, no end grain shall be visible in completed installation.
Section 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
Page 6
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
.6
Finished millwork shall be free from bruises, blemishes, mineral marks, knots,
shakes and other defects and shall be selected for uniformity of colour, grain and
texture.
.7
Shelving to cabinetwork to be adjustable unless otherwise noted.
.8
Recess shelf standards, unless noted otherwise. Stagger recessed shelf standards
on opposite sides of divider.
.9
Do not exceed maximum 760 mm unsupported span for 19 mm thick shelving.
House fixed shelving into gables and divisions.
.10
Shop assemble finish carpentry to accommodate delivery and handling and to
ensure passage through building openings.
.11
Fabricate cabinets with birch veneer core plywood to profiles shown on drawings.
Doors shall be particle board with birch veneer.
.12
Shop install cabinet hardware for doors, shelves and drawers. Recess shelf
standards unless noted otherwise.
3
Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install Work in accordance with AWS Quality Standards and tolerances for
Architectural Woodwork. Set and secure finish carpentry in place, rigid, plumb,
square, and level.
.2
Scribe and cut as required, fit to abutting walls, and surfaces, fit properly into
recesses and to accommodate columns, fixtures, outlets, or other projecting,
intersecting or penetrating objects leaving a 0.8 mm gap maximum.
.3
Coordinate cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, and other
fixtures, in finish carpentry. Round internal corners of cut-outs and seal exposed
cores.
.4
Form joints to conceal shrinkage.
.5
Install draw bolts and splines in laminated plastic counter top joints at maximum
spacing 450 mm o.c., and 75 mm from edge. Make joints flush, hairline butt joints.
.6
Install finishing hardware accurately and securely in accordance with manufacturer's
directions, adjust and clean.
.7
Install prefinished millwork at locations shown on drawings. Position accurately,
level, plumb straight.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
Page 7
.8
Apply bituminous coating over wood framing members in contact with masonry or
cementitious construction.
.9
Cubbies: Install cubbies, straight, level and plumb, in true vertical and horizontal
manner.
.10
Install window sills level, plumb and even in locations as indicated and ensure that
sills are securely fastened.
.11
Install solid surfacing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.12
Fastening:
.1
Coordinate wall securement, anchorage, and blocking for finish carpentry
items.
.2
Position items of finished carpentry work accurately, level, plumb, true and
fasten or anchor securely.
.3
Design and select fasteners to suit size and nature of components being
joined. Use proprietary devices as recommended by manufacturer.
.4
Provide heavy duty fixture attachments for wall mounted cabinets.
.5
Set finishing nails to receive filler. Where screws are used to secure
members, countersink screw in round cleanly cut hole and plug with wood
plug to match material being secured.
.13
Remove and replace damaged, marked, or stained finish carpentry.
END OF SECTION
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project no. 12208
Part 1
General
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
Section 06400
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Page 1
.1
Fabricated wood casework and associated wood products
.2
Countertops
.3
Cabinet hardware
.4
Preparation for installing utilities / i.e. sinks, faucets, electrical plugs and switches
etc.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications
.2
Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry and Wood Blocking: Grounds and support
framing
.3
Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry / Related trim not specified in this section.
.4
Section 07900 - Sealants
.5
Section 09900 – Painting / On -Site for finishing of misc. loose trim items, etc.
1.3
REFERENCES
.1
ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard.
.2
ANSI A208.1 - Mat Formed Wood Particleboard.
.3
AWMAC (Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada) –
Architectural Woodwork Standards / latest edition
.4
BHMA A156.9 - Cabinet Hardware.
.5
FS MMM-A-130 - Adhesive, Contact.
.6
CHPVA [Canadian Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association] Canadian
Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood
.7
NEMA (National Electric Manufacturers Association) LD3 - High Pressure
Decorative Laminates.
.8
NHLA (National Hardwood Lumber Association).
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
.1
Section 01000: Submittal Procedures.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project no. 12208
Section 06400
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Page 2
.2
Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly
methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location
and schedule of finishes.
.3
Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories.
.4
Casework samples: Submit two 300 x 300 mm size samples, illustrating cabinet
finish / wood species, core and finish as specified within.
.5
Counter-top samples: Submit two 300 x 300 mm size samples, illustrating typical
countertop finish and specified core.
.6
Hardware samples: Submit two samples of pulls, hinges, drawer slides and shelf
clips illustrating hardware finish.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Perform work in accordance with AWMAC Custom grade.
.2
Approved Suppliers / the following firms will be considered by the owner.
1.6
.1
Continental Cabinet Company Inc.
547 Clarke Road
London, Ontario, N5V 2E1
Phone: 519 / 455-3830
Fax: 519 / 455-9993
.2
Mirmil Products
339 Siena Court
Oshawa, Ontario, L1J 6V5
Phone: 905 / 576-9798
Fax: 905 / 576-9800
.3
Ontario Cabinet Makers [Windsor] Ltd.
770 Norht Service Rd E,
Windsor, Ontario, N8X 3J3
Phone: 519 / 969-9164
Fax: 519 / 969-0122
.4
Second Generation Furnishings Inc.
329 Connie Crescent
Concord, Ontario, L4K 5R2
Phone: 905-738-1403
Fax: 905-738-3870
Warranty
.1
At no cost to the owner, repair any defects in the work of this Section due to
delaminating or warping for a period of two years from date of Substantial
Performance
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project no. 12208
.2
1.7
Section 06400
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Page 3
If requested by the owner, a certified inspector approved by the local AWMAC
chapter will be retained for an inspection for work of this section. Costs of this
inspection will be covered under Section 01000 Cash Allowances.
MOCK-UP
.1
Section 01000: Mock-up Requirements.
.2
Provide mock-up of typical full size base cabinet / single door and drawer unit
and upper single cabinet door unit.
.3
Mock-up will remain as part of the Work.
1.8
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
.1
Section 01000: Administrative Requirements – Project Meetings.
.2
Convene minimum 4 weeks prior commencing installation of this section.
1.9
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
.1
Section 01000: Product Delivery Requirements.
.2
Protect units from moisture damage.
.3
Section 01000: Product Storage and Handling Requirements
.4
During and after installation of work of this section, maintain the same
temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces as will occur after
occupancy. [ General Contractor to co-ordinate ]
Part 2
Products
2.1
WOOD MATERIALS
.1
Softwood Lumber: Graded in accordance with AWMAC Custom grade; average
moisture content of 8 percent.
.2
Hardwood Lumber: NHLA; graded in accordance with AWMAC Custom grade;
average moisture content of 8 percent; species and grade as follows:
.1
2.2
Species – Select White Birch and Maple
PANEL MATERIALS
.1
Hardwood Plywood: in accordance with CHPVA and graded to AWMAC
standards; cores for plywood as noted under Fabrication. Hardwood Plywood to
be laminated with a soy-based adhesive containing no urea-formaldehyde /
species and grades as follows:
.1
Exposed Parts: Species - Select Rotary Cut White Birch, Grade - A White
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project no. 12208
.2
Section 06400
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Page 4
Semi – Exposed Parts: Species - Select Rotary Cut White Birch, Grade –
B White
.2
Particleboard Core: [ANSI A208.1;] AWMAC standard, manufactured to meet
NAUF standards
.3
Veneer core: in accordance with CHPVA and AWMAC, manufactured to meet
NAUF standards
2.3
PLASTIC LAMINATE
.1
Acceptable Suppliers:
.1
Formica
.2
Wilsonart
.3
Arborite
Note: All colours and finishes to be selected from manufacturer’s standard colour
range
2.4
LAMINATE MATERIALS
.1
Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, PF 42 Post Forming Grade.
.2
Laminate Backing Sheet: 0.020 inch Backing Sheet grade, undecorated plastic
laminate.
2.5
CABINET HARDWARE
.1
19mm Door Hinges: Blum Press–In 170 degree self close full overlay [or Salice
equivalent]. Hinges to be provided with factory installed knock in dowels. For
quantity of hinges required per door, refer to hinge manufacturer’s manual. Wood
screw fastening system will not be accepted.
.2
19mm Door Hinge Plates: One piece plate with min. 3mm height adjustment.
Hinge plates to be installed using pre-mounted system screws [Euro screw in
5mm pre-drilled hole]. Wood screw fastening system will not be accepted.
.3
19 mm Door Dampener: Blumotion 971A with Cruciform Base [or Salice
equivalent] required for all 19mm doors to allow for soft closing.
.4
19mm Bumpers: Polyurethane 3mm high X 10mm diameter / minimum 2 per
door and drawer front.
.5
Shelf Standards and Clips: KV 255 pilaster and KV 256 clip – satin nickel finish
/ Note: Pilasters to be fully recessed into gables.
.6
Drawer and Door Pulls: Stainless Steel D- Pull / 8mm diameter X 96mm centres
- c/w with 8/32 machine screws.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project no. 12208
Section 06400
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Page 5
.7
Cabinet Locks for 19mm doors and drawers: National Disc Tumbler Cylinder
Cam Lock C8080 Series c/w cam to suit / chrome finish. All cabinets to be locked
with the exception at sink locations. All locks shall be keyed alike per room and
master keyed.
.8
Cabinet Locks for 45mm doors: supplied by Section 08710 Door Hardware.
Note: this section to prepare doors and components to receive specified model.
.9
Elbow catches: Richelieu Heavy Duty Elbow Catch # 5540180 / nickel finish /
required at all two door units
.10
Drawer Slides: Accuride 45 kg [100 lb] # 3832EC X length to suit with Easy
Close feature [soft closing]. Finish C – Clear electroplate
.11
45mm Door Flush Bolts - Onward 392C
.12
45mm Door Hinges: Stanley CB179, 76 x 76 or Hager 1279, 76 x 76
.13
Display Case Hardware:
.1
.2
.3
Standards – KV80 / zinc finish x length to suit
Knife Brackets – KV180 / zinc finish X length to suit
Sliding Door Track Assembly – Richelieu 1551210 & BP15510.
.14
Change Room Coat Hooks: GSH 343
.15
Cubicle Coat Hooks: GSH 343
.16
Coat Rods and Flanges: Richelieu # 122108140 and 1225140
2.6
EDGEBANDING
.1
All exposed edges to be banded with 3mm hardwood edging as follows:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
2.7
The 3mm hardwood edging to be a multilayered natural timber made from
multiple layers of 0.6mm veneer laminated together with PVA glue [which
does not contain any hazardous ingredients and has no harmful effect on
health or the environment.
Final assembly of the 3mm hardwood edging to be surface sanded to 180
grit and roughly sanded on the reverse side for good adhesion.
The top layer of the 3mm hardwood edging to have continuous high
quality veneer to match hardwood plywood with minimal color variation
All layers of the 3mm hardwood edging to have asymmetrical finger joints.
In order to provide proper adhesion, all 3mm hardwood edging to be
stored in a controlled humidified environment prior application.
GLASS and GLAZING
.1
Supply and install all associated glass as follows:
.1
Display Case Doors: 6mm clear tempered / polished edges
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project no. 12208
2.8
Section 06400
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Page 6
.2
Display Case Shelves: 8mm clear tempered / polished edges
.3
Framed 19mm wood doors: 4mm clear tempered
FABRICATION
.1
.2
General Notes:
.1
Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to
permit passage through building openings.
.2
Fabricate each module to be self-supporting with both exterior gables
finished to allow removal and relocation without any alteration to
casework.
.3
Fit all exposed edges with 3.0 mm matching hardwood edging. Use one
piece for full length only.
.4
Cap exposed plastic laminate finish with edges of same finish and
pattern.
.5
Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with
manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with
concealed fasteners. Locate counter butt joints minimum 600mm from
sink cut-outs.
.6
Toe Base Height: Unless otherwise noted, provide 100mm high toe space
at front and 25mm inset at finished ends to accept finish base by flooring
contractor.
Manufactured Units
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Fabricate casework as governed by AWMAC custom quality grade and to
details and sizes as indicated
Casework to be built using full overlay doors and drawer fronts
Casework to be fabricated using frameless system
Casework Bodies: 19mm thick veneer core hardwood plywood
Casework Backs: 6mm hardwood plywood rabbeted into top, bottom and
gables. Backs to be reinforced with min. 12mm nailer strip X 75mm wide
at top and bottom of cabinet to allow for secure installation
Casework Shelving: for spans of up to 900mm, use 19mm thick veneer
core hardwood plywood c/w edgebanding at front edge only. For spans
greater than 900mm and less than 1200mm, use 25mm thick veneer core
hardwood plywood. Spans greater than 1200mm to be supported by
intermediate gable
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project no. 12208
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
2.9
Section 06400
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Page 7
Casework Doors and Drawer Fronts: 19mm thick particle core hardwood
plywood
Drawer Boxes: front, back, sides and bottom to be built using 12mm
hardwood plywood. Exposed edges to have minimum .6mm matching
veneer edgebanding applied.
Counter-tops: Postformed plastic laminate on 19mm particle board with
balanced backer sheet applied / Postformed profile to be D-shaped
Toe Kicks: 19mm exterior grade veneer core plywood / 100mm high toe
space at cabinet front and 25mm inset at finished ends to accept finish
base by flooring contractor.
Teacher’s Closets and Tall Storage Units: units to be fabricated using
45mm solid core wood doors with matching hardwood stiles. Doors to be
installed on 38mm X 45mm solid hardwood rails / rails to be rabbeted and
glued to gables
FACTORY FINISHING
.1
All casework to be shop finished for clear finish
.2
Topcoat to be pre or post catalyzed lacquer
.3
Casework to be finished as per AWMAC System Coating Schedule / Systems 2
and 3, Lacquer, Pre and Post Catalyzed
Part 3
Execution
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Section 01000: Existing conditions.
.2
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
.3
Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
.4
Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Comply with AWMAC (Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of
Canada) – Architectural Woodwork Standards / latest edition
.2
Install cabinetwork components plumb, true and level and securely fasten in
place. Accurately scribe and closely fit components to irregularities of adjacent
surfaces.
.3
Accurately fit joints in true plane, locate joints over bearing or supporting
surfaces.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project no. 12208
Section 06400
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Page 8
.4
Provide mechanical fastening devices such as nails, screws and bolts required
for fastening wood components. Unless permitted provide concealed fastening
of components.
.5
Install plastic laminate components using concealed fastening devices.
.6
Where trim components are fastened with screws or bolts, countersink screw and
bolt heads and provide wood plugs matching surrounding wood.
.7
Prepare work of this Section to receive services, fittings and fixtures provided by
Division 15 and 16.
.8
Provide grommets where shown and at all locations where power / data /
telephone outlets are located below counters / worktables.
.9
Where access is required to valves and other mechanical and electrical
components, located behind cabinetwork, provide removable plywood access
panels of size required.
.10
Check operation of all movable parts and, if necessary, adjust to ensure proper
and smooth function.
.11
Adjust all gapping at cabinet doors and drawer fronts to comply with AWMAC
standards.
.12
When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for
cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.
.13
Upon completion of installation, inspect work of this section and touch up, where
required, minor or damaged surface finish to restore it to original condition.
Replace damaged components which, in the opinion of the Consultant, cannot be
satisfactorily repaired.
3.3
ADJUSTING
.1
Section 01000: Installation
.2
Test installed work for rigidity and ability to support loads.
.3
Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.
3.4
CLEANING
.1
Section 01000: Cleaning
.2
Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.
END OF SECTION
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
1
General
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
1.2
Section 07850
FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKE SEALS
Page 1
Labour, Products, equipment and services necessary for firestopping and smoke
seals Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM E814, Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.
.2
CAN/CGSB 19.13, Sealing Compound, One Component, Elastomeric, Chemical
Curing.
.3
CAN/ULC S102, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and
Assemblies.
.4
CAN/ULC S115, Standard Method of Fire Tests of Firestop Systems.
.5
CAN/ULC S702, Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre for Buildings.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product data:
.1
Submit copies of manufacturer's Product data in accordance with the
Conditions of the Contract indicating:
.1
Performance criteria, compliance with appropriate reference standard,
characteristics, limitations.
.2
Product transportation, storage, handling and installation
requirements.
.3
Submit firestop and smoke seal manufacturer's Product data for
materials and prefabricated devices, including manufacturer's printed
installation instructions.
.2
Shop drawings:
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract
indicating:
.1
Fire rated and smoke sealed systems for each typical application.
.2
Construction details, accurately reflecting actual job conditions.
.3
ULC or Intertek Testing assembly listing.
.3
Certification:
.1
Submit certified documentation from manufacturer for each worker
performing Work of this Section.
.2
Submit installer's and Product manufacturer's certification verifying
compliance with the Contract Documents and conformance with ASTM E814
and CAN/ULC S115.
Section 07850
FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKE SEALS
Page 2
1.4
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
1.5
Perform Work of this Section by manufacturer-approved, skilled, qualified, and
experienced workers trained in installation of Work of this Section.
SITE CONDITIONS
.1
Conform to manufacturer's requirements and maintain a minimum temperature of 50
C for a minimum period of 24 h before application, during, and until application is
fully cured.
.2
Maintain sealant at a minimum 18° C for best workability.
2
Products
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
.1
2.2
Acceptable manufacturers of rated systems include:
.1
AD Fire Protection Systems Inc.
.2
Hilti Canada Corporation.
.3
3M Canada Inc.
.4
Tremco Ltd.
MATERIALS
.1
All materials under Work of this Section, including but not limited to, primers and
sealants are to have low VOC content limits.
.2
Firestop sealant: single component, low modulus, silicone rubber, moisture curing,
ULC labelled to CAN/CGSB 19.13-M and CAN/ULC S115.
.3
Firestop insulation: to CAN/ULC-S702, Type 2; mineral fibre manufactured from rock
or slag, suitable for manual application.
.1
Density: Minimum 64 kg/m3 when tested to ASTM C303.
.2
Combustibility: Noncombustible to CAN/ULC S114.
.3
Melt temperature: >1175 degrees C.
.4
Surface burning characteristics: to CAN/ULC S102, maximum flame spread
of 0, smoke developed of 0.
.5
Moisture Absorption: 0.04 percent when tested to ASTM C1104.
.6
Smoulder Resistance: 0.01 percent when tested to CAN/ULC S129.
.4
Damming, back-up, supports, and anchorage: In accordance with manufacturer's fire
rated systems and to acceptance of authorities having jurisdiction.
.5
Primer: As recommended by firestopping sealant manufacturer.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
2.3
Section 07850
FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKE SEALS
Page 3
SYSTEMS
.1
Firestopping and smoke seals: ULC or Intertek Testing Services listed Products and
systems in accordance with CAN/ULC S115 suitable to actual application and
installation conditions.
.2
Do not use Products containing asbestos.
.3
Firestopping components shall not contain volatile solvents or require special
application to protect plastic pipe from firestopping compound.
3
Execution
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verify condition and dimensions of previously installed Work upon which this Section
depends. Report defects to Consultant. Commencement of Work means
acceptance of existing conditions.
.2
Verify that substrates and surfaces to receive firestopping and smoke seals are
clean, dry, and frost free.
3.2
FIRESTOP AND SMOKE SEAL LOCATIONS AND RATINGS
.1
Install ULC firestop and smoke seal systems rated to match fire resistance design
rating of assemblies into which they are installed.
.2
Install firestop and smoke seal systems. Use systems with required ratings at
following typical locations, including but not limited to:
.1
Gaps at intersections of fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board
partitions.
.2
Control and sway joints in fire-resistance rated walls and partitions such as
masonry and gypsum board.
.3
Gaps at top of fire-resistance rated partitions such as masonry and gypsum
board partitions.
.4
Penetrations through fire-resistance rated walls and partitions including
mechanical and electrical services and openings and sleeves for future use.
.5
Penetrations through fire-resistance rated floor slabs, ceilings, and roofs.
.6
Perimeter of retaining angles on rigid ducts greater than 0.012 m2,
firestopping material between retaining angle and fire separation and
between retaining angle and duct, on each side of fire separation.
3.3
PREPARATION
.1
Prepare, modify, and adjust void sizes, proportions, and conditions to conform to fire
rated and smoke sealed assembly requirements such as assembly opening size and
dimensional restrictions.
Section 07850
FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKE SEALS
Page 4
.2
3.4
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Mask adjacent surfaces to avoid spillage and over-coating of adjacent surfaces.
Remove stains from adjacent surfaces.
INSTALLATION
.1
Install firestopping and smoke seal systems in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and fire rated assembly to establish continuity and integrity of fire
separations.
.2
Install firestop insulation in compacted thicknesses required by ULC design.
Compress insulation approximately 50 percent.
.3
Install primers as recommended by firestop and smoke seal Product manufacturers.
.4
Install temporary forming, damming, back-up as required, remove after materials
have achieved initial cure and will resist displacement.
.5
Install firestop and smoke seal filler in horizontal joints providing 25% compression
fit.
.6
Use resilient, elastomeric firestopping and smoke seal systems in following locations:
.1
Openings and sleeves for future use.
.2
Penetration systems subject to vibration or thermal movement.
.3
Penetration systems in acoustical containment enclosures.
.7
Trowel and tool exposed firestop and smoke seal Product surfaces to uniform,
smooth finish.
.8
Repair damaged firestopped and smoke sealed surfaces to acceptance of
Consultant.
.9
Identify each firestop and smoke seal penetration assembly with permanent label
listing following:
.1
Assembly and rating in hours.
.2
Date of installation.
.3
Installing company's name and telephone number.
.10
Do not cover materials until full cure has taken place.
3.5
CLEAN-UP
.1
Remove excess materials and debris and clean adjacent surfaces immediately after
application.
END OF SECTION
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
1
General
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
Section 07900
SEALANTS
Page 1
.1
Labour, Products, equipment and services necessary for sealant Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
.2
Work of this Section does not include sealants in firestopping and smoke sealed
assemblies.
.3
Work of this Section does not include sealant work identified in individual
specification sections.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM C834, Specification for Latex Sealants.
.2
ASTM C920, Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
.3
ASTM C1330, Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid
Applied Sealants.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product data: Submit copies of Product data in accordance with the Conditions of
the Contract describing type, composition and recommendations or directions for
surface preparation, material preparation and material installation.
.2
Samples:
.1
Submit following samples in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract.
.1
Two samples of sealant/caulking, for colour selection.
.2
Two samples of back-up material and primer for physical
characteristics.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
1.5
Qualifications: Work of this Section shall be executed by trained applicators
approved by sealant manufacturer and having a minimum of 5 years proven
experience.
SITE CONDITIONS
.1
Do not install materials when ambient air temperature is less than 5°C, when
recesses are wet or damp, or to manufacturer's recommendations.
Section 07900
SEALANTS
Page 2
1.6
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
1.7
Arrange delivery of materials in original, unopened packages with labels intact,
including batch number, and ensure that on-site storage is kept to a minimum. Do
not store materials on site where there exists any danger of damage from moisture,
direct sunlight, freezing and other contaminants.
WARRANTY
.1
Submit a warranty for Sealant Work in accordance with General Conditions, except
that warranty period is extended to 2 years. Warrant against leakage, cracking,
crumbling, melting, shrinkage, running, loss of adhesion and staining adjacent
surfaces. Warranty shall be for complete replacement including affected adjacent
Work.
2
Products
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
General:
.1
All materials under Work of this Section, including but not limited to, primers
and sealants are to have low VOC content limits.
.2
Use materials as received from manufacturers, without additives or
adulterations. Use one manufacturer's Product for each kind of Product
specified.
.2
Sealant Type A: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25; One-part, non-sag type,
silicone sealant, in standard colours selected.
.1
‘DC CWS’ by Dow Corning Inc.
.2
‘Sikasil 305CN' by Sika.
.3
‘Tremsil 400' by Tremco.
.3
Sealant Type B: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS; One-part mildew-resistant silicone,
in standard colours selected.
.1
‘786 Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant’ by Dow Corning Inc.
.2
‘Sikasil GP Mildew Resistant' by Sika.
.3
‘Tremsil 200 Silicone Sealant’ by Tremco Ltd.
.4
Sealant Type C: ASTM C834; Pure acrylic siliconized sealant; in standard white
colour (paintable).
.1
‘Tremflex 834 Silconized Sealant’ by Tremco Ltd.
2.2
ACCESSORIES
.1
Primers: Type recommended by material manufacturers for various substrates,
primers to prevent staining of adjacent surfaces encountered on project.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 07900
SEALANTS
Page 3
.2
Joint backing: ASTM C1330; Round, solid section, closed cell, skinned surface, soft
polyethylene foam gasket stock, compatible with primer and sealant materials, 30 to
50% oversized, Shore A hardness of 20, tensile strength 140 to 200 kPa. Bond
breaker type surface.
.3
Bond breaker: Type recommended by material manufacturers.
.4
Void filler around the window frames to be one part expanding polyurethane foam.
.5
Cleaning agents: As recommended by material manufacturer, non-staining,
harmless to substrates and adjacent finished surfaces.
2.3
MIXING
.1
Follow manufacturers instructions on mixing, shelf and pot life.
3
Execution
3.1
PREPARATION
.1
Prepare joints to receive sealants to manufacturer's instructions. Ensure that joints
are clean and dry and ferrous surfaces are free from rust and oil.
.2
Clean recesses to receive sealant, to be free of dirt, dust, loose material, oil, grease,
form release agents and other substances detrimental to sealant's performance.
.1
Remove lacquer or other protective coatings from metal surfaces, without
damaging metal finish, using oil-free solvents. Remove rust, mill scale and
coatings from ferrous metals by wire brush, grinding or sand blasting.
.2
Ensure recess is dry.
.3
Do not apply sealants to joint surfaces treated with sealer, curing compound,
water repellent, or other coatings. Remove incompatible coatings as
required.
.3
Ensure that all materials in contact with sealant are compatible. Test substrate for
adhesion.
.4
Depth of recess: Maintain depth to ½ joint width up to a maximum of 13 mm and not
less than 6 mm at centre of joint. For greater depth, use joint backing under. Where
recess is less than specified depth, cut back surface of recess to specified recess
depth.
.5
Install polyethylene backing rod in joints 6 mm or more in width. Roll backing rod
into joint. Do not stretch or bend backing rod. Install bond breaker to back of
recess.
.6
Prime sides of recess, in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions.
.7
Condition products for use in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
Section 07900
SEALANTS
Page 4
3.2
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
INSTALLATION
.1
Apply sealant immediately after adjoining Work is in condition to receive such Work.
Apply sealant in continuous bead using gun with correctly sized nozzle. Use
sufficient pressure to evenly fill joint.
.2
Ensure sealant has full uniform contact with, and adhesion to, side surfaces of
recess. Superficial painting with skin bead is not acceptable. Tool sealant to smooth
surface, free from ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets, embedded impurities, dirt,
stains or other defects.
.1
At recesses in angular surfaces, finish sealant with flat profile, flush with face
of material at each side.
.2
At recesses in flush surfaces, finish compound with concave face, flush with
face of material at each side.
.3
Make sealant bead uniform in colour.
.4
Cure sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions. Do not cover
up sealants until proper curing has taken place.
.5
Immediately remove excess compound or droppings which would set up or become
difficult to remove from adjacent finished surfaces, using recommended cleaners, as
work progresses. Do not use scrapers, chemicals or other tools which could
damage finished surfaces. Remove defective sealant.
.6
Clean recesses and re-apply sealant.
.7
Remove masking tape immediately after joints have been sealed and tooled.
3.3
CLEANING
.1
3.4
Clean surfaces adjacent to joints, remove sealant smears or other soiling resulting
from application of sealants. At metal surfaces, remove residue. Do not mar or
damage finishes on materials adjacent to joints. Repair or replace marred or
damaged materials.
SCHEDULE OF LOCATIONS
.1
Following sealant location schedule is included for convenience and may not be
complete. Examine Contract Drawings and other specification sections and
determine entire extent of Work of this Section. Generally seal following locations:
.1
Concrete, masonry and wood to metal.
.2
Wood to masonry and concrete.
.3
Metal to metal.
.4
All dissimilar materials.
.5
Where ‘sealant’ or ‘caulking’ in indicated on drawings.
.2
Sealant Type A:
.1
Exterior joints between masonry and steel or aluminum.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Section 07900
SEALANTS
Page 5
Exterior joints between masonry and shelf angle.
Exterior joints between steel or aluminum and concrete or masonry.
Interior and exterior control joints, except in floors.
Door frames, interior and exterior side.
Protrusions through interior and exterior walls and floors, interior and exterior
side, except where fire rated seals are required.
Seal thresholds.
.3
Sealant Type B:
.1
Control joints in tiled areas.
.2
Between vanity and tile.
.3
Between vanity and mechanical fixtures/fittings.
.4
Between access panels and tile.
.5
Between tiles and adjacent materials.
.4
Sealant Type C:
.1
Perimeter of millwork counters.
.2
Perimeter of interior windows.
.3
Perimeter of firehose cabinets.
.4
Junction between drywall and masonry.
END OF SECTION
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
1
General
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
1.2
Section 08110
WOOD DOORS AND METAL FRAMES
Page 1
Labour, Products, equipment and services necessary for the metal doors and frames
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
REFERENCES
.1
ANSI A208.1, Particleboard.
.2
ASTM A653/A653M, Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or ZincIron Alloy-Coated (Galvanealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
.3
ASTM A568/A568M, Specification for General Requirements for Steel, Carbon and
High-Strength Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled Sheet and Cold-Rolled Sheet.
.4
AWMAC, Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers' Association of Canada. Quality
Standards for Architectural Woodwork.
.5
CAN/CGSB-12.1-M, Tempered or Laminated Safety Glass.
.6
CAN/CSA O132.2 Series, Wood Flush Doors.
.7
CSA W47.1, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures.
.8
CSA W59-M, Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding).
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product data: Submit manufacturer's Product data in accordance with the
Conditions of the Contract indicating door and frame construction.
.2
Shop drawings:
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract for
wood doors and metal frames indicating:
.1
Thickness and type of steel and steel stiffeners and location of them
within the door.
.2
Detail thicknesses, core construction and door sizes,
.3
Quantities, fastenings and finishes.
.4
Location of mortises, reinforcement, anchorages, joining, welding,
sleeving, exposed fasteners, openings and arrangement for hardware.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Perform Work in accordance with requirements by a member of the Canadian Steel
Door and Frame Manufacturers Association.
Section 08110
WOOD DOORS AND METAL FRAMES
Page 2
.2
1.5
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Perform Work in accordance with requirements of AWMAC, Quality Standards for
Architectural Woodwork, Premium Grade and CSA O132.2-M, except as indicated
otherwise. The AWMAC standard governs over the CSA standard.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store, and handle wood doors in accordance with the AWMAC Quality
Standards amended as follows:
.1
Wrap wood doors individually in protective wrapping for shipment and Site
storage.
.2
Handle wood doors carefully to prevent damage; replace damaged doors.
.3
Store doors flat on a dry, level surface. Ventilate and maintain recommended
relative humidity before, during and after installation.
2
Products
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
General:
.1
Materials used for work of this Section are to be in accordance with the
following criteria, but not limited to:
.1
Regionally sourced materials.
.2
Certified wood.
.3
VOC content limits.
.2
Adhesives - Urea-formaldehyde-free glues.
.3
All dimensional lumber and plywood to be FSC certified.
.4
All composite wood and/or agrifibre products (including core materials) and
adhesives used to fabricate laminated assemblies used in building must not
contain added urea-formaldehyde.
.5
Material to be sourced regionally from within 800 km of jobsite wherever
possible.
.6
Wherever possible, metals used in work of this Section are to contain
recycled content.
.2
Steel: ASTM A568/A568M, Class 1; Commercial grade steel, hot dip galvanized to
ASTM A653/A653M, ZF075 satin coat finish. Minimum base steel thickness:
.1
Frames
1.6 mm
.2
Lock/strike reinforcements
1.6 mm
.3
Hinge reinforcements
2.7 mm
.4
All other reinforcement
1.6 mm
.5
Top and bottom channels
1.2 mm
.6
Glazing stops
0.9 mm
.7
Guard boxes
0.9 mm
.8
Jamb spreaders
0.9 mm
.3
Wood doors (solid core):
.1
5 ply wood door: As manufactured by Baillargeon Doors Inc., Lambton Doors,
Mohawk Doors or Premdor Inc.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Section 08110
WOOD DOORS AND METAL FRAMES
Page 3
Core: To ANSI A208.1, density 528 kg/m3 minimum, sanded faces, of
thickness to fill void. Extruded particle board cores with voids are not
permitted.
Rails:
.1
Top: 38 mm hardwood.
.2
Bottom: 38 mm hardwood.
Stiles
.1
Hinge: 38 mm hardwood edge strip.
.2
Lock: 38 mm hardwood edge strip.
.3
Edge detail: AWMAC No.2.
Crossbanding: 1.5 mm thick HDF composite.
Door size: Provide custom door size as indicated on drawings.
Door facing: 1.5 mm flat cut birch Veneer finished in accordance with Section
09900.
.4
Adhesive: CAN/CSA O132.2, Type I; Waterproof.
.5
Screws: Stainless steel screws with countersunk flat head.
.6
Frame anchors: 0.9 mm minimum steel anchors of suitable design securely welded
inside each jamb.
.7
Tempered glass: CAN/CGSB-12.1-M, Type 2, Class B, Category II, clear, minimum
6 mm thick.
.8
Laminated glass: to CAN/CGSB-12.1, Category II, consisting of top layer of 3 mm
thick clear tempered glass, 0.8 mm thick clear PVB interlayer, and bottom layer of 3
mm thick clear tempered glass. Heat strengthening and/or tempered laminated glass
as necessary to prevent thermal breakage.
2.2
FABRICATION
.1
General
.1
Fabricate doors and frames in accordance with reviewed shop drawings.
.2
Form profiles accurately to details shown on Contract Drawings.
.2
Metal Frames and Screens:
.1
Fabricate frames of welded construction. Cut mitres and joints accurately
and weld continuously on inside of frame profile. Exterior frames to be
thermally broken.
.2
Construct large frame sections with provision for on Site assembly to suit Site
conditions.
.3
Blank, reinforce, drill and tap frames for mortised, templated hardware.
Protect mortised cut-outs with guard boxes.
.4
Reinforce frames where required for surface mounted hardware.
.5
Reinforce frames over 1200 mm wide with roll formed steel channels or
hollow structural sections specified in Section 05500 and as indicated on
drawings.
Section 08110
WOOD DOORS AND METAL FRAMES
Page 4
.6
.7
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Install 2 channel or angle spreaders per frame, to ensure correct frame
alignment. Install stiffener plates or spreaders between frame trim where
required, to prevent bending of trim and to maintain alignment when setting in
place.
Form channel glazing stops minimum 16 mm height, accurately cut, mitred,
fitted and fastened to frame sections with stainless steel counter-sunk, flat
head screws spaced at maximum 450 mm throughout and 50 mm from each
end.
.3
Welding of frames:
.1
Welding: CSA W59-M to produce a finished unit with no visible seams or
joints, square, true and free of distortion.
.2
Welding: Continuous unless specified otherwise. Execute welding by a firm
fully acceptable to the Canadian Welding Bureau to requirements of CSA
W47.1.
.3
Ream and remove burrs from drilled and punched holes.
.4
Grind welded corners and joints to a flat plane and fill with metallic filler and
sand to a uniform smooth finish. Apply one coat of primer.
.4
Wood Doors:
.1
Fabricate doors square, true, and free from distortion waves, ridges or core
ghost lines. Factory machine doors for finish hardware and flooring.
.2
Fabricate doors using hot press construction technology. Bond stiles and
rails to core using adhesive. Sand for uniform thickness. Laminate door
facing and trim, to assembled core in hot press.
.3
Cut and bevel stile edges as follows:
.1
Lock side: 3 mm in 50 mm.
.2
Hinge side: 1.5 mm in 50 mm.
3
Execution
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
3.2
Verify condition and dimensions of previously installed Work upon which this Section
depends. Report defects to Consultant. Commencement of Work means
acceptance of existing conditions.
HOLLOW METAL FRAME INSTALLATION
.1
Install hollow metal frames plumb, square, level, secure and at correct elevation.
.2
Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction. Brace frames rigidly in
position while building-in. Remove temporary steel shipping jamb spreaders. Install
wood spreaders at third points of frame rebate height to maintain frame width.
Supply and install vertical supports as indicated on drawings for openings over
1200 mm in width. Remove wood spreaders after frames have been built-in.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 08110
WOOD DOORS AND METAL FRAMES
Page 5
.3
Allow for structural deflection and prevent structural loads from being transmitted to
hollow metal frames.
.4
Install glazing in metal frames in accordance with the requirements of Section 08810.
.5
Touch-up areas where galvanized coating has been removed or damaged with
primer.
3.3
WOOD DOOR INSTALLATION
.1
Install doors plumb, rigid, square, clear of floor finishes, and with correct rebate
opening for door installation.
.2
Conform to requirements of AWMAC Quality Standard, for wood door installation.
3.4
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
.1
Replace the following wood doors:
.1
Warped more than 3 mm, measured at any point on door, relative to perfectly
flat surface.
.2
Core telegraphing visible at 1500 mm distance, under final Site lighting
conditions.
.2
Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.
.3
Clean doors and frames.
END OF SECTION
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 08710
FINISHING HARDWARE
Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
Instructions
.1
All General Conditions of the Stipulated Price contract incorporated in the
Canadian Standard Construction Document CCDC2–2008 and the Supplementary
General Conditions included in this Specification shall form part of and govern all
Sections of these Specifications.
.2
The Work associated with this section shall comply with all pertinent sections and
articles in Document 0 - Contract and Bidding Requirements and Division 1 General Requirements.
Scope of Work
.1
Supply of finishing hardware including but limited to all hardware for hollow metal
and or wood doors, teachers closets and larger cabinets requiring locksets,
aluminium doors, and other doors as noted herein.
.2
Supply and installation of power door operators, and all required accessories
(including key switches) by this section (08710). Key switches to be installed on the
underside on auto door operator and keyed into the master key system
.3
The Hardware Supplier shall provide assistance to the Contractor on all matters
pertaining to the Work of the Section.
.4
The Hardware Schedule shall be prepared by a Consultant selected by the Owner
(see schedules section 1.5) and shall be provided to the Contractor who shall
coordinate the Work of this Section.
.5
With the exception of the teacher closets locksets; all architectural millwork
hardware shall be supplied and installed, including the teacher closet lockset by
the Millwork Subcontractor per Section 06400 – ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK.
.6
Supply only of the aluminium door hardware by this section (08710) and installed
by the aluminium window and door Subcontractor. The weather-strip and threshold
will be supplied and installed by the aluminium door supplier.
.7
The Contractor shall take delivery of hardware, furnish receipts, and store it in a
safe place, systematically, according to the hardware list. The Contractor must
check all items received and be entirely responsible for its custody after delivery to
the job.
.8
This Section 08710 covers the supply only of the finishing hardware, including all
applicable delivery charges and Federal and Provincial taxes. The General
Contractor shall include in their Bid Price all costs for the installation of all of the
finishing hardware and signs required for a complete job, in accordance with the
manufacturer’s directions and the Architect’s instructions. Holes and locksets shall
be made the exact and proper size and the Contractor will be required to replace
doors which are damaged by poor and improper hardware installation.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
1.3
1.4
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
.1
Section 06200 - FINISHED CARPENTRY
.2
Section 06400 – ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK
.3
Section 06200 – FINISHED CARPENTRY
.4
Section 08100 - METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
.5
Section 08200 - WOOD AND PLASTIC DOORS
.6
Section 08400 - ALUMINIUM DOORS, FRAMES AND WINDOWS
.7
Division 16 – ELECTRICAL (Connection of power door operators, interlocking
hardware, electric locks, electric strikes and other controls)
References
.1
1.5
Section 08710
FINISHING HARDWARE
Page 2
Architectural Finish Hardware and power door operators shall conform to the
following as a minimum standard:
.1
CAN/CGSB-69.18-M, Butts and Hinges;
.2
CAN/CGSB-69.19-M, Exit Devices;
.3
CAN/CGSB-69.20-M, Door Controls, Closers;
.4
CAN/CGSB-69.21-M, Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products;
.5
CAN/AGSB-69.22-M, Architectural Door Trim;
.6
CAN/CGSB-69.29-M, Template Hinge Dimensions;
.7
CAN/CGSB-69.24-M, Door Controls - Overhead Holders;
.8
CAN/CGSB-69.29-M, Mortise Locks and Latches;
.9
CAN/CGSB-69.91-M, Closer Hold or Release Devices;
.10
CAN/CGSB-69.99-M, Self-Closing Hinges and pivots;
.11
CAN/CGSB-69.94-M, Materials and Finishes.
.12
CAN/CGSB-69.26-M90, Power-Operator Pedestrian Doors.
.13
CSA-HA Series, CSA Standards for Aluminium and Aluminium Alloys.
.14
CAN/ULC-S533-1987, Egress Door Securing and Releasing Devices.
.15
NFPA80, Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows, 2010 Edition.
Schedules
.1
The Architectural Finishing Hardware Schedule contained within the Contract
Documents has been prepared by the Owners Hardware Consultant – Upper
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 08710
FINISHING HARDWARE
Page 3
Canada Specialty Hardware Limited, 7100 Warden Avenue, Unit 1, Markham,
Ontario, contact: Sam Scutella, phone no. (905) 940-8358 ext. 232.
1.6
1.7
1.8
Quality Assurance and Regulatory Agencies
.1
The supply of the Work contained in this Section shall be made by recognized
architectural finishing hardware and power door operator Suppliers and or
Subcontractors being well experienced in the supply finishing hardware and supply
and installation of power door operators.
.2
Hardware provided shall comply with codes and requirements of all governing
authorities, and as specified.
.3
Provide hardware items with characteristics which will provide specified fire ratings,
and conform to exit requirements of all governing authorities. Install only U.L.C. or
U.L.I. listed hardware for all fire rated closures.
.4
Perform power door operator Work to CAN/CGSB-69.26.
Performance Requirements
.1
Power door operator equipment shall accommodate high frequency pedestrian
traffic.
.2
Power door operators shall be C.S.A. approved and labelled.
.3
Power door operator and hardware to Fire Rated Doors shall be U.L.C. listed and
labelled.
.4
Provide manual operation for opening and closing of doors during electrical power
failure and when power is manually switched off.
.5
Supply electro mechanical automatic swing door operator
.6
Locks and Panic Hardware on fire rated doors shall be U.L.C. listed and labelled.
Submittals
.1
Architectural Finishing Hardware Schedule:
.1
Contractor to submit six (6) copies of the architectural finishing hardware
schedule and product data of each product to be used on the project to the
Consultant for review and approval. The architectural finishing hardware
schedule shall list type, selected manufacturer's name and number, location
and finish for all hardware, and complete cross reference to Door and
Hardware Schedules.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
.2
1.9
Section 08710
FINISHING HARDWARE
Page 4
.2
Once the architectural finishing hardware schedule is reviewed by the Owner
and the Consultant, the Contractor shall release the architectural finishing
hardware schedule and product data to the architectural finishing hardware,
aluminium door, power door and hollow metal door and pressed steel frame
Subcontractors along with all required architectural finishing hardware
templates. Contractor to furnish promptly to the applicable trades all
templates and ¡formation required for proper preparation for all applications of
hardware, n ample time to facilitate the progress of the Work.
.3
As requested by the Owner and or Consultant, furnish samples of each
architectural finishing hardware item.
.4
The Contractor shall prepare and submit for review, a detailed keying
schedule recognizing the Owner requirements which shall be determined
after award of the Contract.
Maintenance Instructions:
.1
Instruct the Owner's designated representative in proper care and
preventative maintenance of all hardware to assure longevity of operation.
.2
Provide three (3) copies of descriptive information, operating, adjustment,
and maintenance instructions, and "As-Built" record of location of each
hardware group, spare parts list, and other pertinent information.
.3
Provide the information suitably identified in accordance with requirements of
Section 01730 - OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA.
.4
Include servicing frequencies, instructions for adjustment and operation
applicable to each type of component or hardware, and name, address and
telephone number of nearest authorized service representative.
Product Handling
.1
Package each item of hardware individually, complete with all trim and necessary
fastenings, and accessories, including wrenches, keys, and other appurtenances
required to ensure correct installation. Mark each item as to contents and
appropriate use in specified groups.
.2
All items of hardware subject to handling when installed shall be provided with an
easily removable covering to protect against scratches, abrasions, coating with
dissimilar finish materials on adjacent surfaces, and tarnishing.
.3
All aluminium door hardware to be itemized and packaged separately. Contractor
to hand over finishing hardware to aluminium door supplier for installation.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 08710
FINISHING HARDWARE
Page 5
1.10 Templates
.1
Provide to associated trades, and one (1) copy to Consultant, necessary copies of
all templates, template information, installation instructions and details necessary
to enable the preparation for, and installation of finish hardware in accordance with
Door Hardware Institute Recommended Procedures. Submit templates arranged
and marked coincident with specified hardware designations.
1.11 Coordination
.1
Coordinate work of this Section to ensure all information and material is promptly
provided, to ensure orderly and expeditious progress of Work, and to comply with
schedule for completion of all phases of Work.
.2
Assist in organizing hardware storeroom and provide qualified staff to correctly
categorize, mark, and arrange each item in groups to enable efficient dispensing in
specified hardware groups for each door to installation trades.
.3
Be responsible for coordination of hardware with doors, frames and other surfaces
in which direct contact is made. This function shall include a review and
acceptance of all hardware information on steel door and frame shop drawings,
aluminium and stainless steel entrance shop drawings, overhead door shop
drawings, and any other shop drawings affected by hardware supplied under this
section. Return such drawings with review stamp and signature to applicable
manufacturers with five (5) days of receipt.
.4
Provide qualified staff on site promptly to assist installation trades subsequent to
being requested and to ensure that hardware is being correctly installed.
1.12 Key Control Security
.1
Provide one (1) Key Control Cabinet as indicated in Architectural Finish Hardware
Schedule, complete with “Two Tag Key Control System” and all change keys and
mount in location later designated by the Consultant.
.2
All interior locks including cylinder for auto opener key switch shall incorporate
keyway of selected manufacture “Schlage”
1.13 Warranty
.1
Contractor hereby warrants that work of this section shall remain free of defects in
materials and quality of work in accordance with requirements of General
Conditions, but for a period of one (1) years for all items except for door closers
which shall be under warranty for a period of five (5) years. Refer to Document
00601 – WARRANTY FORM.
.2
Contractor further agrees to promptly remove, replace and reinstall material, upon
verification that defects in material, quality of work, or operation are in evidence.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
.3
Section 08710
FINISHING HARDWARE
Page 6
Power Door Operator Warranty shall be for a period of one (1) year and shall
include coverage of repair or replacement of components or entire operator units
which fail in operation and hardware, deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and
other materials beyond normal weathering.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
Materials - General
.1
Architectural finishing hardware shall be supplied in strict accordance to the
Architectural Finish Hardware Schedule attached to the Contract Documents.
Hardware finish of different manufacturers shall be uniform in all respects.
.2
Provide all items complete with fastening devices necessary to ensure a neat and
secure installation.
.3
One manufacturer's products shall only be used for similar items.
.4
The Contractor shall ensure that the hardware specified is suitable in both
dimension and function for the intended purpose. The Contractor shall advise the
Hardware Consultant and Consultant of discrepancies or omissions.
.5
Power door operator shall be as manufactured by “Besam Automatic Door
Systems”, SW100 LE 1/8 HP Mechanical Automatic Swing Door Operator. No
alternates will be accepted
Materials - Specific
.1
Hinges:
.1
In all high traffic areas, foyers, corridor doors, stairways, gymnasium
entrances, washrooms, library, change rooms and kitchen shall have four
heavy weight butt hinges as manufactured by “Montreal Hinge, BB1068
interior & BB1099 NRP exterior, or a specified in hardware schedule. See
finishing hardware schedule for allowable alternate product
.2
In light traffic interior doors butt hinges shall be as manufactured by “Montreal
Hinge”, model no. BB1079 114x101, finish C26D or a specified in hardware
schedule. See finishing hardware schedule for allowable alternate product
.3
Where doors are to swing 180 deg., furnish hinges of sufficient throw to clear
adjacent trim and or wall.
.4
Aluminium door hinges to be manufactured by “Select Hinge” to be a geared
type which has been cycled test for two million cycles or more, nothing less
will not be accepted. Model SL11HD
See finishing hardware schedule for allowable alternate product
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
.2
.3
Exit Devices
.1
In all exterior aluminium curtain wall or aluminium frames wall systems
mortise exit devices shall be as manufactured by “Von Duprin”, model no.
9875EO, finish C26D. No alternates will be accepted
.2
In all exterior aluminium curtain wall or aluminium frames wall systems with a
power door operator, active leaf rim exit device shall be as manufactured by
“Von Duprin, model no. 9875NL-OP X 110MD-NL, finish US26D. No
alternates will be accepted
.3
In all interior rim exit device within a fire rated closure shall be as
manufactured by “Von Duprin, model no. 98L-F X 996L-R&V, 07B lever,
finish C26D. No alternates will be accepted
Closers
.1
.4
.5
Section 08710
FINISHING HARDWARE
Page 7
All closers shall be as manufactured by “LCN Closers”, model no. LCN4040
Series, finish 689 complete with heavy duty arms, powder coat finish,
delayed action where required and 110 deg (Minimum opening), drop plates,
and door track. No alternates will be accepted
Door Pulls
.1
All door pulls for entry doors shall be stainless steel 19 mm (3/4’ dia.) as
manufactured by “Gallery Specialty Hardware”, model no. GSH 4012-1, finish
C32D. See finishing hardware schedule for allowable alternate product
.2
All door pulls located exterior doors off of gymnasiums, exterior access
storage rooms, etc shall be flush mounted stainless steel type as
manufactured by “Gallery Specialty Hardware”, model no. GSH 955, finish
C26D.
See finishing hardware schedule for allowable alternate product
Stops
.1
All doors where a wall stop cannot be used, supply a concealed overhead
stop as manufactured by “Glynn-Johnson”, model no. 100S or 100H for hold
open, heavy duty, finish C32D. No alternates will be accepted
.
.2
All doors where a wall stop or concealed overhead stop cannot be used,
supply and install a surface mounted overhead stop as manufactured by
“Glynn-Johnson”, model no. 900S or 900H for hold open, heavy duty, finish
C32D. No alternates will be accepted
.
.3
All doors which open against a wall supply and install a wall mounted door
stop as manufactured by “Gallery Specialty Hardware”, model no. GSH 250,
finish C32D. Floor stops not to be used.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
.6
Locksets, Privacy Sets, Passage Sets
.1
.7
.8
All doors requiring a lock, privacy, storage or passage set shall be a mortise
lock as manufactured by “Schlage”, “L9000”, ANSI A156.13, series 1000
Grade 1(extra heavy duty, 07B lever design, all to be finish 626. No
alternates will be accepted
Cores
.1
All exterior door cores shall be high security type with interchangeable cores
as manufactured by “ASSA as supplied by the Toronto Catholic District
School Board. No alternates will be accepted
.2
All locksets and cylinders shall be grand master keyed, construction keyed
and manufactured by “Schlage”. No alternates will be accepted
Door Bolts
.1
.9
.10
Section 08710
FINISHING HARDWARE
Page 8
All doors requiring non-active leafs shall have a manual flush bolt as
manufactured by “Ives”, model no. FB458, U.L.C. listed, with bottom bolting,
finish US26D.
See finishing hardware schedule for allowable alternate product
Door Protection Plates
.1
All doors requiring kick plates shall be as manufactured by “Gallery Specialty
Hardware”, model no. GSH80A 150 x width of door less 50mm, finish C32D,
installed with no holes, tape mounted.
See finishing hardware schedule for allowable alternate product
.2
All doors off the corridors shall have mop plates installed and shall be as
manufactured by “Gallery Specialty Hardware”, model no. GSH80A 150 x
width of door less 25mm, finish C32D, installed with no holes, tape mounted.
See finishing hardware schedule for allowable alternate product
Thresholds and Weatherstripping
.1
All exterior doors requiring a threshold (except for aluminium doors) shall be
as manufactured by “KN Crowder Mfg. Inc.”, model no. CT-805 x width of
door, finish AL.
See finishing hardware schedule for allowable alternate product
.2
All exterior doors (except for aluminium) requiring a door sweep shall be as
manufactured by “KN Crowder Mfg. Inc.”, model no. W24S x width of door,
finish AL.
See finishing hardware schedule for allowable alternate product
.3
All exterior doors requiring weatherstripping (except aluminium doors) shall
be as manufactured by “KN Crowder Mfg. Inc.”, model no. W-50 x width &
height of door, finish AL.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 08710
FINISHING HARDWARE
Page 9
See finishing hardware schedule for allowable alternate product
.11
.4
All doors in music and practise rooms an automatic door bottom shall be
recessed and as manufactured by “KN Crowder Mfg. Inc.”, model no. CT53
Neoprene x width of door, finish AL for wood doors and CT54 for hollow
metal doors.
See finishing hardware schedule for allowable alternate product
.5
All doors in music and practise rooms install weatherstripping as
manufactured by “KN Crowder Mfg. Inc.”, model no. W-15 x width & height of
door, finish AL.
See finishing hardware schedule for allowable alternate product
Power Door Operators
.1 Power door operator shall be as manufactured by “Besam Automatic Door
Systems”, SW100 LE 1/8 HP Mechanical Automatic Swing Door Operator,
C/W factory installed key switch to underside of operator to accept a full
mortise cylinder Grand Master keyed to system
No alternates will be accepted
.12
.2
Push buttons BEA 10PBR1 6"
.3
BEA 10 escutcheon Tamper Proof S/S
Miscellaneous
.1
Construction keys
.2
Grand Master keys
.3
Master Keys.
.4
Change Keys.
.5
Staff Access Keys
.6
Key cabinet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Examination
.1
Before furnishing any hardware, carefully check drawings of Work requiring
hardware, verify door swings, door and frame materials and operating conditions,
and assure that hardware will fit Work to be attached.
.2
Check shop drawings and frame and door lists affecting hardware type and
installation, and verify to correctness thereof, or advise of required revisions.
Check that doors, frames and panels requiring additional support are reinforced.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
3.2
3.3
.3
Point out special requirements to installer. Make final adjustment of hardware, in
particular closer arms, valves and locksets; all to work properly.
.4
Adjustments and inspection of initial closers shall be witnessed by Consultant.
Provide adequate 48 hours notice and staff to reach satisfactory conclusion to
witnessed tests.
Installation
.1
Install architectural finish hardware, power door operators, including wiring,
conduits and controls in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer’s
instructions.
.2
Coordinate the installation of power door operators and controls with related and
adjacent work.
.3
Make electrical connections for power door operators with rough-in power supply
installed by Division 16 - ELECTRICAL.
.4
Power shall be brought to the location by the Electrical subcontractor who shall
also supply and install all low voltage wiring between the operators and the push
buttons.
.5
Architectural finish hardware shall be installed to manufacturers’ standard heights
unless noted below or as defined by the requirements of the O.B.C. or as shown
on the Contract Document drawings:
Elementary Schools – Locksets, privacy sets, panic hardware and latching to
be installed at 900 mm (36”) from finished floor.
.2
Secondary Schools – Locksets, privacy sets, panic hardware and latching to
be installed at 1016 mm (40”) from finished floor.
After repeated operation of complete installation equivalent to three days of use by
normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles), readjust power door operators and controls for
optimum, smooth operating condition and safety and for weather tight closure.
Lubricate hardware, operating equipment and other moving parts.
Demonstration
.1
3.5
.1
Adjusting
.1
3.4
Section 08710
FINISHING HARDWARE
Page 10
Demonstrate to the Owner the operation and maintenance requirements for the
equipment of this section.
Field Quality Control
.1
Inspect the installation of finish hardware on an agreed frequency.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 08710
FINISHING HARDWARE
Page 11
.2
Advise the Consultant in writing of any Work being performed which will prejudice
the installation or correct operation of any item of hardware.
.3
Upon completion of installation of hardware, hardware supplier shall arrange and
conduct, in company of Owner, Consultant and Contractor, inspections to verify
that all hardware is installed, adjusted and functioning satisfactorily, complete with
required trim and accessories, and fastenings are adequately secured and
accepted. Where necessary, recommend adjustments of such items as closer
arms, valves, door holders and latch and locksets. Report all comments in writing
to Owner, Consultant and Contractor.
.4
Any and all substitutions of specified products which do not meet conditions of this
specification shall be removed from site and replaced with those products specified
at no additional cost to Owner.
***************
End of Section 08710
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Section 08710
FINISHING HARDWARE
Page 12
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
1
General
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
1.2
Section 09250
GYPSUM BOARD
Page 1
Design, labour, Products, equipment and services necessary for gypsum board
Work.
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM A653/A653M, Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-coated (Galvanized) or ZincIron Alloy-Coated (Galvanealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
.2
ASTM C475, Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum
Board.
.3
ASTM C645, Specification for Non-Load Bearing (Axial) Steel Studs, Runners
(Tracks), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board.
.4
ASTM C665, Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction
and Manufactured Housing.
.5
ASTM C754, Specification for Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached
Gypsum Board.
.6
ASTM C840, Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
.7
ASTM C1002, Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum
Board or Metal Plaster Bases.
.8
ASTM C1178, Specification for Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board.
.9
ASTM C1278, Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Panel.
.10
ASTM C1325, Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cementitious
Backer Units.
.11
ASTM C1396, Specification for Gypsum Board.
.12
CGSB 19-GP-21M, Sealing and Bedding Compound, Acoustical.
.13
CAN/CGSB-71.25-M, Adhesive, for Bonding Drywall to Wood Framing and Metal
Studs.
.14
CAN/ULC-S102, Building Materials and Assemblies, Standard Method of Test for
Surface Burning Characteristics of.
Section 09250
GYPSUM BOARD
Page 2
1.3
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
.1
Design ceiling suspension system in accordance with manufacturer's printed
directions and ASTM C754.
.2
Design ceiling system for adequate support of electrical fixtures as required by the
current bulletin of the Electrical Safety Authority.
.3
Design hanger anchor and entire suspension system static loading not to exceed
25% of their ultimate capacity including lighting fixture dead loads.
.4
Design suspension system to support weight of mechanical and electrical items such
as air handling boots and lighting fixtures, and with adequate support to allow
rotation/relocation of light fixtures.
.5
Design subframing as necessary to accommodate, and to circumvent, conflicts and
interferences where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of
hangers.
.6
Design of wall assemblies with a height greater than 3000 mm incorporating nonstandard gypsum board assemblies including, but not limited to, assemblies
incorporating abuse resistant gypsum board and cement board.
1.4
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
1.
1.5
Provide fire separations and fire protection exactly as specified in test design
specification that validates the specified rating. Verify that work specified in other
Sections, as a part of the entire assembly, meets applicable validating test design
specification.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product data:
.1
Submit copies of manufacturer's Product data in accordance with the
Conditions of the Contract indicating:
.1
Performance criteria, compliance with appropriate reference standard,
characteristics, and limitations.
.2
Product transportation, storage, handling and installation
requirements.
.2
Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Conditions of the
Contract indicating wall assemblies, suspension systems, adjacent construction,
elevations, sections and details, dimensions, thickness, finishes and relationship to
adjacent construction.
.3
Certifications: Submit written certification stating that suspended ceiling system is
designed for adequate support of electrical fixtures as required by the current
bulletin of the Electrical Safety Authority.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
1.6
Section 09250
GYPSUM BOARD
Page 3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
1.7
Qualifications: Execute the Work of this Section by skilled, qualified, and
experienced workers trained in the installation of the Work of this Section.
SITE CONDITIONS
.1
Do not begin Work of this Section until:
.1
Mechanical and electrical Work above the ceiling is complete.
.2
Substrate and ambient temperature is above 15°C.
.3
Relative humidity is below 80 %.
.4
Ventilation is adequate to remove excess moisture.
.2
Install temporary protection and facilities to maintain Product manufacturer's, and
above specification, environmental requirements 24 h before, during, and 24 h after
installation.
2
Products
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
General:
.1
All materials under Work of this Section, including but not limited to, sealants,
adhesives, and primers are to have low VOC content limits.
.2
Steel framing: ASTM C754; ASTM A653/A653-M, Z275; cold rolled, galvanized steel
sheet.
.1
Bailey Metal Products Limited
.2
Corus Metal Profiles
.3
Steel studs and track runners: ASTM C645; Galvanized steel studs and runners, 32
mm wide x depth as indicated on Contract Drawings. Formed from galvanized steel
sheet, thicknesses as follows:
.1
Less than 3000 mm: Minimum 0.53 mm (25 ga.).
.2
Greater than 3000 mm and non-standard assemblies: Minimum 0.91 mm (20
ga.).
.4
Main carrying channels: ASTM C645; Formed from galvanized steel sheet, 38 x 19
mm cold rolled, channels.
.5
Resilient channel: ASTM C645; 0.5 mm thick galvanized metal, 57 mm wide x 12
mm deep for walls and ceiling to reduce sound transmission.
.6
Furring channels: ASTM C645; Formed from galvanized steel sheet, 22 mm winged
flange type, cold rolled.
.7
Furring channels (hat type): ASTM C645; 0.5 mm base steel thickness, galvanized.
70 mm wide x 22 mm deep hat shaped channel.
Section 09250
GYPSUM BOARD
Page 4
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
.8
Heavy duty furring channels: ASTM C645; 0.9 mm steel thickness, galvanized hat
shaped channel with a wider and deeper size as required by manufacturers.
.9
Hanger wires: 4.1 mm minimum diameter galvanized pencil rod.
.10
Tie wire: 1.6 mm thick minimum diameter, soft annealed, galvanized steel wire.
.11
Corner bead, casing bead, and special shapes: Formed from 0.6 mm thick minimum,
galvanized steel sheet, designed to be concealed by joint compound.
.12
Control joint strip: Roll formed from galvanized steel sheet, with a tape protected
recess, 6 mm wide x 11 mm deep.
.13
Screw fasteners: ASTM C1002 Type S; Corrosion resistant.
.14
Concrete anchors: tie wire sleeve anchors, ‘Redi-Drive Anchors' by ITW Red Head
or approved alternative.
.15
Acoustic/Fire insulation: ASTM C665, Paperless, semi-rigid, spun mineral fibre
mats, of thickness as indicated on Contract Drawings, ‘NoiseReducer’ by
CertainTeed, ‘Quiet Zone Batts’ by Owens Corning Inc. or ‘Roxul AFB’ by Roxul Inc.
.16
Acoustical sealant: CGSB 19-GP-21M; Single component, non-skinning synthetic
rubber sealant. Acoustical Sealant by Tremco.
.17
Isolation hangers: Shall be a combination of high-deflection steel spring in series
with a resilient, molded neoprene noise and vibration isolation pad. Steel spring and
neoprene pad shall be incorporated into a stamped steel hanger assembly that
resiliently supports the isolated ceiling. Model ICC Deck-Suspended Ceiling Hanger
by Kinetics Noise Control or approved alternative by Mason Industries Inc., or PAC
International.
.18
Abuse Resistant Panels: 15.9 mm thick unless indicated otherwise on drawings;
‘Fibrerock Abuse Resistant Panels’ by CGC Inc. or ‘DensArmor Plus Abuse
Resistant Interior Panel’ by G-P Products or approved alternative by Certainteed
Gypsum Canada.
.19
Moisture and mould resistant board: 12.7 mm thick of maximum practical lengths to
minimize end joints, unless indicated otherwise; ‘ProRoc Moisture and Mould
Resistant Gypsum Board with M2Tech' by Certainteed Gypsum Canada, ‘Sheetrock
Mold Tough’ by CGC Inc. or ‘DensArmor Plus High Performance Interior Panel’ by
G-P Products.
.20
Tile Backer: Water resistant tile backer board meeting ASTM C1178 or ASTM
C1278, 15.9 mm thick unless indicated otherwise on drawings. ‘Dens Shield’ by G-P
Products or approved alternative by Certainteed Gypsum Canada or CGC Inc.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 09250
GYPSUM BOARD
Page 5
.21
Fire rated gypsum board: ASTM C1396; gypsum board 15.9 mm thick of maximum
practical lengths to minimize end joints, unless indicated otherwise. Furnish Type X
Board by Certainteed Gypsum Canada, CGC Inc., or G-P Products.
.22
Gypsum board: ASTM C1396; gypsum board 13 mm thick, unless otherwise
indicated, of maximum practical lengths to minimize end joints, unless indicated
otherwise. Furnish Board by Certainteed Gypsum Canada, CGC Inc., or G-P
Products.
23.
Primer: Where indicated by board manufacturer, provide primer as required to
achieve finishes as defined in ASTM C840.
24.
Latex Fortified Mortar: Of type recommended by cementitious board manufacturer to
suit application.
.25
Joint reinforcing tape:
1.
Standard gypsum board: ASTM C475; 50 mm wide x 0.25 mm thick,
perforated paper, with chamfered edges.
.2
Tile backer boards: ASTM C475; fibreglass mat joint tape as recommended
by board manufacturer to suit location.
.26
Bonding adhesive: Type for purpose intended and as recommended and approved
by manufacturer.
.27
Joint and patching compound: ASTM C475; Asbestos-free, supplied by manufacturer
of gypsum board used.
.28
Fast setting patching compound: ASTM C475; Asbestos-free, Sheetrock or
Durabond by CGC Inc., ProRoc products by Certainteed Gypsum Canada or
approved alternative.
.29
Access doors: Supplied by other Sections for installation as part of the Work of this
Section.
3
Execution
3.1
SUSPENSION FRAMING
.1
Install ceiling systems in accordance with reviewed shop drawings and
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Install hanger wires plumb and securely anchored to the building structural framing,
independent of walls, pipes, ducts, and metal deck; install additional framing and
hangers to bridge interference items.
.3
Install vibration isolation hangers at all locations where indicated in strict accordance
with manufacturer's printed instructions.
Section 09250
GYPSUM BOARD
Page 6
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
.4
Install hanger wires at 1200 mm maximum centres along carrying channels, not less
than 25 mm, and not more than 150 mm from channel ends.
.5
Install additional hangers at lighting fixture and ductwork locations. Do not attach
hanger wires to mechanical or electrical equipment. Do not support mechanical and
electrical fixtures and fitting on ceiling without the ceiling manufacturer's written
acceptance.
.6
Install main carrying channels transverse to structural framing members. Lap main
carrying channels 200 mm minimum at splices and wire each end with two loops and
prevent clustering or lining-up of splices.
.7
Install furring channels at 400 mm o.c., not less than 25 mm, and not more than 150
mm from perimeter walls, at openings, at interruptions in ceiling continuity, and at
change in plane. Install furring channels to a tolerance of 3 mm maximum in 3600
mm.
.8
Install additional main carrying and furring channels to frame and to reinforce
openings such as recessed lighting fixtures, access hatches, ceiling grilles, outlet
boxes, ventilating outlets and similar items.
3.2
STEEL STUDS AND FURRING
.1
Install steel studs and furring in accordance with reviewed shop drawings and
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Install steel stud partitions to underside of structure unless indicated otherwise.
.3
Install track runners at floors, ceilings, and underside of structure; align track runners
accurately and secure to structure at 600 mm centres maximum.
.4
Install double top track runner assembly to prevent the transmission of structural
loads to steel studs.
.5
Install steel studs vertically at 400 mm o.c., unless otherwise indicated, and not more
than 50 mm from abutting walls, at openings, and at each side of corners. Install
studs securely to track runners.
.6
Schedule and coordinate steel framing installation with mechanical and electrical
services installation.
.7
Install full height, double studs at door and service openings, fastened together and
stiffened back to the structure to prevent vibration when doors close.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 09250
GYPSUM BOARD
Page 7
.8
Provide double studs boxed together at all openings, sill, head and jambs and at
door jambs, fastened together and stiffened back to the structure to prevent
vibration. At each opening exceeding 900 mm in width, double studs shall be 20 ga.
extending to structure above, and adequately anchored at each end. Provide steel
studs above and below openings spaced at 400 mm oc maximum. All metal stud
partitions above doors and screens over 1220 mm wide shall be secured to structure
over and reinforced with sway bracing to stabilize walls to prevent lateral movement.
.9
Erect three studs at corner and intermediate intersections of partitions. Space 50
mm apart and brace together with wired 19 mm channels.
.10
Stiffen partitions over 2440 mm high or 3000 mm long, or both, with horizontal
bracing extended for full length of partitions. Provide one line of bracing in partitions.
Space lines to provide equal unbraced panels. Provide bracing for portions of
partitions over door openings in partitions over 3000 mm high, and bracing both
above and below openings in partitions located no greater than 150 mm from top
and bottom of opening, and extending two stud spaces beyond each edge of
opening for both doors and windows. Wire tie or weld bracing to studs.
.11
Frame control joints using back to back double studs at abutting structural elements,
at dissimilar backup interface, at dissimilar walls and ceilings, at structural expansion
and control joints, at door and other openings, and at 9000 mm maximum spacing in
continuous runs. Install control joint strips and secure in place.
.12
Install additional support framing at openings and cutouts for built-in equipment,
upper cabinet support, access panels and similar items.
.13
Attach to framing adequate steel reinforcing members or an 18 ga. steel stud
mounted horizontally and notched around furring members to support the load of,
and to withstand the withdrawal and shear forces imposed by, items installed upon
the work of this Section. Such items include, but are not restricted to, coat hooks,
washroom accessories, handrail anchors, rub rails, grab bars, guards, wall-hung
cabinets and fitments, shelving, curtain and drape tracks; Owner supplied
equipment; and minor mechanical and electrical work. Heavy mechanical and
electrical equipment shall be self-supporting in Divisions 15 and 16.
.14
Provide for support and incorporation of flush-mounted and recessed mechanical
and electrical equipment and fixtures only after consultation and verification of
methods with those performing the work of Divisions 15 and 16.
.15
Install cross bracing in accordance with the steel stud manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.3
FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES
.1
Install Products in fire rated assemblies in strict accordance with applicable ULC
tested and approved designs.
Section 09250
GYPSUM BOARD
Page 8
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
.2
Stiffen fire rated walls over 3.66 m high, where linear length of wall is greater than
2.44 m between perpendicular wall supports, with diagonal bracing above the ceiling
extending perpendicular to wall at a 45° angle to structure above. Locate diagonal
bracing at maximum 2.44 m o.c.
.3
Where double layers of gypsum board are shown, and required for fire rating, screw
first layer to studs and furring and laminate the second layer to the first using joint
filler as an adhesive. Stagger joints between first and second layers.
3.4
ACOUSTICAL INSULATION
.1
3.5
Install acoustic insulation in partitions, between steel studs, and as indicated on
Contract Drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Fill stud
cavities to full height of partitions and carefully cut and fit acoustic insulation around
services and protrusions.
ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
.1
Install acoustical sealant to acoustically insulated partitions in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and Contract Drawings.
.2
Install acoustical sealant under floor runner track, at partition perimeter both sides
and at openings, cut-outs, and penetrations, concealed from view in the final
installation.
3.6
GYPSUM BOARD
.1
Comply with ASTM C840. Install gypsum board in accordance with reviewed shop
drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Install gypsum board vertically or horizontally, whichever results in fewer end joints.
Locate end joints over supporting members.
.3
Install gypsum board in lightly butted contact at edges and ends and with 1.6 mm
maximum open space between boards; do not force gypsum board into place. Do
not install imperfect, damaged or damp boards.
.4
Install gypsum board butting paired tapered edge joints, and mill-cut or field-cut end
joints; do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends.
.5
Install vertical joints minimum 300 mm from the jamb lines of openings and stagger
vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions.
.6
Do not locate joints within 200 mm of corners or openings, except where control
joints occur at jamb lines or where openings occur adjacent to corners. Where
necessary, place a single vertical joint over the centre of wide openings.
.7
Cut, drill and patch gypsum board as may be necessary to accommodate the Work
of other trades.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
8.
3.7
Section 09250
GYPSUM BOARD
Page 9
Fire Separations:
1.
Construct gypsum board assemblies, where located, in accordance with
tested assemblies to obtain required or indicated fire rated assemblies. As a
minimum fire separations shall consist of metal framing covered on both
sides by fire-rated gypsum board.
2.
Install assemblies tightly to enclosing constructions to maintain integrity of the
separations. Install casing beads at all perimeter edges.
CORNER, CASING BEADS AND TRIM
.1
Corner reinforcing bead: Install along all external angles, erect plumb, level and with
a minimum of joints. Secure with screws at 225 mm o.c. apply filler over flanges
flush with nose of the bead and extending at least 75 mm onto surface of board each
side of corner. When filler dries, apply a thin coat of topping cement and blend onto
adjoining surfaces.
.2
Casing bead: Install where wallboard butts against a surface having no trim
concealing the juncture and where shown on drawings. Erect casing beads plumb or
level, with minimum joints, and secure with screws at 300 mm o.c. apply filler over
flange flush with bead and extending at least 75 mm onto surface of board. When
dry, apply a thin coat of topping cement and blend onto adjoining surfaces.
.3
Recess channels and trim: Install recess channels and special metal trim where
shown. Secure to substrate. Provide casing beads full height on wallboard edges at
recess channels and metal trim.
3.8
JOINT TAPING AND FINISHING
.1
Install reinforcing tape and a minimum of 3 coats of joint compound over gypsum
board joints, metal trim and accessories, and screw fasteners in accordance with the
gypsum board manufacturer's instructions.
.2
Fill gaps between ,and any imperfections in, gypsum boards with joint compound,
allow to dry, and sand smooth ready for painting.
.3
Install finished gypsum board Work smooth, seamless, plumb, true, flush, and with
square, plumb, and neat corners.
.4
Finish gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C840 to the following grades:
1.
Level 0: No taping, finishing, or accessories required. Use above suspended
ceilings and within other concealed spaces, unless the assembly is fire rated,
sound rated, sound or smoke controlled, or unless the space serves as an air
plenum.
2.
Level 1: At joints and interior angles embed tape in joint compound. Leave
surface free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are
acceptable. Use above suspended ceilings and within other concealed
spaces if the gypsum board assembly is fire rated, sound rated, sound or
smoke controlled, or the space serves as an air plenum.
Section 09250
GYPSUM BOARD
Page 10
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.9
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Level 2: At joints and interior angles embed tape in joint compound with one
separate coat of joint compound applied over joints, angles, fastener heads,
and accessories. Use for water resistant gypsum board indicated for use as a
substrate for ceramic tile.
Level 3: At joints and interior angles embed tape in joint compound with two
separate coats of joint compound applied over all joints, angles, fastener
heads, and accessories. Apply joint compound smooth and free of tool marks
and ridges. Use where heavy grade wall coverings are the final decoration.
Level 4: At joints and interior angles embed tape in joint compound with three
separate coats of joint compound applied over all joints, angles, fastener
heads, and accessories. Apply joint compound smooth and free of tool marks
and ridges. Use for all locations except those indicated for other finish levels.
Level 5: At joints and interior angles embed tape in joint compound with three
separate coats of joint compound applied over all joints, angles, fastener
heads, and accessories. Apply a thin skim coat of joint compound, or a
material manufactured especially for this purpose, to the entire surface.
Leave surface smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Use where
semi-gloss or gloss finish coatings are the final decoration.
ACCESS DOORS
.1
3.10
Install access doors, supplied as part of other parts of the Work, in accordance with
manufacturer’s written instructions.
SITE TOLERANCES
.1
3.11
Install metal support systems to ensure that, within a tolerance of +3 mm and -1.5
mm for plaster thickness, finish surfaces will be flat within 3 mm under a 3 m
straightedge, and with no variation greater than 1.5 mm in any running 300 mm, and
that surface planes shall be within 3 mm of dimensioned location.
WORK IN EXISTING AREAS
.1
In existing areas, where existing gypsum board work has been demolished and/or
damaged and repair work is required, provide new gypsum board finish.
.2
Thoroughly prepare areas to be repaired. Provide neat, clean and straight cuts.
.3
Finish all repair work as specified for new work.
.4
In existing areas where existing openings are to be filled in with gypsum board,
provide new gypsum board wall and ceiling construction. Ensure new board faces
are flush with faces of abutting existing walls and ceilings.
3.12
REPAIR
1.
Make good cut-outs for services and other work, fill in defective joints, holes and
other depressions with joint compound.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
2.
Section 09250
GYPSUM BOARD
Page 11
Make good defective work, and ensure that surfaces are smooth, evenly textured
and within specified tolerances to receive finish treatments.
END OF SECTION
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
1
General
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
1.2
Section 09300
TILE
Page 1
Labour, Products, equipment and services necessary for tile Work in accordance
with the Contract Documents.
REFERENCES
.1
ANSI A108/A118/A136.1, Installation of Ceramic Tile.
.2
CAN/CSA A3000, Cementitious Materials Compendium.
.3
CGSB 71-GP-22M, Organic Adhesive for Installation of Ceramic Wall Tile.
.4
TTMAC Specification Guide 09300 Tile Installation Manual.
.5
TTMAC, Maintenance Guide.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product data:
.1
Submit copies of manufacturer's Product data in accordance with the
Conditions of the Contract indicating:
.1
Performance criteria, compliance with appropriate reference standard,
characteristics, limitations and warranties.
.2
Product transportation, storage, handling and installation
requirements.
.2
Samples:
.1
Submit following sample panels in accordance with the Conditions of the
Contract.
.1
Each colour, texture, size, and pattern of tile.
.2
Adhere tile samples to 400 x 400 x 12.5 mm thick cement board
complete with selected grout colour in joints.
.3
Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certificates stating that materials supplied are in
accordance with this specification.
.4
Closeout submittals: Submit recommended maintenance instructions and listing of
recommended maintenance Products for incorporation into Operations and
Maintenance Manuals in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Perform Work of this Section by a company that is a member in good standing of the
Terrazzo Tile and Marble Association of Canada with proven, acceptable experience
on installations of similar complexity and scope.
Section 09300
TILE
Page 2
1.5
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver materials in adequate crates or containers with manufacturer’s name and
product description clearly marked.
.2
Handle and store tiles in a manner to avoid chipping, breakage or the instruction of
foreign matter. Take precautions to protect the mortar and grout admixtures from
freezing or from excessive heat.
1.6
SITE CONDITIONS
.1
Do not install Work of this Section outside of the following environmental ranges
without the Consultant's and Product manufacturer's written acceptance:
.1
Ambient air and surface temperature: 150C to 450C.
.2
Precipitation: None.
.2
Install temporary protection and facilities to maintain the Product manufacturer's, and
specified, environmental requirements for 7 Days before, during, and 7 Days after
installation.
1.7
MAINTENANCE
.1
Submit extra tile amounting to 3% of gross area covered, allowing proportionately for
each pattern and type specified and which are part of the same Production run as
installed Products. Store maintenance Products as directed by the Consultant.
2
Products
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
General: All materials under Work of this Section, including but not limited to,
sealants, adhesives, and sealers are to have low VOC content limits.
.2
Tile:
.1
.2
.3
.4
To CAN/CGSB-75.1-M.
Supply coves, caps, inside and outside corners and bullnose tile as required.
Where unfinished tile edge is exposed, supply cap to Consultant’s selection.
Tile types as indicated on Finish Schedule.
.3
Ceramic Tile Base: Cove base tile to match floor tile.
.4
Ceramic Thresholds: Match floor tile, full width of door openings, at junction of
ceramic tile and carpet and resilient floor materials.
.5
Floor Divider Strip: Stainless steel edge, continuous at all exposed tile edges, depth
as required to suit tile thickness. ‘Schiene-E’ by Schluter Systems or approved
alternative.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
2.2
Section 09300
TILE
Page 3
ACCESSORIES
.1
Cement: CAN/CSA A3000, Type GU.
.2
Sand: ASTM C144.
.3
Water: Potable and free of minerals and other contaminants which are detrimental
to mortar and grout mixes.
.4
Polymer additive: Keralastic by Mapei Inc or approved alternative by Flextile Ltd. or
Laticrete International.
.5
Pre-mixed thin-set mortar: ANSI A108/A118/A136.1:
.1
‘Kerabond with Keralastic Latex Additive’ by Mapei Inc. or approved
alternative by Flextile Ltd. or Laticrete International unless otherwise
recommended by grout manufacturer to suit tile size or application.
.2
White coloured mortar shall be provided at appropriate tile types including,
but not limited to; glass tile, light coloured marble, green marble and light
coloured granite.
.6
Primer: To meet specified requirements of adhesive manufacturer.
.7
Cleaner: In accordance with TTMAC’s requirements and as recommended by tile
manufacturer.
.8
Organic adhesive (walls): CGSB 71-GP-22M, Type 1.
.9
Grout:
.1
Floors and bases (below 3 mm joint width): ‘Keracolor U’ by Mapei Inc. or
approved alternative by Flextile Ltd. or Laticrete International.
.2
Floors and bases (3 mm to 10 mm joint width): ‘Ultra/Color’ by Mapei Inc. or
approved alternative by Flextile Ltd. or Laticrete International.
.3
Walls (1.5 mm to 3 mm joint width): ‘Ker 800' by Mapei Inc. or approved
alternative by Flextile Ltd. or Laticrete International.
.4
Walls (over 3 mm joint width): ‘Ultra/Colour’ by Mapei Inc. or approved
alternative by Flextile Ltd. or Laticrete International.
.5
Grout colour: To be selected by the Consultant from the manufacturer’s full
colour range.
.10
Joint backing: Round, closed cell, foam rod, oversized by 30% to 50%, Shore A
hardness of 20, tensile strength 140 to 200 kPa.
.11
Tile sealant: In accordance with Section 07900.
Section 09300
TILE
Page 4
3
Execution
3.1
SURFACE PREPARATION
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
.1
Clean and dry surfaces thoroughly. Remove oil, wax, grease, dust, dirt, paint, tar,
primers, form release agents, curing compound, and other foreign material from
substrate surfaces which may prevent or reduce adhesion.
.2
Neutralize any trace of strong acids or alkali from the substrate.
3.2
CONTROL JOINTS
.1
Provide control, expansion and isolation joints in accordance with TTMAC
specification 301MJ and as indicated on drawings. Install in locations indicated on
drawings and specified herein.
.2
Continue control, construction, and cold joints in the structural substrate up through
the tile finish, and align with mortar joints where possible. Review joint locations on
Site with the Consultant.
.3
Install joint widths to match grout joint widths, except where a minimum width is
indicated.
.4
Install control joints in the following typical locations:
.1
Aligned over changes in type of substrate.
.2
At the restraining perimeters such as walls and columns.
.3
Interior areas (not subject to sunlight): 6 mm minimum width, at 7320 mm
o.c. maximum.
.4
Interior areas (subject to sunlight): 6 mm minimum width, at 3660 mm o.c
maximum.
.5
As indicated on the Contract Drawings.
.5
Seal control joints in accordance with Section 07900.
3.3
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
.1
Install tiles in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and TTMAC Specification
Guide 09300 Tile Installation Manual. Manufacturer's installation instructions govern
over TTMAC Installation Manual.
.2
Lay out Work to produce a symmetrical pattern with minimum amount of cutting.
Ensure cut tile at room perimeter and at joints is not less than ½ full size.
.3
Install trim to be placed under tile in locations indicated on Drawings.
.4
Set tiles in place and rap or beat with a beating block as necessary to ensure a
proper bond and to level surface. Align tile for uniform joints and allow to set until
firm. Clean excess mortar from surface of tile with a wet cloth or sponge while
mortar is fresh.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 09300
TILE
Page 5
.5
Ensure following minimum mortar contact coverage to back of tiles. Contact must be
evenly distributed to give full support of the tile.
.1
90% for interior applications.
.6
Adjust joints between units uniform, plumb, straight, even, and true, with adjacent
tile flush. Align grout joints in both directions unless indicated otherwise.
.7
Align grout joints.
.8
Install tile accessory fittings for a complete and fully coordinated tile assembly.
.9
Install wall tile full height unless indicated otherwise.
.10
Do not place tile, trim, and accessories over control, expansion, or isolation joints.
Stop materials in either side on joints and provide control, expansion and isolation
joints as specified.
.11
Cut and fit tile neatly around piping, fittings, joints, projections and around recesses
items e.g. washroom accessories. Where surface mounted equipment and
accessories are installed on tile surfaces, extend tile over surfaces. Cut edges
smooth, even, and free from chipping; chipped and broken edges are not
acceptable.
.12
Do not proceed with grouting until minimum 48 hours after tile has set, to prevent
displacement of tiles.
.13
Apply grout in accordance with grout manufacturer's directions to produce watertight,
filled joints without voids, cracks and excess grout. Finish grout flush to edge
thickness of tile and remove excess grout with soft burlap or sponge moistened with
clean water.
3.4
CLEANING
.1
Clean off excess grout with soft burlap or sponge moistened with clean water.
.2
Polish wall tile after grout has cured in accordance with TTMAC recommendations
in the Maintenance Guide; do not use acid for cleaning.
.3
Re-point joints after cleaning as required to eliminate imperfections, then re-clean as
necessary. Avoid scratching tile surfaces.
3.5
RESTORING EXISTING TILE
.1
Repair and replace damaged ceramic tile where noted on drawings and schedules.
.2
Strip, clean and reseal all existing tile and terrazzo floors to remain.
Section 09300
TILE
Page 6
3.6
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
JOINT BACKING AND TILE SEALANT
.1
Install joint backing under sealant as necessary.
.2
Install tile sealant around piping and fittings extending through tiled surfaces.
.3
Seal tile control joints.
.4
Seal internal tile to tile junctions. Tool to a smooth, flush surface, free from air
bubbles and contamination.
3.7
PROTECTION
.1
Prevent traffic over tiled areas, and protect tiled assemblies from weather, freezing,
and water immersion, for 72 hours minimum, after final installation.
.2
Prevent direct impact, vibration and heavy hammering on adjacent and opposite
walls for 24 hours minimum, after final installation.
.3
Cover work temporarily with building paper properly lapped and taped at joints until
work has been approved by Consultant.
END OF SECTION
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
1
General
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
1.2
Section 09500
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Page 1
Design, labour, Products, equipment and services necessary for acoustical ceilings
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM A653/A653M, Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or ZincIron Alloy-Coated (Galvanealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
.2
ASTM C423, Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the
Reverberation Room Method.
.3
ASTM C635, Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal
Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.
.4
ASTM C636, Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels.
.5
ASTM C645, Specification for Non-Load Bearing (Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks),
and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board.
.6
ASTM E1264, Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.
1.3
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
.1
Design ceiling suspension systems in accordance with ASTM C636 and manufacturer's
printed directions.
.2
Design tile ceiling system for adequate support of electrical fixtures as required by the
current bulletin of the Electrical Safety Authority. Acoustic panel system is not designed
to carry the weight of electrical equipment.
.3
Design hanger anchor and entire suspension system static loading not to exceed 25%
of their ultimate capacity including lighting fixture dead loads.
.4
Design tile suspension system to support weight of mechanical and electrical items such
as air handling boots and lighting fixtures, and with adequate support to allow
rotation/relocation of light fixtures. Acoustic panel system is not designed to carry the
weight of mechanical and electrical equipment.
.5
Design subframing as necessary to accommodate, to avoid conflicts and interferences
where ducts or equipment prevent regular spacing of hangers.
Section 09500
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Page 2
1.4
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
SUBMITTALS
.1
Shop drawings:
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract
indicating:
.1
Suspension system layout including hangers and supports for acoustic
tile system.
.2
Acoustic panel system including suspension system, hangers, supports
and panel sizes and locations.
.3
Conditions at abutting, intersecting, and penetrating construction.
.4
Dimensioned locations of lighting fixtures, diffusers, sprinkler heads and
other items that pierce the ceiling plane.
.2
Certificates: Submit written certification stating that suspended ceiling system is
designed for adequate support of electrical fixtures as required by the current bulletin
of the Electrical Safety Authority.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
1.6
Mock-up:
.1
Construct one 10 m2 mock-up for each type of ceiling system incorporating
typical light fixture and other typical mechanical and electrical fixtures.
.2
Test the adequacy of the suspension system to support the fixtures without
deflection of ceiling or failure of hanging wire anchorage. Supply copy of Test
Results to Consultant.
.3
Change materials and installation methods if tests indicate proposed system is
inadequate and re-test as necessary until system approved.
.4
Give early notice to Consultant and Mechanical and Electrical Trades and cooperate with them in selecting suitable location for sample ceiling and timing of
installation and test.
.5
Do not commence general installation work until sample ceiling approved, then
install ceiling to conform with approved samples.
.6
Mock-up may form part of final Work, if acceptable to Consultant. Remove and
dispose of mock-ups which do not form part of Work.
SITE CONDITIONS
.1
Do not install the Work of this Section until:
.1
Mechanical and electrical Work above the ceiling is complete.
.2
Relative humidity is below 80 %.
.3
Ventilation is adequate to remove excess moisture.
.4
Areas are closed and protected against weather, and maintained at no less than
10°C.
.2
Install temporary protection and facilities to maintain Product manufacturer's, and above
specification, environmental requirements 24 h before, during, and after installation.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
1.7
Section 09500
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Page 3
MAINTENANCE
.1
1.8
Submit extra acoustic ceilings amounting to 2% of gross ceiling area, allowing
proportionately for each pattern and type specified to nearest full carton. Submit
Products which are part of same production run as installed Products. Store
maintenance Products as directed by Consultant.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Transport, handle and store material in manner to prevent warp, twist, damage to panel
edges and surfaces in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.
.2
Any warped and/or damaged panels and trim shall be rejected and be replaced by new,
straight, undamaged and acceptable material at no cost to Owner.
.3
Bent, twisted or otherwise damaged Tee grid suspension components shall not be used
under any circumstances. Replace such damaged items with new undamaged material
at no additional cost to Owner.
.4
Store material in warm, dry place away from water and the elements. Protect against
undue loading stresses and shock.
.5
All packaged material shall be delivered in original manufacturers wrappers and
containers with labels and seals intact. All cartons shall bear U.L. label.
2
Products
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Wherever possible, acoustical ceiling tiles, steel suspension system and framing used
in work of this Section are to contain recycled content.
.2
Galvanized steel sheet: ASTM A653/A653-M, Z275; cold rolled, galvanized steel sheet.
.3
Main carrying channels: ASTM C645; Channels formed from galvanized steel sheet, 38
x 19 mm cold rolled.
.4
Subframing: ASTM C645; Channels formed from galvanized steel sheet, dimensions
and spans as required.
.5
Hangers: 2.6 mm minimum diameter, galvanized steel wire.
.6
Tie wire: 1.6 mm minimum diameter, soft annealed galvanized steel wire.
.7
Concrete anchors: tie wire sleeve anchors, ‘Redi-Drive Anchors' by ITW Red Head or
approved alternative.
Section 09500
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Page 4
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
.8
Wall mouldings and accessories, including but not limited to, corner caps, edge
mouldings, panel hold over clip, metal closures, and trim. Finish and colour: same as
main tees.
.9
Exposed main, cross tees, and relocatable cross tees: ASTM C635, 38 mm high steel,
bulb tee design double steel web, rectangular single spans without exceeding a
deflection of 1/360 of the span. Splices to be integral and reversible; cross tee
interlocking into main tee. Colour and finish: Manufacturer’s standard white.
.1
‘Prelude XL’ by Armstrong World Industries Inc.
.2
‘Donn DX Fast-Loc’ by CGC Inc.
.3
‘Classic Hook’ by Certainteed Ceilings Canada.
.10
Acoustic tile: ASTM E1264, acoustical tile type in accordance with Finish Schedule.
.11
Wall mouldings: To match acoustical ceiling suspension system.
3
Execution
3.1
SUSPENSION SYSTEM
.1
Coordinate locations and openings of mechanical and electrical services support, and
penetration through the acoustical ceilings. Coordinate field conditions, clearances,
measurements, and mechanical and electrical services testing and commissioning,
above the acoustical ceilings.
.2
Install hanger wires plumb and securely anchored to the building structural framing,
independent of walls, pipes, ducts, and metal deck; install additional framing and
hangers to bridge interference items.
.3
Install acoustical ceiling systems in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,
reviewed shop drawings, and ASTM C636, listed in order of precedence.
.4
Install hanger wires at 1200 mm maximum centres along carrying channels, not less
than 25 mm, and not more than 150 mm from channel ends.
.5
Install additional hangers at lighting fixture and air distribution ductwork locations. Do
not attach hanger wires to mechanical or electrical equipment. Do not support
mechanical and electrical fixtures and fitting on ceiling without the ceiling manufacturer's
written acceptance.
.6
Install acoustical ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1:1200 of span and 0.4
mm maximum between adjacent metal members. Tolerances are not cumulative. Refer
to Electrical Contract Drawings for fixture layout.
.7
Do not bend or twist hangers as a means of levelling. Form double loops tightly and
lock to prevent vertical movement or rotation within the loop.
.8
Install edge moulding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 09500
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Page 5
.9
Centre acoustical ceiling suspension systems on room axis; install equal border pieces.
Install hangers onto the ends of main tee runners at not more than 150 mm from ends
of runners, adjacent and perpendicular to walls.
.10
Support the suspension system independently of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and
conduits.
.11
Install main runners in maximum available lengths. Layout joints in suspension
members to avoid the perimeters of recessed fixtures. Lock grid members to form a
rigid assembly. Install additional tee, suspension system framing around recessed
fixtures, diffusers, grilles and other items for a complete assembly.
3.2
ACOUSTIC LAY-IN TILES
.1
Install acoustic tile in grid system openings supported by bottom flanges of members.
Provide special shapes and sizes to provide a complete installation by cutting tile to fit
into openings. Fit tile moderately tight between upright legs of members.
.2
Carefully cut and trim acoustic tiles to accommodate items piercing the finished ceiling
plane.
.3
Remove and replace acoustic tiles with broken edges,
discoloured, soiled, or stained faces.
3.3
or damaged, marked,
ADJUSTMENTS AND CLEANING
.1
Clean soiled or discoloured surfaces of exposed work on completion of work.
.2
Replace components which are visibly damaged, marred or uncleanable.
END OF SECTION
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
1
General
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
1.2
Section 09660
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
Page 1
Labour, Products, equipment and services necessary for resilient tile flooring Work
and accessories in accordance with the Contract Documents.
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM F710, Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient
Flooring.
.2
ASTM F1066, Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile.
.3
ASTM F1861, Specification for Resilient Wall Base.
.4
ASTM F1869, Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of
Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Cloride.
.5
ASTM F2170, Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete
Slabs Using in-situ Probes.
.6
ASTM F2195, Standard Specification for Linoleum Tile Flooring.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product data:
.1
Submit copies of manufacturer's Product data in accordance with the
Conditions of the Contract indicating:
.1
Performance criteria, compliance with appropriate reference standard,
characteristics, limitations.
.2
Product transportation, storage, handling and installation
requirements.
.2
Samples:
.1
Submit following samples in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract:
.1
Two 250 x 200 mm samples of each type of tile material and colour.
.2
Two 250 mm long samples of each base, accessory and colour.
.3
Closeout submittals: Submit maintenance and cleaning data for incorporation into
Operations and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with the Conditions of the
Contract.
1.4
SITE CONDITIONS
.1
Maintain air temperature and structural base temperature at flooring installation area
above 20oC for 48 hr before, during and 48 hr after installation.
Section 09660
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
Page 2
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
.2
Store materials for 2 days prior to installation in area of Work to achieve temperature
stability.
.3
Do not lay flooring in conditions of high humidity or where exposed to cold drafts. In
hot weather, protect from direct sunlight.
.4
Provide adequate ventilation during installation.
1.5
MAINTENANCE
.1
Submit extra 5% or to nearest full carton of each colour, pattern and type of flooring
material and base required for maintenance use. Identify each carton. Store where
directed.
2
Products
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
All materials under Work of this Section, including but not limited to, primers,
adhesives, sealers, and waxes are to have low VOC content limits.
.2
Vinyl composition tile: ASTM F1066, Vinyl composite tile type as indicated on Finish
Schedule.
.3
Linoleum composition tile: ASTM F2195, Type 1; minimum 330 x 330 x 2.0 mm thick
with polyester backing, colour to be selected by Consultant from manufacturer’s full
colour range. ‘Marmoleum Composition Tile (MCT)’ by Forbo Flooring or approved
alternative.
.4
Rubber base: ASTM F1861, Rubber base type as indicated on Finish Schedule.
.5
Reducing edge strips, transition strips, thresholds, etc.: Nitrile rubber plasticized
vinyl, 80-95 Shore A Durometer, adhesive recommended by flooring manufacturer.
.1
‘Finishing Accessories’ Johnsonite or approved alternative.
.6
Primers and adhesives: Low VOC, waterproof, recommended by flooring
manufacturer for specific material on applicable substrate, above, at or below grade.
.7
Concrete skim coat compound: High-performance, rapid-setting cement based skim
coating compound. 'Ultra SkimCoat' by Mapei or approved alternative for filling
minor voids and leveling existing substrate. Allow for minimum 75 mm thick levelling
agent under the new VCT flooring covering a minimum 25% of room area.
.8
Sealer: Low VOC sealer, type recommended by flooring manufacturer.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
3
Execution
3.1
EXAMINATION
Section 09660
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
Page 3
.1
Verify condition and dimensions of previously installed Work upon which this Section
depends. Report defects to Consultant. Commencement of Work means acceptance
of existing conditions.
.2
Ensure concrete floors meet the following minimum requirements and requirements
of the flooring manufacturer. If there is a conflict between these requirements and
those of the flooring manufacturer, the more stringent shall apply.
.1
Internal Relative Humidity Test: Perform internal relative humidity testing in
accordance with ASTM F2170. Results shall not exceed 80% RH.
.2
Moisture Test: Moisture emissions from concrete subfloors (cured for a
minimum of 28 days) must not exceed 3 lbs per 1000sf per 24 hours (1.4 kg
H2O/24 hr/93 m2) for acrylic adhesive and 5lbs for polyurethane adhesive via
the Calcium Chloride Test Method (ASTM F1869).
.3
The pH level of the subfloor surface shall not be higher than 9.9. If higher,
subfloor must be neutralized.
.3
Ensure that sub-floors have been provided as specified without holes, protrusions,
cracks, depressions or other major defects.
.4
Ensure that control joints have been filled and levelled.
.5
Defective Work resulting from application to unsatisfactory surfaces will be
considered the responsibility of those performing the Work of this Section.
3.2
SUBFLOOR TREATMENT
.1
Flooring shall be installed over subfloors conforming to ASTM F710 for concrete.
.2
Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes and other
defects with sub-floor filler.
.3
Apply sub-floor filler to low spots and cracks to achieve floor level to a tolerance of
1:1000, allow to cure.
.4
Meet ASTM F710 Standard for Concrete or other monolithic floors.
.5
Clean and remove all deleterious materials from surfaces to receive this Work in
accordance with the adhesive manufacturer's recommendations.
.6
Prime concrete to flooring manufacturer's printed instructions.
3.3
TILE APPLICATION
.1
Install resilient tile flooring in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
Section 09660
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
Page 4
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
.2
Apply adhesive uniformly using recommended trowel in accordance with flooring
manufacturer's instructions. Do not spread more adhesive that can be covered by
flooring before initial set takes place.
.3
Lay flooring with joints straight and parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical
tile pattern. Install equal size perimeter tile on each side.
.4
Install flooring to square grid pattern with all joints aligned.
.5
As installation progresses, and after installation, roll flooring in 2 directions with
minimum 45 kg minimum roller to ensure full adhesion.
.6
Remove adhesive seepage at seams or surface while adhesive is still wet, in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendation.
.7
Cut tile and fit neatly around fixed objects.
.8
Install feature strips and floor markings where indicated. Fit joints tightly.
.9
Terminate flooring at centerline of door in openings where adjacent floor finish or
colour is dissimilar.
.10
Install reducing edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges where flooring
terminates and at edges where there are two finishes of different thicknesses.
3.4
BASE APPLICATION
.1
Lay out base to keep number of joints at minimum.
.2
Prior to installing base, fill cracks and irregularities with a filler recommended by
base manufacturer.
.3
Set base in adhesive using a 3 kg hand roller, against wall and floor surfaces.
.4
Install straight and level to variation of 1:1000.
.5
Scribe and fit to door frames and other obstructions.
.6
Cope internal corners.
3.5
CLEANING AND WAXING
.1
3.6
Forty-eight hours after installation, clean vinyl tile surfaces with a mild soap solution
approved by finish manufacturer. Rinse clean and dry.
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
.1
Protect floors from time of final set of adhesive until final waxing.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 09660
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
Page 5
.2
Prohibit traffic on floor for 48 hours after installation.
.3
Cover waxed and polished surfaces with fibre reinforced, clean, non-staining kraft
paper. Secure in position with gummed tape to prevent drifting. Remove covering
when directed by Consultant.
END OF SECTION
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
1
General
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
1.2
Section 09900
PAINTING
Page 1
Labour, Products, equipment and services necessary for painting Work in accordance
with the Contract Documents.
REFERENCES
.1
CAN/CGSB 85.10, Protective Coatings for Metals.
.2
CAN/CGSB-85.100, Painting.
.3
Master Painters Institute (MPI), Painting Specification Manual.
.4
SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council, Standards.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product data:
.1
Submit copies of manufacturer's Product data in accordance with the Conditions
of the Contract indicating:
.1
Performance criteria, compliance with appropriate reference standard,
characteristics, limitations.
.2
Product transportation, storage, handling and installation requirements.
.2
Submit listing of manufacturer's Product types, Product codes, and Product
names, number of coats, and dry film thicknesses, corresponding to each
Painting Schedule code; submit listing minimum of 8 weeks before materials are
required.
.2
Samples:
.1
Submit following samples in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract.
.1
Three 300 x 150 mm draw downs of each colour minimum 4 weeks
before paints are required.
.2
Identify each sample with Contract number and title, colour reference,
sheen, date, and name of applicator.
.3
Certificates:
.1
Submit certified documentation to confirm each airless spray painter has
minimum of 5 years experience on applications of similar complexity and scope.
.2
Submit certified documentation to confirm each worker has Provincial
Tradesman Qualification certificate of proficiency.
.4
Reports:
.1
Submit written field inspection and test report results after each inspection.
.2
Submit Field Quality Control test result reports for alkali content, substrate
moisture, and dry film thickness.
Section 09900
PAINTING
Page 2
.3
1.4
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Submit electronic moisture meter manufacturer's specifications including
tolerances. Submit record of latest meter calibration to meet manufacturer's
recommendations.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Finishing Work: Perform work to MPI requirements for premium grade.
.2
Installers qualifications: Perform Work of this Section by a company that is a member
in good standing of MPI.
.3
Supervision: Have Work supervised by a full-time qualified foreperson who has 10 years
minimum experience on Contracts of similar complexity and scope.
.4
Mock-up:
.1
Construct three 10 m2 mock-ups of different Paint Schedule code systems,
selected by Consultant, in locations acceptable to Consultant to demonstrate
installation workmanship, colour, and hiding power of Products.
.2
Obtain Consultant's acceptance in writing before proceeding with the Work of
this Section.
.3
Mock-ups may remain as part of the Work if acceptable to Consultant and will
serve as a standard for similar code systems.
.4
Repaint over mock-ups which do not form part of the Work.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
.1
Install correct, safe temporary storage for paint, thinner, solvents, and other volatile,
corrosive, hazardous, and explosive materials in accordance with requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
.2
Post hazard warning signage in areas of storage and mixing. Install and maintain
sufficient CO2 fire extinguishers of minimum 9 kg capacity, accessible in each storage
mixing and storage areas.
.3
Maintain storage enclosures at minimum 10oC ambient temperature and to
manufacturer's instructions.
1.6
SITE CONDITIONS
.1
Apply coatings under the following conditions:
.1
Exterior coatings (except Latex): 5o C minimum.
.2
Exterior latex coatings: 10oC minimum.
.3
24 hours minimum after rain, frost, condensation, or dew.
.4
When no condensation is possible (unless specifically formulated against
condensation).
.5
Interior coatings: 7oC minimum.
.6
Relative humidity: 85% maximum.
.7
Not in direct exposure to sun light.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 09900
PAINTING
Page 3
.2
Maintain temperature conditions indicated above for 24 hours before, during and 24
hours after painting.
.3
Install clean plywood sheets to protect floors and walls in storage and mixing areas,
from paint drips, spatters, and spills.
.4
Apply sufficient masking, clean drop cloths, and protective coverings for full protection
of Work not being painted including, but not limited to, the following:
.1
Light fixtures, fire and smoke detectors.
.2
Sprinkler heads.
.3
Prepainted diffusers and registers.
.4
Prepainted equipment.
.5
Fire rating labels and equipment specification plates.
.6
Finished surfaces.
1.7
ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.
1.8
Provide paint products meeting MPI "Green Performance Standard GPS-1-05".
MAINTENANCE
1.
Deliver to Owner's place of storage on completion of work, sealed containers of each
finish painting material applied, and in each colour. Label each container as for original,
including mixing formula. Provide the following:
.1
1 L of extra materials when less than 50 L are used for Project;
.2
3.78 L of extra stock when 50 to 200 L are used;
.3
7.57 L of extra stock when over 200 L are used.
2
Products
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Paint:
.1
All materials under Work of this Section, including but not limited to, primers,
stains, and paints are to have low VOC content limits.
.2
Products in accordance with the MPI Painting Specification Manual, Exterior and
Interior Systems;
.1
Manufacture's premium grade, first line Products.
.2
Uniform dispersion of pigment in a homogeneous mixture.
.3
Ready-mixed and tinted whenever possible.
.3
Products within each MPI paint system code: From single manufacturer.
.4
Colours as indicated on drawings.
.5
Acceptable manufacturers:
.1
Benjamin Moore.
.2
ICI Paints, (Glidden ) Company Limited.
.3
Para Painting & Coatings.
.4
PPG Canada Industries Limited.
.5
Sherwin Williams.
Section 09900
PAINTING
Page 4
2.2
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
COLOUR SCHEDULE
.1
Consultant will select choice of colours and gloss when compiling a Colour Schedule
after award of Contract; allow for colour selection beyond paint manufacturer’s standard
colour range.
.2
Conform to gloss reflectance definitions listed in MPI Specification Manual.
2.3
PAINTING AND FINISHING SCHEDULE
.1
Refer to Table 1, MPI Painting and Finishing Schedule coded systems, comply with MPI
Painting Specification Manual.
Table 1: Painting and
Finishing Schedule
INTERIOR
SUBSTRATES
Typical substrates
(Including but not
limited to)
Metal Fabrications
(Factory primed)
MPI
Manual
Ref.
MPI
Finish
System
Code
Topcoat
INT
5.1
INT
5.1R
Acrylic
Galvanized metal
HM door frames
INT
5.3
INT
5.3B
Latex
coating
Dressed lumber
Doors and frames
requiring stain finish
INT
6.3
INT
6.3D
Alkyd
varnish
Wood paneling &
casework
Partitions, panels,
millwork
INT
6.4
INT
6.4E
Polyurethane
Gypsum board,
Drywall, walls,
ceilings
INT
9.2
INT
9.2A
Latex
Gypsum board,
Wet areas
INT
9.2
INT
9.2F
Epoxy
.2
Notes:
.1
Chalkboard paint: Provide chalkboard paint to plywood panels and additional
substrates as indicated on drawings. Apply number of coats as recommended
by chalk paint manufacturer in accordance with this Section and manufacturer’s
written instructions.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
3
Execution
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
3.2
Section 09900
PAINTING
Page 5
Verify condition of previously installed Work upon which this Section depends. Report
defects to Consultant. Commencement of Work means acceptance of existing
conditions.
PREPARATION
.1
General:
.1
Clean substrate surfaces free from, dust, grease, soiling, or extraneous matter,
which are detrimental to finish.
.2
Patch, repair, and smoothen minor substrate defects and deficiencies e.g.
machine, tool and sand paper marks, shallow gouges, marks, and nibs.
.3
Clean, sweep, and vacuum floors and surfaces to be painted, debris and dustfree prior to painting.
.4
Refer to MPI Painting Specification Manual
for surface preparation
requirements of substrates not listed here.
.2
Where finish hardware has been installed remove, store, re-install finish hardware, to
accommodate painting. Do not clean hardware with solvent that will remove permanent
lacquer finishes.
.3
Alkali Content tests and neutralization:
.1
Test for ph level using litmus paper on dampened substrate.
.2
Neutralize surfaces over 8.5 ph with 4% solution of Zinc Sulphate for solvent
based systems and tetrapotassium pyrophosphate for latex based systems, to
below 8.0 ph, and allow to dry.
.3
Brush-off any residual Zinc Sulphate crystals.
.4
Coordinate paint system primer / sealer to be alkali-resistant.
.4
Substrate moisture tests:
.1
Test for moisture content over entire surface to be painted, minimum one test/
2 m2 in field areas and one test/600 mm along inside corners including at ceiling
to wall juncture.
.2
If any test registers above 10% allow entire substrate surfaces, within the plane,
to dry further before paint system application. Install temporary drying fans if
necessary.
.3
Re-test employing same criteria.
.5
Mildew removal: Scrub with solution of trisodium phosphate and sodium hypochlorite
(Javex) bleach, rinse with water, and allow to dry completely.
.6
Galvanized steel sheet:
.1
Z275 (Satin & Spangled Sheet): SSPC SP7 brush blast.
.2
ZF075 (Wiped Coat): Remove contamination, wash with Xylene solvent.
.3
Touch-up damaged galvanized areas with organic zinc rich primer.
Section 09900
PAINTING
Page 6
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
.7
Galvanized iron and steel: Prepare galvanized and ungalvanized metal surfaces
according to CAN/CGSB-85.10.
.1
Unpassivated, unweathered and weathered: Remove contamination, wash with
Xylene or Toluol solvent, allow to dry thoroughly. Make paint system
primer/sealer an etching type primer.
.2
Manufacturer pre-treated (including passivated): SSPC SP7.
.3
Touch-up damaged galvanized areas with organic zinc rich primer.
.8
Structural steel and miscellaneous metal fabrications:
.1
Coordinate the following with the responsible trades:
.1
Rust, mars, mill scale, and weld-burn touch-ups.
.2
Oil, grease, weld flux and other residue removal.
.2
Prime paint items, not otherwise indicated to be primed as part of another
Section.
.3
Touch-up damaged galvanized areas with organic zinc rich primer.
.9
Wood and Millwork:
.1
Wood surfaces to be clean and dry with a moisture content of less than 15%.
.2
Remove foreign matter prior to prime coat; spot coat knots, pitch streaks and
sappy sections with sealer.
.3
Fill nail holes and fine cracks after primer has dried.
.4
Backprime interior and exterior woodwork.
.10
Factory primed surfaces:
.1
Touch up damaged areas.
.2
Clean as required for top coat.
.11
Gypsum board:
.1
Apply primer/sealer paint to reveal defects and deficiencies and to equalize
absorption areas.
.2
Coordinate repairs and touch-ups with the responsible trade.
.3
Re-prime repairs.
.12
Coordinate with other trades to prevent:
.1
Damage, and inadvertent activation of fire and smoke detectors.
.2
Odour and dust distribution by permanent HVAC systems including fouling of
ducts and filters.
.13
Field-mix Products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3
APPLICATION
.1
Apply painting systems in accordance with the MPI Painting Specification Manual. Apply
each Product to manufacturer's recommended dry film thickness.
.2
Painting systems listed are required minima, apply additional coats if necessary to
obtain substrate hiding acceptable to the Consultant.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 09900
PAINTING
Page 7
.3
Tint prime and intermediate coats lighter than final top coats for identification of each
succeeding coat and to facilitate inspections. Include only manufacturer's recommended
reducing and tinting accessories. Do not add adulterants.
.4
Sand lightly between coats to achieve a tooth or anchor for subsequent coats.
.5
Apply paint uniformly in thickness, colour, texture, and gloss, as determined by the
Consultant under adequate illumination and viewed at a distance of 1500 mm. Apply
finishes free of defects in materials and application which, in the opinion of the
Consultant, affect appearance and performance. Defects include, but are not limited to:
.1
Improper cleaning and preparation of surfaces.
.2
Entrapped dust, dirt, rust.
.3
Alligatoring, blisters, peeling.
.4
Scratches, blemishes.
.5
Uneven coverage, misses, drips, runs, and poor cutting in.
.6
Chalkboard paint: Preparation of surfaces receiving paint and application of paint to be
in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Painted surfaces to meet
Consultant’s approval.
.7
Do not apply coatings on substrates which are not sufficiently dry. Unless indicated
otherwise, allow each painting system coat to cure dry and hard before following coats
are applied.
.8
Repaint entire areas of damaged or incompletely covered surfaces, to the nearest inside
or outside corner; patching will not be permitted.
.9
Miscellaneous painting requirements:
.1
Paint projecting ledges, and tops and sides of doors both above and below sight
lines to match adjacent surfaces.
.2
Paint door frames, access doors and frames, door grilles, prime coated butts,
and prime coated door closers to match surface in which they occur.
.3
Finish closets and alcoves as specified for adjoining rooms.
.4
Paint light coves white whether a light lense is installed or not, unless otherwise
indicated.
.5
Paint interior columns to match walls of room.
.6
Allow for:
.1
2 wall colours per room, one ceiling colour per room.
.2
Different door colours in each functionally different area.
.3
Different colours on both sides of same door.
.10
Mechanical, electrical and other painting coordination:
.1
Paint mechanical services in accordance with Mechanical Identification Division
15.
.2
Pipes and ducts at parking garage are NOT to be painted.
.3
Coordinate painting of pipes, ducts, and coverings with the Work of Division 15
to precede pipe colour banding, flow arrows, and other pipe identification
labeling installation.
Section 09900
PAINTING
Page 8
.4
.5
.6
3.4
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Paint exposed conduit, pipes, hangers, ductwork, grilles, gratings, louvres,
access panels, fire hose cabinets, registers, convector and radiator covers,
enclosures, and other mechanical and electrical equipment including services
concealed inside cupboard and cabinet Work; apply colour and sheen to match
adjacent surfaces, except as noted otherwise.
Paint portions of surfaces such as duct interiors, piping, ductwork, hangers,
insulation, walls, and similar items, visible through grilles, louvres, convector
covers etc., matte black in colour.
Remove the following to accommodate painting, carefully store, clean, then reinstall on completion of each area and when dry:
.1
Switch and receptacle plates, fittings and fastenings, grilles, gratings,
louvres, access panels, convector covers, and enclosures.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
3.5
Dry film thickness tests:
.1
Test for film thickness over entire surface to be painted, minimum one test/2 m2
in field areas and one test/600 mm along inside corners including at ceiling to
wall juncture.
.2
If any test registers below specified thickness, re-apply paint to entire surface
to nearest inside and outside corners.
.3
If test registers more than 50% above specified thickness, consult with paint
manufacturer, determine if problem exists, offer solutions to Consultant, and
repair as directed.
.4
Re-test employing same criteria after repair.
CLEANING
.1
3.6
Remove spilled, splashed, and spattered paint promptly as Work proceeds and on
completion of Work. Clean surfaces soiled by paint spillage and paint spatters. Repair
or replace damaged Work, as directed by Consultant.
PROTECTION
.1
Post Wet Paint signs during drying and restrict or prevent traffic where necessary.
.2
Post sign, after Consultant's inspection and acceptance of each room, reading:
PAINTING COMPLETE - NO ADMITTANCE WITHOUT CONTRACTOR'S
PERMISSION.
END OF SECTION
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
1
General
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
1.2
Section 10160
COMPARTMENTS AND CUBICLES
Page 1
Labour, Products, equipment and services necessary for compartments and cubicles
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
REFERENCES
.1
CAN/CSA B651-M, Barrier Free Design.
.2
ASTM A167, Specification for Stainless Steel and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Conditions of the
Contract indicating fabrication and erection details, plans, elevations, hardware, and
installation details.
.2
Samples:
.1
Submit samples in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract.
.1
Submit 300 x 300 mm samples for each colour.
.2
Submit samples of each hardware item, including brackets,
fastenings, and trim.
1.4
MAINTENANCE DATA
.1
1.5
Provide maintenance data for maintenance of finished work for incorporation into
Maintenance Manual specified in the Conditions of the Contract.
PROTECTION
.1
Cover finished surfaces with heavy Kraft paper or put in cartons during shipment.
Protect installed surfaces by approved means. Do not remove until immediately prior
to final inspection.
2
Products
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
.1
Floor Mounted Overhead Braced;
.1
Solid Phenolic Core by Bradley Corporation.
.2
Duraline Solid Phenolic by Bobrick Washroom Equipment of Canada Ltd.
.3
Shanahan's Model O.B. Overhead Braced by W.G. Wood Sales Company
Limited.
.4
Phenolic Partitions by Global Partitions/Watrous.
Section 10160
COMPARTMENTS AND CUBICLES
Page 2
2.2
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
MATERIALS
.1
All materials under Work of this Section, including but not limited to, adhesives are to
have low VOC content limits.
.2
Phenolic partitions: 19 mm thick consisting of multiple resin-impregnated kraft paper
core with colour and clear melamine surface sheets, fused at high temperature. No
brown core permitted. Colour of surface sheet as selected by Consultant.
.3
Hardware:
.1
Hinges: concealed, heavy duty chrome plated non-ferrous casting, selflubricating inward swing.
.2
Slide bolt and keeper: chrome plated non-ferrous casting or extrusion,
equipped for emergency access.
.3
Door stop: chrome plated non-ferrous casting or extrusion with rubber insert.
.4
Connecting brackets: channel shaped, anodized aluminum extrusion or
casting, continuous.
.5
Coat hook: combination hook and door bumper, chrome plated non-ferrous
casting.
.6
Provide hardware on doors that can be opened from exterior in case of an
emergency.
.4
Stainless steel sheet metal: ASTM A167, Type 304 with No. 4 satin finish.
.5
Fasteners: Stainless steel tamperproof type screws and bolts.
2.3
FABRICATION
.1
Toilet partitions shall be floor mounted, overhead braced.
.2
Fabricate stiles and doors of 19 mm thick solid phenolic core and panels of 13 mm
thick solid phenolic core with decorative plastic laminate facing. Multiple resinimpregnated kraft and surface sheets shall be fused at high temperature and
pressure with all edges finished and polished.
.3
Unless otherwise indicated or required, doors shall be nominal 610 mm wide, except
doors to compartments for the handicapped shall be 810 mm wide.
.4
Fabricate headrail of brake formed anti-grip 1.5 mm thick clear anodized aluminum.
.5
Fabricate pilaster boot assembly for bottom, of 1.5 mm thick die formed stainless
steel. Fabricate assembly in size to suit pilaster.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
3
Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
Section 10160
COMPARTMENTS AND CUBICLES
Page 3
.1
Install compartments and cubicles in accordance with manufacturer's details and
reviewed shop drawings, for a secure, plumb, square, and rigid installation.
.2
Provide connecting brackets and secure to building structure and to pilasters. Insert
edge of panels and closure pilasters into brackets and secure with through type
sleeve bolt and nut.
.3
Install doors with 6 mm to 10 mm maximum space between door panel and pilasters.
.4
Install panels with 6 mm maximum space between panels and walls.
.5
Install hardware in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and CAN/CSA B651M.
.6
Make compartments adjustable with screw jack through steel saddles made integral
with pilaster. Conceal fixings with stainless steel shoes.
.7
Provide for adjustment of floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles made
integral with pilaster. Conceal floor fixings with stainless steel boot assemblies.
.8
Install door tops edges aligned parallel with top edges of side partitions; determine
alignment when doors are in closed position.
.9
Brace through top of pilasters with rectangular shaped anti-grip headrail and fasten
with stainless steel sheet metal screws.
.10
Set panels, and doors level and in line, raised approximately 300 mm above finished
floor.
.11
Hang doors to remain stationary at open position.
.12
Equip each door with hardware. Adjust and align hardware for easy, proper function.
.13
Provide closure pilasters, as required, at end units of compartment bank.
.14
Remove and replace damaged components not acceptable to Consultant.
3.2
ADJUSTING
.1
Adjust operating hardware to work smoothly and without force. Adjust hinges of
compartment doors so that all doors remain open to the same degree when
unlatched, except doors at handicapped cubicles shall close automatically.
END OF SECTION
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
1
General
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
1.2
Section 10800
WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
Page 1
Labour, Products, equipment and services for washroom accessories Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM A167, Specification for Stainless Steel and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
.2
ASTM A312, Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel
Pipes.
.3
ASTM A653/A653M, Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or ZincIron Alloy-Coated (Galvanealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
.4
CAN/CSA B651-M, Barrier Free Design.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product data: Submit Product data to requirements of the Conditions of the Contract
indicating each washroom accessory describing size, finish, details of function,
attachment methods, hardware and locks, description of rough-in frame, and
building-in details of anchors for grab bars.
.2
Closeout submittals:
.1
Submit for each Product operation and maintenance instructions for
incorporating into the Operations and Maintenance Manuals in accordance
with the Conditions of the Contract.
.1
Supply 2 keys for each lockable washroom accessory to Consultant.
.2
Master key washroom accessories which are keyed.
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
1.5
Deliver materials in sealed cartons and containers with manufacturer’s name and
product description clearly marked.
EXTENDED WARRANTY
.1
Submit a warranty for washroom accessories Work in accordance with the General
Conditions, except that the warranty period is extended to 10 years.
.1
Against cracked or scratched mirrors, spoiling or deterioration of silvering or
backing, loosening of fastenings or adhesive
.2
Coverage: complete replacement including effected adjacent Work.
Section 10800
WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
Page 2
1.6
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
MAINTENANCE
1.
Maintenance Tools: Provide special tools necessary for accessing,
assembly/disassembly or removal of toilet, bath and cleaning accessories in
accordance with requirements specified in the Conditions of the Contract.
2
Products
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Stainless steel:
.1
Sheet metal: ASTM A167, Type 304.
.2
Tubing: ASTM A312, Type 304.
.2
Sheet steel: ASTM A653M, Z275; Cold rolled, commercial quality, surface
preparation and pretreatment as required for applied finish.
.3
Fasteners, screws and bolts: ASTM A167, Type 304 stainless steel, tamper-proof.
2.2
ACCESSORIES
.1
The following Products are by Bobrick Washroom Equipment of Canada Ltd. or
American Specialties Inc./Watrous except where noted. Quantity and location of
accessories as shown on Contract Drawings. Alternatives will be considered
provided they are approved prior to purchase.
.2
Toilet tissue dispenser: Supplied by Owner and installed by Contractor.
.3
Paper towel dispenser: Supplied by Owner and installed by Contractor.
.4
Soap dispenser: Supplied by Owner and installed by Contractor.
.5
Feminine napkin/tampon dispenser:
.1
#B-3706 or #W-64684; Recessed mounted, two flush tumbler locks, one lock
for dedicated for coin box, full length stainless steel hinge, stainless steel
cabinet.
.2
Fabricate unit to combine 2 dispensing mechanisms available with 25 or 50
cents or “complementary” operation in one cabinet dispensing mechanism
convertible to allow the change of coin denomination.
.3
Finish: Type 304 stainless steel with satin finish.
.6
Feminine napkin disposal: Supplied by Owner and installed by Contractor.
.7
Grab bar:
.1
#B-5806.99 x 24 or #W-3101P-M24; 30 mm diameter, 1.2 mm thick,
concealed mounting with snap flange, complete with escutcheons. Lengths
and configurations as indicated on drawings.
.2
Finish: Type 304 stainless steel with a satin finish and peened grip.
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Section 10800
WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
Page 3
.8
L-Shaped Grab bar:
.1
#B-816722.99 or #W-3100P-SMOD; 32 mm diameter, 1.2 mm thick,
concealed mounting with snap flange, complete with escutcheons. L-shape
as indicated on drawings.
.2
Finish: Type 304 stainless steel with a satin finish and peened grip.
.9
Mirror: 6 mm thick, mirror quality tempered glass
.1
Corners heliarc welded, ground and polished smooth.
.2
Dimensions: Sizes and locations as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
.3
Frame finish: Type 304 stainless steel satin finish.
.4
Refer to the following types:
.1
Type 1: #B-1658 x 2448 or #W-0600-B2448.
.2
Type 2: #B-2938 x 1630 or #W-0535-B1630.
.10
Hand Dryer:
.1
#B-750 or #WD-XRA5; recessed mounted, automatic hand dryer by Bobrick
or approved alternative, one-piece, deep-drawn, steel cover, motor shall be
1/10 hp with sealed ball bearings and automatic thermal overload, automatic
sensor with shut off after 1-1/2 min if covered by inanimate object, after
removed unit will automatically reset.
.2
Finish: white, high gloss, acid-resistant enamel.
.11
Utility shelf:
.1
#B-224x30 or #W-1315-3; 150 mm H by 205 mm deep. Shelf constructed of
minimum 1.2 mm stainless steel, mop and broom holders to have spring
loaded rubber cam to grip handles up to 30 mm in diameter, and stainless
steel hooks positioned below shelf.
.2
Finish: Type 304 stainless steel with satin finish.
3
Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Verify and coordinate templates, inserts, and rough-in frames and verify exact
location of washroom accessories for installation.
.2
Verify there is adequate supports and/or blocking in gypsum wall assemblies prior to
installation of washroom accessories.
.3
Provide fastening and mounting kits for washroom accessories.
.4
Locate washroom accessories where indicated on Drawings and where directed by
Consultant.
.5
Install washroom accessory fixtures, accessories, and items in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and CAN/CSA B651-M. Provide exposed tamper-proof
screws of stainless steel to match units.
Section 10800
WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
Page 4
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
.6
Install washroom accessories plumb, level, and securely and rigidly anchored to
substrate surfaces and framing. Adjust accessories for proper operation and verify
mechanisms function smoothly.
.7
Install grab bars to withstand minimum 408 kg downward pull. Provide necessary
reinforcements as required.
.8
Clean and polish exposed surfaces and fill accessories with necessary supplies prior
to acceptance by Consultant.
END OF SECTION
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
1
General
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
1.2
Section 10990
MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
Page 1
Labour, Products, equipment and services necessary for miscellaneous specialties
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product data:
.1
Submit duplicate copies of manufacturer's Product data for each Product
specified in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract indicating:
.1
Performance criteria, compliance with appropriate reference standard(s),
characteristics, and limitations.
.2
Product transportation, storage, handling and installation requirements.
.2
Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract
indicating elevations, sections, details, dimensions, materials, gauges, and finishes.
.3
Closeout submittals: Submit cleaning and maintenance instructions for miscellaneous
specialties for incorporation into Operations and Maintenance Manuals in accordance
with the Conditions of the Contract.
1.3
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
.1
Package or crate, and brace products to prevent distortion in shipment and handling.
Label packages and crates, and protect finish surfaces by sturdy wrappings.
2
Products
2.1
MANUFACTURED UNITS
.1
Markerboard: 1220 x 2440 mm, porcelain on steel laminated to 8 mm impregnated core
with zinc coated backing sheet, ‘Magnetic Centurion Porcelain’ by Ghent, distributed by
School House Products or approved alternative, Whiteboard shall be complete with
clear anodized aluminum perimeter trim and marker tray, concealed hanging brackets
and one box (12 per box) of companion marking pens, black in colour. Sizes as
indicated by the Consultant.
3
Execution
3.1
PREPARATION
.1
Verify substrate surfaces are solid, free from surface water, dust, oil, grease, projections
and other foreign matter detrimental to performance.
Section 10990
MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
Page 2
.2
3.2
Levitt Goodman Architects
Project No. 12208
Items to be built-in: Provide information and templates required for installation of work
of this Section, and assist or supervise, or both, the setting of anchorage devices, and
construction of other work incorporated with products specified in this Section in order
that they function as intended.
INSTALLATION
.1
Install miscellaneous specialties level and securely and rigidly anchored to substrate in
accordance with authorities having jurisdiction, reviewed shop drawings, and
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
After installation, adjust miscellaneous specialties in accordance with manufacturer’s
written instructions.
3.3
CLEANING
.1
Clean and polish exposed surfaces prior to acceptance by Consultant.
END OF SECTION
Mechanical Specifications
for
Renovations to
Blessed Margherita of Citta di Castello
Catholic School
108 Spenvalley Drive,
Toronto, Ontario
St Francis De Sales Catholic School
333 Firgrove Crescent,
Toronto, Ontario
Venerable John Merlini Catholic School
123 Whitfield Avenue,
Toronto, Ontario
ENSO Systems Inc.
5700 Yonge Street, Suite 200
Toronto, Ontario, M2M 4K2
Tel/Fax: (416) 410-9865
Email: ensosystems@rogers.com
April 9, 2013
Project: 852
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Index to Mechanical Specifications
Section Number
Description
Section 15010
Section 15050
Section 15250
Section 15300
Section 15400
Section 15600
Section 15900
General Provisions
Basic Materials and Methods
Thermal Insulation
Fire Protection Systems
Plumbing and Drainage
Heating, Ventilation and Air-Conditioning
Controls and Instrumentation
April 9, 2013
No of Pages
9
19
6
3
7
14
2
Division 15 - Mechanical
Article No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Table 1
Table 2
Table 3
Index to 15010 – General Provisions
Description
Page No.
General
Definitions and Interpretations
Laws and Regulations
Permits and Fees
Drawings
Examination
Co-ordination
Standard of Materials and Equipment
Protection of Work & Materials
Warranty
Trial Usage
Superintendence
Data Books, Operating & Maintenance Instructions
Base Bid and Supplementary Mechanical Tender Form
Shop Drawings and Samples
Record Drawings
Accessibility
Concealment
Final Inspection
Cutting and Patching
Site Visit
Applicable Codes, Standards and Authorities
Abbreviations
English/Metric Conversion
List of Base Bid & Acceptable Equipment
Manufacturers, Methods/Services
Hoisting Apparatus
Work in Existing Building
Continuity of Existing Services
Testing
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
Abbreviations
Motor and Pipe Size Conversions
List of Base Bid and Acceptable Equipment
Manufacturers, Methods/Services
7
9
5
5
5
6
6
9
General Provisions
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 15010
Page 1
1
General
1.1
Comply with Division 1 - General Requirements and all documents referred to therein. The
work of Division 15 - Mechanical is divided into Sections and SubSections as follows:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Section 15010 - General Provisions
Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods including SubSections
Section 15250 - Thermal Insulation
Section 15300 – Fire Protection Systems
Section 15400 - Plumbing and Drainage including SubSections
Section 15600 - H.V.A.C. including SubSections
Section 15900 - Controls and Instrumentation including SubSections
1.2
Subsections are in order, but may not be numbered consecutively. Refer to the Index and
page numbers.
2
Definitions and Interpretations
2.1
The term "provide" shall be understood to include labour, materials, and services
necessary to supply and install item or work referred to.
The term "approved", "approval", etc., shall be understood to mean approved by
authorities having jurisdiction as conforming to Codes, Standards, By-laws, etc.
The term “accessible” shall be understood to mean readily accessible by a person using
necessary tools but without cutting or breaking out material.
The term “exposed” shall be understood to mean within the line of sight of any person
standing, sitting in or using the occupied space, unless defined otherwise in the Sections
of Division 16.
The term “listed” shall be understood to mean that the materials or equipment have been
tested in accordance with applicable standards, and have been approved and listed for
their intended use by a testing company approved by the Authorities having jurisdiction.
The term “subject to review” shall be understood to mean work or materials shall be laid
out for review. No work shall proceed until instructions have been obtained. Submit further
information, shop drawings, samples, etc., as specified and as may be reasonably
requested.
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
3
Laws and Regulations
Work provided under this Division shall conform to the standards and codes, current
by-laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. In case of conflict, the codes,
by-laws and regulations take precedence over the Contract Documents. Do not reduce
the standard established by the drawings and specifications by applying codes, by-laws
and regulations.
4
Permits and Fees
Give notices, obtain and pay for permits including Electrical Safety Authority Inspection
and pay all fees necessary to complete the work of this Division.
5
Drawings
The drawings are diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of work and indicate
general arrangement and approximate location of equipment, fixtures, conduit and cable
runs. Take information involving accurate dimensions of the building by site
measurements.
6
Examination
Examine existing buildings, building site and local conditions affecting the work together
with drawings and specifications of other Divisions forming part of the Tender Documents,
General Provisions
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 15010
Page 2
before Tendering. Submit notice of omissions, discrepancies, defects or interferences
affecting the work before submitting Tender.
7
Co-ordination
7.1
Lay out work so that it does not conflict with work of other Trades. Prepare field drawings
showing size and location of equipment bases, sleepers, inserts, sleeves and openings
required for passage of bus ducts, conduits, cables, etc., through walls, partitions, roofs,
ceilings, floors and structural members. Submit field drawings as specified under Shop
Drawings.
No extra cost or credit shall be incurred for any change in location of equipment, providing
distance does not exceed 3 m (10') and information is given before installation of said
equipment.
Coordinate work with all other trades and notify consultant of any conflicts or
discrepancies prior to rough-in.
7.2
7.3
8
Standard of Materials and Equipment
8.1
8.2
Material required for performance of work shall be new and of uniform pattern throughout
work. Identical units or equipment shall be of same manufacture.
All material and equipment shall be of the type subject to Factory Mutual, Underwriters'
Laboratories of Canada or Canadian Standards Association inspection and approval and
shall bear ULC or CSA labels.
9
Protection of Work and Materials
Protect materials and equipment from damage, inclement weather and/or extreme
temperatures. Provide enclosures, tarpaulins, or special protection as required under the
circumstances. Be responsible for the protection and maintenance of the work of this
Division until the work has been completed and accepted.
10
Warranty
10.1
Warrant equipment and work against defects, deficiencies in design and workmanship
for a period of one year after acceptance.
Provide extended warranties where called for. Submit (1) copy of warranty certificates with
Data Book.
10.2
11
Trial Usage
Allow for use of electrical systems to be thoroughly tested before final completion and
acceptance of the work. Supply labour and equipment for such tests.
12
Superintendence
Maintain at the job site for the full duration of the project, qualified personnel with proven
experience in erecting, supervising, testing and adjusting projects of comparable nature
and complexity.
13
Data Books, Operating and Maintenance Instructions
13.1
Submit three copies of final reviewed shop drawings and manufacturer's maintenance and
operating instruction for each piece of major equipment and system. Include the names
and addresses of spare parts suppliers and service organizations.
Compile copies in sets in hard cover three-ring data books, with index page and indexing
tabs.
Provide the services of qualified personnel to instruct and familiarize the Owner's
operating and maintenance staff with the correct procedures of operating and maintaining
systems and equipment.
13.2
13.3
14
Base Bid and Supplementary Mechanical Tender Form
General Provisions
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
14.1
Products names and/or model numbers shown are for the purpose of establishing a
standard of quality, performance, serviceability, appearance and capacity. Base tenders
on the materials, equipment and methods specifically named in the specifications or
indicated on the drawings. Submit proposed substitutions or alternatives in accordance
with the following procedures:
.1
.2
.2
Section 15010
Page 3
Where products, materials, methods and services are specifically named or
identified as "Base Bid" items, submit proposed substitutions and/or alternatives as
required by the Supplementary or Mechanical Tender Form.
Where products, materials and methods are not specifically named or identified as
"Base Bid" items, include one of the listed acceptable equipment manufacturers,
methods and/or services (where applicable) in the tender and show the product
and/or service on which the tender is based as required by the Supplementary or
Mechanical Tender Form.
.3
The tenderer is encouraged to offer products and materials by manufacturers not included
in the specification. Do not include these items in the tender sum, but show items
separately as substitutes complete with changes in price.
Ensure that offered substitutions and/or alternatives meet space, weight, connection,
power and wiring requirements, etc. All costs incurred for additional components, changes
to services, structural or space requirements, layouts and plans, etc., necessary to
accommodate the alternative or substitute items shall be borne by this Division.
15
Shop Drawings and Samples
.1
Submit shop drawings for review in accordance with the requirements of Section 01340
and furnish shop drawings to authorities having jurisdiction for review where applicable.
Submit shop drawings showing details of construction, weights, accurate dimensions,
capacities, performances and wiring diagrams for each piece of major equipment and for
each piece of equipment listed under "Shop Drawings" article in the Trade Section.
Indicate the following information:
.2
.3
.1 Manufacturer's and Supplier's name, catalogue model number
 Name of trade supplying item, project numbers
 Number identifying item in the contract documents such as equipment, fan and pump
numbers, diffuser & grille identification symbols, etc.
.4
.5
.6
.7
15.8
Check for pertinent information such as physical dimensions, make, performance,
electrical characteristics before submittal. Be responsible for accuracy of equipment
dimensions related to available space, accessibility for maintenance and compliance with
Codes and Regulations.
Review of the drawings shall be construed to apply to general arrangement only and shall
not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from the drawings and
specifications, unless he has submitted written notice of such deviations at the time of
submission of drawings and samples.
Furnish prints of the reviewed shop drawing details to other parties for co-ordination.
Submit samples of material and equipment where specified or as instructed for review
before ordering same. Samples may be retained until the completion of the contract.
Complete all work in accordance with reviewed shop drawings. All materials and
workmanship shall be equal to reviewed samples.
16
Record Drawings and Demonstration
16.1
Obtain and pay for one set of black line record drawings relating to the work of this
Division and keep at the job site. Note clearly, accurately and promptly revisions to the
work and deviations from the Contract Documents. Dimension the location, depth, size
and type of underground services from convenient reference points.
General Provisions
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 15010
Page 4
16.2
Submit three sets of prints and one disk with record drawings (in AutoCAD 2004) upon
completion of work. Construction drawing files will be made available for contractor’s use.
17
Accessibility
Install work so as to be readily accessible for operation, maintenance and repairs by
access panels or other acceptable means.
18
Concealment
.1
Conceal conduit and cables except in unfinished areas such as service rooms or as
noted on the drawings where conduits shall be surface mounted. Chase walls were
necessary to conceal conduit and boxes.
Install services that are to be concealed as close to the building structure as possible so
that furrings, ceiling spaces and other enclosures can be of minimum size. Run exposed
services parallel to building lines.
Identify locations and submit notice where installation of work interferes with interior
treatment and use of space. Await instructions before proceeding with the work.
.2
.3
19
Final Inspection
.1
Submit a written request to arrange for a final inspection of all electrical systems when:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
Deficiencies noted during job inspections have been corrected.
Systems have been tested and reports submitted. Obtain and submit
unconditional final inspection certificate to Owner upon completion of work.
Operating and maintenance manuals have been submitted.
Tags are in place and equipment identified.
Owner's operating personnel have been given operating and maintenance
instructions.
.2
Obtain and submit unconditional final inspection certificate from local Authorities having
jurisdiction to Owner upon completion of work.
20
Cutting, Patching and Firestopping
20.1
Advise other Trades of the location of openings required for the installation of this
Division's work. Provide and set sleeves, inserts, anchors, etc., when requested in
advance of concrete pouring or similar work. Pay for and employ the Trades whose work
is involved for cutting and patching of completed work. Lay out such work for review. Do
not cut reinforcing steel without written instructions.
Unless noted otherwise, perform and pay for cutting and patching in existing construction
required for installation of work under this Division. Sleeve as specified elsewhere in this
Specification.
Do not cut reinforcing steel without written instructions.
Provide fire stopping and smoke sealant where required for work by this Division. Refer
to general sections for material specifications.
Make good openings in walls and floors where demolished equipment, conduit, etc., are
removed.
20.2
20.3
20.4
20.5
21
Site Visit
Site visits are strongly suggested to all bidders in order to review existing conditions that
may affect the work. Advise the Owner’s representative 72 hours in advance of planned
site visit and make all necessary arrangements to gain access to the areas affected by
the work of the Contract.
General Provisions
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 15010
Page 5
22
Applicable Codes, Standards and Authorities
.1
Codes, standards and authorities governing the work of this Division shall include but not
be limited to the following:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.2
Authorities:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
23
Municipal Building Department
Municipal Fire Prevention Authorities
Ontario Ministry of Health and Longterm Care
Electrical Safety Authority
Ontario Ministry of Energy and Environment
Ontario Fire Marshal’s Office
Abbreviations
.1
.2
24
Ontario Building Code and all Regulations referred to therein.
National Building Code and all Regulations referred to therein.
Ontario Electrical Safety Code
Ontario Gas Utilization Code
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 10 - Portable Fire Extinguishers.
NFPA No. 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
NFPA No. 14 – Installation of Standpipe Systems
Fire Protection: Insurance Underwriters (Agency).
Ministry of Labour Regulations.
T.S.S.A. and Pressure Vessel and Pressure Piping Regulations.
Abbreviations used in these documents shall be as shown in the Table 1 at the
end of this section.
Other abbreviations may be used and shall be interpreted as referred to in the
ASHRAE Guide and Data Books.
English/Metric Conversion
Metric Units of measurement used in this specification are based on the International
System of Units (SI) contained in "The Canadian Metric Practice Guide" prepared by the
Canadian Standards Association, Publication Number CAN3-Z234.1-76. Motor and pipe
size conversions used are as in Table 2 at the end of this section.
25
List of Base Bid and Acceptable Equipment Manufacturers, Methods and Services
See a complete list at the end of this section in Table 3.
26
Hoisting Apparatus
.1
Unless noted otherwise, provide all apparatus necessary for the hoisting and placing of
materials or equipment forming part of this Division.
Ensure that all equipment and materials can be hoisted and set in place. Include for the
cost of dismantling and reassembling equipment where required.
.2
27
Work In Existing Building
.1
General
.1
.2
.3
.4
Route new services to avoid interference with existing construction.
Cut back and terminate existing services to present a neat appearance.
Remove and dispose of existing abandoned piping, ductwork, conduit, wiring,
devices, equipment, fixtures, hangers and supports. All wiring and cable to be
removed to source panel. All unused outlet boxes (where it is not practical to
remove same) shall be blanked with coverplates.
Refer also to Demolition Section in the Contract Documents.
General Provisions
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
.5
.6
.7
.8
.2
Section 15010
Page 6
Hand over to the Owner existing devices and equipment to be removed such as
thermostats, pneumatic control valves, etc., when requested by the Owner.
Conceal all conduit and boxes except in unfinished areas such as service rooms
or as noted on the drawings where conduits shall be surface mounted. Walls
shall be chased where necessary.
It shall be the responsibility of any contractor, who while working on this project
may disturb the wiring or produce heat, smoke, or dust that may activate the fire
alarm system, to arrange to have the fire detectors in the area isolated before
commencing such work. Failure to comply may result in false alarms.
Subsequent charges and fines by the local municipality for attending to a false
alarm shall be borne by this contractor.
All water and gas supply interruptions shall be arranged with the Owner’s
representative at least 10 working days in advance and performed after hours as
directed by the Owner’s representative. Obtain written approval 48 hours prior to
each shut down.
Work Schedule
Carry out Owner/user disturbing work after hours or on weekends. For further details refer
to Instructions to Bidders.
.3
X-ray and Scanning
Before core drilling any concrete floors or walls, x-ray and/or scan the area in question.
Include for premium time to perform this work.
28
Continuity of Existing Services
Keep time for interruption of existing services to a minimum and arrange shut down
periods with the Owner's authorized representative. Obtain written approval 72 hours prior
to each shut down. Include in tender price for overtime work that may be required to tie-in
services and wiring at night or weekends.
29
Testing
Perform tests on each system and submit test results for approval prior to the final
acceptance of the work. Repair or correct deficiencies and re-test system as directed.
Table 1 - Abbreviations
Abbreviation:
Long Form:
AFF or A.F.F.
AFG or A.F.G.
AMCA
ANSI or A.N.S.I.
ARI or A.R.I.
ASA or A.S.A.
ASHRAE ASTM BOD or B.O.D.
CGA
CGSB
CSA
CUA
Above Finished Floor
Above Finished Grade
Air Moving and Conditioning Assoc. Inc.
American National Safety Institute
American Refrigeration Institute
American Standards Association
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating & Air Conditioning
American Society For Testing Materials
By Other Division
Canadian Gas Association
Canadian Government Specification Board
Canadian Standards Association
Canadian Underwriter's Association
General Provisions
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 15010
Page 7
Table 1 - Abbreviations continued
Abbreviation:
Long Form:
C/W or c/w
Complete With
CI or C.I.
Cast Iron
CO or C.O.
Clean-out
CW or C.W.
Domestic Cold Water
CBM/S or cbm/s or m3/s
Cubic Meters Per Second
DBT or D.B.T.
Dry Bulb Temperature
EEMAC or E.E.M.A.C.
Electrical and Electronic Manufacturer's Association Of Canada
ESA
Electrical Safety Authority
FA(P) or FAAP
Fire Alarm (Panel) or Fire Alarm Annunciator Panel
HP or hp
High Pressure Or Horsepower
KG or kg
Kilograms
KPA or kpa
Kilopascals
KW or kw
Kilowatts
L or l
Litres
L/S or l/s
Litres Per Second
LV or lv
Low voltage
M or m
Meters
MM or mm
Millimeters
M/S or m/s
Meters Per Second
MG or mg
Milligrams
NFPA
National Fire Protection Association
NC, NO or nc, no
Normally Open, Normally Closed. Position When Power Is Off or
Control Signal Output Is Zero
NRCC or N.R.C.C.
National Research Council Of Canada
NTS or N.T.S.
Not To Scale
PDI or P.D.I.
Plumbers Design Institute
RH or R.H.
Relative Humidity
PPM or ppm
Parts Per Million
RPM or rpm
Revolutions Per Minute
SMACNA
SheetMetal And AirConditioning Contractors National Association Inc.
SS or S.S.
Stainless Steel
SP or S.P.
Static Pressure
TSSA
Technical Standards and Safety Authority
ULC
Underwriter's Laboratory of Canada
WBT or W.B.T.
Wet Bulb Temperature
WP or wp
Working Pressure
WG or wg
Water Gauge
WOG or wog
Water Oil And Gas
General Provisions
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 15010
Page 8
Table 2 - Motor and Pipe Size Conversions
English System
Motor Size
HP
.5
Metric System
Nominal Equivalent
KW
.37
English System
Pipe Size
Inches (“)
1/2
Metric System
Nominal Equivalent
MM
12 or 15
.75
.56
3/4
20
1
.75
1
25
1.5
1.1
1-1/4
32
2
1.5
1-1/2
40
3
2.2
2
50
5
3.7
2-1/2
65
7.5
5.5
3
75
10
7.5
3-1/2
90
15
10.5
4
100
20
15
5
125
25
19
6
150
30
22
8
200
40
30
10
250
General Provisions
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 15010
Page 9
Table 3 - List of Base Bid and Acceptable Equipment Manufacturers, Methods & Services
The following is a list of acceptable equipment manufacturer, methods and services. Any
deviation from the following list must be identified at the time of Tender closing on the
Supplementary Tender Form.
Item
Base Bid
Acceptable Alternatives
Vibration Isolation
Mech’l Grooved Joints
Gate, Globe & Butterfly Valves
Victaulic
-
Vibro-Acoustics, Kinetics Noise Control
Crane, Jenkins, Toyo, Kitz
Check Valves
-
Crane, Jenkins, Toyo, Kitz
Ball Valves
Balancing (CBV) Valves for
Domestic Hot Water
Recirculation
Balancing (CBV) Valves for
Hot Water Heating Systems
Unions
Strainers
-
Crane, Jenkins, Watts, Kitz
Crane, Jenkins, Toyo, Kitz
-
Armstrong, Bell and Gossett
-
Automatic Air Vents
-
Crane, Grinell
Braukmann,Crane, Morrison, Brass, McAvity,
Sarco
Amtrol, Sarco, S.A. Armstrong, Trerice
Thermal Insulation
-
Johns Manville, Knauf
Roof Drains, Floor Drains,
Cleanouts, Drain Specialties
Stainless Steel Sinks
Faucets
J.R. Smith, Zurn, Watts
Kindred, Franke
Vitreous China Fixtures
American
Standard
Toto
Zurn, Kohler
Automatic Flush Valves
Sloan
Zurn, Powers
Tempering Valves
-
Powers, Leonard, Watts, Zurn
Air Terminal Devices
(Diffusers, Registers)
Hot Water Unit Heaters &
Cabinet Heaters, Wallfin
Washroom Exhaust Fans
-
EH Price, Nailor, Titus,
-
Engineered Air, Rosemex
-
Broan, Nutone, Greenheck
END OF SECTION 15010
Moen, Delta
Division 15 - Mechanical
Index to 15050 – Basic Materials & Methods
Section No. Description
15050
15051
15053
15055
15056
15057
15058
15059
15060
15061
15062
15063
15064
15068
15070
15071
15072
15073
15075
15080
15081
15100
General
Painting
Welding, Soldering & Brazing
Expansion Joints, Loops, Anchors & Guides
Sleeves & Escutcheon Plates
Access Panels
Name & Registration Plates
Supports & Hangers
Strainers
Shock Arrestors
Backflow Preventers
Electrical Work
Electrical Motors
Identification & Directories
Piping Materials, Fittings & Installations
Pipe Joints
Pipe Unions
Pipe Couplings
Excavating & Backfilling
Air Vents
Testing & Working Pressures
Valves
Page No.
1
1
2
2
3
4
4
5
6
7
7
7
8
9
10
13
13
14
15
16
16
17
Basic Materials & Methods
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 15050
Page 1
General
1
Subsection 15050
Part One: General
.1
General
.1
.2
.2
Comply with Division 1, General Requirements and Section 15010,
General Provisions and all documents referred to therein.
This Section includes specifications for products, criteria and methods of
execution, common to one or more Sections of the Mechanical Division.
Work Included
.1
.2
.3
Provide all labour, material, equipment and services required to complete
the work of the Mechanical Division in accordance with the specifications
and/or drawings.
Examine the drawings, equipment schedules, etc. in conjunction with the
specifications to determine the scope of work.
The specifications and drawings shall be considered an outline form in
which accessories and other apparatus necessary for the satisfactory and
safe operation of the systems shall be provided.
- End of SubSection 15050 -
Painting
1
Subsection 15051
Part One: General
.1
Work Included
.1
.2
.2
Related Work Not Included
.1
.3
Submit colour schedules and samples of finish painted equipment provided
by this division.
Part Two: Products
.1
3
Painting: Division 1, Section Painting.
Submittals
.1
2
Factory or shop prime paint for equipment and materials fabricated from
ferrous metals except for galvanized steel. Provide finish painting where
specified.
Painting of fire and gas piping as required by applicable codes and/or
governing authorities.
Prime paint to be compatible with finishes specified under Division 1, Painting.
Part Three: Execution
.1
.2
.3
.4
Treat unprotected surfaces of galvanized steel with zinc rich paint.
Make good damaged finishes of factory or shop finished painted equipment and
materials.
Deliver black (iron) steel pipe to site protected by either factory applied varnish
lacquer of factory applied primer paint coat.
Make good finishes of existing construction damaged while installing new work.
Employ qualified tradesman.
- End of SubSection 15051 -
Basic Materials & Methods
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 15050
Page 2
Welding, Soldering & Brazing
1
Part One: General
.1
.2
2
Carry out welding, testing and inspection procedures for high pressure and high
temperature services in strict compliance with the regulations of governing
authorities.
Submit inspection and testing certificates where applicable.
Part Two: Products
.1
3
Subsection 15053
Solder joints in copper piping: 95% tin and 5% antimony hard solder and non
corrosive flux (conform to ASTMB 32) unless noted otherwise. Use silver brazing
alloy on underground, vapour, compressed air and refrigerant piping systems.
Part Three: Execution
.1
.2
.3
Perform welding by either electric arc or oxyacetylene process. Use oxyacetylene
for cutting and for welding steel pipe 50mm and less. Weld larger pipe sizes by
electric arc.
Welding methods shall comply with all of requirements of AWSI D10.9,
Specification for Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and
Tubing, Level AR3.
Apply solder and brazing alloy (AWS A5.8, Classification BcuP) as recommended
by the manufacturer.
- End of SubSection 15053 -
Expansion Joints, Loops, Anchors & Guides
1
Part One: General
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
2
Be responsible for and make allowances for the expansion and contraction of
piping.
Unless shown or specified otherwise use bends or expansion loops. Where space
does not permit the installation of bends and loops install expansion joints.
Base axial traverse for loops, bends and joints on ambient temperature at time of
installation to corresponding media temperature plus 30% safety factor.
Provide guides and anchors as required, to adequately control pipe expansion and
contraction. Stresses shall be within allowable limits of A.S.A. Code B 31.1.
Submit shop drawings including calculations showing location, reaction loads,
anchor and guide details of loops and guides for review.
Part Two: Products
.1
.2
3
Subsection 15055
Pressure Class: Appropriate for the service. Minimum working pressure shall be
860 kPa.
Expansion Loops: Same size and materials as the pipe line.
Part Three: Execution
.1
.2
Install joints with alignment guides in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Size cylindrical guides for full pipe insulation thickness.
Secure anchors and guides to building structure in an acceptable manner.
- End of SubSection 15055 -
Basic Materials & Methods
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Sleeves & Escutcheon Plates
1
Work Included
.1
.2
.3
.2
Sleeves for pipes and round ducts passing through floor slabs, walls, roofs,
partitions, ceilings, concrete beams, etc.
Escutcheon plates where exposed pipes pass through floors, walls or
ceilings.
Sleeves for rectangular and square ducts passing through floors unless
noted otherwise.
Submittals
.1
Prepare field drawings showing location of sleeves, duct and pipe openings
and submit for review.
Part Two: Products
.1
.2
.3
.4
3
Subsection 15056
Part One: General
.1
2
Section 15050
Page 3
Sleeves for pipes: Schedule 40 for the full thickness of the wall, slab or member,
except as hereinafter specified.
Sleeves for ducts: Minimum 18 gauge galvanized steel.
Sleeves for pipes passing through roof and metal decks: Cast iron, copper or lead
projecting a minimum of 150mm above finished surface.
Escutcheon plates: Chrome plated split type.
Part Three: Execution
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
Roofs: Set sleeves into slab, or clamp to metal deck. Provide all flashing, caulking
and counterflashing required. Flashing material may be of lead or copper sheet
complying to the weights and sizes required by authorities having jurisdiction.
Extend sleeves for piping, conduit and ducts penetrating equipment room floors
and floors 75mm and 25mm respectively above finished floor.
Sleeves shall have plain, smooth ends.
Size sleeves to accommodate continuous application of insulation.
Fill annular space between sleeves and pipe and/or duct, and void space between
sleeves and building material as follows:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
Firmly pack for the full thickness of the penetration and finish flush annular
and void spaces with an acceptable material.
Caulk both faces of wall, floor, ceiling, roof, partition penetrations of
equipment spaces and building structures serving as a sound barrier, with
an acceptable resilient, non-hardening caulking compound to eliminate
acoustic leaks.
Pack all annular and void spaces occurring in fire separations in strict
compliance with the regulations of the building code and authorities having
jurisdiction with a listed fire stopping material.
Pack annular and void spaces for sleeves in exterior walls, with oakum,
seal with lead and watertight mastic or asphalt.
Where pipe and duct shaft openings have been provided by other Division,
Division 15 shall seal void spaces between duct or pipe and formed
opening by providing sleeves and packing as previously described. Fill in
remaining opening around sleeve with materials similar to adjoining
construction, and to acceptable finish. Maintain fire separations where
applicable.
Basic Materials & Methods
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
.6
.7
Section 15050
Page 4
Inside dimension of escutcheon plates shall fit snugly around the insulation or
around the bare pipe; outside dimension shall cover the sleeve. Install plates tight
against finished surfaces and secure with set screws.
Provide a special sleeve fitting with flange and clamping device for pipes and ducts
passing through floor slabs with integral waterproofing membrane. Refer to
architectural and structural drawings for location and details of waterproofing
membranes.
- End of SubSection 15056 -
Access Panels
1
Part One: General
.1
.2
2
Supply acceptable access panels for locations where mechanical equipment or
any other device requiring maintenance or adjustment is "built-in"; such as
expansion joints, valves, dampers etc. Include cost of installation by qualified
tradesmen.
Submit shop drawings for review showing size, type and exact location of access
panels.
Part Two: Products
.1
.2
.3
.4
3
Subsection 15057
Material: Block walls, plaster and dry wall: Minimum 12 gauge prime coated steel
with concealed hinges and screw driver locks. Glazed tile walls: 304 S.S. with No.
4 finish.
Frames: Flush type with built-in recessed plaster frame for drywall and plaster
surfaces, flush type with exposed flange for masonry and glazed tile.
Size: Minimum 300mm x 300mm (600mm x 600mm where personnel enters).
Access doors installed in fire rated walls, partitions or ceilings shall bear an
acceptable fire resistance rating.
Part Three: Execution
.1
.2
Do not provide access panels in removable panel type ceilings. Indicate location of
equipment with acceptable markers.
Size and locate access panels in applied tile, or in glazed or unglazed structural tile
to suit block patterns.
- End of SubSection 15057 -
Name & Registration Plates
1
Part One: General
.1
.2
2
Subsection 15058
Provide acceptable name plates for apparatus and mechanical equipment such as
fans, pumps, motors, disconnect switches, motor starters, etc., showing the size,
name and service or equipment, identifying numbers corresponding to the
drawings, serial numbers, and pertinent information including voltage, cycle, phase
and horsepower of motors and the name of the manufacturer.
Provide pressure vessel registration plates, Underwriters' Laboratory of Canada
and C.S.A. etc., approval plates on equipment in accordance with respective
codes.
Part Two: Products
.1
Minimum 25mm x 60mm engraved black and white lamacoid plastic type. All
stamped, etched or engraved lettering on plates, shall be perfectly legible.
Basic Materials & Methods
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
3
Section 15050
Page 5
Part Three: Execution
.1
Mount plates in acceptable locations and secure with rivets or screws.
-
End of SubSection 15058 –
Supports & Hangers
1
Part One: General
.1
.2
.3
2
Subsection 15059
Provide acceptable support for piping, ductwork and equipment supplied and
installed under this Division.
Where required by Code and/or Authorities, engage the services of a Registered
Professional Engineer to certify and supervise the work to be provided by this
Division. Submit certified shop drawings for review.
Do not use powder actuated type fastenings without prior approval.
Part Two: Products
.1
General
.1
.2
.2
Ductwork
.1
.3
Hangers: Listed or meeting the requirements of ULC Standard C203.
Provide copper plated supports or acceptable isolation for hangers and
supports in contact with copper piping. Perforated copper strap hangers
may be used to support plumbing pipe up to 25mm diameter if concealed.
Galvanized band iron hangers spaced at maximum 3m centers on ducts up
to 900mm in width. Angle type trapeze hangers with rod supports, spaced
at maximum 2.5m centers for ducts over 900m in width.
Piping
.1
.2
.3
.4
Unless noted otherwise, provide clevis hangers of approved type for
support of horizontal piping.
Where horizontal axial motion of piping is excessive use roller type
hangers.
Unless noted otherwise, provide piping supported on roller type hangers,
with pipe insulation protection saddles.
Provide roller type hangers on pipes 100mm diameter and larger for the
following services:

.5
3
Hot Water Heating Piping
Provide acceptable prefabricated insulation shield complete with
incompressible insulation and vapour barrier for chilled water and domestic
cold water piping supported on roller type hangers.
Part Three: Execution
.1
Support piping as follows:
.1
.2
Horizontal cast iron drain piping at every hub and maximum 1.5m intervals.
Horizontal copper, schedule 40 and schedule 80 steel pipe.
Nominal Pipe Size



25mm and smaller
to 90mm
100mm & larger
Max. Distance Between Supports
2.0 m
3.0 m
4.5 m
Basic Materials & Methods
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
Section 15050
Page 6
Place a hanger within 250mm of each horizontal elbow.
Support vertical cast iron drainage piping, including soil, waste, vent stacks, and
rain water leaders at hubs by a riser clamp located at every other floor slab. Bolt
riser clamps around pipe and anchor to concrete slab.
Support vertical pipes, other than cast iron drainage, by means of riser clamps.
Support piping located near floors from the floor by means of a pipe support of
adequate size with saddle and floor plate.
Install hanger rods supporting piping, ductwork and equipment vertical without
bends and offsets. Piping shall not support ductwork, equipment or pipe hangers.
Do not support piping, ductwork or equipment from metal deck structure without
written instructions.
Provide spring hangers as required to compensate for thermal expansion of
vertical piping.
Use expansion type hangers capable of vertical adjustment after piping is erected.
Where all-threaded rods are used, increase the diameter by one trade size above
that required for plain rods.
Design supports to suit loading and building structure. Secure supports for hangers
to building steel framing wherever practical, use inserts for suspending hangers
from reinforced concrete slabs. Set inserts in position in advance of concrete work.
Drill concrete where inserts shall be placed later. Install inserts in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations. Where structural bearings do not exist, provide
approved supports made of steel channels or angles from which to suspend
hangers.
Provide supports carried to floor with floor plates and anchor bolts.
- End of SubSection 15059 -
Strainers & Suction Guides
1
Part One: General
.1
.2
2
Provide 'Y' type or "basket" type strainers and suction guides as specified and
where shown on the drawings.
Working pressures shall be as specified for valves.
Part Two: Products
.1
Strainers shall be of the following type:



.2
3
Subsection 15060
Body: Bronze or iron body; Screen: Stainless steel;
Perforations: Closed water systems: 1.6mm through 75mm size and 3mm for
75mm and over. Open water systems: 3mm perforations. Free screen area
shall not be less than double the internal area of the pipe.
Ends: Screwed 50mm and smaller, flanged 50mm and larger.
Suction guides shall have cast iron bodies with flanged connections and steel
guide vanes. Screen shall be stainless steel with perforations as specified for
strainers. Provide a fine mesh brass start-up strainer.
Part Three: Execution
.1
.2
Suction guides may be used in lieu of strainers at pump inlets.
Strainers may be used in lieu of suction guides, provided inlet piping to equipment
such as pumps, etc. is installed in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's
recommendation.
- End of SubSection 15060 -
Basic Materials & Methods
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 15050
Page 7
Shock Arrestors
1
Part One: General
.1
Provide shock arrestors at the following piping as recommended by the
manufacturer to eliminate water hammer:


2
Domestic hot and cold water supplies to faucets and flush valves.
Fast acting control or solenoid valves
Part Two: Products
.1
.2
3
Subsection 15061
Shock arrestors shall be engineered or manufactured devices with permanently
sealed air/gas chambers, tested and certified in accordance with the Plumbers
Design Institute Standard PDI-WH201.
Air chambers may be used in lieu of shock arrestors on single plumbing fixtures
furnished with manually controlled faucets that are serviced individually. Air
chambers shall consist of a 250mm length of pipe of the same size as the branch
pipe.
Part Three: Execution
.1
Locate shock arrestors to be readily accessible.
- End of SubSection 15061 -
Backflow Preventers
1
Part One: General
.1
2
Provide backflow preventers as specified and shown and where required by code
and governing authorities.
Part Two: Products
.1
3
Subsection 15062
Unless noted otherwise or acceptable by code and governing authorities each unit
shall be reduced pressure type incorporating strainer, double check valves, relief
valve, vents and test cocks. Unit shall be of bronze construction with internal parts
of stainless steel. Pressure rating shall be same as specified for valves.
Part Three: Execution
.1
.2
.3
Install backflow preventers on all direct connections of potable water piping to
non-potable water systems to prevent contamination of the potable water supply.
Pipe relief valves to nearest funnel floor drain.
Comply with the regulations and by-laws of the City of Toronto. Test and complete
the City’s forms at time of installation.
- End of SubSection 15062 -
Electrical Work
1
Subsection 15063
Part One: General
.1
Work Included
.1
.2
.3
Electrical wiring, components and controls as specified in the Controls and
Instrumentation Section and Trade Sections of this Division.
Interlocking wiring of equipment, motors, devices, etc., to provide specified
control sequence or function of mechanical systems, unless noted
otherwise.
Magnetic starting equipment, controls and associated wiring for packaged
equipment provided by this Division.
Basic Materials & Methods
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
.4
.5
.2
.2
Detailed, composite wiring diagrams for mechanical equipment and
systems.
Part Two: Products
.1
General
.1
.3
Starters, disconnect switches, electrical power wiring for fans, pumps, etc.
and wiring from the building distribution system to motors and devices will
be provided under Division 16 - Electrical, unless noted otherwise.
Refer to the Electrical Contract Documents for interface wiring and work to
be provided by Division 16 - Electrical.
Submittals
.1
2
Additional contacts, relays and/or double voltage relays for starters
provided by Division 16, required to complete the work of this Division.
Wiring in conjunction with the refrigerant monitoring system.
Related Work Not Included
.1
.3
Section 15050
Page 8
Electrical devices and work provided by Division 15 shall meet the
requirements specified in Division 16 - Electrical.
Part Three: Execution
1. Be responsible for the correct functioning of systems and equipment supplied under
this Division.
2. Co-ordinate with the Electrical Division and verify electrical characteristics of
equipment before ordering.
3. Unless noted otherwise or dictated by safety or fail safe requirements, arrange controls
so that equipment automatically restarts on resumption of power after a commercial
power failure.
- End of SubSection 15063 -
Electrical Motors
1
Part One: General
.1
.2
2
Subsection 15064
Provide electrically driven equipment specified under this Division complete with
motors.
Nameplate rating of motor shall not be less than the input power rating of the
driven equipment at the specified operating condition and not less than the
minimum power specified or shown on the drawings. Size motors to come up to
rated speed under load within 15 seconds.
Part Two: Products
.1
.2
.3
Unless otherwise specified or required by regulating authorities, motors shall be
1750 RPM drip proof with ball bearings. Three phase motors shall be CEMA
design 'B' with class 'B' insulation, 40oC ambient and 1.15 service factor.
Unless otherwise noted, motors size .56 kw and larger shall be squirrel cage
induction motors rated 3 phase, 60 hertz and of voltage indicated. Motors up to
and including .37 kw shall be rated 115 volt, single phase, 60 hertz and shall be
factory preassembled capacitor start, induction run motors with adequate thrust
capacity for required service.
Motors 1.5kw and larger shall be of high efficiency design.
Basic Materials & Methods
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
3
Section 15050
Page 9
Part Three: Execution
Provide motors with winding and termination to accommodate specified starters.
Terminate leads in a suitable box. For type of starter provided refer to the drawing
schedules, etc. in the mechanical and electrical contract documents.
.1
-
End of SubSection 15064 –
Identification & Directories
1
Part One: General
Provide piping and valves (except where located in fire hose cabinets, radiation,
unit heaters and fixture stops or located within plain sight of equipment or
apparatus which they control) with an identifying tag, attached to valve stem or
wheel handle with a brass chain.
Submit three copies of valve charts, encased in clear plastic and bound in vinyl
covered, hard backed 200mm x 300mm ringed covers.
Submit list of legend and identification marking and background colour for review.
.1
.2
.3
2
Subsection 15068
Part Two: Products
Tags: Brass with stamped numbers filled in with black enamel, approximately
25mm diameter. Secure with brass chain.
Identification markers, flow arrows and tape to C.S.A. Standard B53, revised to
date or C.G.S.B. 24-GP-3. Background colour:
.1
.2




Lettering and arrows: Black except white for fire protection markers.
Use markers prefabricated from waterproof plastic coated cotton cloth conforming
to A.S.A. Standard A13. Markers to resist heat to 150 degree C, constant operating
temperature and 200 degree C, intermittent temperature with moisture-proof
adhesive conforming to curved surfaces.
Provide markers and lettering of the following sizes:
.3
.4
.5
.6
Red - Fire Protection Equipment
Yellow - Dangerous Materials
Blue - Protective Materials
Green - Safe Materials
Outside Diameter of Pipe or Size of Covering
Size of Letter and Marker

Uninsulated pipe 65mm dia. or less, or
insulated pipe 60mm dia. or less as
measured over the outside of insulation.
25mm high legend on
28mm wide marker.

All over the above sizes
50mm high legend on
57mm wide marker.
The identification colours are as in the following table.
Colour
Service
Yellow
Steam Condensate, Gas Piping, Domestic Hot Water,
Hot Water Heating, Steam and Unsafe Water.
Domestic Cold Water (Potable), Drainage, Vent.,
Sanitary, Storm (except acid, etc.) and Treated Water.
Fire protection
Green
Red
Basic Materials & Methods
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
3
Section 15050
Page 10
Part Three: Execution
.1
.2
.3
After pipes are painted, apply acceptable identification markers designating pipe
service and arrows showing flow direction. Secure markers to pipes with adhesive
backing tape properly overlapping. Provide markers in concealed spaces or
chases where access openings or removable ceiling tile are provided. Install
markers and arrows together as a set and locate for best visibility from floor.
Do not exceed maximum spacing of 9m measured along the pipe between
markers. Where run is concealed place markers at each access opening. Identify
pipes at least once in each room where run exposed.
This Division to paint fire and gas piping as required by applicable codes and/or
governing authorities.
- End of SubSection 15068 –
Piping Materials, Fittings & Installation
1
Part One: General
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
2
Subsection 15070
Provide all piping, fittings and accessories as specified and/or shown on the
drawings.
Piping, fittings and joints for services not listed hereinafter shall be as specified in
the Trade Sections or as recommended by the manufacturer or as required by
applicable codes and/or governing authorities.
The piping, fittings and joints shall meet the pressure-temperature rating
requirements specified under appropriate articles in the Trade Sections.
Nominal sizes of valves, pipes and fittings are specified in Metric values and shall
be converted to English system values where necessary as shown in the schedule
included in this section.
Threaded pipe joints shall conform to English system, American National
Standards. Where threaded piping is connected to equipment with Metric outlets,
provide suitable English/Metric adapters or spool pieces.
Part Two: Products
Piping Systems
.1
Above Ground Sanitary Drain, Vent Piping:
.1
Piping sizes 65mm and smaller: Type DWV to:




.2
Piping sizes 75mm and larger: Cast iron piping and fittings to:



.3
Minimum NPS 3.
CAN/CSA B70 – latest edition.
Mechanical Joints: Neoprene or butyl rubber compression gaskets to
ASTM C564-70 (latest edition), stainless steel clamps.
Plastic piping and fittings

.2
ASTM B306 – latest edition for copper tube.
ASME B16.23 – latest edition for cast copper alloy joint drainage fittings
- DWV.
ANSI B16.29 – latest edition for wrought copper fittings - DWV.
Solder: Lead-free copper alloy SXR9999.
Equal to IPEX system XFR fire rated PVC pipe and fittings.
Buried Sanitary Drain, Vent & Storm Piping within Foundation Walls
.1
Plastic piping and fittings to:
Basic Materials & Methods
ENSO Systems Inc. #852



.3
.2
Unburied: Piping and fittings shall be copper, type 'L', hard drawn, to ASTM
B88.
Fittings: Brass or bronze flanges and flanged fittings to ANSI B16.24. Brass
or bronze threaded fittings to ANSI B16.15. Cast bronze to ANSI B16.18.
Wrought copper or bronze casting conforming to ANSI B16.22. Union shall
be bronze, MSS SP72 & SP110, Solder (non-lead) or braze joints.
Equipment Drain and Overflow Piping
.1
.5
CAN/CSA B181.2 – latest edition for PVC DWV.
Joints: solvent weld for PVC to ASTM D2564 - latest edition.
Conversion from cast iron/copper (above ground) to buried PVC shall
be downstream of where cast iron/copper drain penetrates concrete
slab.
Domestic Cold, Hot and Recirculation Water Piping
.1
.4
Section 15050
Page 11
Type 'M' hard copper with wrought copper fittings.
Hot Water Heating Piping
.1
Piping size 50mm or smaller:
.1
.2
Schedule 40 steel, continuous weld or electric resistance welded black
carbon steel conforming to ASTM A53- latest edition, grade B, with
threaded end. For screwed Joints sizes 50mm and smaller use 1035
kpa malleable iron fittings.
.2 Type ‘L’ hard drawn copper tubing conforming to ASTM B88. Type ‘L’
soft annealed copper tubing may be used within convector enclosures.
Piping size 65mm or larger:
.1
.5
Schedule 40 steel, continuous weld or electric resistance welded black
carbon steel conforming to ASTM A53- latest edition, grade B, with
bevelled end. For welded joints sizes 65mm and larger use standard
weight seamless forged steel welding fittings A.S.T.M. 234. butt
welding ends.
Standpipe Piping
.1
Piping size less than 100mm:
1. Schedule 10 black steel, joined with joined by ULC listed
combination of grooved fitting, gaskets, and grooves conforming to
NFPA-13 & 14 requirements. Grooves cut or rolled on pipe shall be
dimensionally compatible with fittings.
.2
Piping size 100mm or larger:
1. Schedule 40, CSA B63, Grade A black steel, joined by welding.
3
Part Three: Execution
.1
.2
.3
Install piping without bending or forcing. Use fittings for all offsets or changes in
pipe sizes. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other. Space pipes to permit the
application of insulation.
The inside of all pipe, fitting, traps, valves and other equipment shall be clean and
free from loose mill scale, oil and dirt when erected.
Grade piping so that when systems are filled, air in mains and risers shall be
carried up and discharged at venting points. All reductions in pipe size shall be
Basic Materials & Methods
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16
.17
.18
.19
Section 15050
Page 12
made by using eccentric reducing fittings. Use long radius elbows where space
permits.
For circulating water and supply systems, take up-feed connection at 45 degree
angle from the top of mains. For down-feed systems, feed connections shall come
off bottom of main at 45 degree angle; return connections from branches and risers
shall connect into bottom return main with 45 degree fitting.
Install piping serving equipment in such a manner that the connecting pipe can be
dismantled close to the unit for easy removal of the component, e.g., all header
pipes serving coils shall be located to the side of the coil or coils and each
connection from the header to coil shall have a union so located that the unions
can be dismantled and the coil removed.
Swing or swivel joints connecting risers to mains shall use at least five (5) fittings
from main to riser including tee in main and shut-off valve.
Provide line size shut-off valves on risers connecting to supply or return mains, and
at inlet and outlet connections to individual equipment in order to permit unit
removal for repairs without interfering with remainder of system.
Provide valved drains at the bottom of all risers and at the low points of mains and
branches of water systems, and at each pump and piece of equipment which is
tapped for drainage. Provide drain valves with hose end where drain piping cannot
be carried into funnel or floor drains.
Size pipe and/or pipe sizes not shown on the Drawings in accordance with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction or as recommended by equipment
manufacturers. Pipe runs shall be subject to review.
Where pipe size specified and/or shown on the Drawings is not commercially
available, use next larger pipe.
Steel piping installed in inaccessible spaces shall be of all welded construction.
Were uninsulated piping is concealed in block walls, wrap non-combustible
insulation around pipes so as to prevent metal to block contact. Asphalt coat all
piping laid in concrete.
No pipes shall be placed so that they will be liable to freeze. Protect piping against
freezing by an acceptable method.
Provide approved type vacuum breakers as specified and shown or as required for
the proper functioning of equipment and fixtures.
Install supply piping to control valves and equipment including gate valves and
strainers therein, at line size with the reduction in size being made at the inlet and
outlet to the control valve or equipment.
Provide piping connections from pump glands, outlet of water relief valves,
overflow, etc., to floor, hub or combination funnel floor drains provided for this
purpose. Overflows from apparatus shall drip into exposed funnels so that overflow
may be seen.
Isolate piping in equipment rooms with spring isolators as recommended by the
vibration isolation manufacturer.
Line up services parallel to or at right angles to the building walls. Work shall
present a neat appearance on completion.
Slope up hot water heating piping 6mm in 3m in direction of flow. Slope down
steam and condensate piping 13mm and 18mm in 3m respectively in direction of
flow.
-
End of SubSection 15070 –
Basic Materials & Methods
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 15050
Page 13
Pipe Joints
1
Part One: General
.1
.2
2
Subsection 15071
All joints shall be made in strict accordance with applicable codes and
manufacturer's recommendations.
Mechanical joints shall be approved type as recommended by the manufacturer for
the pipe and service involved.
Part Two: Products
.1
Joint Types
.1
Joints between Dissimilar Metals
.1
.2
.3
.2
Cast Iron Piping: Hubless
.1
.3
Unless noted otherwise or required by code, joints shall be
threaded for sizes 50mm and under, welded for sizes 65mm and
over.
Standpipe and Sprinkler Piping:
.1
3
Cast iron caulking ferrule, caulked with lead into hub of cast iron
pipe and soldered to copper pipe or approved mechanical joint for
hubless piping.
Hot Water Heating Piping:
.1
.6
Solder joints: 95% tin and 5% antimony solder for water piping and
leadfree solder for drains, wastes and vents. Silver solder for all
buried copper piping joints, compressed air and refrigeration piping.
Copper to Cast Iron Piping
.1
.5
Approved mechanical joint type suitable for the service.
Copper Piping
.1
.4
Joints between ferrous and non-ferrous screwed piping and
equipment: Acceptable type insulating unions or couplings.
Joints between ferrous and non-ferrous flanged piping and
equipment: Acceptable insulating gaskets and "Teflon" sleeves and
washers between flanges, bolts and nuts.
The entire insulating joint, including the dielectric material, shall be
suitable to withstand the temperature, pressure and other operating
characteristics of the service involved.
Unless noted otherwise or required by code or governing
authorities, joints shall be mechanical (groove) coupling type for
sizes less than 100mm; welded or for 100mm and over.
Part Three: Execution
.1
All joints shall be made in strict accordance with applicable codes and
manufacturer's recommendations.
-
Pipe Unions
1
End of SubSection 15071 –
Subsection 15072
Part One: General
.1
For pressure-temperature rating requirements refer to appropriate articles in the
Trade Sections.
Basic Materials & Methods
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
2
Part Two: Products
.1
.2
.3
3
Section 15050
Page 14
In piping systems with screwed, soldered or brazed joints, use threaded ring,
ground joint type unions or material compatible with pipe.
In piping systems with flanged or welded joints use flanged type unions with
flanges and gaskets identical with those used throughout the system. English
system bolts and nuts shall be hexagonal to ASTM Standard A-307. Gaskets
material shall be suitable for the service.
For metric pipe unions and flanges, bolts and nuts shall be hexagonal to ASTM
Standard A-325M.
Part Three: Execution
.1
Provide flanged connections, unions or compression fittings on equipment side of
shut-off valves in piping connections to equipment, tanks, fixtures, etc., so that
same can be disconnected for service. Install such joints close to the equipment
being served. Install a union on each side of equipment without flanged
connections such as control valves, regulators, check valves (one side only),
pumps, etc. Where flanged valves, regulators, etc., do not permit the removal of
flange bolts, separate two such devices by a spool.
-
End of SubSection 15072 –
Pipe Couplings
1
Part One: General
.1
.2
2
Standard couplings shall be same material and strength as adjoining pipe and shall
conform to designated standards for fittings in such pipelines.
Grooved mechanical couplings shall be 'Victaulic' or approved equal suitable for
the application.
Part Two: Products
.1
3
Subsection 15073
Grooved mechanical couplings shall mechanically engage and lock the grooved
pipe ends in a positive couple and to permit some degree of angular deflection and
contraction and expansion. Coupling shall consist of malleable iron housing clamps
in two or more parts, a single C-shaped composition sealing gasket with internal
sealing lips projecting diagonally inward so that internal pressure serves to
increase the tightness of seal when installed, and two or more steel bolts as
required to assemble the housing clamps. The entire coupling assembly, materials
and method of assembly, shall be suitable for the most severe operating conditions
of the system.
Part Three: Execution
.1
.2
Install couplings in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation for
the service involved.
On sprinkler piping with "light wall" steel pipe, joints shall be made using approved
roll groove method.
- End of SubSection 15073 -
Basic Materials & Methods
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 15050
Page 15
Excavating & Backfilling
1
Part One: General
.1
Work Included
.1
.2
.2
Provide excavating and backfilling as required for the work under this
Division. Request written instructions regarding the type of soil and it's
extent.
Provide concrete backfill and pipe supporting pads required for the work
under this Division.
Related Work Not Included
.1
Paving, sodding
.1
2
Excavating and backfilling by Division 2, Site Work except for work
provided by the Mechanical Division as specified under 1.1 above.
Part Two: Products
.1
3
Subsection 15075
Not Applicable.
Part Three: Execution
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
Carry out trench excavation in strict conformity with the Construction Safety Act.
Keep excavation dry at all times.
Excavate and prepare for underground services, so that no portion of any pipe
bears directly against rock or hard surface.
Grade and shape bottoms of excavations for pipes, as required, to fit the lower
one-third segment of pipes and sockets.
Keep sides and bottoms of excavation from freezing and protect as required to
prevent damage to any part of the work by weather or other conditions.
Execute excavating, pipe laying, testing and backfilling in limited length to enable
protective and heating measures to function efficiently.
Break up rocks and boulders removed from excavation as required, to permit
handling. Remove rock encountered by drilling and wedging. Blasting will not be
permitted unless prior written instructions are obtained.
Form bottoms of trenches in earth inside building so that pipes are supported on a
solid bed of undisturbed earth. Lay pipe to relieve hubs or conduits of undue strain.
Backfill excavation required in proximity to and below footing levels with 10 MPa
concrete to the level of the top of adjacent footing. Support piping inside building
installed in unstable or filled ground as defined by jurisdictional authorities on a
reinforced 17.5 MPa concrete pad or piers. Shape concrete support to provide a
minimum bearing for the lower one-third of circumference of pipe.
Excavate bottoms of trenches outside building so that pipe can be supported on
Class 'B' bedding as defined by code. Use Class 'A' 17.5 MPa concrete bedding
where unstable or filled ground conditions exists as defined by jurisdictional
authorities. Bedding shall be as specified in the Canadian Pipe Institute.
Support outside piping passing through building foundation walls with reinforced
17.5 MPa concrete pads. Key concrete pads into the outside wall and extend in
length sufficiently to obtain a minimum bearing of .6m on undisturbed ground.
Extend and wire the reinforcing steel of the support pads to the reinforcing steel of
the outside walls, to prevent failure at the junction of the two elements.
Replace excavation carried to greater depth than shown or authorized through
negligence or error, with well compacted acceptable sand fill or concrete, at no
change to Contract Price to give a bearing value equal to that of adjacent soil.
Basic Materials & Methods
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
Section 15050
Page 16
Do not commence backfilling until written instruction to do so have been obtained.
Backfill carefully to avoid injury to work and undue subsequent settlement.
Backfill pipe trenches under building floors with sand placed in 150mm layers
compacted to 98% standard Proctor. Manually compact fill up to 450mm above
pipes.
Backfill under exterior grass or planted areas, with granular 'A' or 100mm crushed
stone compacted to 98% standard Proctor. Manually compact fill up to 450mm
above pipes.
Backfill under exterior paved or graveled areas with granular 'A' or 100mm crushed
stone compacted to 98% standard Proctor. Manually compact fill up to 450mm
above pipes.
Store materials excavated in locations as instructed and in such a manner as to
produce a minimum of damage or disfigurement of existing ground. Remove and
dispose of excess excavated materials. Leave site clear and unencumbered.
-
End of SubSection 15075 –
Air Vents
1
Part One: General
.1
2
Provide air vents as specified and/or shown on the drawings.
Part Two: Products
.1
.2
3
Subsection 15080
Manual Air Vents: Lockshield chromium plated.
Automatic Air Vents: Float type with isolating valve, cast brass or semi-steel body,
copper float, stainless steel valve and valve seat, suitable for system operating
temperature and pressure. Minimum working pressure: 860 kPa.
Part Three: Execution
.1
.2
.3
.4
Provide automatic air vents to ensure the prompt removal of air in recirculating
type water systems where shown on the Drawings, at all high points in piping
systems and wherever air pockets are formed at equipment. Locate air vents at
convenient accessible points with piped connections to nearest floor drains, janitor
sinks.
Install automatic air vents on line size 'T' fittings to effectively remove air entrained
in the fluid stream.
Provide a lockshield chromium plated air vent on each unit heater, convector and
finned tube heating element and duct mounted heating coil served by hot water
heating systems.
Provide an air bottle consisting of 150mm long 25mm diameter pipe or acceptable
alternative at each air vent connection. Extend piping as required to locate air vent
in a suitable accessible location.
-
End of SubSection 15080 –
Testing & Working Pressures
1
Subsection 15081
Part One: General
.1
General
.1
.2
.2
Conduct hydrostatic, performance, leakage and grade tests as specified
and as required by the authorities having jurisdiction.
Systems and components shall be capable of operating at the working
pressures indicated.
Related Work not Included
Basic Materials & Methods
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
.1
.2
.3
Air Balancing, Section 15600
Hydronic Balancing, Section 15600
Submittals
.1
2
Section 15050
Page 17
Submit test reports, performance curves, certificates etc.
Part Two: Products
Not Applicable.
3
Part Three: Execution
.1
General
.1
.2
.3
.2
Plumbing Systems, Natural Gas Systems and Sprinkler Systems
.1
.3
Test systems as required by code and Authorities having jurisdiction.
System and Equipment Tests
.1
.4
Provide test equipment, apparatus, gauges, meters, etc. together with
skilled personnel to perform tests and record results.
Conduct tests before application of external insulation and before any
portion of work is concealed.
Isolate equipment and device during tests when test pressure exceeds the
working pressure.
Conduct operating tests of mechanical systems and demonstrate
performance.
Hydrostatic Tests
.1
Prove the following piping systems tight under a hydrostatic test of at least
1.5 times the working pressure but not less than 1300 kpa for a period of
12 hours without pumping:

.2
.5
Hot water heating systems (including glycol solution systems)
Make correction for variations in ambient temperature between start and
finish of tests. Give welded joints a hammer test during hydrostatic testing.
System Working Pressure Rating 860 kpa (125 psi)
.1
All parts of the following systems shall be rated for the working pressure
indicated above unless noted otherwise:


.2
Domestic cold water, hot water and hot water recirculation system
Hot water heating systems (including glycol solution systems)
Unions for sizes 65mm and under shall be rated 1725 kpa.
- End of SubSection 15081 -
Valves
1
Subsection 15100
Part One: General
.1
.2
.3
.4
Provide valves as specified and/or shown on the drawings.
For pressure-temperature rating requirements refer to appropriate articles in the
trade sections.
Valves for services not listed hereinafter shall be as specified in the trade sections
or as recommended by the manufacturer or as required by applicable codes and/or
governing authorities.
Except for specialty valves, use valves of one manufacture.
Basic Materials & Methods
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
.5
.6
.7
.8
2
Section 15050
Page 18
Unless noted otherwise provide gate and globe valves with hand wheels.
Provide the Owner with two lever operators and lockshield valve keys for each size
of lever operated valve installed.
All valves shall have working pressure cast or stamped on the body.
Use ball valves in lieu of gate, angle or globe valves where commercially available
for domestic hot, cold, recirculation and hot water (glycol) heating lines 65mm and
under.
Part Two: Products
.1
Valve Ends
.1
Unless noted otherwise or required by code, valve ends shall be as follows:


.2
.2
Threaded: Sizes 50mm and smaller
Flanged: Sizes 65mm and larger
Solder ends or screwed ends with solder adapters for valves installed in
copper piping.
Valve Types
.1
Gate, Globe and Angle Valves
.1
.2
Valve design: Suitable for repacking under pressure when fully
opened, rising stem unless otherwise specified or dictated by
available space.
Gate valves for general purpose shut-off control on:
Hot or cold domestic water piping systems for sizes where
ball valves are not available.
.1

.3
Sizes 75mm & larger: O.S.& Y., iron body, bronze trim,
renewable bronze seat ring and composition disc.
Valves on steam lines shall have renewable bronze or
SS disc and seat ring.
Gate valves used on sprinkler systems shall be O.S.&Y., rising
stem, listed. Where noted and/or required by Code, valves must be
supervised type with contacts to be activated when valve is closed.
Listed butterfly valves may be used in lieu of gate/globe valves
where approved by governing authorities.
.2
Ball Valves
.3
Valve design: Full bore design with stainless steel ball and stem,
Watts series B-6081SS or approved equal.
.2
Provide valves with memory stop where used for flow control.
.3
Use ball valves where commercially available for general purpose
shut-off and flow control on hot water heating (glycol), chilled water
and domestic cold, hot water and recirculation systems.
Check Valves
.1
.1
Check valves excepting those installed in pump discharge lines and
lines with pulsating flow shall be as follows:

Sizes 65mm and smaller: Screwed, MSS-SP-80, class 125,
Bronze body, bronze swing disc, screw in cap, regrindable seat.
Basic Materials & Methods
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 15050
Page 19
.2
Check valves for lines with pulsating flow shall be lift type with
renewable composition disc to suit service, spring loaded, bronze
construction for sizes 50mm and under.
Check valves for pump discharge applications shall be silent check,
globe type, iron body, bronze trim, spring loaded with S.S. spring.
.3
.4
Balancing Valves for Domestic Hot Water Recirculation
.1
.5
Balancing Valves for Hot Water Heating Systems
.1
.6
Globe style, of non-ferrous copper alloy or bronze construction,
capable of positive shutoff, circuit drain connection, with lockable
memory and precise full measurement.
Drain Valves
.1
3
Combination type, calibrated, bronze with bronze disc, equipped
with readout valves with integral check valve, indexing position
pointer and calibrated name plate, internal EPT o ring seals and
factory moulded insulating enclosures.
Drain valves shall be globe type bronze construction with hose end.
Size shall be 20mm unless otherwise noted.
Part Three: Execution
.1
.2
.3
Install valves as per manufacturer's recommendation.
Valves used for isolation of equipment shall be installed so that system side
pressure will be exerted on the valve seat in the shutoff position.
Valves shall be line size except modulating control valves, pressure reducing
valves and safety valves which shall be sized to meet requirements specified or
shown on the drawings.
- End of SubSection 15100 -
END OF SECTION 15050
Division 15 - Mechanical
Index to 15250 – Thermal Insulation
Article Number
Description
Part 1
General
References
Work Included
Related Work Not Included
Submittals
Definitions
1
1
1
1
1
Products
General
Pipework Insulation Types
Type ‘A’
Type ‘B’
1
1
1
1
.3
Ductwork and Casing Insulation
Type ‘A’
Type ‘B’
2
2
2
.4
.5
Insulation Covering
Insulation Accessories
2
2
Execution
General
Insulation Types
Pipework Type ‘A’
Pipework Type ‘B’
Ductwork and Casing Type ‘A’
Ductwork and Casing Type ‘B’
2
3
3
3
4
4
Insulation Covering
Hangers and Insulation Shields
Hot Equipment
Application
5
5
5
6
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
Part 2
.1
.2
Part 3
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Page No.
Thermal Insulation
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
1
Part One: General
.1
References
.1
.2
.3
Acoustic duct insulation and flexible duct insulation. Refer to Air Handling
Section of this specification and the drawings for specific requirements and
extent of flexible ductwork and internal acoustic lining.
Submittals
.1
.5
Provide all labour, material, equipment and services required to complete
the insulation work of the Mechanical Division in accordance with the
specifications and/or drawings.
Related Work Not Included
.1
.4
Comply with Division 1, General Requirements and Section 15010,
General Provisions and all documents referred to therein.
Work Included
.1
Submit sample of insulating materials and a report from an approved
testing laboratory confirming fire hazard ratings if requested.
Definitions
.1
.2
2
Section 15250
Page 1
Exposed piping and exposed pipe insulation includes all piping and pipe
insulation installed in equipment rooms, service spaces and areas of
building not provided with suspension type acoustic tile, drywall or plaster
ceilings.
Exposed casings or ductwork and exposed casings or duct insulation
includes all casings and ductwork and casings and ductwork insulation
installed in equipment rooms, service spaces and areas of the building not
provided with suspension type acoustic tile, drywall or plaster ceilings.
Part Two: Products
.1
General
.1
.2
.2
Thermal insulating materials shall be non-combustible. Adhesive shall be
waterproof and flame resistant. Combustible wrappings or vapour barriers
used in conjunction with thermal insulating materials shall be treated to
reduce their combustibility so that flame spread classification of entire
assembly, as determined according to Method of Fire Hazard Classification
for Building Materials ASTM E-84-76a shall not exceed 25 and smoke
developed number shall not exceed 50.
Insulation thickness shall be as specified under the "Work Included Article"
of this Section.
Pipework Insulation Types
.1
Type 'A'
.1
.2
Preformed type mineral insulation of minimum 104 kg/m3 density
with canvas or multi service jacket having longitudinal and traverse
laps.
Type 'B'
.1
Preformed type mineral insulation of minimum 104 kg/m3 density
with factory applied vapour barrier jacket or glass fibre reinforced
Thermal Insulation
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 15250
Page 2
kraft or aluminum foil laminate having a maximum vapour
transmission rate of .03 perms.
.3
Ductwork and Casing Insulation
.1
Type 'A'
.1
.2
.3
.4
.2
Type 'B' (Ducts/plenums handling outdoor air located inside the building)
.1
.2
.3
.4
.4
Close weave fire retarding canvas of the following weights:
Exposed pipe and equipment insulation: 1.8 kg/m2.
Exposed fitting, valve body, etc., insulation: 1.8 kg/m2.
Exposed ductwork and casing insulation: 1.8 kg/m2.
Factory premoulded PVC fitting covers and jacketing approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
Insulation Accessories
.1
.2
.3
3
Exposed rectangular ductwork and casings: 50mm thick rigid
fibrous glass duct insulation of minimum 86 kg/m3. density .
Exposed round ductwork 250mm diameter and over: 50mm thick
Fiberglas FLEX-WRAP of 56 kg/m3 (3.5 lbs/ft3) or 50mm thick
preformed fibrous glass sleeving.
Concealed round ductwork: 50mm thick flexible fibrous glass duct
insulation of minimum 28 kg/m3. density.
Insulation to be supplied with factory applied vapour barrier jacket
of glass fibre reinforced kraft or aluminum foil laminate having a
maximum vapour transmission rate of .03 perms.
Insulation Covering
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.5
Exposed rectangular ductwork and casings: 25mm thick rigid
fibrous glass duct insulation of minimum 86 kg/m3 density .
Exposed round ductwork 250mm diameter and over: 25mm thick
Fiberglas FLEX-WRAP of 56 kg/m3 (3.5 lbs/ft3) or 25mm thick
preformed fibrous glass sleeving.
Concealed round ductwork: 25mm thick flexible fibrous glass duct
insulation of minimum 28 kg/m3 density.
Insulation to be supplied with factory applied vapour barrier jacket
of glass fibre reinforced kraft or aluminum foil laminate having a
maximum vapour transmission rate of .03 perms.
(14 gauge) pins with 32mm (1.25") square plated type clips.
Fibrous glass twine to local authorities approval.
Unless noted wire used to secure insulation shall be minimum 16 gauge
galvanized annealed wire.
Part Three: Execution
.1
General
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
This work shall be performed only by tradesmen experienced in insulation
work.
Install insulation material and adhesive in strict compliance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
Provide covering material which is to be finish painted by other Division, in
condition to receive the paint.
Surfaces to be insulated shall be clean and dry.
Do not apply insulation until leakage tests have been completed.
Thermal Insulation
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Install insulation in a neat workmanlike manner with smooth and even
surfaces. Locate longitudinal seams where least visible.
Keep insulation clear of all instruments, controls, dampers, components,
etc., so that it will not hinder or interfere with removal, setting, reading of, or
access to same.
Seal all welded pin penetrations of vapour barriers with a 100mm x 100mm
patch of aluminum foil tape or pressure sensitive vapour barrier tape.
Install insulation continuous through walls, floors and similar surfaces.
Do not break continuity of insulation, vapour barrier and canvas finish by
supports or rods. Remove supports and rods temporarily to facilitate
installation of insulation, vapour barrier and canvas finish where required.
Install 100mm long, 20 gauge polished aluminum pipe insulation protectors
at all points, where exposed pipe insulation terminates at floor.
Unless noted otherwise, do not insulate the following items:
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12



.13
.14
.15
.2
Section 15250
Page 3
Discharge from safety and relief valves, overflow and equipment drain
pipes.
Closed type hot water heating and chilled water expansion tanks.
Exposed chrome plated piping.
Unless otherwise noted, further insulation will not be required on ductwork
provided with internal acoustic lining. Exposed flexible ductwork insulation
shall be canvas covered by this Section.
Install incompressible insulation material of the same thickness as adjacent
ductwork insulation between casing or duct and support for externally
insulated exposed rectangular or square casings or ductwork, except for
ductwork supported by steel bands.
Ensure correct installation of plugs for pitot tube openings in externally
insulated casings and ductwork. Finish insulation flush with test plugs so
that test openings may be used without damage to insulation.
Insulation Types
.1
Pipework Insulation Type 'A'
.1
.2
.3
.2
Secure insulation with approved type staples and/or cement laps
down with adhesive.
Insulate fittings, flanged unions and valve bodies with segments of
preformed block or pipe insulation of by wrapping with strips of
fibrous glass blanket type insulation to the same thickness of the
adjoining pipe insulation. Insulation shall be held in place with wire
of fibrous glass twine. Finish insulation with a coat of cement
recovered with canvas or factory premoulded one piece PVC fitting
covers and jacketing.
Do not insulate screwed unions and piping inside air handling unit
casing.
Pipework Insulation Type 'B'
.1
.2
Overlap vapour barrier jacket at least 50mm on longitudinal joints.
Wrap butt joints with a minimum 100mm wide band of vapour
barrier jacket. Seal laps and bands with pressure sensitive, vapour
proof adhesive or vapour proof mastic applied to the complete
surface of the laps.
Insulate all fittings, screwed and flanged unions and valve bodies
with segments of preformed pipe insulation or by wrapping with
strips of fibrous glass blanket type insulation to the same thickness
Thermal Insulation
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 15250
Page 4
of the adjoining pipe insulation. Insulation shall be held in place with
wire or fibrous glass twine. Coat the insulation with vapour proof
mastic and wrap with glass fabric. Embed the glass fabric in the
mastic and seal the fabric with vapour proof mastic. Finish
insulation by applying a coat of vapour proof adhesive. Alternatively
factory premoulded one piece PVC fitting covers and jacketing may
be applied over insulation, in lieu of mastic and glass fabric. Install
the covers to provide a complete vapour seal. Insulate expansion
joints and flexible hose connectors to allow for movement and
flexing of joints.
.3
Ductwork and Casing Insulation Type 'A'
.1
.2
.3
.4
.4
Secure flexible insulation for ducts up to 0.6 meter wide to duct
surface using pressure sensitive tapes a minimum of 100mm wide
and applied with moving pressure using an appropriate sealing
tool. Outward clinch insulation with staples placed 150 mm on
center. Refer to manufacturer’s diagram for staple stitching and
butt-joint method. Closure systems should have a 25/50 F.H.C.
per UL 723. Secure with wire at 300 mm centres on runs of
ductwork and 150mm centres on fittings. Do not compress
insulation to more than 25% of specified thickness.
Adhere rigid insulation and flexible insulation for ducts and casings
over 0.6 meter wide to duct surface with insulation adhesive and
welding pins. Apply adhesive in 150mm wide strips at 450mm
maximum spacing. Locate welded pins at 450mm maximum
spacing and secure pins to duct with welding gun. Use a minimum
of two rows of fasteners per side. Pin sizes shall be as
recommended by the insulation manufacturer for the type and
thickness of insulation. Impale insulation over pins and secure with
suitable speed washers or clips. Remove protruding ends of pins.
Butt insulation tightly against standing seams or flanged joints. Seal
joints between perimeter of insulation and flange with vapour proof
mastic. Overlap longitudinal seam of the vapor retarder by a
minimum of 50 mm (or more if recommended by manufacturer).
Fill joints, seams, chipped edges, etc., on exposed ductwork and
casing insulation with a vapour barrier bedding compound or mastic
to leave a smooth and even surface. Provide 50mm x 50mm x
0.4mm protective aluminum corners secured with tape until canvas
covered.
Ductwork and Casing Insulation Type 'B'
.1
Apply insulation as specified for Type 'A' insulation except as
follows:
 At standing seams and flanged joints, cover the projecting
portion of the seam or flange with 75mm wide strips of the duct
insulation grooved to accommodate seam or flange and
provide a minimum of 12mm cover over the perimeter edges of
seam or flange. Adhere strips to insulation on duct with
adhesive. Over all coverings, strips at standing seams and
flanges, apply a layer of vapour-proof mastic, embed an open
mesh glass fabric, 20 x 20 in the mastic and apply a second
coat of mastic over the insulation on the duct or casing for a
minimum 50 mm.
Thermal Insulation
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
.3
Insulation Covering
Unless noted cover exposed pipe and equipment insulation and exposed
ductwork and casing insulation with canvas. PVC jacketing may be used
for piping in mechanical rooms. Adhere canvas to insulation surfaces with
full coating of lagging adhesive. Finish and seal canvas with a full brush
coat of lagging adhesive. Install canvas over any vapour barrier jacket or
coating specified. Where insulation is butted against standing seams or
flanged joints, canvas cover the projecting leg of the seam or joint by
placing a strip of canvas tight around the projecting seam or joint extending
75mm on each side. Lapp all seams at least 50 mm.
.1
.4
Section 15250
Page 5
Hangers and Insulation Shields
Insulate and vapour seal hangers directly supporting insulated piping as
part of adjoining pipe for the following services:
.1
Domestic Cold Water and Rain Water piping
.1
.2
.3
.5
Insulate hanger rods to length of 4 times the pipe insulation
thickness.
Use curved metal insulation shields wherever pipe is supported by
hanger of type which cannot effectively be insulated to prevent
condensation, eg. roller hangers.
Insulation shields shall consist of segment high density insulation
and 12 gauge galvanized sheet steel protective shield complete
with vapour barrier, designed to suit adjacent insulation thickness
and pipe weight.
Hot Equipment
Insulate hot equipment with fibrous glass metal mesh blanket. Hold metal
mesh blankets in place with 20mm metal bands on maximum 300mm
centres. Lace metal edges butting together with wire. On large flat or
irregular surfaces, impale metal mesh blankets over suitable welded
fasteners on maximum 300mm centres. Alternatively hot equipment may
be insulated with calcium silicate insulation blocks applied and secured as
specified above.
Finish the insulation with two coats of asbestos free cement, 6mm thick
troweled smooth. Cover insulation with canvas.
Insulation thickness shall be as follows:
.1
.2
.3



Equipment Temperature
Insulation Thickness
up to 95oC
96 oC to 150oC
150oC and over
25 mm
40 mm
50 mm
Insulation shall have maximum 'K' value of 0.068 W/M/oC at 150oC mean
temperature.
Hot equipment shall include all equipment as specified under the
"Application Article" of this Section.
Do not insulate the following:
.4
.5
.6

Inspection and manholes on tanks and equipment, chemical by-pass
feeders, flanges on strainers and suction guides requiring removal for
access to strainer.
Thermal Insulation
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
.6
Section 15250
Page 6
Application
.1
Domestic Cold Water Piping
.1
.2
.2
Sanitary Drain Piping
.1
.2
.3
.3
Insulate as specified. Equipment includes the following:
Equipment, pipes, etc., exposed to human contact having surface
temperatures exceeding 70oC.
Bodies of strainers installed in piping systems and/or services to be
insulated with type 'A' pipework insulation.
Hot Water Heating Piping
.1
.2
.6
Insulate with Type 'A' pipework insulation.
Insulation thickness: 25 mm for pipe size 25mm or larger; 12mm for
pipe size 20mm or smaller.
Hot Equipment
.1
.2
.5
Insulate all concealed and exposed drain piping including fittings
receiving flow from water closets, urinals, condensate from cooling
coils, etc. up to the main vertical drain stacks and including the
vertical portion of the stack fittings forming the first bend of
horizontal take-offs with Type “B’' pipework insulation.
Insulation thickness: 50mm in ventilated crawl space and 25mm in
rest of space.
Hot Water and Hot Water Recirculating Piping Systems
.1
.2
.4
Insulate with Type 'B' pipework insulation.
Insulation thickness: 25mm.
Insulate with Type 'A' pipework insulation.
Insulation thickness: Branch run-outs up to 25mm: 12 mm. All other
piping and sizes 25 mm.
Ductwork Insulation
.1
.2
Insulate all concealed supply air ducts with type A ductwork
insulation. Refer to architectural drawings for reflected ceiling
plans.
Exhaust Air Duct/Plenum
.1
END OF SECTION 15250
Insulate exhaust air duct serving washroom exhaust fans
from exterior wall by minimum 3m with type ‘B’ ductwork
insulation.
Division 15 - Mechanical
Index to 15300 – Fire Protection Systems
Article Number
Description
15301
15303
15304
General
Fire Hose & Standpipe Systems
Portable Fire Extinguishers
Page No.
1
1
2
Fire Protection Systems
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 15300
Page 1
General
1
Sub-Section 15301
Part One: General
.1
References
.1
.2
.2
Work Included
.1
.3
Comply with Division 1, General Requirements and all documents referred
to therein.
Comply with Section 15010, General Provisions and Section 15050, Basic
Materials and Methods.
Provide all labour, material, equipment and services required to complete
the fire protection work of the Mechanical Division in accordance with the
specifications and/or drawings.
Submittals
.1
Submit shop drawings for the following:


Fire hose cabinet, and
Fire extinguishers.
- End of SubSection 15301 -
Fire Hose & Standpipe Systems
1
Part One: General
.1
Work Included
.1
.2
.2
Fire hose and standpipe systems as shown and specified.
Provide portable fire extinguishers in cabinet.
References
.1
Standards
.1
Comply with the following Standards for materials and performance
of work:
.1
.3
Standpipe System: NFPA No. 14 - Standpipe and Hose
Systems.
Design
.1
.2
.3
2
Subsection 15303
The drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping and design
criteria.
Ensure that pipes are adequately sized so that a fire pump is not
necessary.
Successful tenderer will be required to produce shop drawings complete
with all necessary hydraulic pipe sizing and system design calculations
where required by the local authorities. Submit these drawings and
calculation as specified. System design and calculation procedures shall be
in accordance with the requirements of governing codes and authorities.
The design and drawings must be certified by a Professional Engineer.
Part Two: Products
.1
Piping and Fittings
.1
Refer to Section 15050-Basic Materials and Methods, Subsection 15070.
Fire Protection Systems
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
.2
Fire Hose Cabinets
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Fully recessed Cabinet: 750 x 750 x 200 (30" x 30" x 8") deep, for two
valves, the hose and 2.27kg fire extinguisher.18gauge baked white enamel
corrosion protected steel tubs. Full 14 gauge stainless steel door (no glass)
and door latch. Front section to have 51mm adjustment to wall surface and
complete with 13mm turn back frame. Provide sign with lettering “FIRE
HOSE & FIRE EXTINGUISHER” as required by governing authorities.
Surface mounted Cabinet: 750 x 750 x 200 (30" x 30" x 8") deep, similar to
recessed cabinet except without trim or adjustment to the cabinet. Frame
section can be adjusted for left and right door swing. All edges are ground
and round for safety. Finish: Exterior parts of steel cabinet prime coat
painted, interior cabinet surfaces two coats of alkyd enamel to Architect's
approval.
Standpipe valves, hoses, and accessories:
1. ULC listed semi-automatic hose rack, chromed moving parts, positive
water stop, as manufactured by Wilson and Cousins model IE-75 CP
or National Fire Protection model HR.
2. 65mm adjustable pressure restricting angle valve, chrome plated finish,
as manufactured by Wilson and Cousins model IE-25-PRV or National
Fire Protection model A-156.
3. 40mm adjustable pressure restricting angle valve, chrome plated finish,
as manufactured by Wilson and Cousins model IE-25-PRV or National
Fire Protection model A-156.
4. 40mm all purpose single jacket hose, 23m length, abrasion resistant
polyester filament jacket with polyurethane lining as manufactured by
National Fire Protection model paragon
5. 40mm polished chrome adjustable fog and straight stream hose nozzle
with bumper, as manufactured by Wilson and Cousins model HN206Tor National Fire Protection model A-7.
Chrome plate exposed parts (valves, couplings, hose rack, etc.) Fire hose
cabinets, hose racks, hose and fittings provided under this Division shall be
by one supplier.
Provide fire extinguisher in fire hose cabinet.
The following identification symbols indicate specific requirements for fire
hose cabinets:
.1
.2
.3
3
Section 15300
Page 2
FHC: Surface or recessed (refer to drawings) mounted type with
40mm/65mm valves and hose rack assembly to building standard.
Provide pressure gauge with 690 kpa scale at high point of each
standpipe.
Provide owner with one set of hose wrenches.
Part Three: Execution
.1
.2
.3
As construction progresses, install and maintain fire standpipes and hose as
required by local Fire Department. Notify the local Fire Department whenever the
water service in the fire standpipe system is interrupted during construction.
Provide pressure gauge with 690 kpa scale at high point of each standpipe.
Submit sealed final review letter from design Engineer certifying that all work has
been designed and installed in accordance with the OBC, NFPA 14 and the design
documents upon completion of work.
- End of SubSection 15303 -
Fire Protection Systems
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 15300
Page 3
Portable Fire Extinguishers
1
Subsection 15304
Part One: General
.1
Work Included
.1
Supply and installation of portable fire extinguishers as follows:
.1
.2
Where shown on the drawings.
References
.1
Comply with the following Standards for materials and performance of
work:
.1
2
Part Two: Products
.1
.2
.3
.4
Where indicated on the drawings, mount extinguishers in fully recessed
cabinets.
Recessed cabinet: Tub 18 gauge steel construction with black enamel
interior. Front to be adjustable with black enamel trim and 18 gauge 304
stainless steel door, as manufactured by Wilson and Cousins model IE-100
National Fire Protection model CTE-300.
Extinguishers shall be approved water pressurized pump tank type and/or
chemical type as required by governing authorities.
The following identification symbols indicate specific requirements for
portable fire extinguishers:
.1
.2
.3
3
NFPA No. 10 - Portable Fire Extinguishers.
FE: Indicates extinguisher shall be mounted on an acceptable wall
bracket.
FEC: Indicates extinguisher shall be mounted in an acceptable
recessed cabinet.
Type FE: Dry Chemical Type, capacity 2.27 kg with an ‘5A10BC’
ULC rating as noted in the drawing legend complete with discharge
hose. Standard of acceptance: National Fire Protection model
Diamond or equal Wilson and Cousins.
Part Three: Execution
.1
Install extinguishers as per code.
- End of SubSection 15304 -
END OF SECTION 15300
Division 15 - Mechanical
Section No. Description
15400
15402
15403
15405
15407
15408
15411
General
Cleanouts
Trap & Trap Seal Primers
Floor Drains
Water, Sanitary & Storm Drainage Systems
Domestic Cold & Hot Water Heating Systems
Plumbing Fixtures
Index to 15400 – Plumbing & Drainage
Page No.
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
Plumbing & Drainage
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 15400
Page 1
General
1
Subsection 15400
Part One: General
.1
References
.1
.2
.2
Work Included
.1
.3
Provide all labour, material, equipment and services required to complete
the plumbing and drainage work of the Mechanical Division in accordance
with the specifications and/or drawings.
Related Work Not Included
.1
.4
Comply with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and
requirements of Division 1.
Comply with Section 15010, General Provisions and Section 15050, Basic
Materials and Methods.
Washroom accessories by other Division.
Submittals
.1
Submit shop drawings for the following:


Plumbing fixtures and trim
Plumbing specialties
-
End of SubSection 15400 –
Cleanouts
1
Part One: General
.1
2
Provide cleanouts at the ends of all straight runs of sewers, at the end of all
branches, at the base of all risers, on exposed or accessible traps, on straight
horizontal runs 15m apart, and at all points of the system where so indicated,
required by code or necessary to remove obstructions.
Part Two: Products
.1
.2
3
Subsection 15402
Stack Cleanouts in base of cast iron stacks shall be cast iron body with approved
gasketed screwed cover.
Line cleanouts in cast iron pipe shall be with approved gasketed cover screwed to
body. Line cleanouts in copper pipes shall be cast bronze tube with wedge type
gasket and bronze plug secured to body by bronze cap screws.
Part Three: Execution
.1
.2
.3
Make cleanouts accessible. Where shown on drawings, extend the branch
connections to surface of floors, walls or partitions.
Provide cleanouts concealed behind and/or located in finished surfaces of
partitions and walls with chromium plated cast brass covers secured to plugs.
Where cleanouts are concealed behind tiled walls or partitions provide round
stainless steel plates with slotted flat head screws or access panels for access.
Provide cleanouts located in waterproofed areas with flashing clamp devices.
- End of SubSection 15402 -
Plumbing & Drainage
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 15400
Page 2
Traps and Trap Seal Primers
1
Part One: General
.1
2
Provide traps for all fixtures, drains and equipment requiring connections to the
drainage system.
Part Two: Products
.1
Trap seal primers shall be activated as follows:


.2
3
Subsection 15403
By flushing of fixtures in conjunction with trap seal primer valves.
By automatic flushing devices of singular or multiple design.
Trap priming equipment: Precision Plumbing system, model P-1 and/or P-2, trap
priming piping: 12mm copper tube, ASTM B88, type L, hard drawn.
Part Three: Execution
.1
.2
Prime and vent traps in accordance with applicable codes and regulations.
Provide all necessary piping required in conjunction with trap seal priming devices.
-
End of SubSection 15403 –
Floor Drains
1
Part One: General
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
2
Subsection 15405
Provide drains as specified and/or shown on the drawings.
Size of drains is determined by the branch size indicated.
Provide drains installed in roofs, waterproofed floors or shower pans with clamping
devices. Refer to architectural and structural Contract Documents for specific
requirements.
Drains shall have interchangeable body collars and strainers.
Provide drains with extension collars, expansion joints and bearing pans as
required for the application.
Part Two: Products
.1
Definitions
.1
.2
Suffix 'B' indicates floor drain with sediment bucket. e.g. FD1B denotes:
Floor drain type FD1 with sediment bucket.
Floor Drain Types
.1
Type FD1 (Finished Areas Conventional Floor Drains)
.1
3
Lacquered cast iron body construction complete with seepage
flange, reversible clamping device, and body collar combination
with weep holes and adjustable medium duty 125mm dia. nickel
bronze strainer.
Part Three: Execution
.1
Install drains as per manufacturers recommendations.
-End of SubSection 15405 –
Water, Sanitary & Storm Drainage Systems
1
Part One: General
.1
Work Included
.1
As shown and specified.
Subsection 15407
Plumbing & Drainage
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
.2
Related Work not Included
.1
2
Weeping tile drains will be provided by other Division.
Part Two: Products
.1
3
Section 15400
Page 3
Refer to Section 15050-Basic Materials and Methods, Subsection 15070.
Part Three: Execution
.1
General
.1
.2
Verification of Inverts
.1
.2
.3
.3
Offset all vent piping at ceiling level below roofs, so that piping will
penetrate roofs a minimum 1.0m from outside wall, parapets, etc.
Immediately upon award of contracts, verify the location and inverts of
existing and new underground services affecting this project.
Submit a report of serious discrepancies before proceeding with installation
of the services.
Avoid disturbing or damaging existing underground services. Be
responsible for and make good any such damage, without charge to the
Contract Price.
Connections to Equipment and Fixtures
.1
.2
Unless otherwise noted, connect equipment, fixtures, etc., provided by this
or other Division or the Owner to appropriate services.
Provide hot and cold water, waste and vent connections required in
mechanical equipment rooms.
- End of SubSection 15407 -
Domestic Cold & Hot Water Heating Systems
1
Part One: General
.1
2
Provide cold and hot water heating systems as shown and specified.
Part Two: Products
.1
3
Subsection 15408
Refer to Section 15050-Basic Materials and Methods, Subsection 15070.
Part Three: Execution
.1
.2
.3
Provide check valve for each hot and cold water supply where hot and cold water
lines connect to combination supply fitting with a shut-off valve on its discharge or
where the combination supply fitting is equipped with a manual or thermostatic
mixing valve.
Install ball valves with memory stops in domestic hot water recirculation lines for
balancing.
Valves on branch piping from mains and risers serving plumbing fixtures shall be
ball type.
- End of Section 15408 -
Plumbing Fixtures
1
Subsection 15411
Part One: General
.1
.2
Provide fixtures as shown and specified.
Provide accessories, supplies, frames and supports as recommended by the
manufacturer for installation of fixtures.
Plumbing & Drainage
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
.3
.4
2
Section 15400
Page 4
Fixtures shall be new and free from flaws or blemishes. Finished surfaces shall be
clear, smooth and bright and guaranteed not to craze, discolour or scale.
Unless noted, visible parts of fixture trim, including faucets, escutcheons, strainers,
traps, supplies, stops, etc., shall be chrome plated.
Part Two: Products
Fixtures
.1
Drawing Symbol W1 (Wall Mounted WC, Exposed Flush Valve)
.1
.2
.3
.4
.2
Drawing Symbol W2 (Floor Mounted WC, Exposed Flush Valve)
.1
.2
.3
.3
Closet: Toto CT708E, 17.5’’ high, vitreous china, wall hung, 6Lpf, high
efficiency, powerful direct-fed siphon jet closet bowl with elongated rim,
and 40mm (1 1/2") top spud.
Seat: Toto #SC534 elongated heavy duty solid white plastic open front
toilet seat less cover with check hinges and stainless steel posts, washers
and nuts.
Flush Valve: "Sloan” Royal model 111-YO quiet, 6Lpf, exposed,
diaphragm type, chrome plate closet flush valve complete with following
features: van dal Resistant stop cap, adjustable tailpiece, 25mm (1") I.P.S
screwdriver Bak-Chek angle stop, spud coupling and spud flange for
49mm top spud, seat solder adapter with cover tube and cast wall flange,
high copper, low zinc brass casting for dezincification resistance , nonhold-open handle and no external volume adjustment to ensure water
conservation, handle packing, stop seat and vacuum breaker molded
form PERMEXTM rubber compound for chloramine resistance.
Carrier to suit.
Closet: Toto CT705ELN, 17.5’’ high, vitreous china, floor mounted, 6Lpf,
high efficiency, siphon jet flushing, elongated front bowl, and 40mm (1
1/2") top spud.
Seat: Toto #SC534 elongated heavy duty solid white plastic open front
toilet seat with cover with check hinges and stainless steel posts, washers
and nuts.
Flush Valve: "Sloan” Royal model 111-YO quiet, 6Lpf, exposed,
diaphragm type, chrome plate closet flush valve complete with following
features: vandal Resistant stop cap, adjustable tailpiece, 25mm (1") I.P.S
screwdriver Bak-Chek angle stop, spud coupling and spud flange for
49mm top spud, seat solder adapter with cover tube and cast wall flange,
high copper, low zinc brass casting for dezincification resistance , nonhold-open handle and no external volume adjustment to ensure water
conservation, handle packing, stop seat and vacuum breaker molded
form PERMEXTM rubber compound for chloramine resistance.
Drawing Symbol W3 (Floor Mounted WC, Tank type)
Closet: Toto CST744SDB, 14.5’’ high, vitreous china, floor mounted, 6Lpf,
high efficiency, powerful G-Max flushing system, bowl with elongated rim,
insulated tank, bolt down lid, and SanaGloss ceramic glaze.
.2
Seat: Toto #SC534 elongated heavy duty solid white plastic open front
toilet seat less cover with check hinges and stainless steel posts, washers
and nuts.
Drawing Symbol U1 (Wall Mounted Urinal)
.1
.4
.1
American Standard, WashbrookTM FloWiseTM 0.5 high efficiency urinal,
Vitreous china, flushing rim, elongated 14’’ rim from finished wall,
Plumbing & Drainage
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
.2
.3
.5
extended sides for privacy, washout flush action with ¾’’ (20mm) top spud
inlet, stainless steel strainer.
Flush Valve: "Sloan” model 186-0.5, low consumption, 1.9LPF (0.5 GPF)
exposed, diaphragm type, chrome plate urinal flush valve complete with
following features: free spinning vandal Resistant stop cap, adjustable
tailpiece, spud coupling and spud flange for ¾’’mm top spud, seat solder
adapter with cover tube and cast wall flange, high copper, low zinc brass
casting for dezincification resistance, non-hold-open handle and no
external volume adjustment to ensure water conservation, flush accuracy
controlled by CID technology, diaphragm, handle packing, stop seat and
vacuum breaker molded form PERMEXTM rubber compound for
chloramine resistance.
Carrier to suit.
Drawing Symbol L1 (Lavatory, Wall Mounted, Vitreous China, Barrier Free)
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.6
Section 15400
Page 5
Lavatory: American Standard, Murro wall-hung lavatory, 0958.000,
(203mm) centres, 21.25" x 22" (559 x 540mm) vitreous china basin, rear
overflow, faucet ledge, barrier-free complete with 0059.020 semi-china
pedestal to cover exposed piping.
Carrier: Jay R Smith 0700-Z-M to suit concealed arms support application.
Faucet: American Standard faucet, Monterrey, 6530.170.002, C.P. 8’’
(203mm) C.C., cast brass lead-free body, washerless, ¼ turn ceramic dripfree disc valve brass cartridges, 10-5/8’’(270mm) high x 5’’ (127mm) reach
rigid gooseneck spout with tamper-resistant 5.7LPM (1.5 gpm) flow aerator
outlet and V.R. red and blue indexed cast brass 4’’ (102mm) blade
handles.
Waste: McGuire 155A Basin drain, chrome plated cast brass, one piece
open grid strainer with 17ga. With 32mm tailpiece.
Supply: McGuire H165LKN3RB chrome plated rigid brass horizontal
supplies with angle stops and stainless steel braided flexible risers.
Trap: McGuire 8872C, 40 mm cast brass chrome plated offset adjustable
‘P’ trap with cleanout.
Drawing Symbol S1 (Stainless Steel, Single Bowl, Drop-in Sink for Teacher)
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
Sink: Kindred model LBS6808, 20cm deep, single compartment self
rimming drop-in sink with faucet ledge, 20 gauge type 302 18-8 stainless
steel, undercoated, waste fitting, factory applied rim seal, cutout template,
and universal installation system hardware. Centre back waste location,
includes 89mm crumb cup strainer with 38mm brass tail piece. Cut hole to
suit faucet installation, refer to architectural drawing for exact location (side
mount or back mount faucet).
Faucet: American Standard, Heritage model 6830.372H.002, 5’’ (127mm)
reach swing gooseneck spout with 5.7LPM(1.5GPM) flow pressure
compensating aerator outlet and red and blue indexed cast brass 4’’
(102mm) blade handles, vandal resistant, 8’’ (203mm) centres, durable
cast brass lead-free construction, ¼ turn washerless ceramic disc valve
cartridges, all operating parts must be replaceable from above the deck,
threaded male inlet shank.
Mixing valve: Powers model Hydroguard 141-650 on hot water supply.
Supply: McGuire H165N5 rigid polished brass horizontal supplies with
wheel handle angle stops and flexible copper risers.
Trap: McGuire 8912CB 40 mm polished cast brass ‘P’ trap with cleanout.
Plumbing & Drainage
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
.7
Drawing Symbol S2 (Stainless Steel, Single Bowl, Drop-in Sink for Children)
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.8
Sink: Bradley floor mounted SentryTM Semi-Circular Shallow Bowl
Washfountain, modle SN2004, hand control activated metering air valve,
54’’ bowl size, vandal resistant and easy to clean. All exposed materials are
type 304 stainless steel polished to #4 finish. Bowl, pedestal and access
panels, frame, support tube, and sprayhead are heavy gauge stainless
steel. Exposed fittings are chrome plated. Completes with navigator
thermostatic mixing valve, flexible stainless steel supply hoses and ½’’
compression female stops. Each pushbutton pneumatically actuates nonhold-open, air metering, single-temperature valve with field adjustable
timing form 0-45 seconds (factory preset at 10 seconds). Cast brass ‘P’
trap with cleanout.
Drawing Symbol DF1 (Wall mounted, Exposed, Drinking Fountain, Barrier Free)
.1
.2
.3
.4
3
Sink: Kindred model LBS6808, 20cm deep, single compartment self
rimming drop-in sink with faucet ledge, 20 gauge type 302 18-8 stainless
steel, undercoated, waste fitting, factory applied rim seal, cutout template,
and universal installation system hardware. Centre back waste location,
includes 89mm crumb cup strainer with 38mm brass tail piece. Cut hole to
suit faucet installation, refer to architectural drawing for exact location (side
mount or back mount faucet).
Faucet: American Standard, Heritage model 6830.372H.002, 5’’ (127mm)
reach rigid gooseneck spout with 5.7LPM(1.5GPM) flow pressure
compensating aerator outlet and red and blue indexed cast brass 4’’
(102mm) blade handles, vandal resistant, 8’’ (203mm) centres, durable
cast brass lead-free construction, ¼ turn washerless ceramic disc valve
cartridges, all operating parts must be replaceable from above the deck,
threaded male inlet shank.
Mixing valve: Powers model Hydroguard 141-650 on hot water supply.
Supply: McGuire H165N5 rigid polished brass horizontal supplies with
wheel handle angle stops and flexible copper risers.
Trap: McGuire 8912CB 40 mm polished cast brass ‘P’ trap with cleanout.
Drawing Symbol WF1 (Semi-Circular Shallow Bowl Washfountain)
.1
.9
Section 15400
Page 6
Haws model 1109, wall hung, lead-free, stainless steel, 18 gauge with #4
satin finish, round front, forged brass bubbler head, self-closing button,
automatic volume regulator, 250 micron in-line filter, vandal-resistant
open grid strainer, tailpiece, complete with Haws 6700 concealed
mounting plate furnished with all thread studs, nuts and washers.
Carrier: Jay R Smith 0824 fountain carrier (4’’ wall space required).
Supply: McGuire JST11BV chrome plated polished brass straight turn
brass ball valve stop with VP loose key handle.
Drain: McGuire 8872C-17T chrome plated p-trap brash adjustable body
and escutcheon. Connect fountain drain to hub drain mounted below
millwork.
Part Three: Execution
.1
.2
Refer to architectural drawings for location of fixtures.
Unless otherwise noted or required by code provide the following service
connections:
.1
Water Closets (Flush Valve Type)
.1
Waste: 75 mm; Vent: 40 mm; Cold Water: 25 mm
Plumbing & Drainage
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
.2
Water Closets (Tank Type)
.1
.3
Waste: 50 mm; Vent: 40 mm; Cold Water: 20 mm
Lavatories/Sinks/Washfountains
.1
.5
Waste: 75 mm; Vent: 40 mm; Cold Water: 12 mm
Urinal
.1
.4
Section 15400
Page 7
Waste: 40 mm; Vent: 32 mm; Hot & Cold Water: 12mm
Wall Hydrant
.1
Hot & Cold Water: 12mm
- End of SubSection 15411 -
END OF SECTION 15400
Division 15 - Mechanical
Index to 15600 – Heating, Ventilating & Air-Conditioning
Section No. Description
15600
15601
15602
15603
15605
15607
15608
15609
15610
15612
15651
15652
15655
15656
General
Ductwork
Ductwork Access Panels
Dampers
Flexible Ductwork
Acoustic Duct Lining
Fans
Grilles, Registers, Diffusers & Accessories
Testing & Balancing
Duct Leakage
Convectors and Finned Tube Units
Cabinet Unit heaters
Water Treatment
Cleaning & Flushing
Page No.
1
1
3
4
5
6
6
7
9
11
12
13
14
14
H.V.A.C.
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 15600
Page 1
General
1
Subsection 15600
Part One: General
.1
References
.1
.2
.2
Work Included
.1
.3
Comply with Division 1, General Requirements and all documents referred
to therein.
Comply with Section 15010, General Provisions and Section 15050, Basic
Materials and Methods.
Provide all labour, material, equipment and services required to complete
the heating, ventilating and air conditioning work of the Mechanical Division
in accordance with the specifications and/or drawings.
Submittals
.1
.2
Refer to article 15 Section 15010
Submit shop drawings for the following:
.1
.2
.3
Grilles, Diffusers and Registers including a room schedule showing
ceiling type, grille and diffuser quantities, size, type, accessories
and finish of grilles and diffusers for each room.
Fans, with fan curves showing air flow plotted against static
pressure, and efficiency, marked with selection points. Sound
Power levels in decibles reference 10-12 watts, measured in the
nine octave bands between 31 and 8,000 Hertz, for the selection
points.
Convectors and wall fin units
-
Ductwork
1
End of SubSection 15600 –
Subsection 15601
Part One: General
.1
General
.1
.2
Ductwork sizes shown on the drawings are expressed in millimeters,
unless shown otherwise.
References
.1
Standards
.1
Comply with the following Standards for materials and performance
of work where those described are not at variance with the
requirements of Authorities having jurisdiction or do not conflict with
those on the drawings and/or specified in this Section:
.1
.2
ASHRAE Guide and Data Book: Ductwork fabrication and
supporting methods.
SMACNA Duct Manual and Sheet Metal Construction for
Ventilating and Air Conditioning Systems, Section 1 - Low
Velocity Systems.
H.V.A.C.
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
.3
Definitions
.1
Low Velocity, Low Pressure Ductwork
.1
2
Section 15600
Page 2
Low velocity, low pressure ductwork shall be classified as ductwork
with mean velocities less velocities less than 10.2 m/s and static
pressure 50mm water gauge or less.
Part Two: Products
.1
Sealants and Tapes
.1
.2
Turning Vanes
.1
.3
Use turning vanes of double wall construction with correct air foil pattern,
fabricated by an acceptable manufacturer. Fabricate vanes of same gauge
metal as elbows and install in vane rails.
Instrument Test Holes
.1
.4
Use water resistant duct sealants (sealers) and duct tape compatible with
mating materials, meeting ULC-S109 flame resistance requirements. Clean
and treat all surfaces in accordance with sealant manufacturer's
recommendations prior to application.
Factory fabricated, air tight, non-corroding instrument test holes with screw
caps and gaskets. In insulated surfaces, raise caps up through insulation.
Ductwork Types
.1
Low Velocity, Low Pressure Ductwork
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Fabricate rectangular, square and round ductwork of prime quality
G-90 galvanized sheet steel with designation Z275 Metric coating
and meeting ASTM Specifications.
Rivets, screws, and other fasteners shall be of same material as
ductwork, except that zinc or cadmium plated fasteners may be
used with galvanized sheets.
Caulk joints and corner of joints on supply ductwork with duct sealer
to ensure air tightness.
Unless otherwise noted, construct round ducts of either helically
wound galvanized steel strips with spiral lock seam or flat
galvanized steel sheet with longitudinal seams locked to ensure air
tightness.
Design elbows and bends for rectangular ducts for easy air flow
with a centre radius not less that 1.5 times width of the duct. Where
space requirements do not permit the use of specified elbows and
wherever shown of the drawings use turning vanes or turning radii.
Ninety degree elbows for round ductwork shall be smooth elbows or
five piece construction. Mitered elbows with approved turning vanes
may be used in locations where clearance restriction do not permit
the use of specified elbows. Forty-five degree elbows for round
ductwork shall be smooth elbows or of three piece construction.
Join spiral duct sections and fittings with a coupling sleeve joint to
permit a sliding fit with overlap not less than 100mm . Insert sheet
metal screws in joints at 300mm centres around perimeter with less
than three screw per joint. Seal all joints with duct sealer. Clean
surface of overlap or flanges and apply duct sealing compound
H.V.A.C.
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
.7
3
Section 15600
Page 3
before sections are jointed. Hammer down all edges and slips so as
to leave smooth finished surfaces inside duct.
Provide round duct sections with longitudinal seams and fittings
with a plain end and a belled end to permit a sliding fit with overlap
not less than 100mm and lap in direction of flow. Insert sheet metal
screws in joints at 300mm centre around perimeter with not less
than three screws per joint. Seal all joints with duct sealer.
Alternatively ducts may be jointed by flanged joints. Clean surface
of overlap or flanges and apply duct sealing compound before
sections are jointed. Hammer down all edges and slips so as to
leave smooth finished surfaces inside ducts.
Part Three: Execution
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
Do not fabricate ductwork without confirmation that diffuser, register and grille
locations are in accordance with architectural reflected ceiling plans. It shall be this
Section's responsibility to request and obtain all appropriate detail drawings before
fabrication. Adjustment of ductwork required due to non-compliance with the above
shall be made by this Section at no change to the Contract Price.
Make changes to duct sizes to accommodate structural conditions or other Trade's
work at no change to Contract Price. In all cases, equivalent cross sectional areas
must be maintained. Ductwork shall not be fabricated until work has been site
measured.
Duct transitions shall be gradual with a maximum slope of 1mm in 4mm for low
velocity and 1mm in 7mm for medium and high velocity ductwork. Limit duct
transitions on the upstream side of equipment to 30 degrees and on the leaving
side of equipment to 45 degrees.
Braze and stiffen all ducts so that they will not rattle, vibrate, sag or buckle. Ducts
shall be self-supporting and complete in themselves. Single thickness partitions
between ducts will be accepted only where specifically noted on the drawings.
Vertical ducts passing through floors, shall be supported on angles secured to duct
and bearing on the floor.
Unless specified or shown otherwise, make branch duct take-offs and tee
connections in accordance with ASHRAE or SMACNA standards.
Paint visible internal portions of ductwork at grilles, registers and diffusers dull
black.
Weather proof all ductwork including access panels and flexible duct connections
located outdoors.
Seal all joints and seams in outdoor air intake ducts and/or plenums watertight.
Provide suitable drain connection(s) at low points. Slope ductwork and/or plenum
towards drain connections.
Provide test holes where specified and wherever required to facilitate testing and
balancing systems.
Take all necessary precautions during installation to avoid foreign matter being
deposited accidentally or otherwise in the ducts and remove all such objects.
- End of SubSection 15601 –
Ductwork Access Panels
1
Subsection 15602
Part One: General
.1
Provide access panels as specified and/or shown on the drawings and
where required for periodic servicing of equipment, control elements, etc.
H.V.A.C.
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
2
Part Two: Products
Duct Mounted Access Panels
.1
.1
.2
3
Section 15600
Page 4
Fabricate panels of galvanized steel sheet of metal gauge suitable for the
application and size of panels. Hinge panels larger than 460mm x 460mm
to galvanized steel mounting frame and provide sash locks to give tight
closure on neoprene gasket. Secure gasket material to frame. All hardware
shall be of corrosion resistant material including attaching bolts. Bolted and
screwed panels will not be accepted unless specifically called for.
Access panels in thermally insulated ducts shall be double panel
construction with insulation as specified for adjacent ducts sandwiched
between the panels. Mount panels on a galvanized steel collar overlapping
and flush with face of externally applied insulation or acoustic internal
insulating lining where applicable.
Part Three: Execution
Access panels shall be maximum size possible in ducts up to and including
430mm in width of height. In ducts and plenums 460mm and larger, size of access
panel shall be at least 300mm x 400mm or larger if required for easy access. Sizes
of access panels specified or shown on the drawings shall be minimum sizes.
Provide access panels at the following equipment and items whether shown on the
drawings or not:
.1
.2






Motorized dampers.
Upstream of duct and plenum mounted cooling and heating coils.
Air filters.
Fusible link on fire dampers.
Back draft dampers.
Ductwork in equipment rooms to allow inspection and cleaning of ducts prior to
start-up of systems.
- End of SubSection 15602 -
Dampers
1
Part One: General
.1
2
Subsection 15603
Provide dampers as shown and specified.
Part Two: Products
.1
Back Draft Dampers - Gravity Operated - (Drawing Symbol B/D)
.1
.2
.2
Construct dampers of aluminum. Join blades with a tie bar and mount
shafts in bronze bushings. Felt edges of blades for quiet operation.
Counterbalanced dampers shall be complete with ball bearings suitable for
horizontal or vertical mounting.
Fire Dampers (Drawing Symbol F/D)
.1
.2
.3
Dampers shall be listed and labeled.
Dampers installed in membrane forming part of a rated ceiling assembly
shall be fire stop flap design meeting code requirements.
Fire dampers shall be single blade, multi-blade or accordion type spring
tension blade design, rated for fire separation. Accordion type fire dampers
shall maintain 100% free duct area in ducts with air velocities of 6.0 m/s
and over.
H.V.A.C.
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Provide 71oC fusible link conforming to ULC S505, chain and spring catch,
for control of dampers.
Dampers shall be of galvanized steel construction, except those installed in
stainless steel ductwork which shall be constructed of stainless steel.
.4
.5
3
Section 15600
Page 5
Part Three: Execution
.1
Back Draft Dampers - Gravity Operated - (Drawing Symbol B/D)
.1
Unless otherwise noted, provide gravity operated backdraft dampers for all
exhaust air and relief air openings discharging air to atmosphere that are
not provided with motor operated dampers. Install dampers as shown on
the drawings or as close as possible to louvred openings where applicable.
Counterbalance dampers as required for proper operation.
Dampers shall not replace or substitute for rain louvers
.2
.2
. Fire Dampers (Drawing Symbol F/D)
.1
Provide fire dampers where shown on the drawings and in the following
locations:




.2
.3
.4
.5
On ducts passing through fire separations.
Where ducts enter or leave duct shafts classed as fire separations.
Where ducts pass through openings in floor slabs that are not protected by
fire rated duct shafts.
On ducts entering and leaving exit stairways. Fire rated enclosures to be
provided by other Division.
Install fire dampers in strict accordance with applicable codes and the
requirements of governing authorities.
Install fire dampers complete with collars, angle iron retainers, etc., as
required. Provide access panel properly located in adjacent ductwork to
give free access to all parts of the fire damper assembly.
Where fire dampers are located remote from fire separation the duct
between fire damper and separation shall be encased by this Section in
rated fireproof construction, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Refer to architectural drawings for specific information regarding location of
fire separations, fire rated duct shafts, etc.
- End of SubSection 15603 -
Flexible Ductwork
1
Part One: General
.1
2
Subsection 15605
Provide flexible ductwork as specified and/or shown on the drawings.
Part Two: Products
.1
.2
.3
Flexible ductwork, including connectors, shall comply with or exceed the
requirements of ULC - S110 standards for Class 1 air ducts.
Flexible ductwork shall be of corrugated aluminum construction with minimum
average wall thickness of .15mm and minimum positive and negative pressure
rating of 400mm W.G. for high pressure ductwork applications.
Where thermal insulation is specified for flexible ductwork under Thermal Insulation
Section, provide insulation as follows:
.1
Insulation shall be flexible glass fibre and shall have nominal thickness of
12mm and density of 24 kg per cubic meter, and shall be factory applied.
H.V.A.C.
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
.2
3
Section 15600
Page 6
Sheath insulation with an approved and acceptable vapour barrier. On
supply ducts located in ceiling spaces used as a return air plenum, vapour
barrier may be omitted and insulation may be sheathed with glass cloth or
netting, approximately 16 x 16 mesh, permanently secured to the
insulation.
Part Three: Execution
.1
.2
.3
Length of flexible duct connecting branch ducts to air terminal and/or diffuser shall
not exceed 3m and be continuous with no intermediate joints.
Connect flexible ducts to other ductwork or units by airtight slip joints. Secure joints
by at least three wraps of reinforced pressure sensitive vapour-seal adhesive tape
or mastic duct sealant and sheet metal screws or clamps. Skin back insulation and
vapour seal sheath temporarily to allow making up of joint. Make up joints so that
original thickness of insulation will be maintained.
Support flexible ducts by hangers every 1.5m. Support method shall be such that
duct or insulation cannot be damaged by vibration or other motion. Do not lay
ducts across any lighting fixture or hot surface.
-
End of SubSection 15605 –
Acoustic Duct Lining
1
Part One: General
.1
2
Provide internal acoustic lining in ductwork, duct plenums and
specified and/or shown on the drawings.
casings as
Part Two: Products
.1
.2
3
Subsection 15607
Unless otherwise noted, lining for rectangular ductwork, duct plenums and casings
shall be 25mm thick rigid fibrous glass of minimum 72 kg per cubic meter density
with neoprene coated inner surface. Lining for round ductwork shall be 25mm thick
flexible fibrous glass of minimum 24 kg per cubic meter density with neoprene
coated inner surface.
Flame spread classification of entire lining assembly as determined according to
methods of Fire Hazard Classification for Building Materials ASTM E84-68 shall
not exceed 25 and smoke developed number shall not exceed 50.
Part Three: Execution
.1
.2
Increase duct sizes by insulation thickness to maintain free areas.
Secure lining to sheet metal surfaces with a fire resistant adhesive and welded
pins with fasteners at approximately 450mm centers. Use welding procedure which
will not burn through or destroy the duct finish. Remove protruding ends of pins so
that pins terminate flush with fasteners. Seal joints and surfaces unprotected by
the neoprene coating with a fire resistant mastic. Repair damage to neoprene
coating and leading edges by spraying or brush coating with a suitable similar
compound.
- End of SubSection 15607 -
Fans
1
Subsection 15608
Part One: General
.1
.2
Provide fans complete with drive and motors as specified and/or shown and
scheduled.
The following abbreviations are used to identify fans as to service involved:
H.V.A.C.
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
.1
Section 15600
Page 7
EF - Exhaust Air Fan
.3
2
Provide fans exposed to the weather with a heavy gauge vented housing that
completely protects the fan and motor. Casings, except those constructed of
aluminum shall be treated with corrosion resistant paint. Casings shall have
suitable access for bearing and belt servicing.
.4
Unless otherwise noted or required by code, provide exhaust fans not fitted with
motor operated dampers with gravity back draft dampers.
.5
Unless noted otherwise, fans shall be belt driven.
.6
Provide discharge openings of fans installed outdoors with aluminum or galvanized
steel 12mm mesh birdscreens.
Part Two: Products
.1
3
As scheduled on the drawings.
Part Three: Execution
.1
Install fans as per manufacturer's recommendations.
-
End of SubSection 15608 –
Grilles, Registers, Diffusers & Accessories
1
Part One: General
.1
.2
Provide grilles, registers and diffusers as specified hereinafter and/or shown on the
drawings.
Base grille, register and diffuser selection on the following noise criteria (N.C.)
levels:


.3
.4
2
Subsection 15609
Classrooms: 30
All other areas: 35
Finish of grilles, registers and diffusers shall be subject to Shop Drawing Review.
Grilles, registers and diffusers shall handle the air quantities shown on the
drawings, while maintaining air velocities below 0.25 m/s in the occupied zone up
to 1.8m above the floor.
Part Two: Products
.1
General
.1
.2
.2
Unless specified otherwise, finish all internal parts of grilles, registers and
diffusers with flat black paint.
Counter-sink screw holes at face of grilles, registers or diffusers to accept
recessed type screws.
Diffuser Identification
.1
The following abbreviations are used hereinafter and on the drawings to
identify diffusers as to service involved and to indicate specific
requirements for frames:
.1
.2
.3
SD Supply air diffuser.
Diffusers shall distribute air in a throw pattern as shown on the drawings.
Blank-off active section of diffusers where shown on the drawings and as
required to accommodate obstructions affecting air distribution.
Diffusers of linear design shall be of length shown on the drawings. Take
field measurements as required before ordering. Where sectional
H.V.A.C.
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 15600
Page 8
installation is required provide alignment devices without devices being
visibly apparent.
.3
Diffuser Types
.1
Type SD1
.1
.2
.3
.4
Grilles and Registers Identification
.1
The following abbreviations are used hereinafter and on the drawing to
identify grilles and registers as to service involved:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.2
.5
Diffusers shall be of square face or round neck design with a
minimum of four louvred vane assemblies and adjustable air
pattern. The inner vane assemblies shall be removable without the
use of tools for access to accessories above. Diffusers shall be of
aluminum construction. EH price model ASCDA.
Unless noted otherwise, diffusers used on inverted T-bar ceilings
shall be provided with a flat border frame so that the diffuser will
neatly rest on the inverted T-bar. Unless noted otherwise, provide
diffusers for other than lay-in ceiling tile, inverted T-bar applications
with extended frame designed for flush mounting and to overlap
ceiling opening.
Unless noted otherwise, provide each diffuser with one multi-blade
variable position deflecting and equalizing grid. Install grid in
diffuser neck with blades positioned to provide optimal draft free air
distribution at occupant positions.
SG
RG
EG
TG
SR
RR
ER
Supply air grille
Return air grille
Exhaust air grille
Transfer air grille
Supply air register
Return air register
Exhaust air register
Unless noted otherwise, provide grilles and registers used in inverted T-bar
ceilings with a flat border so that the grille or register will neatly rest on the
inverted T-bars. Provide grilles and registers for other than lay-in ceiling tile,
inverted T-bar applications with extended frame designed for flush
mounting and to overlap ceiling, floor or wall opening, except where
abbreviations above are followed by an R. These grilles and registers shall
be provided with an extended mounting frame designed to allow removal of
the grille or register core without destroying the panel seal and paint finish;
e.g. SRG denotes supply grille with removable core type extended
mounted frame. Extended mounting frame shall be of material specified for
grille or register.
Grille and Register Types
.1
Type RG1, RR1, EG1, ER1 and TG1
.1
Grilles and registers shall be of aluminum construction with 12mm x
12mm x 12mm grid core dimensions providing minimum 90% free
area. Grilles used on non-ducted return air ceiling applications with
inverted T-bar ceilings may be without border frame specified
elsewhere. T-bar to support grid core shall be provided by other
Division.
H.V.A.C.
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
.2
Type RG2, RR2, EG2, ER2 and TG2
.1
.3
.2
Coordinate with general trades and provide door grilles as shown
on the drawings equal to EH Price, STG series. Employ qualified
tradesman for door cutting and grille installation.
Width and height of door grilles shall be subject to Shop Drawing
review.
Accessories
.1
.2
.3
.4
3
Grilles and registers shall be of steel construction, with fixed blades
spaced at 12mm centres and 30 degrees deflection designed to
prevent see-through. Fixed blades shall be parallel with floor for all
mounted grilles.
Type DG
.1
.6
Section 15600
Page 9
Provide accessories in conjunction with supply air diffusers, supply, return
and exhaust air grilles and registers as specified and/or on the drawings.
Integral opposed blade volume control dampers shall be key and
gang- operated type adjustable from register or diffuser face with
removable key. Dampers shall have spring tension or other positioning
device to maintain positive blade setting under all operating conditions.
Opposed blade volume control dampers shall be aluminum or steel and
aluminum construction. Unless specified otherwise, finish shall be matte
black paint.
Where shown on drawings, provide multi- vane air deflecting devices at
branch duct take-offs serving registers and grilles. Each unit shall consist of
a bank of curved blades, secured to four heavy side rails, two top and two
bottom, which in turn are pivoted to the mounting frame. Air deflecting
devices shall be rotary operated by lever arm with lever arm and locking
quadrant external to duct. Unless specified otherwise, finish shall be matte
black paint.
Multi-blade variable position deflecting and equalizing grids shall be of steel
construction. Unless specified otherwise, finish shall be matte black paint.
Part Three: Execution
.1
.2
.3
Install grilles, registers and diffusers in such a manner as to facilitate
repeated removals of same without damaging ceiling or wall construction
and finish.
Apply opposed blade volume dampers integral with grilles to comprise
registers.
Joints between each grille, register or diffuser and its components,
connecting duct or mounting surface shall be essentially airtight, using
gasket or equivalent as required, to prevent leakage of supply air return air
plenums and to prevent air bypassing grille, register or diffuser.
- End of SubSection 15609 -
Testing and Balancing
1
Subsection 15610
Part One: General
.1
.2
This work shall be provided by a recognized firm of air and hydronic balancing
experts.
Balancing firm to provide labour, engineering and test equipment required to adjust
and balance the systems. Division 15 to provide and install test ports, dampers,
etc., required for testing and balancing and make any changes required for the
H.V.A.C.
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 15600
Page 10
final balancing results. Division 15 to Include for the changing of pulleys, belts, etc
as recommended by the balancing firm.
2
Part Two: Products
.1
3
Not Applicable
Part Three: Execution
.1
Procedures (Air Systems)
.1
Prior to the Substantial Performance of the Contract, adjust air systems as
necessary to provide the design quantities for each part.
Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities of supply inlet and
exhaust air outlets only to the extent that adjustments do not create
objectionable air motion or sound levels in excess of specified limits. Effect
volume control by duct and internal devices located in branch ducts or
take-offs such as dampers and splitters not by adjustment of air inlets or
outlets. Make final measurements of air quantities only after adjusting air
inlets and outlets to provide optimum pattern of air distribution.
Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds or pitch on
controllable pitch fans as follows:
.2
.3

.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.2
+/- 10% for air outlets and inlets with air supply of .5 m3/s and under, and
+/- 5% for air outlets and inlets with air supply over .5 m3/s.
Balance systems so that fans operate at lowest static pressure possible.
Make air quantity measurements in ducts by pitot tube traverse of entire
cross-sectional area of the duct.
Measure air quantities at each type of air outlet and inlet.
Verify correct minimum outdoor air quantities and damper settings of unit
ventilator by the ‘’mixed air’’ temperature method at low ambient (less than
15OF) temperatures. Do not use pilot tube traverse readings for this
purpose. Request the Controls and Instrumentation Section to simulate
minimum outdoor air operating conditions by making necessary control
adjustments.
Demonstrate in presence of appointed Field Representative that the
systems are ‘’in balance’’ under above load conditions with the
outdoor/return and exhaust air dampers in the ‘’free cooling’’ operating
mode. ‘’In balance’’ is defined as operating of systems so that the building
will be neither excessively ‘’pressurized’’ nor ‘’exhausted’’ under varying air
handling system load conditions. Make all necessary adjustments to fan
control speed, controllers, operators and dampers to meet the performance
specified.
Check supply air diffusers for "dumping effect" under various load
conditions. Blank off active parts and/or redirect air flow as required to
maintain draft free air distribution under reduced cooling load conditions.
Procedures (Hydronic Systems)
.1
.2
.3
.4
Prior to Substantial Performance of the Contract adjust heating water
systems as necessary to provide the design flow rates for each part.
Calibrate all gauges, thermometers, thermostats, etc., before conducting
tests. Use calibrated test gauges for pump adjustment.
Adjust system to provide the design pressure drops and flows through the
heat transfer elements.
Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open to the heat
transfer elements.
H.V.A.C.
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
.5
.3
Section 15600
Page 11
Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing
cocks, valves and fittings. Do not use service or shut-off valves for
balancing.
Certified Reports
.1
.2
.3
.4
Submit six (6) copies of the reports describes herein, covering balance,
prior to final acceptance of the project.
Provide the reports in hard cover 3-ring binder manuals, complete with
index page and indexing tabs, and cover identification at front and side.
The reports shall be certified by a qualified Engineer or Technician who is
versed in the field of mechanical air and hydronic system balancing.
Certification shall include calculation procedure and final summaries.
The certified report shall include air and hydronic balance and equipment
data listed hereafter:
.1
Duct Systems







.2
Water System Data:
.1
.4
Duct Air Quantities-(For Main and Branches).
Duct Size (s).
Number of Pressure Readings.
Sum of Velocity Measurements.
Average Velocity.
Duct Recorded Air Flow.
Duct Design Air Flow.
Flows at all CBVs.
Final Inspection and Acceptance
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
At the time of final inspection, re-check in the presence of the appointed
Field Representative random selections of data, recorded in the Certified
Report.
Locations for re-check shall not exceed 20% of the total number tabulated
in the Report.
A measured flow deviation of 10% or more, from the Certified Report
listings, by more thant 10% of the selected re-check stations, shall result in
rejection of the Report as unacceptable.
In the event that the Report is rejected, rebalance all systems, submit new
Certified Reports and make a re-inspection, all at no change to the
Contract Price.
Following acceptance of Certified Reports, permanently mark the settings
of all splitters, dampers, valves and other adjustment devices so that
adjustment can be restored if disturbed at any time. Do not mark such
devices until after acceptance of the Report.
-
End of SubSection 15610 –
Duct Leakage
1
Part One: General
.1
2
Subsection 15612
Comply with leakage criteria specified.
Part Two: Products
.1
Not applicable
H.V.A.C.
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
3
Section 15600
Page 12
Part Three: Execution
.1
.2
Construction of systems comprising equipment and ductwork separately and
collectively, shall be suitable for the service and performance tests, including
leakage criteria, specified herein.
Construction of low pressure ductwork shall be inherently airtight, and leakage
shall be of sufficiently low magnitude as to be inaudible in quiet ambient and not
detectable by sense of feel.
- End of SubSection 15612 –
Convectors & Finned Tube Units
1
Part One: General
.1
.2
2
Subsection 15651
Refer to the drawings for location, type and capacity of units.
The unit manufacturer shall take field dimensions as required to ensure proper
installation.
Part Two: Products
.1
General
.1
.2
.3
.2
Finned Tube Units (Drawing Symbol Type ‘A’)
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.3
For unit valves which are not accessible for servicing, provide readily
removable sections of enclosure panels or access panels for access to
valves as shown on the drawings.
Metal surfaces of enclosures or cabinets shall have factory applied baked
enamel finish coat. Colour to architect’s approval. Submit colour sample
with shop drawings.
Unless noted otherwise, capacities shown on the Drawings are based on
18oC entering air temperature and 82oC/71oC entering and leaving water
temperature.
Heating Elements: Copper tube/aluminum fin.
Element Hangers - quiet operation, ball bearings, cradle type providing
unrestricted longitudinal movement during expansion and contraction.
Enclosure brackets shall support hangers on four centres maximum with
element evenly spaced.
Provide expansion compensators as recommended by the unit
manufacturer to absorb expansion.
Enclosures for tube fins shall be wall to wall, sloped top and sloped bottom,
and of type as shown on the drawings complete with end boxes, trim strips
inside and outside where required. Enclosure construction minimum 16
gauge.
Heating elements shall be single row unless required otherwise by
available space. Pipe double row elements in series.
Increase enclosure heights if required to obtain specified capacity.
Convector Units (Drawing Symbol Type ‘B’)
.1
.2
.3
Heating Elements: Copper tube/aluminum fin.
Element Hangers - quiet operation, ball bearings, cradle type providing
unrestricted longitudinal movement during expansion and contraction.
Enclosures shall fully recessed wall design as scheduled on the drawings.
Enclosure front panel construction minimum 14 gauge.
H.V.A.C.
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
.4
Finned Tube Units (Drawing Symbol Type ‘C’)
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
3
Section 15600
Page 13
Heating Elements: Copper tube/aluminum fin.
Element Hangers - quiet operation, ball bearings, cradle type providing
unrestricted longitudinal movement during expansion and contraction.
Provide expansion compensators as recommended by the unit
manufacturer to absorb expansion.
Enclosures shall be free-standing design as scheduled on the drawings.
Enclosure construction minimum 16 gauge.
Heating elements shall be single row unless required otherwise by
available space. Pipe double row elements in series.
Increase enclosure heights if required to obtain specified capacity.
Part Three: Execution
.1
.2
.3
Unless shown otherwise, provide each unit, which is supplied by upfeed runouts
with easily accessible air vent. Where air vent is not easily accessible, extend vent
through enclosure cabinet for screw driver operation.
Install two valves on each radiator and convector on hot water heating systems.
One valve shall be a hand operated ball valve and the other a ball valve with
memory stop. For units located in public areas, remove valve operator.
Provide units located below mains with air vents and drain valves. Pitch units to
allow air to vent to the air vent.
-
End of SubSection 15651 –
Cabinet Unit Heaters
1
Part One: General
.1
.2
2
Subsection 15652
Provide heaters as shown and/or scheduled on the drawings.
Unless noted otherwise, heaters shall be controlled by single stage, electric
heating thermostats with key adjustable set points and scale markings in oC.
Provide acceptable type guards where called for in the drawings.
Part Two: Products
.1
Cabinet Unit Heaters (Drawing Symbol CUH-#)
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Elements shall be of 15mm copper tubes with aluminum plate type fins and
with headers. Each element shall be provided with a screwdriver operated
air vent valve.
Cabinets shall be designed for recessed, wall or ceiling mounting as shown
on the drawings and shall be constructed of 16 gauge steel with zinc
chromate finish with inlet and outlet grille. Cabinet shall be provided with a
prime coat of paint inside and outside.
Unit shall be complete with motor, overload protection, minimum 2-speed
controller and centrifugal fans. Speed controller shall be mounted within the
cabinet and be easily accessible through an access panel in the front
panel.
Indicated unit capacities shall be met on low speed operation.
Concealed mounted units shall have removable front panel to allow full
access to motor, fans and controls.
Unless noted on drawings, capacities scheduled on the drawings are
based on 15.5OC EAT, 80OC EWT, 20 OC differential temperature, low
speed operation. Max. WPD not to exceed 12 kPa at rated capacity.
Electric supply: 120/1/60
H.V.A.C.
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
3
Section 15600
Page 14
Part Three: Execution
.1
Electrical wiring
.1
This Division (Section 15900) shall provide thermostats, starters and
electrical wiring including power wiring from power supply termination
points (junction boxes) as shown on the electrical drawings.
- End of SubSection 15652 -
Water Treatment
1
Part 1: General
.1
.2
2
Before commencing work test existing hot water heating system water quality and
submit a report including recommendations to achieve recommended quality
standards.
After cleaning and flushing of new piping loop, check system quality of water and
add compatible chemical treatment to maintain recommended system standards.
Part 2: Products
.1
3
SubSection 15655
To be compatible with existing treatment.
Part 3: Execution
Provide a report on water quality after completion of work to be included in the operating
and maintenance manuals.
- End of SubSection 15655-
Cleaning & Flushing
1
Part One: General
.1
2
Clean and flush the hot water system as specified.
Part Two: Products
.1
3
Subsection 15656
Cleaning Compound: Acceptable non-foaming and phosphate free detergent
cleaning compound as recommended by the water treatment specialist.
Part Three: Execution
.1
.2
.3
.4
After satisfactory leak testing, and prior to any system service or start-up,
completely flush and drain the systems and equipment. Clean all strainers.
Introduce cleaning compound and circulate solution as recommended by the water
treatment specialist.
Provide valved pipe connections and temporary circulating pump as required for
circulating cleaning solution in new pipe loop.
Test samples of water from the system for iron content. If total iron content of water
exceeds one p.p.m. repeat cleaning procedure. Submit results for review.
- End of SubSection 15656 –
END OF SECTION 15600
Division 15 - Mechanical
Section No. Description
15900
15912
15918
General
Electrical Wiring
Control Sequence Description
Index to 15900 – Controls & Instrumentation
Page No.
1
1
2
Controls & Instrumentation
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 15900
Page 1
General
1
Subsection 15900
Part One: General
.1
References
.1
.2
.2
Work Included
.1
.2
.3
.3
.4
Refer to article 15016 Section 15010.
Submit shop drawings for the following:
Control diagram complete with all wiring layouts. Wiring diagrams shall
identify interface wiring connections.
Control valves.
Part Two: Products
.1
3
Provide all labour, material, equipment and services required to complete
the Controls and Instrumentation work of the Mechanical Division in
accordance with the specifications and/or drawings.
Electrical wiring required in conjunction with the new mechanical equipment
and building automation and energy management system as specified.
Provide itemized and separate prices as called for in the Mechanical
Tender Form.
Submittals
.1
.2
.3
2
Comply with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and
requirements of Division 1.
Comply with Section 15010, General Provisions, Section 15050, Basic
Materials and Methods and Division 16 specifications.
Refer to appropriate sections.
Part Three: Execution
.1
Installation and Responsibility
.1
All equipment shall be supplied and installed by (site specific controls
contractor) (see 15010 for contact information) who shall be responsible for
the operation of the whole system.
-
End of SubSection 15900 –
Electrical Wiring
1
Part One: General
.1
.2
.3
Comply with 15063 Electrical Work, Section 15050.
Except as otherwise specified or shown herein, this Section shall provide all
electrical wiring, relays and control components in conjunction with thermostats,
freezestats, safety devices and work specified to provide the control sequences
specified including interface wiring into motor starter circuits.
Provide electrical work specified under the following articles:
.1
2
Subsection 15912
Thermostats
Part Two: Products
.1
To Toronto Catholic District School Board standards.
Controls & Instrumentation
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
3
Section 15900
Page 2
Part Three: Execution
.1
Interlocking
.1
.2
.3
This section shall interwire fans, equipment, components, etc,. to provide
sequences and operation specified and/or shown.
Where specified automation points can accommodate software interlocks
do not use hard wire interlocks unless specifically noted otherwise and or
required by Code or fail safety devices such as smoke detectors,
freezestats etc.
Conceal all wiring in EMT conduit or approved Wiremold where mounting
on existing block walls.
-
End of Subsection 15912 –
Control Sequence Description
1
Part One: General
.1
General
.1
.2
.3
Heating modes shall be determined by the outdoor air conditions. The
outdoor air sensor will determine the mode of operation of all connected
systems and will broadcast it to all the mechanical equipment.
Part Two: Products
.1
3
Unless otherwise specified, dampers and valves shall return to the "NO" or
"NC" positions as specified, when respective system supply fans or pumps
are stopped.
The control sequences outlined hereinafter describe basic system
functions. Include for programming required to meet the latest TCDSB
energy conservation standards.
Heating Modes
.1
2
Subsection 15918
NA
Part Three: Execution
Control Sequence Description – Equipment
.1
Cabinet Unit Heater (Typical Zone)
.1
.2
Wall-fin/Convector (Typical Zone)
.1
.3
Electronic space thermostat (to TDSCB standard complete with heavy
duty metal guard) shall modulate the NO 2-way hot water heating valve
and cycle the fan on demand for heating to maintain a set point of 20OC
(or to school standard). Mount thermostats 5’6’’ AFF.
Electronic space thermostat (to TDSCB standard) shall modulate the NO
2-way hot water heating valve and cycle the fan on demand for heating to
maintain a set point of 20OC (or to school standard). Mount thermostats
5’6’’ AFF.
Sensors connected to Building Automation
.1
Where noted, relocate existing sensors as shown and mount at 5’6’’ AFF.
- End of Section 15918 -
End of 15900
Electrical Specifications
for
Renovations to
Blessed Margherita of Citta di Castello
Catholic School
108 Spenvalley Drive,
Toronto, Ontario
St Francis De Sales Catholic School
333 Firgrove Crescent,
Toronto, Ontario
Venerable John Merlini Catholic School
123 Whitfield Avenue,
Toronto, Ontario
ENSO Systems Inc.
5700 Yonge Street, Suite 200
Toronto, Ontario, M2M 4K2
Tel/Fax: (416) 410-9865
Email: ensosystems@rogers.com
April 9, 2013
Project: 852
Index
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 16000
Page 1
SECTION NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
Section 16010
Section 16050
Section 16450
Section 16477
Section 16500
Section 16519
Section 16550
Section 16770
General Provisions
Basic Material & Methods
Grounding Secondary
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Luminaires
Exit Lighting
Emergency Lighting
Fire Alarm Systems
******* END OF SECTION 16000 *******
April 9, 2013
PAGES
9
8
1
1
1
1
1
3
General Provisions
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 16010
Page 1
1
General
1.1
1.2
Comply with Division 1 - General Requirements and all documents referred to therein.
The work of Division 16 - Electrical is divided into Sections and Subsections as follows:



Section 16010 - General Provisions
Section 16050 - Basic Materials and Methods including Subsections
Additional Subsections as outlined in Index
1.3
Subsections are in order, but may not be numbered consecutively. Refer to the Index and
page numbers.
2
Definitions and Interpretations
2.1
The term "provide" shall be understood to include labour, materials, and services
necessary to supply and install item or work referred to.
The term "approved", "approval", etc., shall be understood to mean approved by
authorities having jurisdiction as conforming to Codes, Standards, By-laws, etc.
The term “accessible” shall be understood to mean readily accessible by a person using
necessary tools but without cutting or breaking out material.
The term “exposed” shall be understood to mean within the line of sight of any person
standing, sitting in or using the occupied space, unless defined otherwise in the Sections
of Division 16.
The term “listed” shall be understood to mean that the materials or equipment have been
tested in accordance with applicable standards, and have been approved and listed for
their intended use by a testing company approved by the Authorities having jurisdiction.
The term “subject to review” shall be understood to mean work or materials shall be laid
out for review. No work shall proceed until instructions have been obtained. Submit further
information, shop drawings, samples, etc., as specified and as may be reasonably
requested.
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
3
Laws and Regulations
Work provided under this Division shall conform to the standards and codes, current
by-laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. In case of conflict, the codes,
by-laws and regulations take precedence over the Contract Documents. Do not reduce
the standard established by the drawings and specifications by applying codes, by-laws
and regulations.
4
Permits and Fees
Give notices, obtain and pay for permits including Electrical Safety Authority Inspection
and pay all fees necessary to complete the work of this Division. Include for all testing and
demonstration to authorities having jurisdiction required to obtain final approvals.
5
Drawings
The drawings are diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of work and indicate
general arrangement and approximate location of equipment, fixtures, conduit and cable
runs. Take information involving accurate dimensions of the building by site
measurements.
6
Examination
6.1
Examine existing buildings, building site and local conditions affecting the work together
with drawings and specifications of other Divisions forming part of the Tender Documents,
before Tendering. Submit notice of omissions, discrepancies, defects or interferences
affecting the work before submitting Tender.
General Provisions
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 16010
Page 2
Co-ordination
6.1
6.2
6.3
Lay out work so that it does not conflict with work of other Trades. Prepare field drawings
showing size and location of equipment bases, sleepers, inserts, sleeves and openings
required for passage of bus ducts, conduits, cables, etc., through walls, partitions, roofs,
ceilings, floors and structural members. Submit field drawings as specified under Shop
Drawings.
No extra cost or credit shall be incurred for any change in location of equipment, providing
distance does not exceed 3 m (10') and information is given before installation of said
equipment.
Coordinate work with all other trades and notify consultant of any conflicts or
discrepancies prior to rough-in.
7
Standard of Materials and Equipment
7.1
7.2
Material required for performance of work shall be new and of uniform pattern throughout
work. Identical units or equipment shall be of same manufacture.
All material and equipment shall be of the type subject to Factory Mutual, Underwriters'
Laboratories of Canada or Canadian Standards Association inspection and approval and
shall bear ULC or CSA labels.
8
Protection of Work and Materials
Protect materials and equipment from damage, inclement weather and/or extreme
temperatures. Provide enclosures, tarpaulins, or special protection as required under the
circumstances. Be responsible for the protection and maintenance of the work of this
Division until the work has been completed and accepted.
9
Warranty
9.1
Warrant equipment and work against defects, deficiencies in design and workmanship
for a period of one year after acceptance.
Provide extended warranties where called for. Submit (1) copy of warranty certificates with
Data Book.
9.2
10
Trial Usage
Allow for use of electrical systems to be thoroughly tested before final completion and
acceptance of the work. Supply labour and equipment for such tests.
11
Superintendence
Maintain at the job site for the full duration of the project, qualified personnel with proven
experience in erecting, supervising, testing and adjusting projects of comparable nature
and complexity.
12
Data Books, Operating and Maintenance Instructions
13.1
Submit three copies of final reviewed shop drawings and manufacturer's maintenance and
operating instruction for each piece of major equipment and system. Include the names
and addresses of spare parts suppliers and service organizations.
Compile copies in sets in hard cover three-ring data books, with index page and indexing
tabs.
Provide the services of qualified personnel to instruct and familiarize the Owner's
operating and maintenance staff with the correct procedures of operating and maintaining
systems and equipment.
13.2
13.3
13
Base Bid and Supplementary Electrical Tender Form
13.1
Products names and/or model numbers shown are for the purpose of establishing a
standard of quality, performance, serviceability, appearance and capacity. Base tenders
General Provisions
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 16010
Page 3
on the materials, equipment and methods specifically named in the specifications or
indicated on the drawings. Submit proposed substitutions or alternatives in accordance
with the following procedures:
14.1.1 Where products, materials, methods and services are specifically named or
identified as "Base Bid" items, submit proposed substitutions and/or alternatives as
required by the Supplementary or Electrical Tender Form.
14.1.2 Where products, materials and methods are not specifically named or identified as
"Base Bid" items, include one of the listed acceptable equipment manufacturers,
methods and/or services (where applicable) in the tender and show the product
and/or service on which the tender is based as required by the Supplementary or
Electrical Tender Form.
14.2
14.3
The tenderer is encouraged to offer products and materials by manufacturers not included
in the specification. Do not include these items in the tender sum, but show items
separately as substitutes complete with changes in price.
Ensure that offered substitutions and/or alternatives meet space, weight, connection,
power and wiring requirements, etc. All costs incurred for additional components, changes
to services, structural or space requirements, layouts and plans, etc., necessary to
accommodate the alternative or substitute items shall be borne by this Division.
15
Shop Drawings and Samples
15.1
Submit shop drawings for review in accordance with the requirements of Section 01340
and furnish shop drawings to authorities having jurisdiction for review where applicable.
Submit shop drawings showing details of construction, weights, accurate dimensions,
capacities, performances and wiring diagrams for each piece of major equipment and for
each piece of equipment listed under "Shop Drawings" article in the Trade Section.
Include shop drawings for distribution equipment, transformers, luminaires, switches
(disconnect, safety, transfer), generators, emergency lighting and battery system, fire
alarm system, lighting control equipment, cable trays and modular wireways, fuses,
heating, low voltage wiring systems, wiring devices, and other special equipment as
requested by the Consultant.
Indicate the following information:
15.2
15.3



15.4
15.5
15.6
15.7
15.8
16
16.1
Manufacturer's and Supplier's name, catalogue model number
Name of trade supplying item, project numbers
Number identifying item in the contract documents such as splitter, transformer and
panel numbers, luminaire identification symbols, etc.
Check for pertinent information such as physical dimensions, make, performance,
electrical characteristics before submittal. Be responsible for accuracy of equipment
dimensions related to available space, accessibility for maintenance and compliance with
Codes and Regulations.
Review of the drawings shall be construed to apply to general arrangement only and shall
not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from the drawings and
specifications, unless he has submitted written notice of such deviations at the time of
submission of drawings and samples.
Furnish prints of the reviewed shop drawing details to other parties for co-ordination.
Submit samples of material and equipment where specified or as instructed for review
before ordering same. Samples may be retained until the completion of the contract.
Complete all work in accordance with reviewed shop drawings. All materials and
workmanship shall be equal to reviewed samples.
Record Drawings and Demonstration
Obtain and pay for one set of black line record drawings relating to the work of this
Division and keep at the job site. Note clearly, accurately and promptly revisions to the
General Provisions
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
16.2
17
Section 16010
Page 4
work and deviations from the Contract Documents. Dimension the location, depth, size
and type of underground services from convenient reference points.
Submit three sets of prints and one disk with record drawings (in Autocad 2010) upon
completion of work. Construction drawing files will be made available for contractor’s use.
Accessibility
Install work so as to be readily accessible for operation, maintenance and repairs by
access panels or other acceptable means.
18
Concealment
18.1
Conceal conduit and cables except in unfinished areas such as service rooms or as
noted on the drawings where conduits shall be surface mounted. Chase walls were
necessary to conceal conduit and boxes.
Install services that are to be concealed as close to the building structure as possible so
that furrings, ceiling spaces and other enclosures can be of minimum size. Run exposed
services parallel to building lines.
Identify locations and submit notice where installation of work interferes with interior
treatment and use of space. Await instructions before proceeding with the work.
18.2
18.3
19
Final Inspection
19.1
Submit a written request to arrange for a final inspection of all electrical systems when:
19.1.1 Deficiencies noted during job inspections have been corrected.
19.1.2 Systems have been tested and reports submitted. Obtain and submit
unconditional final inspection certificate to Owner upon completion of work.
19.1.3 Operating and maintenance manuals have been submitted.
19.1.4 Tags are in place and equipment identified.
19.1.5 Owner's operating personnel have been given operating and maintenance
instructions.
19.2
Obtain and submit unconditional final inspection certificate from local Authorities having
jurisdiction to Owner upon completion of work.
20
Cutting, Patching and Firestopping
20.1
Advise other Trades of the location of openings required for the installation of this
Division's work. Provide and set sleeves, inserts, anchors, etc., when requested in
advance of concrete pouring or similar work. Pay for and employ the Trades whose work
is involved for cutting and patching of completed work. Lay out such work for review. Do
not cut reinforcing steel without written instructions.
Unless noted otherwise, perform and pay for cutting and patching in existing construction
required for installation of work under the Electrical Division. Sleeve as specified
elsewhere in this Specification.
Do not cut reinforcing steel without written instructions.
Provide fire stopping and smoke sealant where required for work by this Division. Refer
to general sections for material specifications.
Make good openings in walls and floors where demolished equipment, conduit, etc., are
removed.
20.2
20.3
20.4
20.5
21
Site Visit
Site visits are strongly suggested to all bidders in order to review existing conditions that
may affect the work. Advise the Owner’s representative 72 hours in advance of planned
site visit and make all necessary arrangements to gain access to the areas affected by
the work of the Contract.
General Provisions
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 16010
Page 5
22
Applicable Codes, Standards and Authorities
22.1
Codes, standards and authorities governing the work of this Division shall include but not
be limited to the following:
22.1.1
22.1.2
22.1.3
22.1.4
22.1.5
22.1.6
22.2
Ontario Building Code, current edition, and all Ontario Regulations.
National Building Code of Canada, current edition.
Fire Protection: Insurance Underwriters (Agency).
Department of Labour Regulations.
Ontario Electrical Safety Code
Elevating Devices Act & Elevator Code
Authorities:
22.2.1
22.2.2
22.2.3
22.2.4
22.2.5
Municipal Building Department
Municipal Fire Prevention Authorities
Electrical Safety Authority
Ontario Ministry of Energy and Environment
Ontario Fire Marshal’s Office
23
Abbreviations
23.1
Abbreviations used in these documents shall be as shown in the Table 1 at the end of this
section.
Other abbreviations may be used and shall be interpreted as referred to in the Ontario
Building Code and Electrical Safety Code.
23.2
24
English/Metric Conversion
Metric Units of measurement used in this specification are based on the International
System of Units (SI) contained in "The Canadian Metric Practice Guide" prepared by the
Canadian Standards Association, Publication Number CAN3-Z234.1-76. Motor and pipe
size conversions used are as in Table 2 at the end of this section.
25
List of Base Bid and Acceptable Equipment Manufacturers, Methods and Services
See Table 3 at end of section and Luminaire schedule on the drawings.
26
Hoisting Apparatus
26.1
Unless noted otherwise, provide all apparatus necessary for the hoisting and placing of
materials or equipment forming part of this Division.
Ensure that all equipment and materials can be hoisted and set in place. Include for the
cost of dismantling and reassembling equipment where required.
26.2
27
Work in Existing Building
27.1
General
27.1.1 Route new services to avoid interference with existing construction.
27.1.2 Cut back and terminate existing services to present a neat appearance.
27.1.3 Remove and dispose of existing abandoned conduit, wiring, cables, devices,
equipment, fixtures, hangers and supports. All wiring and cable to be removed to
source panel. All unused outlet boxes (where it is not practical to remove same)
shall be blanked with coverplates.
27.1.4 Hand over to the Owner existing equipment to be removed such as panels,
transformers, splitters, etc., when requested by the Owner.
27.1.5 Refer also to Demolition Section in the Contract Documents.
27.1.6 Conceal all conduit and boxes except in unfinished areas such as service rooms
or as noted on the drawings where conduits shall be surface mounted. Walls
shall be chased where necessary.
General Provisions
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 16010
Page 6
27.1.7 It shall be the responsibility of any contractor, who while working on this project
may disturb the wiring or produce heat, smoke, or dust that may activate the fire
alarm system, to arrange to have the fire detectors in the area isolated before
commencing such work. Failure to comply may result in false alarms.
Subsequent charges and fines by the local municipality for attending to a false
alarm shall be borne by this contractor
27.2 Work Schedule
Carry out Owner/user disturbing work after hours or on weekends. For further details refer
to Instructions to Bidders.
27.3 X-ray and Scanning
27.3.1 Before core drilling any concrete floors or walls, x-ray and/or scan the area in
question. Include for premium time to perform this work.
28
Continuity of Existing Services
28.1 Include in tender price for overtime work that may be required to tie-in services and wiring
at night or weekends.
29
Testing
29.1 Perform tests on each system and submit test results for approval prior to the final
acceptance of the work. Repair or correct deficiencies and re-test system as directed.
29.2 Balance panels within 5%.
29.3 Grounding shall be as required by the Ontario Electrical Safety Code.
29.4 Test all system grounding conductors for phase to ground loads; ammeter shall read less
than one ampere.
Table 1 - Abbreviations
Abbreviation:
Long Form:
AFF or A.F.F.
Above Finished Floor
AFG or A.F.G.
Above Finished Grade
ANSI or A.N.S.I.
American National Safety Institute
ASA or A.S.A.
American Standards Association
ASHRAE -
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating & Air Conditioning
ASTM -
American Society For Testing Materials
BB
Plywood backboard (FR indicates fire-rated)
BOD or B.O.D.
By Other Division
CGA
Canadian Gas Association
CGSB
Canadian Government Specification Board
CSA
Canadian Standards Association
CUA
Canadian Underwriter's Association
C
Conduit
C/W or c/w
Complete With
General Provisions
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 16010
Page 7
Table 1 - Abbreviations continued
Abbreviation:
Long Form:
EEMAC or E.E.M.A.C.
Electrical and Electronic Manufacturer's Association Of Canada
ESA
Electrical Safety Authority
FA(P) or FAAP
Fire Alarm (Panel) or Fire Alarm Annunciator Panel
FR or FR BB
Fire-rated or fire-rated backboard
HP or hp
High Pressure Or Horsepower
JB
Junction Box
KG or kg
Kilograms
KW or kw
Kilowatts
LP or PP or RP
Lighting Panel, Power Panel, Receptacle Panel
LV
Low voltage
M or m
Meters
MM or mm
Millimeters
NFPA
National Fire Protection Association
NC, NO or nc, no
Normally Open, Normally Closed. Position When Power Is Off or
Control Signal Output Is Zero
PP
Power Pole
RPM or rpm
Revolutions Per Minute
SB
Switchboard
SP
Splitter
SS or S.S.
Stainless Steel
TSSA
Technical Standards and Safety Authority
TX or tx
Transformer
ULC
Underwriter's Laboratory of Canada
WM
Wiremold
General Provisions
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 16010
Page 8
Table 2 - Motor and Conduit Size Conversions
English System
Motor Size
HP
.5
Metric System
Nominal Equivalent
kW
.37
English System
Conduit Size
Inches (“)
1/2
Metric System
Nominal Equivalent
MM
12 or 15
.75
.56
3/4
20
1
.75
1
25
1.5
1.1
1-1/4
32
2
1.5
1-1/2
40
3
2.2
2
50
5
3.7
2-1/2
65
7.5
5.5
3
75
10
7.5
3-1/2
90
15
10.5
4
100
20
15
5
125
25
19
6
150
30
22
8
200
40
30
10
250
50
37
12
300
60
45
14
350
75
56
16
400
100
75
18
450
Table 3 - List of Base Bid and Acceptable Equipment Manufacturers, Methods & Services
The following is a list of acceptable equipment manufacturer, methods and services. Any
deviation from the following list must be identified at the time of Tender closing on the
Supplementary Tender Form.
Component
Acceptable Product
Safety Switches
Square D (Schneider Electric)
Siemens
Cutler Hammer (Eaton)
Wiring Devices
Pass & Seymour
Leviton
Hubbell
Arrow Hart
Exit Lights and
Battery Packs
Lumacell
Emergi-Lite
Beghelli
General Provisions
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 16010
Page 9
Product
Acceptable Suppliers
Fluorescent Fixtures
Visioneering
CFI
Cooper
Lithonia
Fluorescent Ballast
And Lamps
Osram-Sylvania
GE
Philips
Motion sensors/Photocells
Wattstopper
Lutron
Leviton
Pass & Seymour
******* END OF SECTION 16010 *******
Basic Materials & Methods
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 16050
Page 1
1.
GENERAL
1.1
1.2
Conform with the requirements of Section 16010 General Provisions.
Install all lighting luminaires, conduit, heat detectors etc., in Mechanical Rooms, Boiler
Rooms, Fan Rooms after mechanical equipment, ducts, pipes, etc., are in place. Locate
fixtures/equipment with chain hangers to best possible advantage.
2.
STANDARD OF MATERIALS
2.1
Part 1: General
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.2
Materials and equipment are specifically described and named in this
Specification in order to establish a standard of material and workmanship.
Materials required for performance of work shall be new and the best of their kind
and of uniform pattern throughout work.
Materials shall be of Canadian manufacture where obtainable. Materials of
foreign manufacture, unless specified, shall be approved before being used.
Equipment items shall be standard products of approved manufacture. Identical
units of equipment shall be of same manufacture. In any unit of equipment,
identical component parts shall be of same manufacture, but the various
component parts comprising the unit need not be of one manufacture.
Chemical and physical properties of materials and design performance
characteristics and methods of construction and installation of items of
equipment, specified herein, shall be in accordance with latest issue of applicable
Standards or Authorities when such are either mentioned herein, or have
jurisdiction over such materials or items of equipment.
Materials shall be CSA or ULC approved and bear labels of same. Provide
labelling as required by Code and/or Inspection Authorities.
Part 3: Execution
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
Install materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Include items of material and equipment not specifically noted on Drawings or
mentioned herein but that are necessary to make a complete and operating
installation.
Confirm capacity or ratings of equipment being provided, when based on ratings
of equipment being provided under other trade Sections, before such items are
purchased.
Remove materials, condemned as not approved for use, from job site and deliver
and install suitable approved materials in their place.
3.
CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
3.1
Part 1: General
3.1.1
3.2
Conduit sizes shall be as indicated on the drawings and shall not be reduced in
size without authorization. Conduit in finished area shall be concealed. All
conduits shall be installed parallel to building lines.
Part 2: Products
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
Unless otherwise noted, conduits inside the building for panel feeders, lighting,
fire alarm, branch circuit wiring, drops, devices, etc., shall be thinwall (EMT).
Steel fittings shall be used with EMT to building standard; cast fittings are not
acceptable. Connectors to be steel, set screw type, nylon insulated. Conduit
straps shall be single or double hole steel.
Conduit installed underground or in slab shall be rigid PVC (Scepter) and shall be
provided with watertight fittings where conduit passes through outside wall and/or
floor. Connectors to be rigid, extruded, solvent type. Conduit straps to be double
Basic Materials & Methods
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.2.7
3.2.8
3.3
Section 16050
Page 2
hole heavy duty PVC.
Conduit subject to mechanical damage or in any hazardous locations shall be
rigid threaded, heavy wall galvanized steel. Connectors to be steel, threaded
type. Conduit straps shall be single or double hole steel.
Motor feeder drops shall be in rigid threaded steel conduit with a maximum of 1m
(3’) flexible liquid-tight conduit for final connection to motor. Start rigid conduit
drop 1m (3’) ahead of actual bend and have two additional clips over normal
requirements. Minimum conduit size for drops is 20mm (3/4’’) unless otherwise
noted on the drawings.
Where conduits cross expansion joints of building, as shown on Architectural
Drawings, provide approved type expansion joints complete with grounding
straps and clamps.
Aluminum conduit shall NOT be used unless specifically noted.
Do not use running threads. Use Ericson coupling where required.
Part 3: Execution
3.3.1
Conduit shall be installed at a minimum of 150 mm (6’’) from uninsulated heating
pipes and 1.5m (5’) from heat producing equipment. Provide a minimum 25mm
(1’’) clearance at crossovers.
3.3.2 Clean interior of all conduits to remove water and debris before pulling wires.
3.3.3 Bend conduit without heating and mechanically bend conduit over 20mm (3/4’’) in
diameter.
3.3.4 Replace conduit if kinked more than 1/10th of its original diameter.
3.3.5 Where conduit becomes blocked, remove and replace blocked section.
3.3.6 Group exposed conduits on surface or suspended channels.
3.3.7 Conduits and armoured cables shall be supported independently of the
suspended ceiling.
3.3.8 Provide polypropylene pull cords in all empty conduits.
3.3.9 Minimum conduit size to be 12mm (1/2’’).
3.3.10 Provide conduit expansion fittings on all conduits crossing expansion joints at a
maximum of 60m (200’) spacing. Install expansion fitting perpendicular to
expansion joint. Refer to structural drawings for location of expansion joints.
3.3.11 Install conduit so that conductors can be drawn in without strain or damage.
3.3.12 Minimum concrete coverage for conduits installed in slabs shall be 75mm (3’’).
4.
PULL BOXES, JUNCTION BOXES, SPLITTERS, CABINETS AND OUTLET BOXES
4.1
Part 2: Products
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
Boxes shall be code gauge and sizes to meet the Electrical Code requirements.
Provide sheet steel boxes for concealed work and cast boxes for exposed work
of welded construction and screw-on flat covers. Provide PVC boxes of a onepiece moulded design for exterior work with weatherproof gasket. Provide covers
with 25mm (1’’) minimum extension all the way around for flush-mounted boxes.
Electro-galvanized steel single and multi-gang boxes for flush installation shall be
minimum size of 75mm x 50mm x 37mm (3’’x2’’x1.5’’). Use 100mm (4’’) square
boxes where more than one conduit enters one side with extension and plaster
rings as required. Utility boxes for connection to surface mounted EMT conduit
shall be minimum 100mm x 54mm x48mm (4’’x2.125’’x1.875’’). Square or
octagonal boxes for lighting shall be minimum 100mm (4’’). Boxes for flush
mounting devices in finished plaster or tile wall shall be minimum of 100mm (4’’).
Use electro-galvanized steel masonry single and multi-gang MBD boxes for
masonry walls and electro-galvanized sheet steel concrete boxes with matching
extension and plaster rings for concrete walls and electro-galvanized steel
sectional screw gang type boxes with two double clamps for non-metallic
Basic Materials & Methods
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
4.1.4
4.2
Section 16050
Page 3
sheathed cable.
Fittings for boxes to have bushings and connectors with nylon insulated throats,
knockout fillers, double lock nuts and insulated bushing on sheet metal boxes.
Part 3: Execution
4.2.1
Only main pull and junction boxes are indicated on drawings. Install pull boxes so
as not to exceed 30m (100’) of conduit between boxes and after every two 90
degree bends.
4.1.2 Install boxes in inconspicuous but accessible locations.
4.1.3 Boxes shall be supported independently of conduit.
4.1.4 Use conduit outlet bodies for conduit up to 32mm (1.25’’) and pull boxes for
conduits of 50mm (1.5’’) or larger.
4.1.5 Gang boxes where wiring devices are grouped.
4.1.6 Provide matching blank coverplates for boxes without wiring devices.
4.1.7 Recess outlet boxes in plaster, masonry, or concrete walls where possible.
Surface mount outlet boxes only on existing masonry or concrete walls or in
service rooms.
4.1.8 Separate communications outlets from power outlets by 100mm (4’’).
4.1.9 Separate opposing outlet boxes by a 150mm (6’’) horizontal separation. Do not
mount back to back.
4.1.10 Provide separate outlet boxes for 120V and 240V or 347V light switches.
5.
CABLETROUGHS, WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
5.1
Part 2: Products
5.1.1
5.2
Refer to drawings for additional wireway specifications (Wiremold series).
Part 3: Execution
5.2.1
Install wireways where noted on the drawings or where required on existing
masonry walls. Supply all elbows, tees, connectors and fittings as required.
Install to full length of equipment and keep number of elbows, offsets and
connections to a minimum.
6.
WIRE AND CABLE
6.1
Part 2: Products
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
6.1.4
6.1.5
6.1.6
6.1.7
Unless otherwise noted, all wires shall be copper RW90 (90OC) for indoors or
copper RWU-90, X-Link (-40OC) for outdoors, as dictated by Code. Aluminum
shall NOT be used. Wiring in channel back of fluorescent luminaires shall be
GTF or TEW type. Termination lugs for feeders shall be compression type.
The minimum permissible size for branch circuit wiring shall be #12 AWG.
All wires shall be new and delivered to the site of the project in their original
packing.
Wires and cables shall be rated at 600 volts for 120/208V circuits, 300 volts for
low voltage control, security or fire alarm circuits and 1000V for 347/600V
circuits.
Wires #10 and smaller shall be solid and wires #8 and larger shall be stranded.
Wires shall be factory identified, showing size, voltage rating and insulation type.
Low voltage armoured cables (feeders) to be TECK, multiple conductor with
annealed, Class B, stranded copper conductors and cross-linked polyethylene,
RW90 insulation, 1000 volt rating for #8 AWG and larger. Grounding to be
uninsulated tinned stranded copper with non-hygroscopic filter material to
maintain circular cross-section. Inner and outer jackets to be PVC ‘Flamenol’
suitable for –40OC with mylar tape separator and aluminum strip, armour helically
Basic Materials & Methods
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
6.1.8
6.2
Section 16050
Page 4
wound and interlocked. Termination lugs shall be compression type.
Low voltage armoured cables to be type AC90, multi-conductor, with solid
annealed commercial grade 98% conductivity tinned copper conductors and
cross-linked polyethylene with R90 insulation, 600 volt rating on #10 and #12
size only. Grounding to be uninsulated, solid copper with impregnated paper
separator. Throat connectors and anti-short sleeves are required at all dressed
ends.
Part 3: Execution
6.2.1
6.2.2
All wiring for feeders, branches, drops, devices, etc., to be in EMT conduit unless
noted in 6.2.2.
Armoured cable (BX) AC90 may be used for:
 final lighting connections to a maximum of 1.5m (5’); note that final connections to
lighting fixtures shall originate from an outlet box; connections of fixture body to
fixture body are not acceptable.
 continuous rows of recessed luminaires in GWB ceilings.
 final connection to a new receptacle concealed in an EXISTING drywall partition
(must originate from a junction box in the ceiling within 0.3m (12’’) of the wall
entry point.
DO NOT use armoured cable anywhere else without prior approval.
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
6.2.6
6.2.7
6.2.8
6.2.9
Code approved wire shall be for final fixture or appliance connections.
Neutral conductor shall be white throughout, three phase wires shall be: one red,
one black and one blue or 3 black with coloured tape on each termination.
Where common neutrals are used ensure that circuits are from different phases
with a minimum neutral size to be #10 AWG.
Provide a separate neutral for all separate circuits.
No splices are permitted for low voltage armoured cables.
Size wires for a maximum 2% voltage drop to farthest outlet on loaded circuit.
For 120V branch wiring exceeding 23m (75’) to the farthest outlet on a loaded
circuit shall be #10 AWG.
7.
CONNECTORS FOR WIRES AND BOXES
7.1
Part 2: Product
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
Building wire connectors to be Ideal ‘Wing Nut’ or equal for wire sizes up to #6
AWG and Burndy QQA (CU/AL) at studs and bus bars and Burndy Q2A or A3Q
(CU/AL) for wire sizes #4 and larger.
Cable connectors to be watertight with open compounded head, T&B series
‘Spin-on 2’ with corrosion resistant boot for armoured TECK cables, T&B ‘TiteBite’ with nylon insulated throat for armoured cables steel type.
Install connectors and tighten as recommended by manufacturer.
8.
FASTENINGS, HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
8.l
Part 2: Product
8.1.1 Support Channels: U shape pre-galvanized steel, 41mm x 41mm x 22m for
surface mounting, suspending or inserting into poured concrete walls and
ceilings as required complete with channel fittings to suit channel type and other
fittings to suit equipment weight, location and surfaces required.
8.2
Part 3: Execution
8.2.1
Provide supports for all conduits, luminaires, equipment, etc. installed by this
Division.
Basic Materials & Methods
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.4
8.2.5
8.2.6
8.2.7
8.2.8
8.2.9
8.2.10
8.2.11
8.2.12
8.2.13
8.2.14
8.2.15
Install fastenings and supports as required for each type of conduit, cable and
equipment in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer’s
installation recommendations.
Conduit Anchors: rigidly anchor all conduits to structural bearings where required
to control the direction of expansion and to prevent undue stress on branch
connections and structure or crushing of insulation in sleeves. Pay particular
attention to all building expansion joists.
Dissimilar metals shall not come in direct contact with each other.
Space hangers to prevent sagging and to prevent conduit joints from carrying the
weight of the conduit and contents.
Secure plywood backboards, channels, chains, equipment and fittings to wood
with wood screws to solid masonry, tile and plaster surfaces with lead anchors, to
poured concrete with self-drilling expandable inserts, and to hollow masonry
walls with toggle bolts.
Support ceiling mounted equipment from the ceiling support system provided it is
adequate to carry weight of equipment specified. Provide Engineer and Electrical
Safety Authority with a letter of approval for ceiling manufacturer or Structural
Engineer.
Support equipment, conduit or cable using clips, spring-loaded bolts or cable
clamps designed as accessories to basic channel members.
Support conduit with one hole steel straps to secure surface conduits and cables
50mm (2’’) and smaller and two-hole steel straps for conduits and cables larger
than 50mm. Conduit may be secured to exposed steelwork with beam clamps.
Support individual cable or conduit runs with or without channels from 6mm
(1/4’’) diameter threaded rods and spring clips.
Support vertical conduits at each floor and/or at each length of conduit.
Provide metal brackets, frames, hangers, clamps and related type of support
structure where indicated or required to support conduit runs, cable runs and
raceways. Ensure adequate vertical support where there is no wall support.
Do NOT use powder-actuated fasteners or wire lashing or perforated strap to
support or secure conduits, cables or raceways.
Hangers shall only be suspended from structural bearings such as beams, or
joists. Where such bearings do not exist use bridging steel. Do not weld hangers
to structural steel.
Provide 1200mm wide x 2400mm high x 19mm thick fire-retardant plywood
backboards and paint both sides with approved fire-retardant paint. Provide
backboards for mounting of panelboards, cabinets, contactors, communications
equipment, fire alarm control equipment, or any other equipment where required
by Code, local authorities, or designated on plans.
9.
WIRING DEVICES
9.1
Part 2: Product
9.1.1
15A duplex receptacles shall be as specified on drawings, grounding type rated
for 15 A, 125 Volt, CSA Type 5-15R (Hubbell Cat. #5262), white finish, unless
otherwise specified on drawings. These shall have break-off line to allow for split
wiring or 2 circuits. Equivalent manufacturers of receptacles are as follows:
Arrow Hart
Pass & Seymour
9.1.2
Section 16050
Page 5
-
Specification Grade
Specification Grade
20A duplex receptacles shall be as specified on drawings, grounding type rated
for 20A, 125 Volt, CSA Type 5-20R (Hubbell Cat. #5362), white finish, unless
otherwise specified on drawings. Equivalent manufacturers of receptacles are as
follows:
Basic Materials & Methods
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Arrow Hart
Pass & Seymour
9.1.3
9.1.7
9.1.8
9.2
Specification Grade
Specification Grade
-
Specification Grade
Specification Grade
Single receptacles shall be of the specification grade type.
Light switches single pole, 3-way and 4-way shall be voltage as specified on
drawings, premium specification grade, toggle type, equal to Hubbell 1200
series, 20A, white finish, unless otherwise specified on drawings. Corridor
switches to be key-operated. Equivalent manufacturers of switches are as
follows:
Arrow Hart
Pass & Seymour
9.1.6
-
Ground fault receptacles shall be as specified on drawings, grounding type rated
for 15 A, 125 Volt, CSA Type 5-15R (Hubbell #GF5262), white finish, unless
otherwise specified on drawings. These shall have double wipe contacts and be
suitable for #9 AWG wiring. Equivalent manufacturers of receptacles are as
follows:
Arrow Hart
Pass & Seymour
9.1.4
9.1.5
Section 16050
Page 6
-
Premium Specification Grade
Premium Specification Grade
Coverplates in finished areas shall be super stainless steel type 302, number of
gang as required, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Devices to be
DECORA style, white finish. In unfinished areas these shall be metal covers for
F.S. type boxes. For weatherproof areas these shall be cast aluminum with lift
cover for F.S. type boxes.
Telephone & data communications and alarm coverplates shall be as above.
All wiring devices and coverplates to be specification grade.
Part 3: Execution
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
Co-ordinate all switch and receptacle locations with Architectural and Mechanical
Drawings before installation.
Gang outlets and switches with common coverplate.
Install switches with the lever the ‘UP’ position when the switch is closed.
10.
INSTALLATION OF SWITCHES AND OUTLETS
10.1
Part 1: General
10.1.1 The drawings show approximate location of outlets, exact location shall be
co-ordinated on the site with other trades, architectural drawings, etc. Outlets
inaccurately located shall be re-adjusted or relocated at the Contractor's
expense.
10.2
Part 3: Execution
10.2.1 Unless otherwise noted on the drawing, locate outlets as follows:




Receptacles, telephone and alarm outlets 12" (305 mm) above finished floor,
or above raised floor unless otherwise noted.
Outlets over counter 42" (890 mm) above finished floor or as per architectural
drawings (co-ordinate on job with millwork) .
Outlets in mechanical, electrical and telephone rooms 48" (1220 mm) above
floor.
Light switches 47" (1200 mm) above finished floor to barrier-free standards.
10.2.2 Mount devices in classroom control panel as detailed on drawings.
Basic Materials & Methods
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
11.
NOISE AND VIBRATION
11.1
Part 3: Execution
Section 16050
Page 7
11.1.1 Electrical equipment is to operate without excess noise or vibration. If in the
opinion of the Engineer, the equipment operates with excessive noise or
vibration, then the equipment must be replaced or noise or vibration eliminated.
11.1.2 Provide flexible conduit connections to noise producing and vibrating equipment
such as transformers, dimming equipment, generator sets and motors.
11.1.3 Provide vibration isolators where indicated or required. Isolate transformers from
the structure with spring and neoprene isolators when wall mounted or
suspended and isolate transformers with high-density neoprene sandwich pads
(type MVP) when floor mounted with a thickness as directed by the
manufacturer.
12.
IDENTIFICATION
12.1
12.7
12.8
Provide lamacoid identification nameplates. These shall be BLACK with WHITE
engraved letters (minimum 1/4’’ in height) and shall be installed with screws on all
equipment, disconnect switches, panels, etc. indicating the load served. Co-ordinate
identification with Division 15 to ensure same designations are used.
Panelboard identification should include panel voltage, phase, #wires, amperage (actual
to panel not panel nameplate), designation and from where panel is fed.
Disconnect switches and contactors should include voltage and equipment controlled.
Safety and transfer switches should include voltage, fuse size and equipment controlled.
Provide RED lamacoid nameplates with WHITE lettering for emergency system devices.
Each panel shall have a typewritten directory showing lights or equipment connected to
each circuit. Directories shall be mounted on the inside of the panel door with a
transparent plastic cover.
Identify each receptacle by panel and circuit number.
Identify communications outlets as required by Section 17000.
13.
ACCESS PANELS
13.1
Supply architectural style recessed frame and flange type access panels for locations
where electrical equipment or any other device requiring maintenance or adjustment is
"built-in"; such as junction boxes, relays, etc. Include cost of installation by qualified
tradesmen.
Submit shop drawings for review showing size, type and exact location of access panels.
Access panel types to be as follows:
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
13.2
13.3
13.3.1 Material: Drywall: Minimum 12 gauge prime coated steel with concealed hinges
and frames and screw driver locks. Glazed tile walls: 304 S.S. with No. 4 finish.
13.3.2 Frames: Recessed flush type with built-in recessed plaster frame for drywall and
plaster surfaces, flush type with exposed flange for masonry and glazed tile.
13.3.3 Size: Minimum 300mm x 300mm (600mm x 600mm where personnel enters).
13.3.4 Access doors installed in fire rated walls, partitions or ceilings shall bear an
acceptable fire resistance rating.
13.4
13.5
Do not provide access panels in removable panel type ceilings. Indicate location of
equipment with acceptable markers.
Size and locate access panels in applied tile, or in glazed or unglazed structural tile to suit
block patterns.
14.
SAFETY SWITCHES (fused and unfused)
14.1
These shall be heavy duty, fusible or non-fusible, quick-make, quick-break, voidable
cover interlock lockable in "off" position with neutral bar where required, in CSA
Basic Materials & Methods
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 16050
Page 8
14.5
14.6
14.7
enclosure as required by code..
Fuse holders shall be required to suit rating and type of fuses specified without adaptors.
Withstand rating 6 times continuous current break at rated voltage.
Enclosure shall be CEMA 1 with drip shields except where weatherproof switches are
required, these shall be CEMA 3. ON-OFF switch position indication on cover.
All switches shall be of the same manufacturer.
Provision for padlocking in on-off switch position by three locks.
Mechanically interlocked door to prevent opening when handle in ON position.
15.
TIMERS, TIMECLOCKS, MOTION SENSORS & PHOTOCELLS
15.1
Motion sensor light switches and wall/ceiling mounted sensors to be as specified on the
drawings. Ensure that switches are compatible with luminaire (ballast type).
14.2
14.3
14.4
******* END OF SECTION 16050 *******
Grounding Secondary
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 16450
Page 1
Part 1: General
1.1
Grounding shall conform to Electrical Safety Code and as herein specified.
Part 2: Products
2.1
Equipment
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.2
System, equipment, grounding conductors, bare stranded copper, non-tinned, soft
annealed, un-armoured, size as required by Code.
Branch circuit insulated grounding conductors: type No. 12 RW90, green
insulation.
Manufacturers
2.2.1
Acceptable manufacturers: Burndy and Thomas & Betts.
Part 3: Execution
3.1
Installation - General
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.1.6
3.1.7
3.2
System and Circuit Grounding
3.2.1
3.3
Install complete permanent, continuous, system and circuit, equipment, grounding
systems including electrodes, conductors, connectors, accessories, as indicated,
to conform to requirements of local Hydro Authority.
Install connectors in accordance with manufacturer's instruction.
Protect exposed grounding conductors from mechanical injury.
Use mechanical connectors for grounding connections to equipment provided with
lugs.
Soldered joints not permitted.
Install bonding wire for flexible conduit, connected at one end to grounding
bushing, soldieries lug, clamp or cup washer and screw. Neatly cleat bonding wire
to exterior of flexible conduit.
Install separate ground wire in each conduit and bond to box. DO NOT USE
CONDUIT AS GROUND.
Install system and circuit grounding connections to 120/208/240V system as
required by Code.
Tests
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
Perform tests in accordance with Section 16010.
Perform ground continuity and resistance test using method appropriate to site
conditions and to approval of local authority having jurisdiction over installation.
Perform test before energizing electrical system.
Disconnect ground fault devices during tests.
*******END OF SECTION 16450*******
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 16477
Page 1
Part 1 General
1.1 Product Data
1.1.1
1.1.2
Submit product data in accordance with General Conditions, Sections 1A and
16010.
Include time-current characteristic curves for breakers with ampacity of 400 A
and over or with interrupting capacity of 22 000 A symmetrical rms and over at
system voltage.
Part 2 Products
2.1
Breakers – General
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.1.7
2.2
Thermal Magnetic Breakers (Design A) – typical breaker
2.2.1
2.3
Bolt-on moulded case circuit breakers, quick-make, quick-break type, for manual
and automatic operation with temperature compensation for 40 degree C
ambient.
Common-trip breakers with single handle for multi-pole applications.
Magnetic instantaneous trip elements in circuit breakers, to operate only when
the value of current reaches setting. Trip settings on breakers with adjustable
trips to range from 3-10 times current rating.
Switching duty breakers for security lighting and unswitched lighting circuits.
Circuit breakers with interchangeable trips as indicated.
General power 120/208V panelboard circuit breakers to be type 'NB' with
10,000A interrupting symmetrical unless otherwise noted on the drawing.
Circuit breakers for motor circuits on general power panelboards to be type
'NBH' with 22,000 A interrupting symmetrical unless otherwise noted on
drawings.
Moulded case circuit breaker to operate automatically by means of thermal and
magnetic tripping devices to provide inverse time current tripping under overload
conditions and instantaneous magnetic tripping for short circuit protection. Circuit
breakers for frame sizes over 150A shall be complete with interchangeable trips.
Magnetic Breakers (Design B) – where motors have thermal overload protection
2.3.1
Moulded case circuit breaker to operate automatically by means of magnetic
tripping device to provide instantaneous tripping for short circuit protection.
Provide integral fusing where higher interrupting capacity is required.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
Installation
3.1.1
3.1.2
Install circuit breakers as indicated.
Provide shunt trip, auxiliary switch and on-off locking device where required.
******* END OF SECTION 16477 *******
Luminaires
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 16500
Page 1
Part 1 General
1.1
Conform with the requirements of Section 16010 and 16050.
1.1.1
Contractor shall include in his Tender the fixture(s) that are specified. If an
alternate manufacturer is named, it is mandatory that the fixture be equivalent in
all respects, i.e. same lens, equivalent frame, performance, paint finish, ballast,
construction quality, etc. Alternate manufacturers or alternate fixtures types must
be offered as an alternate only to the base bid, with a Separate Price stated in
the Tender. Low bidder will be determined on the basis of the specified items not
on "alternate savings".
Part 2 Products
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
Ballasts:
2.1.1
Fluorescent fixture ballasts shall be energy efficient electronic (discrete
component) long life, full light output, high power factor, programmed rapid start,
sound rate "A", internal thermal protection, non PCB type. Manufacturer shall be
Sylvania Quicktronic High Efficiency 32W T8, universal voltage, PROStart
Parallel Operation model QHE 2x32T8/UNV PSN, 0.88 Ballast Factor, Power
Factor >0.98.
2.1.2
347V ballast for fixtures controlled by motion sensors: Philips Advance Centium
32 T8, 347 volt, model GCN-2S32T8 or Sylvania or C.G.E. equivalent.
Provide fixtures and lamps as indicated on the fixture schedule and/or as specified under
this section. These must and shall be complete with all necessary plaster frames,
hangers, lamps, louvres, diffusers, canopies, supports, etc. Lenses shall be K-12, 0.125''
thick unless noted otherwise in the Luminaire schedule. Provide lens supports on all four
sides.
Unless otherwise noted, fluorescent lamps shall be 32 Watt, T8, 4100OK CCT, 85CRI,
60,000 hour, Octron 800XP XL SS Ecologic 3 extended performance by OsramSylvania. Unless otherwise noted, compact fluorescent lamps shall be 4100OK colour
temperature, 85CRI, 10,000 hour by Osram-Sylvania.
Verify catalogue reference numbers with the description and co-ordinate with the
installation conditions, with particular regard to ceiling construction details, type and
finish, before ordering luminaires.
Fixture manufacturer shall be responsible for obtaining CSA approval prior to installation
of fixtures and shall bare all associated costs.
Luminaire Schedule: refer to drawings.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Co-ordinate the mounting and location of luminaires with other trades to avoid conflicts.
Junction boxes in suspended ceiling space shall be accessible through the fixtures or by
removable ceiling.
Support suspended luminaire using two or more lengths of Weldless ‘Single jack’ bright
zinc plated steel safety chain, gauge and links per foot as recommended by
manufacturer.
Refer to Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plans for exact location of luminaires.
Connect strip lights under cabinets after installation of cabinets.
Dispose of existing fixtures as shown on drawings. Include for disposal of PCB
containing ballasts to approval of authorities having jurisdiction.
******* END OF SECTION 16500 *******
Exit Signs
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 16519
Page 1
Part 1 General
1.1
Submit product data in accordance with general conditions.
Part 2 Products
2.1
Equipment
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.1.7
2.1.8
2.2
Design
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.3
Housing: extruded aluminum minimum 1.3 mm thick with satin white enamel
finish unless otherwise noted in Luminaire Schedule.
Face and back plates: extruded aluminum 2mm (.78’’).
Light source: light emitting diodes (LED) 25 year long life lamps.
Power source: 120VAC and 12 or 24 VDC (from battery pack) as noted in
luminaire schedule.
Letters: height as per Code requirements reading "EXIT" on one common face
plate.
Power supply assembly to be low loss, low noise high power factor transformer
type encapsulated ballast for 347V units.
Power consumption: 1 watt per face.
Face plate to remain captive for re-lamping.
Wall, end to wall and ceiling mounting as indicated.
Single and double face with arrows indicating exit directions as indicated.
Acceptable Manufacturers
2.1.1
Refer to luminaire schedule and Table 3 of Section 16010.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
Installation
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.1.6
3.1.7
3.1.8
Install exit lights as indicated, to requirements of OBC latest amendments.
Mount exit luminaire independent of T-bar ceiling. Caddy clips and wood bracing
not acceptable.
Exit lighting wiring to be in separate conduit system.
Connect fixtures to exit light circuits as indicated.
Connect emergency lamp sockets to emergency circuits from emergency lighting
battery unit is indicated.
Permanently tag each fixture box with circuit numbers (commercial power and
emergency power circuits).
Provide 15A,1P breakers in emergency panel for additional circuits as required.
Ensure that exit light circuit breaker is locked in 'on' position.
******* END OF SECTION 16519 *******
Emergency Lighting
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 16550
Page 1
Part 1 General
1.1
Submit product data in accordance with general conditions.
Part 2 Products
2.1
Equipment
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.1.7
2.1.8
2.1.9
2.1.10
2.1.11
2.1.12
2.1.13
Battery: long-life, hermetically sealed, lead-acid battery, 10 year life.
Supply voltage: 120V AC as noted in luminaire schedule.
Operating life: 30 minutes.
Output voltage: 12 or 24V DC as noted in luminaire schedule.
Charger: solid state, multi-rate, voltage/current regulated, inverse temperature
compensated, short circuit protected, modular construction.
Solid state transfer.
Low voltage disconnect: solid state, modular, operates at 80% battery output
voltage.
Signal lights: solid state, life expectancy 100,000 hours minimum, for ‘AC Power
ON’ and ‘High Charge’.
Lamp heads: integral on unit and remote adjustable mounting, swivel type,
adjustable lens, c/w high intensity quartz-halogen, 12W, 20W, 55W or 75W as
per luminaire schedule.
Cabinet: suitable for direct or shelf mounting to wall and complete with knockouts
for conduit.
Finish: white baked enamel.
Warranty: 10 year for battery
Auxiliary equipment:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Lamp disconnect switch
Test switch
3 minute time delay relay
Battery disconnect device
Hardwired connection for AC
Self-diagnostic and testing circuitry additional remote alarm contacts
2.2 Manufacturers
2.2.1
Refer to panel schedule on drawings for base bid specifications or Table 3 of
Section 16010.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
Installation
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.1.6
3.1.7
3.1.8
3.1.9
Permanently tag each fixture box with circuit number.
Size wire as required to maintain allowable voltage drop.
Install emergency lighting in accordance with CSA C22.1, latest edition.
Cut and re-cap cord to remove surplus.
Direct heads as indicated.
Run diagnostic circuitry and test all remote lamps.
Permanently tag from battery number each remote and exit within outlet box.
Hardwire each battery unit and connect to circuit as identified on drawings.
Ensure that breaker serving battery units is locked in the ‘ON” position.
******* END OF SECTION 16550 *******
Fire Alarm System
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
Section 16770
Page 1
Part 1 General
1.1
Requirements of Regulatory Agencies
1.1.1
Comply with Building Code and local authorities Requirements including:





1.2
CAN/ULC-S524 - Standard for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems
CAN/ULC-S536 - Standard for the Inspection and Testing of Fire Alarm Systems
CAN/ULC-S537 - Standard for the Verification of Fire Alarm Systems
NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code, latest Edition
National Electrical Code
Shop Drawings
1.2.1
1.2.2
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Supplementary General Conditions,
Division 1 and Section 16010.
Include:
.1
1.3
Devices such as bells & strobes, heat detectors, modules, EOL resistors,
etc.
Operation and Maintenance Data
1.3.1
1.3.2
Provide data for incorporation into maintenance manual specified Section 16010.
Operation and Maintenance Manual to include:
.1
.2
Copy of approved shop drawings.
Operating instructions and maintenance recommendations for newly
installed devices.
Part 2 Products
2.1
Materials – all equipment and devices to bear UL or ULC label as noted:
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.2
Audible signal devices: to ULC-S525, latest edition.
Visual indicating devices: to ULC-S526, latest edition.
Manual fire alarm pull stations: to ULC-S528, latest edition.
Smoke Detectors: to ULC-S529, latest edition.
Thermal detectors: to ULC-S530, latest edition.
Fire Alarm Peripheral Devices
2.2.1
Manual Pull Stations - (Single Stage Operation)
.1
Manual stations shall be of the break glass, single action, non-coded type.
Provide manual pull stations with the following characteristics:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Constructed of high impact, red lexan.
Break glass stations shall have a hinged front with a resettable key
lock
English lettering unless otherwise noted
One set of NO sealed contacts
Maximum device size shall be 115mm (4.5’’) high by 315mm (3.5’’)
wide.
Tamper-proof, clear LEXAN shield that easily fits over pull station.
When shield is lifted to gain access to the station, a battery
powered piercing warning horn shall be activated. The horn shall
be silenced by lowering and realigning the shield. The horn shall
provide 85dB at 10 feet and shall be powered by a 9 VDC battery.
Fire Alarm System
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
2.2.2
Alarm Signalling Appliances
.1
.4
Horn devices shall be polarized and shall be operated by 24 VDC. Each
assembly shall include separate wire associated leads for in/out wiring for
each leg of the associate signal circuit. Devices shall be suitable for flush
mounting and have a minimum sound pressure level output of 90 dB at
3.2m (10 feet).
Bells shall be polarized and shall be operated by 24 VDC. Each bell
assembly shall include separate wire associated leads for in/out wiring for
each leg of the associate signal circuit. Bells shall be 6" in finished areas
and 10" in warehouse areas and finished in baked-on red enamel paint.
Bells shall be suitable for surface or semi-flush mounting. Bells shall be
vibrating type with a minimum sound pressure level output of 90 dB at 3.2m
(10 feet).
Provide surface mounting boxes where required, painted to match wall,
brick or ceiling.
Provide trim plates where required, painted to match signalling devices.
2.3.2
Thermal Detectors
.1
Provide heat detectors to building standard.
.2
.3
2.2.3
Smoke Detectors
.1
Provide smoke detector mounting bases with the following characteristics:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.2
.4
.5
.6
.7
30 mesh insect screen
Stable to 2,000 feet per minute velocity
Sealed base to restrict air flow, dust and insect entry through the
back.
Completely shielded against EMI and RFI interference to prevent
false alarms.
Integral LED which flashes to indicate normal operation and glows
continuously to indicate alarm operation.
Magnetically operated functional test unit.
1.0 Microcurie of Radioactive AM-241.
E.O.L. Supervision Devices
.1
2.3
Terminals for wiring connections.
There shall be no wire
connections made directly to the smoke detector head itself.
Removal of the detector head shall interrupt the supervisory circuit
of the fire alarm detection loop and cause a trouble signal to
generate at the control panel.
Base shall accommodate either photoelectric or ionization type
smoke detectors.
Tamper and vandal resistant lock screw.
Output for powering local alarm LED.
Provide ionization smoke detector heads with the following characteristics:
.1
.2
.3
2.2.4
Section 16770
Page 2
Provide E.O.L. resistors to supervise all zone and signal circuit wiring.
Mount resistors on single gang stainless steel plates with terminal blocks.
Existing Fire Alarm System
2.3.1 Existing fire alarm panel: refer to power & system drawings for each school
that identify the existing fire alarm system.
Fire Alarm System
ENSO Systems Inc. #852
2.4
Wiring:
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.5
Section 16770
Page 3
All wiring shall be installed to conform to the requirements of the Canadian
Electrical Code, Part 1 and applicable Provincial Codes. Wiring shall be sized in
accordance with Class 1 requirements, as recommended by System
Manufacturer, and shall be protected from mechanical injury or other injurious
conditions such as moisture, excessive heat or corrosive action in accordance in
Class 1 requirements. Conductors shall be solid copper. The minimum size of
any conductors shall be #18 for alarm and #14 for signal circuits.
Provide shielded wiring as per manufacturer’s requirements.
Colour code fire alarm conductors differently from building power wiring; use one
colour for supervisory circuit wiring and another for alarm initiating device circuit
wiring. Paint all fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red.
Qualified Personnel
2.5.1
All fire alarm work shall be by a CFAA certified person.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
Installation
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
Install systems in accordance with CAN4-S524-M82 and DFC-410(M).
Perform tests in accordance with Section 16010 and CAN4-S537.
All work shall be installed in a workmanlike manner in accordance with approved
manufacturers manuals and wiring diagrams. The contractor shall furnish all
conduit, wiring, outlet boxes, junction boxes, cabinets and similar devices
necessary for the complete installation. All wiring shall be of the type
recommended by the NEC, approved by local authorities having jurisdiction for
the purpose, and shall be installed in dedicated conduit throughout.
3.1.4 End of Line Resistors: Shall be furnished as required for mounting as directed by
the manufacturer.
3.1.5 Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within one year of date of Substantial
Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound pressure levels and
adjusting controls and sensitivities to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up
to three visits to the site for this purpose.
3.2 Verification and Certification
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.2.7
3.2.8
Submit comprehensive verification reports for the installed system according to the
requirements of the U.L.C. Standard S536.
Verify that the equipment installed meets the specifications.
Verify wiring connections to all equipment meets applicable codes and
standards.
Verify the operation of all devices.
Provide a copy of the inspecting technician’s report. Identify each device by
location and certify the test results.
Retest and update reports to correct all deficiencies.
Issue a Certificate of Verification confirming the completion of the verification.
Include all costs of this inspection in the total tender price.
******* END OF SECTION 16770 *******